SuSE Linux / Installation - Configuration - First Steps

SuSE Linux / Installation - Configuration - First Steps
Leah Cunningham, Karl Eichwalder, Stefan Fent, Werner Fink, Peter Findeisen, Dennis Geider,
Viviane Glanz, Carsten Groß, Roland Haidl, Björn Jacke, Richard Jelinek, Hubert Mantel,
Johannes Meixner, Edith Parzefall, Peter Pöml, Peter Reinhart, Marc Rührschneck,
Thomas Schraitle, Klaus G. Wagner, Christian Zoz
SuSE Linux 7.2
System and Reference Manual
SuSE Inc.
580 2nd Street, #210
Oakland, CA 94607
USA
Toll free phone number
within the US and Canada:
Phone.:
Fax.:
e-mail:
WWW:
1-888-UR-LINUX (1-888-875-4689)
+1-510-628-3380
+1-510-628-3381
[email protected]
[email protected]
[email protected]
http://www.suse.com
Europe:
SuSE Linux Ltd.
The Kinetic Centre
Theobald Street
Borehamwood, WD6 4PJ UK
Phone.:
+44-20-8387-4088
Fax:
+44-20-8387-4010
WWW:
http://www.suse.co.uk
SuSE GmbH
Schanzäckerstr. 10
D-90443 Nürnberg
Germany
Tel.:
Fax.:
e-mail:
WWW:
+49-911-740-5331
+49-911-741 77 55
[email protected]
http://www.suse.de
Leah Cunningham, Karl Eichwalder, Stefan Fent, Werner Fink, Peter Findeisen, Dennis Geider,
Viviane Glanz, Carsten Groß, Roland Haidl, Björn Jacke, Richard Jelinek, Hubert Mantel,
Johannes Meixner, Edith Parzefall, Peter Pöml, Peter Reinhart, Marc Rührschneck, Thomas Schraitle,
Klaus G. Wagner, Christian Zoz
SuSE Linux 7.2
System and Reference Manual
1st edition 2001
SuSE GmbH
Copyright
This work is copyrighted by SuSE GmbH.
You may copy it in whole or in part as long as the copies retain this copyright
statement.
Layout: LATEX
English Translation and Editing: Rebecca Ellis, Marc Rührschneck
Cover design based on graphics by Stephan Endraß.
Design by Manuela Piotrowski.
Geeko-Icons by Rolf Vogt.
Linux is a registered trademark of Linus Torvalds. XFree86 ™ is a registered
trademark of The XFree86 Project, Inc. MS-DOS, Windows, Windows 95,
Windows 98, and Windows NT are registered trademarks of Microsoft Corporation.
UNIX is a registered trademark of X/Open Company Limited. Other trademarks and
registered trademarks are: Clipper of Computer Associates, dBASE of Borland,
Foxbase of Microsoft, Compuserve, T-Online of Deutsche Telekom, SuSE and YaST
of SuSE GmbH . All trade names are used without the guarantee for their free use
and are possibly registered trade marks. SuSE GmbH essentially follows the
notations of the manufacturers. Other products mentioned in this manual may be
trademarks of the respective manufacturer.
Contents
Contents
1
Introduction
1.1
1.2
1.3
1.4
1.5
2
What Is “Linux”? . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Purpose of this Book – Notes on Usage . . . . . . . . . .
Typographical Conventions – or What Does “earth:˜ #
Mean . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Additional Linux Documentation . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Acknowledgments . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
1
. . .
. . .
ls”
. . .
. . .
. . .
Your first SuSE Linux installation
2.1
2.2
2.3
2.4
Installation with the Text-based YaST (YaST 1) . . . . . . . . .
2.1.1 Now We’re Starting: the Welcome Screen . . . . . . . .
2.1.2 The Basics: linuxrc . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
2.1.3 Installation with YaST . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
2.1.4 Partitioning and Formatting the Hard Disk . . . . . . . .
2.1.5 Installation of Software Packages . . . . . . . . . . . .
2.1.6 Selection of the Base Software . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
2.1.7 Installing System Software and Programs . . . . . . . .
2.1.8 Selecting a Kernel for the System . . . . . . . . . . . .
2.1.9 Base System Configuration with YaST . . . . . . . . . .
2.1.10 Logging in After Your First Installation . . . . . . . . .
2.1.11 Shutting Down and Booting the System . . . . . . . . .
Starting SuSE Linux . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Special Installations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
2.3.1 Installation Without a Supported CD-ROM Drive . . . .
2.3.2 Automatic Installation and Configuration of SuSE Linux
Tips and Tricks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
2.4.1 Creating Space for Linux (Partitioning) . . . . . . . . .
2.4.2 Booting with CD 2 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
2.4.3 Creating a Boot Disk In DOS . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
2.4.4 Creating a Boot Disk with UNIX . . . . . . . . . . . . .
2.4.5 Does Linux support my CD-ROM? . . . . . . . . . . .
2.4.6 ATAPI CD-ROM Hangs While Reading . . . . . . . . .
1
2
3
3
5
9
9
9
10
14
15
17
18
19
20
21
23
25
26
28
28
29
30
30
33
33
35
35
36
i
Contents
2.5
2.6
3
YaST – Yet another Setup Tool
3.1
3.2
3.3
3.4
3.5
ii
2.4.7 Problems with CD-ROM Drives on Parallel Port . . . .
2.4.8 Loadlin Doesn’t Have Enough Memory to Load the Kernel
2.4.9 Loadlin Doesn’t Start . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Partitioning Tips . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Partitioning for Experts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
2.6.1 Size of Swap Partition . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
2.6.2 Computer Used as Stand-alone Machine . . . . . . . . .
2.6.3 Optimizations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Basic Usage and Keyboard Layout . . . . . . . .
The YaST Main Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Adjustments of Installation . . . . . . . . . . . .
3.3.1 Selecting the Language . . . . . . . . . .
3.3.2 Selecting Keyboard Layout . . . . . . . .
3.3.3 Installation Medium . . . . . . . . . . .
3.3.4 Installation from CD-ROM . . . . . . . .
3.3.5 Installation from a Hard Disk Partition . .
3.3.6 Installation via NFS . . . . . . . . . . .
3.3.7 Installation from a Reachable Directory .
3.3.8 Installation via FTP . . . . . . . . . . . .
3.3.9 Partitioning Your Hard Disk . . . . . . .
3.3.10 Setting Target Partitions/File systems . .
3.3.11 Configuring Your Hard Disk Manually .
3.3.12 File systems and Mount Points . . . . . .
3.3.13 Configuring the Logical Volume Manager
3.3.14 Installation to a Directory . . . . . . . .
Determining the Size of the Installation . . . . .
3.4.1 Load Configuration . . . . . . . . . . . .
3.4.2 Save Configuration . . . . . . . . . . . .
3.4.3 Changing Your Configuration . . . . . .
3.4.4 What if... . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3.4.5 Start Installation . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3.4.6 Checking Package Dependencies . . . .
3.4.7 Index of all Series and Packages . . . . .
3.4.8 Searching for Packages . . . . . . . . . .
3.4.9 Installing Packages . . . . . . . . . . . .
3.4.10 Deleting Packages . . . . . . . . . . . .
Updating the System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
37
38
38
38
40
41
41
42
45
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
45
45
47
47
47
47
48
48
49
50
51
52
54
58
60
64
65
66
66
67
67
69
70
70
70
71
71
72
72
Contents
3.6
4
System Administration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3.6.1 Integrating Hardware into the System . . .
3.6.2 Kernel and Boot Configuration . . . . . . .
3.6.3 Network Configuration . . . . . . . . . . .
3.6.4 Login configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3.6.5 Settings for susewm (the Window Manager)
3.6.6 User Administration . . . . . . . . . . . .
3.6.7 Group Administration . . . . . . . . . . .
3.6.8 Creating Backups . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3.6.9 System Security Settings . . . . . . . . . .
3.6.10 Setting the Console Font . . . . . . . . . .
3.6.11 Setting the time zone . . . . . . . . . . . .
3.6.12 Configuring XFree86(TM) . . . . . . . . .
3.6.13 Configuring gpm . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3.6.14 Changing the Configuration File . . . . . .
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
Booting and Boot Managers
4.1
4.2
4.3
4.4
4.5
4.6
4.7
4.8
4.9
Booting a PC . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Boot Concepts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
An Overview of LILO . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Configuring LILO . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
4.4.1 Structure of lilo.conf . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
4.4.2 Other LILO Configuration Options . . . . . . . . . . .
Installing and Uninstalling LILO . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Creating a Linux Boot Disk . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Sample Configurations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
4.7.1 DOS/Windows 95/98 and Linux . . . . . . . . . . . .
4.7.2 Windows NT and Linux on One Hard Disk . . . . . .
4.7.3 OS/2 and Linux . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
4.7.4 DOS, OS/2 and Linux . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
LILO Problems . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
4.8.1 Diagnosis of Errors: LILO Start Messages . . . . . . .
4.8.2 The 1024-Cylinder Limit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
4.8.3 Special Boot Problems with Kernels from 2.0 Onwards
Starting via loadlin . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
4.9.1 Necessary Steps for all loadlin Users . . . . . . . . . .
4.9.2 Setting up Boot Menus . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
4.9.3 Starting Linux from Within Windows . . . . . . . . .
4.9.4 The Windows Boot Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
73
73
75
78
80
81
81
83
84
85
85
86
86
86
87
89
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
89
90
91
94
95
97
100
102
104
104
105
106
107
108
108
109
110
113
114
114
116
117
iii
Contents
5
The X Window System
5.1
5.2
5.3
5.4
5.5
5.6
6
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
Linux and Hardware
6.1
6.2
6.3
6.4
6.5
6.6
6.7
6.8
iv
Historical Background . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
The New Version 4.0 of XFree86 . . . . . . . . . . .
Configuration Using SaX2 . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
5.3.1 First-time installation . . . . . . . . . . . . .
5.3.2 Reconfiguring . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
5.3.3 Troubleshooting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
5.3.4 The X server logfile . . . . . . . . . . . . .
5.3.5 Starting the X Window System . . . . . . . .
Configuration Using SaX . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
5.4.1 Reconfiguring . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
5.4.2 Troubleshooting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Configuration Using xf86config . . . . . . . . . . . .
Optimizing the Installation of the X Window System
5.6.1 Inserting Additional (True Type) Fonts . . .
5.6.2 Setting up input devices . . . . . . . . . . .
5.6.3 3D acceleration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
121
Preliminary Notes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Cards . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
6.2.1 PCI and ISA Cards . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Sound Cards . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
6.3.1 Configuring Sound Cards with YaST2 . . . .
6.3.2 Configuring Your Sound Card With alsaconf
Ports on a Computer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
6.4.1 PS/2 Ports . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
6.4.2 Serial Ports . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
6.4.3 Parallel Ports . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
6.4.4 USB – Universal Serial Bus . . . . . . . . .
Removable Drives . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
6.5.1 Floppy Disk Drives . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
6.5.2 LS-120 Drives . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
6.5.3 ZIP Drives . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Modems . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
6.6.1 External Modems . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
6.6.2 Internal Modems . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Scanners . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Tape Drives . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
121
122
124
124
134
135
139
141
142
150
150
151
158
162
165
166
169
169
169
169
173
173
173
175
175
175
175
177
180
180
181
181
182
182
182
184
185
Contents
7
Notebooks – PCMCIA, APM, IrDA
7.1
7.2
7.3
8
PCMCIA . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
7.1.1 Hardware . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
7.1.2 Software . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
7.1.3 Configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
7.1.4 Configurations for Changing – “Schemes”
7.1.5 If Things Still Don’t Work . . . . . . . .
7.1.6 Installation via PCMCIA . . . . . . . . .
7.1.7 Other Help Programs . . . . . . . . . . .
7.1.8 Compiling PCMCIA . . . . . . . . . . .
APM – Power Management . . . . . . . . . . . .
7.2.1 Fundamentals . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
7.2.2 The Correct Kernel . . . . . . . . . . . .
7.2.3 The APM Daemon . . . . . . . . . . . .
7.2.4 More Commands . . . . . . . . . . . . .
7.2.5 Pause for the Hard Disk . . . . . . . . .
IrDA – Infrared Data Association . . . . . . . . .
187
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
Basics and Requirements for Printing . . . . . . . . . .
8.1.1 Different Standard Printer Languages . . . . . .
8.1.2 The Problem with GDI Printers . . . . . . . . .
8.1.3 Hardware and Software Requirements . . . . . .
8.1.4 Defining a Suitable Printer Driver . . . . . . . .
Connecting the Printer Locally . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
8.2.1 Parallel Ports . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
8.2.2 Special Slot Cards: ISA-PnP and PCI . . . . . .
8.2.3 USB Connections . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
8.2.4 Serial Ports . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
lpd: the Print Manager and Tools . . . . . . . . . . . . .
8.3.1 The Print Manager in the Background . . . . . .
8.3.2 Additional Tools and Control Tools for the User .
lpr: Sending off Print Jobs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
SETUP (lprsetup): Configuring the Print System . . .
8.5.1 Hints on Configuring with lprsetup . . . . . . .
8.5.2 Testing the printer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
8.5.3 Special cases . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
The apsfilter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
8.6.1 How the apsfilter Works . . . . . . . . . . . . .
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
Printing
8.1
8.2
8.3
8.4
8.5
8.6
187
187
188
188
190
192
194
195
195
196
196
197
197
198
198
198
201
201
201
201
202
203
203
203
205
206
207
208
208
209
210
212
212
214
214
214
214
v
Contents
8.7
8.8
8.9
9
8.6.2 Configuring the apsfilter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
8.6.3 Finding errors with apsfilter . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Printing in the TCP/IP Network . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
8.7.1 Overview: Specific Cases . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
8.7.2 Configuring a Printer Forwarding Queue on the Client
8.7.3 Configuring a Prefilter on a Client . . . . . . . . . . .
8.7.4 Problems with Configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Some Words on Ghostscript . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
8.8.1 Examples of Working with Ghostscript . . . . . . . .
Examples of Your Own Print Filters . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
8.9.1 Preliminary Notes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
8.9.2 A Simple Example of the Basic Method of Working .
8.9.3 A More Complex Example . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
The Kernel
9.1
9.2
9.3
9.4
9.5
9.6
9.7
9.8
233
Kernel Sources . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Kernel Modules . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Kernel Configuration . . . . . . . . . . . .
Settings in the Kernel Configuration . . . .
Compiling the Kernel . . . . . . . . . . . .
Installing the Kernel . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Creating a Boot Disk . . . . . . . . . . . .
Cleaning Your Hard Disk After Compilation
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
10 Kernel Parameters
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
11 Updating the System and Package Management
vi
233
234
236
237
237
238
239
239
241
10.1 Drivers in the Kernel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
10.2 Some Tips . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
10.3 The Parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
10.3.1 Notations and Meanings . . . . . . . . . .
10.3.2 Kernel Parameters at the Boot Prompt . . .
10.3.3 CD-ROM Drives on Proprietary Controllers
10.3.4 modprobe Parameters . . . . . . . . . . .
11.1 Updating SuSE Linux . . . . . . .
11.1.1 Preparations . . . . . . . .
11.1.2 Updating with YaST2 . . .
11.1.3 Updating with YaST1 . . .
11.1.4 Updating Single Packages
215
218
218
219
220
221
222
222
223
224
224
225
228
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
241
242
242
242
243
253
255
275
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
275
275
276
276
278
Contents
11.2 From Version to Version . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
11.2.1 From 6.4 to 7.0 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
11.2.2 From 7.0 to 7.1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
11.2.3 From 7.1 to 7.2 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
11.3 RPM—the Distribution Package Manager . . . . . . . . .
11.3.1 Verifying Package Authenticity . . . . . . . . . .
11.3.2 Managing Packages: Install, Update and Uninstall
11.3.3 RPM Queries . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
11.3.4 Installing and Compiling Source Packages . . . . .
11.3.5 Other Tools for Working with RPM Archives . . .
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
12 Special Features of SuSE Linux
12.1 File System Hierarchy Standard (FHS) and the Linux Standard
Base (LSB) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
12.1.1 File System Hierarchy Standard (FHS) . . . . . . . . .
12.1.2 Linux Standard Base (LSB) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
12.1.3 teTeX – TEX in SuSE Linux . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
12.2 Example Environments for FTP and HTTP . . . . . . . . . . .
12.3 Hints on Special Software Packages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
12.3.1 The packages xdevel and xdevel33 . . . . . . . . . .
12.3.2 Package cron . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
12.3.3 package curses . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
12.3.4 Sources for uucp . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
12.3.5 Manpages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
12.3.6 The Command ulimit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
12.4 Booting with the “initial ramdisk” . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
12.4.1 Concept of the Initial Ramdisk . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
12.4.2 The Order of the Booting Process with initrd . . . . . .
12.4.3 Boot Loaders . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
12.4.4 Using initrd in SuSE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
12.4.5 Possible Difficulties – Self-Compiled Kernels . . . . . .
12.4.6 Prospects . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
12.5 linuxrc . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
12.6 The SuSE Rescue System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
12.6.1 Preparations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
12.6.2 Starting the Rescue System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
12.6.3 Working with the Rescue System . . . . . . . . . . . .
12.7 Virtual Consoles . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
12.8 Keyboard Layout . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
12.9 Local Adjustments . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
12.9.1 Settings for Language Support . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
278
279
280
280
281
281
282
283
285
286
287
287
287
287
287
287
288
288
288
288
289
289
289
290
290
290
291
292
293
294
294
299
299
300
301
303
303
305
306
vii
Contents
13 The SuSE Linux Boot Concept
13.1
13.2
13.3
13.4
13.5
13.6
viii
The init Program . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Runlevels . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Changing Runlevels . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Init Scripts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
/etc/rc.config and SuSEconfig . . . . . . . . . . . . .
The Variables in /etc/rc.config – System Configuration
309
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
309
309
311
311
314
315
A Manual Page of e2fsck
327
B The GNU General Public License
331
C Important keys
339
1
Introduction
1 Introduction
1.1
What Is “Linux”?
The actual “Linux” is the kernel, the “heart” of every UNIX operating system.
But the kernel alone does not constitute an entire operating system. Especially in
UNIX there is a huge amount of free software available; this means that practically any standard tools in Unix are also available in Linux. It is these programs
which make the operating system what it is.
Many of these tools are GNU versions (GNU) of these Unix programs and many
of them offer enhanced features over the originals. Of these, the GNU C/C++
compiler, one of the best compilers available, is probably the most famous program. We should not forget the many tools, small and large, which can be used
on the command line, in shell scripts or as fully fledged programs; from the shell,
file and text utilities such as sed, awk and perl to editors like vi or complete workenvironments like Emacs.
What makes Linux complete is XFree86 ™ (current version, 4.0.3), the X Window System (currently X11 Release 6.4) for PC-based UNIX systems. This port
is part of the official X11R6.4 distribution of the X Consortium, Inc., and is
therefore fully, compatible with that standard.
All these components, together with many other tools, applications and amusements (e. g., games), make up the system known as Linux. There is a large
amount of free software available, and there are many ways to put a Linux system
together.
At this point the Linux distributions come into play, in this case, SuSE Linux. A
distribution is a selection from a wide palette of free software. The end product
is, in the case of the SuSE Linux CDs, over 1000 software packages.
Note
SuSE Linux includes, in addition to free software – software in which the
source-code is included on the CD-ROMs, software packages that, for different reasons, SuSE can only offer in compiled form.
Due to the fact that distributions are offered free on the Internet, updating your
system does not necessarily mean buying a new distribution.
1
1
Introduction
1.2
Purpose of this Book – Notes on Usage
This book should not and cannot be a replacement for more detailed literature
which should allow an interested user to dig deeper into the fascinating world of
high-performance computing – for this, refer to the bibliography at the end of
the book (Chapter 13.6 page 340).
The dynamics of Linux and of free software is a big challenge as far as writing a
handbook is concerned. It must keep up with the most recent developments and,
at the same time, remain suited for those new to the Unix world without boring
experienced Linux users. The book in front of you attempts to do justice to all
these requirements.
The aim of this book is to allow Linux beginners an encouraging start on a voyage
of discovery through the new system.
The book is basically divided into the following sections:
Installation: This section guides the Linux novice with a documented example
installation (Chapter 2 page 9). It points out possible sources of error and
provides concrete help with problems.
YaST: The usage of YaST , the SuSE installation and administration tool, is
described in Chapter 3 page 45. Chapter 4 page 89 explains how to boot the
kernel.
Graphical User Interface: Activating and setting up the X user interface is the
subject of Chapter 5 page 121.
Sound, Scanner, Notebooks, Printing etc.: In Chapters 6 page 169 through 8
page 201 the capabilities of your hardware are explained.
The Linux Kernel: Here we get down to the heart of the matter. The Linux ker-
nel is introduced in Chapter 9 page 233 and Chapter 10 page 241, providing
you with a guide on how to compile and install your own kernel.
Update, Software Packages, Booting: Several update strategies as well as soft-
ware management are introduced (Chapter 11 page 275), special features
of SuSE Linux are covered and the boot concept is explained (Chapter 13
page 309).
Special Features of SuSE Linux: Here you will learn more about the file sys-
tem and the TEX environment of SuSE Linux. Special software packages and
system configuration files will also be discussed here.
The SuSE Linux Boot Concept: In this Chapter 13 page 309 you will read
details on the init program and the several runlevels.
Technical Appendix In the appendix you can find a list of the most important
configuration files, the most frequently used key combinations, example files,
a licensing agreement, and much more.
Bibliography and Index If there is something you still haven’t found yet, you
should consult the extensive bibliography. Either to find the place which
explains important concepts, or simply to increase your general knowledge
about Linux, Unix or computers.
2
1.4
1.3
Additional Linux Documentation
Typographical Conventions – or What Does
“earth:˜ # ls” Mean
The typographical conventions used in this guide are explained in Table 1.1.
Text layout
L INUS T ORVALDS
GNU Emacs (emacs)
Adabas D
/etc/passwd
<file>
PATH
Meaning
important persons
the program GNU Emacs, is invoked with
the command emacs
the product Adabas D
file or directory name
when entering a command, file should be
replaced by the actual value; you should not
enter the angled brackets!
the environment variable with the name
PATH
192.168.1.2
ls
‘news’
earth:˜ # susehelp
[email protected]:/tmp > ls
C:\> fdisk
Alt
+ Alt + Del Ctrl "Permission denied"
‘System update’
Duesentrieb
value of a variable
the command ls
the user ‘news’
‘root’-shell in the directory ~ (‘~’ stands
for the “home directory” of the respective user), you should enter the command
susehelp – here earth is an example of
the name of a computer (hostname).
in the shell of the user ‘newbie’ in directory /tmp, type the command ls
at the DOS prompt, type the command
fdisk
key to press, here the key “Alt”
when ‘+’ is “added” all keys are to be
pressed at the same time; keys to be pressed
sequentially are separated by a space only
system messages
menu entry ‘System update’
company “Duesentrieb”
Table 1.1: Typographical conventions used in the text layout
1.4
Additional Linux Documentation
Support Database
Many solutions to well-known problems are already available. These are presented in our Support Database at http://sdb.suse.de/en/sdb/html/index.
3
1
Introduction
html. We recommend that you look there first!
Besides the online Support Database, the complete Support Database can also be
found in package sdb_en, series doc on your SuSE Linux CD. Those articles
can be read using any WWW browser.
Hypertext Help
A major part of the documentation is available in hypertext form. To start the
hypertext system, run susehelp. Depending on whether X Windows is running, a browser with or without graphical interface will be started for reading the
documentation.
Additional options for the help system can be displayed by invoking
[email protected]:/home/newbie > susehelp --help
Texinfo and Info
Some program packages include documentation in Texinfo format, which is another hypertext variant. These files can be read with Infoviewer (info) or by using the Emacs (emacs) info mode. In X Windows, you can use tkInfo (tkinfo)
or the older xinfo; on the other hand, XInfo (xinfo) is only a bare-bones X program. In addition, these documents can be read in the SuSE help system.
Manual Pages
The usual way to get information about programs or commands is to invoke the
command man.
[email protected]:/home/newbie > man <command>
displays an overview of the tasks and options of each command.
The manual pages – often abbreviated to “manpages” – can be read via the SuSE
help system; see section 1.4.
FAQ’s, HOWTO’s and README’s
The directory /usr/share/doc contains subdirectories with information about
the corresponding packages. There you will often find the missing command
option, the name of the configuration file you could not find anywhere else, etc.
In any case, it is worth looking there before deleting the software. The directory
/usr/share/doc/faq should be pointed out. In it, lists of frequently asked
questions and appropriate answers on a wide variety of problems are placed if the
package manyfaqs, series doc is installed. The directory /usr/share/doc/
howto contains “recipes” explaining how to install certain packages or what to
do when you encounter problems.
In Linux the program less is used to read files. Although the file is compressed
(.gz), less is smart enough to handle this.
4
1.5
Acknowledgments
[email protected]:/home/newbie > cd /usr/share/doc/howto
[email protected]:/usr/share/doc/howto > less DOS-to-Linux-HOWTO.gz
In the directory docu/howto on the first CD there can be found the most current
versions, at the time of the CD going to press, of the most important HOWTO
files. It is certainly worth taking a look in this directory! These files are uncompressed; they can therefore be read comfortably, even before installation (in
DOS, for example, with type).
Kernel-specific questions and answers can be obtained from
/usr/src/linux/Documentation. This is only available if you have installed the kernel source (package linux or package lx_suse), which is highly
recommended anyway. Furthermore, there are many useful hints in the kernel
source subdirectories, and, for the brave, even the kernel sources themselves.
If you have a question which is not answered in this book, please look at the
sources for more information since the scope of this book is limited.
Free Books
The package books, series doc1 (Documentation) contains some books in PostScript format. You can view these books with the package gsview, series gra1
(Graphics) or package gv, series gra1 (Graphics) – if you don’t care about trees
you can print them as well. Before printing, you should ask yourself whether it
might be more economical to buy the book.
1.5
Acknowledgments
Besides everyone who has contributed to the large success of Linux, we would
like to thank E BERHARD M OENKEBERG, who was very helpful with CD-ROM
driver problems.
Many thanks go to Hans Lermen, author of the well-known loadlin.exe, which
allows Linux to be started from DOS and the DOS setup.exe of this Linux system.
Thanks also to all those who sacrificed their spare time for making Linux available to a vast number of international users by helping translating YaST and
linuxrc texts: Jesús Bravo Álvarez, Gunay Arslan, Jaume Badiella i Aguilera,
Zbigniew Baniewski, Sándor Bárány, Olaf Borkner-Delcarlo, Michael Bravo,
Görkem Çetin, Franca Delcarlo, Jochen Depner, Benedek Hermann, Ibán José
García Castillo, Dora Georgarou (with Romy the barking dog), Jonas-Gintaras
Gocentas, Pablo Iranzo Gómez, Krzysztof Hotiuk, Milan Hromada, Arthur Kerkmeester, Ralf A. Lanz, Françoise Lermen, Zoltán Levárdy, Nuno Lima, Francisco Javier Moreno Sigüenza, Tomas Morkus, Karine Nguyen, Matts Nordman, Aleksey Novodvorsky, Razvan Cristian Oprea, Gerco Oudhof, Jordi Jaen
Pallares, George Papamichelakis, Alexey Pavlov, Ákos Rátkai, Bruno David
Rodrigues, Voula Sanida, Gabor Sari, Aleksey Smirnov, Laszlo Varadi, Steve
Varadi, P. Vlachodimitropoulos, Joao Teles, Nuno Vieira, January Weiner, Monika
Weiß and I Made Wiryana. The meticulous yet riveting task of coordinating this
all was undertaken by Antje Faber.
5
1
Introduction
Many thanks, of course, to the dauntless beta testers who risked their running systems: Andreas Koegel, Christian Hüttermann, Dirk Ulbrich, Eberhard Mönkeberg, Frank Hofmann, Georg C. F. Greve, Harald König, Harald Wieland, Karlo Gross, Jens Frank, Lutz Pressler, Martin Hehl, Martin Konold, Martin Schulze, Michael Kleinhenz, Norbert Eicker, Oliver Zendel,
Ralf Geschke, Stefan Bliesener, Thomas Wörner, Ulrich Goebel, Ulrich Windl,
Volker Lendecke, Wolfgang Barth, and the KDE Team.
Matthias Eckermann has re-worked the LATEXmacros and modernized the layout
of the book, and Manuela Piotrowski provided graphics guidelines. These were
based on the KOMA-""Documents class by Frank Neukam and Markus Kohm,
which were in turn built around the “old” susebuch macros by Werner Fink and
Martin Scherbaum.
The following were involved in the production of the previous manual texts:
Bodo Bauer, Daniel Bischof, Michael Burghart, Roland Dyroff, Christian Egle,
Klaus Franken, Jürgen Geck, Olaf Hering, Marc Heuse, Florian La Roche, Ralf
Lanz, Volker Lendecke, Hans Lermen, Arndt Mehlhorn, Jay Migliaccio, Norbert
Munkel, Jordi Jaen Pallares, Christoph-Erdmann Pfeiler, James Samuel, Martin Scherbaum, Burchard Steinbild, Jörg Strebel, Thorsten Wandersmann, Udo
Weber and Stefan Wintermeyer.
Valuable references – and even partially for the text material:
Marco Banse, Stephan Barth, Martin Bergmann, Manfred Blumenthal, Bettina
Botter, Stefan Dirsch, Uwe Drechsel, Thomas Fehr, Peter Findeisen, Matthias
Frühauf, Kurt Garloff, Reinhard Gerndt, Lenz Grimmer, Iris Grossmann, Berthold
Gunreben, Michael Hager, Torsten Hallmann, S. H. A. Handgraaf, Michael Hasenstein, Ulrich Hecht, Fabian Herschel, Bernhard Hölcker, Kevin Ivory,Andreas
Jaeger, Klaus Kämpf, Karsten Keil, Andi Kleen, Sabine Kleine, Marcus Kraft,
Thorsten Kukuk, Werner Kurk, Frank Lemser, Hans Lermen, Dirk Lerner, Christopher Mahmood, Walter Mecky, Marco Michna, Rüdiger Oertel, Ali Özcan, Norman Pancner, Dirk Pankonin, Petr Pavlík, James Ogley, Siegfried Olschner, Milisav Radmanic, David Rasch, Andrea Ratschker, Marion Reyzl, Rupert Rockinger,
Anja Schambach, Manfred Schlenzka, Robert Schmid, Andreas Schmidt, Helmut Schoeberl, Dirk Spilker, Roger Whittaker, Sandra Wiegratz, Steffen Winterfeldt and Olaf Zaplinski. Production technical support took place thanks especially to Holger Dyroff, Christian Egle, Claudio Taulli and Nicole Zwerenz.
Thanks and keep up the good work!
And the many important people without whom this would never have been possible: to all, a big, big THANK YOU!
Further thanks go to S TEFAN E NDRASS, who computed the cover picture of the
CD.
*
*
*
*
The global team of Linux developers is still working intensively on Linux – most
of them on a voluntary basis. We want to thank them for their efforts – this CD
distribution would not exist without them. Our work aims at making their work
accessible to a large number of interested users.
6
1.5
Acknowledgments
Last but not least, special thanks to PATRICK VOLKERDING for supporting our
work and, of course, many thanks to L INUS T ORVALDS!
And last, but not least: Frank Zappa and Pawar!
Nuremberg, 11th May 2001
Have a lot of fun!
Your SuSE Team
7
1
8
Introduction
2
Your first SuSE Linux installation
2 Your first SuSE Linux installation
2.1
Installation with the Text-based YaST (YaST 1)
In SuSE Linux you are provided with YaST, an installation tool which guides
you safely through preparing the hard disk, setting up software and configuring
a graphical login.
For the “normal” case of a computer on which SuSE Linux is to be installed, the
following requirements must be fulfilled:
• You can boot from either the CD 1 or from the boot disk that came with your
system.
• Sufficient space for the Linux installation must be available on your hard
disk. Alternatively you can (and should) provide Linux with its own sufficiently large hard disk.
• The CD-ROM drive is supported by Linux.
you can find out.
If you’re not sure about this,
If your hardware does not meet one of these conditions, there are “alternative”
methods by which you can successfully complete an installation. These are discussed in the section at the end of this chapter (see Section 2.3 page 28 for more
details).
2.1.1
Now We’re Starting: the Welcome Screen
Turn on your computer, and place the CD 1 and/or the boot disk in the appropriate drive. If the computer refuses to boot, you probably need to change the boot
sequence in your system BIOS to either A,C or CD-ROM,C,A.
After a few seconds you will be greeted with the startup screen. You have
10 seconds to select ‘Manual Installation’ and prevent an automatic start
of YaST2. Add boot parameters to the boot options if necessary.
You will know that the loading sequence has started when the following text
appears at the bottom of your screen: "Loading initrd..." followed by
"Loading linux...". Then you will see all of the kernel text messages
scrolling by and finally, the program linuxrc will start.
The program linuxrc is menu driven and will wait until you enter something.
9
2
Your first SuSE Linux installation
Figure 2.1: The SuSE Linux welcome screen
Possible problems
• If your CD-ROM drive (ATAPI) should hang when the system boots, take a
look at Section 2.4.6 page 36.
• CD 1 is not detected as a boot medium. Try using CD 2. see also Section 2.4.2 page 33.
• With graphics cards like FireGL 1, 2 or 3 the installation is not started in the
graphical mode (Framebuffer). The installation has to be carried out in text
mode.
• Other boot problems can usually be remedied using kernel parameters; see
Section 10.3.2 page 243.
2.1.2
The Basics: linuxrc
The program linuxrc allows you to perform settings for the installation.
If
necessary, you can load drivers as kernel modules.
It will then start the installation program YaST, which in turn installs the operating system software and applications.
Tips on operating
linuxrc
: The ↑ and ↓ keys are used to select menu items.
Likewise, the← and → keys are used to select commands, such as ‘Ok’ or
‘Back’. The ←- key will execute the selected command.
10
2.1
Installation with the Text-based
YaST (YaST 1)
If you are interested in a more detailed description of linuxrc, it can be found in
Section 12.5 page 294.
Settings
The program linuxrc now starts by selecting the language, color display and keyboard.
Figure 2.2: Language selection
• Select a language. Make sure you highlight ‘English’ before pressing ←- .
• Select either ‘Color’ or ‘Monochrome’ (black and white), then press ←- .
• Select the keyboard settings.
Make
sure, once again, that the proper setting
is selected before pressing ←- !
Adding Hardware with the Modules
You will now be in the linuxrc main menu (Figure 2.3 on the next page) where
you have the following choices:
‘Settings’ – Here you can modify the language, screen or keyboard settings.
We already did this.
‘System Information’ – This menu option will show you lots of information
about hardware that the kernel has already recognized, modules that have
been already loaded, etc.
‘Kernel Modules (Hardware Drivers)’ – You might need to enter some-
thing here to load modules needed by your hardware.
11
2
Your first SuSE Linux installation
Figure 2.3: The linuxrc main menu
General rule: You do not need to call up this menu item if both your hard
disk(s) and CD-ROM drive (ATAPI) are attached to an (E)IDE controller.
(E)IDE support is built into the kernel.
‘Installation / Starting the System’ – Here the installation is con-
tinued.
‘Abort / Reboot’ – In case you have changed your mind . . .
Select loading of kernel modules with ‘Kernel module’ only if you need support for SCSI or for PCMCIA (see Section 7.1.6 page 194) or if you do not have
an ATAPI drive; you can read about how modlues are loaded in Section 12.5
page 294. In the following submenu choose which modules yo uwant (or need)
to load. Possible choices are:
A SCSI-module – if you have a SCSI hard disk or SCSI CD-ROM drive.
A CD-ROM module – if your CD-ROM drive is not connected to the (E)IDE
controller or the SCSI controller.
A network module – if you want to install via NFS or FTP, but this will not be
discussed here.
Tip
If you can’t find any support for your installation medium (proprietary
CD-ROM drive, parallel port CD-ROM drive, network cards, PCMCIA)
among the standard modules, you may find what you need on the
modules floppy disk which contains additional drivers. To do this, go
to the end of the list and select the item ‘-- More modules --’; you
are then asked to insert the modules.
12
2.1
Installation with the Text-based
YaST (YaST 1)
Starting the installation
Since the ‘Start installation
/ system’ is already highlighted by de to continue with the installation.
fault, all you have to do is press ←- Figure 2.4: Installation menu of linuxrc
In this menu you have the following choices:
‘Start installation’ What you are about to do.
‘Boot installed system’ This option is useful if you are having trouble
booting to an already installed system.
‘Start rescue system’ Up to now, this item is only available for IBM-com-
patible (IA 32) systems.
‘Eject CD’ Eject CD electronically.
For the actual installation, you just need to press ←- at the menu option ‘Start
installation’. In the following screen, select the source medium. By default
the menu option ‘CD-ROM’ is already selected.
Now press ←- . The installation environment will be started from CD 1.
As soon as you have completed this step, select the text-based YaST1 (Figure 2.6
page 15) to start the actual installation.
Possible problems
• The SCSI adapter was not recognized:
– Try the module of a compatible driver.
13
2
Your first SuSE Linux installation
Figure 2.5: Selecting a source medium in linuxrc
– Use a kernel that has support for your SCSI adapter built into it. You need
a boot disk as described in Section 2.4.3 page 33.
• The ATAPI CD-ROM drive hangs while reading information from the CD. In
this case, please refer to Section 2.4.6 page 36, and for more general information, see the section on General Hardware Problems in the chapter
on System Administration in the Configuration Guide.
• For reasons which have yet to be clarified, problems can occur when loading
data to the RAM disk which can cause YaST not to be able to be loaded. In
such cases, the following remedy usually leads to a positive result:
In the linuxrc main menu select ‘Settings’ → ‘Debug (Experts)’; there
you should set ‘Force root image’ to no. Return to the main menu and
start the installation again.
2.1.3
Installation with YaST
If you selected YaST instead of YaST2 earlier, the YaST welcome screen appears
and the reader will see the following four menu options
(see Figure 2.7 page 16):
Note
If you want to learn more about YaST or have special maintenance tasks to
perform, please refer to the detailed YaST chapter (Chapter 3 page 45).–
There are hints at the beginning of this chapter on how the keyboard layout
works in YaST.
14
2.1
Installation with the Text-based
YaST (YaST 1)
Figure 2.6: Selecting YaST in linuxrc
‘Install Linux from scratch’ If SuSE Linux is to be installed for the first
time. This is the topic of the section below.
‘Update existing Linux system’ Updating a SuSE Linux system is de-
scribed in Section 11.1 page 275.
‘Installation using expert mode’ If you select this option, you will have
a number of choices to make during the installation. It is strongly recommended that you only choose this option if you are an experienced Linux
user and you are sure of the steps necessary for a successful installation. The
Expert mode will not be covered in the scope of this manual.
‘Abort - no installation’ if you are having second thoughts. . .
Select the menu item ‘Install Linux from scratch’.
Please take a look before you make partitions at Section 2.5 page 38; there you
will find useful background information.
2.1.4 Partitioning and Formatting the Hard Disk
YaST now informs you that a hard disk has been detected. If “free” hard disk
space is available, YaST will confirm this and suggest that you use this area for
Linux (window ‘Use Free Area?’).
Tip
If you already have a de activated swap partition on your system, perhaps
from a previous installation, YaST will detect it and ask you if you want to
use this partition as a swap partition.
15
2
Your first SuSE Linux installation
Figure 2.7: Initial YaST screen
Proceed as follows to set up the partitions:
‘Partitioning’ – As a rule, the question about partitioning for a SuSE Linux
first-time installation or a new installation needs to be answered with ‘Partition’. You should not select ‘Set up LVM’ unless you know what a
Logical Volume Manager is and that you require it.
‘Yes’ – If you answer ‘Yes’, YaST will perform the partitioning on its own and
you can continue with Section 2.1.6 page 18.
‘No’ – If you say ‘No’, you can partition interactively.
Figure 2.8: YaST – Partitioning hard disk
16
2.1
Installation with the Text-based
YaST (YaST 1)
If YaST does not find free space on your drive, it will suggest that you ‘Use
entire hard disk’. On this screen you can choose from one of the following
possibilities. (Areminder:
the Tab , ← or → keys can be used to position the
cursor, and the ←- key can be used to execute the selection):
‘Partitioning’ – This lets you partition the hard disk yourself; you will need
to select this option if there is another operating system (or partition that you
do not want to remove) already on your hard drive.
Caution
If you select ‘Use entire hard disk’, all data that is currently on the
drive will be lost and unrecoverable.
‘Use entire hard disk’ – With this option YaST will – after presenting a
big “red” warning screen – automatically partition the drive.
You should only choose this option if you just want to install SuSE Linux
from scratch, and you don’t want to get involved with the topic of partitioning.
Operating systems which exist on your hard disk will be deleted if you
choose this option!
If you choose the option ‘Use entire hard disk’, YaST uses the following guidelines when partitioning your hard disk:
• Create a /boot partition (a minimum of 2 MB, or 1 cylinder)
• Create a swap partition (twice the size of the RAM on your system, but
no larger than 128 MB)
• Create a large root partition (‘/’) with the remaining space.
Possible problems
• It may be the case that there are problems when re-reading the partition table.
If this is the case, YaST will display this in a red display box and ask you to
re-boot. You should then re-start the computer and not attempt to make new
partitions the next time.
• Not enough space is available. In section 2.4.1 page 30 there are hints on
how you can create more space on your hard disk, using fips under DOS.
2.1.5 Installation of Software Packages
At this point the hard disk has been prepared for your Linux installation. Now
you must decide which software packages to install.
The next YaST menu to appear is the YaST installation menu (Figure 2.9 on
the next page). This may take a few moments to appear because the series and
package descriptions must be read from the installation medium and evaluated.
17
2
Your first SuSE Linux installation
Figure 2.9: YaST – Package selection
If you do not want to choose specific packages, you can continue with the item
‘Start installation’; in this case you can move on to Section 2.1.7 on the
facing page.
• Select the menu option titled ‘Load configuration’ to make your software selection (standard, network server, minimal, etc.) This is covered in
Section 2.1.6.
When you have selected the system configuration and confirmed this, you
will return to the installation menu.
• The menu option ‘Change/Create configuration’ can be used to change
“individual” software packages in the list of currently selected packages. You
will be presented with the series selection screen. Since you have chosen one
of the pre-configured system configurations, it is generally not necessary to
modify the list of selected packages. The reader should also be aware that it
is possible (and easy) to install or remove packages after the system has been
installed.
A detailed description of adding packages can be found in Section 3.4.3 page 67.
2.1.6
Selection of the Base Software
The YaST screen for selecting one of the default configurations (Figure 2.10 on
the next page) will appear only if you select the menu option ‘Load configuration’, in Section 2.1.5 on the preceding page.
We have
prepared
a few pre-defined package “configurations”.
With the arrow
keys ↑ and ↓ you can reach the individual items; with Space you can select or
de select an item. An ‘X’ in the brackets indicates that the configuration has been
selected to be added or to replace a currently installed package configuration.
18
2.1
Installation with the Text-based
YaST (YaST 1)
A star (‘*’) next to the configuration title indicates that this configuration is
currently selected for installation.
Figure 2.10: YaST – Configuration selection
‘Add’ This menu option will add the list of packages from the selected package
configuration menu option to the currently installed package configuration.
‘Replace’ With this option you can replace the currently installed package con-
figuration list with the selected package configuration. You may be asked if
you want to delete packages which do not belong to the configuration.
‘Abort’ This menu option will bring you back to the previous screen.
2.1.7
Installing System Software and Programs
After all of this preparatory work we are finally ready to fill the hard disk with
great software!
• You can start installing the software packages with ‘Start Installation’.
On the screen, YaST will show you the status of each package as it is installed, as well as the total number of packages installed and the number of
packages remaining.
• You may be prompted for additional CD’s depending on the configuration.
• When the packages have all been installed, return to the main menu by selecting the menu option ‘Main menu’.
Possible problems
• If your system has just a “small amount” of RAM (<16 MB), then initially
only the packages from the first CD-ROM can be installed. The packages
from the other CD’s will be installed later (Section 2.1.9 page 23).
19
2
Your first SuSE Linux installation
• If you are having trouble copying the software, this is usually caused by
hardware problems.
If you have a SCSI system, make sure you double-check the cables and termination. It might also be helpful if you remove all external devices, scanners,
etc. from the SCSI bus during the installation. You should also consider using kernel parameters: the most important ones are listed in Section 10.3.1
page 242.
In case you are having problems with an ATAPI device, please refer to Section 2.4.6 page 36.
2.1.8
Selecting a Kernel for the System
The base system has been successfully installed on the hard disk.
Figure 2.11: YaST – Selecting the kernel
Now you must install the appropriate kernel. For the system, the boot loader,
LILO is set up on the hard disk, and the first software and hardware components
will be configured.
• The ‘standard kernel’ is suitable for most systems.
• The ‘kernel with SMP support’ should be used for multi-processor systems.
• The ‘kernel with APM support’ contains support for “Advanced Power
Management”.
Caution
If your processor is not 100% Pentium, please select ‘kernel for computers with 386 or 486 processors’. You must use this kernel for a
Cyrix 686, for example. Selecting the wrong kernel could lead to a "kernel
panic"; see also file:/usr/share/doc/sdb/de/html/cyrix686.
html.
20
2.1
Installation with the Text-based
YaST (YaST 1)
YaST will copy the selected kernel to /boot/vmlinuz and the kernel configuration file to /usr/src/linux/.config. This file exactly describes the installed
kernel and the modules belonging to it.
The question ‘Would you like to configure LILO?’ should only be answered with‘yes’ if you’re positive that the installed system can be booted with
LILO (see Figure 3.25 page 76); generally speaking this is the case for DOS and
Windows 95/98 – but for Windows NT things look a little different (see Section 4.7.2 page 105) !
Tips on filling out the necessary forms can be found in Section 3.6.2 page 76.
2.1.9
Base System Configuration with YaST
After selecting the kernel you must finish the rest of the basic configuration. The
first software and hardware components are configured.
Figure 2.12: YaST – Selecting a time zone
• Select the appropriate time zone (Figure 2.12). You will have to search
through the long list of time zones to find the one that is appropriate for
your location. You will also be prompted to select either ‘GMT’ or ‘Local
time’. You should select ‘Local time’ unless your system clock (the one
in your BIOS) is already set to Greenwich Mean Time.
• The following screens that appear are for setting up your network configuration:
– Host and Domain name (Figure 2.13 on the following page). Unless you
have been given a Fully Qualified Domain Name (from either your System administrator or your ISP), you can choose whatever you like for a
Host and Domain name. If you are planning on connecting to the Internet
or an intranet, you should make sure that you correctly specify a name.
21
2
Your first SuSE Linux installation
Figure 2.13: YaST – Host - and Domain name
For example earth.cosmos.com. – where earth is the hostname and
cosmos.com is the domain name.
– Onlyloopback, or Real Network? If your computer has no network
card, you can select loopback and you will not be prompted for a detailed
network configuration.
– If you have selected Real Network, you will be prompted with additional network-related questions: DHCP client, Network type (for Ethernet cards, select eth0), IP address, Netmask, Gateway, inetd, portmap,
NFS server, From address for Newsgroup postings, Name Server, IP address, selection of kernel module for network card support and Sendmail
configuration (sendmail.cf).
• Selecting the sendmail.cf for the mail system (Figure 2.14 on the next
page).
The details collected until now are saved and written to the various configuration
files by SuSEconfig. YaST terminates and various messages on the state of the
system appear on the screen. . .
• After some system messages, you will see a welcome message, "Welcome
to SuSE Linux". Here your full attention is required: you are prompted
for the ‘root’ password (System administrator). You should choose this
password carefully and not forget it. You should not use “empty spaces” or
special characters (unless you know what you are doing). Please note that
only the first 8 characters are evaluated.
• YaST will ask you if you want to configure your modem. If you have a
modem, you can do this now or you can configure the modem later. If you
choose ‘Yes’, YaST will prompt you for the serial port to which the modem
is attached. Please note that “Winmodems” are not supported in Linux
(see file:/usr/share/doc/sdb/de/html/cep_winmodem.html).
22
2.1
Installation with the Text-based
YaST (YaST 1)
Figure 2.14: YaST – Selecting a mail system
• YaST will then ask you if you want to configure your mouse. If you want
to, then select ‘Yes’. Choose your mouse type from the list that appears
(Figure 2.16 page 25). If you are using a serial mouse, YaST will also prompt
you for the appropriate serial port (Figure 2.15 on the next page). Choose the
correct serial port from the list.
If additional packages need to be installed from the CD-ROM’s (see Section 2.1.7
page 19), YaST will do this now. . .
• YaST will ask you to insert the other CD’s, so that the remaining software can
be installed; the last CD will only be needed if you have explicitly chosen to
install the package source code – this is not normally the case!
• YaST will exit now and prompt you to press ←- .
The installation of your SuSE Linux is now complete.
2.1.10
Logging in After Your First Installation
Some ‘Root’ configuration scripts will be run in the background. At this point
you can log in as ‘root’ in the foreground, for example on Console 1. Login:
At the login prompt "Login:", enter root and you will be prompted for the
"Password:". Here you should enter the password that you gave for the ‘root’
user (see Section 2.1.9 on the preceding page).
The Linux-Prompt appears and you can now start working; this is what the
prompt looks like:
earth:~ #
For example, the command ls -a can be used to view the contents of the current
directory:
23
2
Your first SuSE Linux installation
Figure 2.15: YaST – Selecting interface for modem and mouse
earth:~ # ls -a
The program yast will start YaST, which can be used to make changes to your
system configuration:
earth:~ # yast
If you start YaST (yast) you can select the menu option ‘System Administration’ and the sub-menu ‘User administration’ to create new user accounts. You can continue with the sub-item ‘Configuring XFree86™’; via
this item the graphical interface can be set up (see also Section 5.3 page 124).
Configuration scripts will be running automatically in the background (indexing
manpages, setting up Perl, etc..). On computers with limited memory and slow
CPUs, this procedure can take up to an hour to complete. If you decided to
“reboot” your computer before these scripts are finished, YaST will automatically
continue processing the scripts from where it left off!
Youcan view
the
status of these scripts on Console 9. To see this console, press
the Alt + F9 keys simultaneously. Once the scripts are completed, the following message will appear:
"Have a lot of fun!"
After the installation is complete, additional configurations can be made.
24
2.1
Installation with the Text-based
YaST (YaST 1)
Figure 2.16: YaST – Selecting mouse driver
2.1.11
Shutting Down and Booting the System
Caution
You should never switch off a Linux computer directly. Either use the function provided by KDM or the commands presented in Section 2.1.11 to “shut
down” the computer. You can switch it off after shutdown. If the computer
is not shut down properly, a file system check must be carried out the next
time the machine boots – this takes some time and in exceptional cases, the
check is not sufficient to restore all files which may have been damaged.
The commands for shutting down your system properly are shown in Table 2.1.
shutdown -h now
halts the system; when you see the output: "the
system is halted", you can switch off your machine
shutdown -r now
reboots the system immediately
Table 2.1: Commands for shutting down your Linux system
The shutdown command can only be invoked by ‘root’.
To shut down your system, log in as ‘root’ and enter the commands
shutdown -h now or shutdown -r now.
Alternatively, you can use Ctrl + Alt +Del , which you might already know
from booting DOS. This combination does not work if you are currently running
X11. Nevertheless, this method can be used by any user on any virtual console.
25
2
Your first SuSE Linux installation
2.2
Starting SuSE Linux
After installation, the question remains as to how you want to boot your system
normally (Booting).
The following section describes the options you have for booting your SuSE
Linux system. The best boot method for you will depends on the intended use of
your Linux system.
Boot disk: You can boot Linux from a Boot disk (“Boot floppy”). This choice
will always work (as long as the boot disk does not get corrupted) and it is
easy. The boot disk may have been created during the installation.
loadlin: The loadlin boot option can be configured as follows:
• The computer must be running either in DOS Real mode or have a VCPI
server in virtual 8086 mode 1 In other words: this method will not function
in Unix, OS/2, Windows NT or in a DOS window on a Windows 95/98
machine. It does, however, function well from MSDOS or from Windows 95/98 in DOS mode.
• Your computer must have enough DOS memory available: There must
be 128 KB available below the 640 KB limit, the rest can be on extended/EMS/XMS memory.
Loadlin is fairly labor intensive to set up, but it can be easily integrated into
the Windows 95/98 boot menus. This requires a manual editing of configuration files. One of the biggest advantages of loadlin is that nothing gets
installed into the MBR (Master Boot Record) of the hard disk. To other operating systems, Linux partitions will appear as an unknown type.
To install loadlin, you need to know a little about Linux and DOS. You should
also be able to create configuration files with an editor. You can find details
of this in Section 4.9 page 113. If you make a mistake in the Windows95/98
boot menus, this could cause problems. In the event of an extreme error,
you may loose access to your Windows hard drive. Before you start modifying your Windows boot menu, make sure that you can boot your Windows
operating system with a boot floppy.
LILO: The universal and technically elegant solution for booting your system is
LILO. The LILO boot menu can be configured to give you a choice of operating systems to boot, before anything is booted. With YaST it is relatively
easy to configure and install LILO (see Section 3.6.2 page 76). LILO must
be installed in the boot sector of your hard disk, and this is not without some
risk. To install it correctly you will need to know a bit more about the boot
process than the average user. You should be comfortable enough with the
main LILO configuration file to edit it. You are well advised to learn how to
uninstall LILO in the event that you have difficulties. Details on LILO and
the boot process can be found in Section 4.3 page 91. LILO is considered the
best boot method, but we should warn you here that it is a bit more difficult
to configure than a simple boot disk.
1A
26
VCPI server is accessed by the program emm386.exe.
2.2
Starting SuSE Linux
Caution
There are BIOS variants which check the structure of the boot sector (MBR),
and after a LILO installation erroneously display a virus warning. This problem can be easily removed by entering the BIOS and looking for corresponding adjustable settings; for example, you should switch off ‘virus
protection’. You can switch this option back on again later; this feature is
unnecessary, however, if Linux is the only operating system you are using.
A detailed discussion of various boot methods, especially of LILO and loadlin
can be found in Chapter 4 page 89.
Other Boot Managers
Because of the increasing importance of Linux, some creators of commercial
boot managers have included options for booting Linux in their products. Best
known among boot managers are System Commander Deluxe and Partition
Magic. In addition to help screens at boot time, many of these packages offer
a lot of functionality. For example it is possible to extend existing FAT32 partitions or to change FAT16 partitions into FAT32. You can not find these programs
on the installation CD’s and we do not offer Installation support for these products!
27
2
Your first SuSE Linux installation
2.3
2.3.1
Special Installations
Installation Without a Supported CD-ROM Drive
What do you do if a standard installation via the CD-ROM drive is not possible? Your CD-ROM drive might not be supported if it is an older, “proprietary”
model. Or it might be your second computer, (a Notebook, for example) which
might not even have a CD-ROM drive, but instead has an Ethernet adapter or a
PLIP cable. . .
SuSE Linux provides ways of installing over a network connection to such a
machine without using a supported CD-ROM drive:
NFS or FTP via Ethernet or via PLIP (Section 2.3.1)
are available to you.
Installation from a Source in the “Net”
We do not offer support for this method of installation. It is only recommended
for experienced computer users.
What’s it all about?
There is no CD-ROM installed on the machine on which you want to install
Linux.
Still you are able to connect to a remote machine over the network that has an
installed CD-ROM drive (and CD) or which has a copy of the CD on its hard
disk.
In addition it is necessary to copy the files .S.u.S.E-disk* from the CD-ROM
to the hard disk; this can be abbreviated in the following way:
earth: # cp /media/cdrom/.S* /emil
earth: # cp -a /media/cdrom/suse /emil
This “other” computer must “export” the directory in a suitable manner.
Tip
Alternatively it is sufficient to start the rescue system on the remote machine
and directly export the CD 1.
Step by step
1. Start the installation of the client as specified in Section 2.1 page 9.
2. Continue with the installation as described in Section 2.1.2 page 10, but:
• When you come to ‘Kernel modules’, select ‘Networking cards’
and load the necessary driver. This is not necessary if you are installing
via PLIP.
28
2.3
Special Installations
• When linuxrc asks you for a ‘Source medium’, you should enter ‘Network (NFS)’ and go through the menu for network configuration. An
alternative is to install via FTP.
3. Finish up the installation as given in Section 2.1.3 page 14.
Possible problems
• The installation aborts before it has actually started, because the installation
directory of the “other” machine wasn’t exported with exec permissions.
Correct this and start again.
• The server does not know the computer on which SuSE Linux is to be installed. Enter the name and IP address of the computer which is to be newly
installed into the file /etc/hosts of the server.
2.3.2
Automatic Installation and Configuration of SuSE
Linux
Why Automatization?
The automatic installation and configuration of Linux systems allows you to assemble a unified server landscape. Even for client installations, automatic installation is preferable – above a certain number – to a manual installation. This
standardization involves the state of the system versions and the software, file
system structures and configuration files. The automatization guarantees that an
installation method which has once proven successful can be used on a computer
at any time, without expert knowledge. In this way it is also possible to expand
the server landscape without problems. This standardization is an obvious help
for system administrators: if the same configuration structures are required, you
don’t need to search for configuration files on every server each time an installation is performed. The software behaves as expected, since the same versions
are being used. Bugfixes will take effect across the whole server landscape.
All these effects improve the quality of production.
An overview of ALICE
ALICE Automatic Linux Installation and Configuration Environment integrates
the installation and essential areas of configuration.
Due to the CVS-based behavior of the configuration data, you can maintain this
configuration data from various locations, and using different users.
It is possible to classify a computer into one or several different classes. This
means that different computers can be kept as “similar” as possible; only really
necessary data needs to be given in the computer-specific configuration file. To
organize its structure, the configuration data is divided into three different directories. The templates directory contains a number of defaults, the classes
directory contains class-specific configurations and the info directory contains
29
2
Your first SuSE Linux installation
host-specific information. The defaults can be overwritten by class values, and
these, in turn, by special values assigned to the host.
ALICE is a growing project, i. e. if you do not find any modules for configuring
software you are using, this can still be accomplished independently or in the
framework of a project.
Further Information
Information on ALICE modules, setting up an installation server, the architecture of ALICE and a configuration session can be found in the documentation
included in the package alice.
Automatic installation with YaST1
The “Automatic Installation” of YaST1 can also be used independently of the
complete framework of the ALICE project; see also the hints in the article file:
/usr/share/doc/sdb/de/html/cg_autoinstall.html.
2.4
2.4.1
Tips and Tricks
Creating Space for Linux (Partitioning)
What’s it all about?
You need to prepare your hard disk for Linux partitions. Hopefully you have
some time to read through this section carefully. It is recommended that you
have some disks or tapes for a backup and a boot disk to boot your existing
operating system.
Details
By partitioning, your hard disk can be separated into several independent parts.
One reason for partitioning your hard disk might be the coexistence of several
different operating systems with different file systems on your hard drive. hard
disks are divided into cylinders. Each cylinder always contains exactly the same
amount of tracks, cylinder 0 being the innermost.
How do you get space for your Linux partition?
• Individual partitions on the hard disk can be deleted but all data which resides on these partitions will be lost. This space is now available for new
partitions (e. g., Linux). You could, however, split this partition into two or
more partitions.
• Any partition can be assigned to a different file system. As with deleting, all
data on these partitions will be lost.
30
2.4
Tips and Tricks
• In MS-DOS or Windows 95/98 you can reduce the last partition of the hard
disk in size without losing files in it; you must ensure, with a defragmentation
program, that all files are located at the beginning of the partition. If you just
have one MS-DOS or Windows partition you can make space in this way
for Linux partitions very simply. After defragmenting you can, with special
programs – for example, the Freeware program, fips, reduce the cylinder
upper limit, making the partition smaller. You can find fips on CD 1 in the
directory dosutils.
• If you are using MS-DOS or Windows, you can minimize the last partition
without losing data.
If all data resides on low-numbered cylinders, special programs (e. g., fips)
can decrease the upper cylinder limit to reduce the size of the last partition
leading to the possibility of creating a new partition for Linux. Using a defragmentation program ensures, that all data is moved to the beginning of the
partition.
• The easiest way is to buy a new hard disk. This, of course, will cost you
some money.
Caution
Every change of the partition tables must be done with extreme caution!
Please read the documentation of the corresponding programs! Severe
problems can occur while changing partition tables; you can even lose all
your data. We at SuSE cannot be held responsible for this! It is strongly
recommended that you have at least a boot disk and a backup of your important data.
Step by step
This is how to proceed to partition your hard disk:
1. If you don’t know already, you have to find out how many partitions are on
your hard disk and the size of the partitions. Use fdisk of your OS for this
task.
2. Determine how many partitions you really need and which size you are going
to assign them. Information on this may be found in Section 2.5 page 38 and
in Section 2.6 page 40.
3. Write down the partition data; you’re going to need it later during the installation process.
4. A backup of your hard disk at this point is highly recommended! If you
don’t have a backup tape or streamer installed and don’t want to back up
everything onto floppies (which is a tedious job), at least make a backup
of the most important data and files (e. g., autoexec.bat, config.sys,
31
2
Your first SuSE Linux installation
*.ini, etc.). Create a boot disk for your OS and make sure you can boot
with it! There are several programs that might come in handy on your boot
disk, such as fdisk, an editor, a formatting program and a backup program.
5. The next step depends on your system configuration.
DOS/Windows 95/98, one partition on your hard disk, and no Backup
You have to reduce the size of your partition without deleting data. Move all
data to the beginning of your partition using a tool such as defrag (MS-DOS 6
or Windows 95/98).
The defragmentation program doesn’t normally move hidden or system files
because sometimes they are write-protected and have a defined place on the
hard disk; moving them could have adverse effects. If you are sure that
no such data is on your hard disk you can deactivate the attributes hidden
or system for the necessary files or, depending on which defragmentation
program you are using, you can “force” the defragmentation of such files.
Please keep in mind that even the Windows swap file is a hidden file. If it’s
in your way, you have to deselect it in Windows in “disable virtual memory”.
Once you have retrieved enough space, change to the directory
\dosutils\fips15 on your SuSE CD. There you will find fips.exe, with
which you can make partitions smaller. Study the documentation included
with fips carefully since changing partition tables can be quite tricky! The
program fips.exe only runs on DOS, not on Windows; you have to exit Windows or (if using Windows 95/98) change into DOS mode. After running
fips.exe, you will have a second partition which later will be divided into
your Linux partitions.
Tip
fips.exe in \dosutils\fips\fips20 is capable of shrinking fat32
partitions. Please make a backup before trying out this fips version!
DOS/Windows 95/98 with several partitions or you have a Complete
File Backup
You can delete your DOS partitions and afterwards install them again, reduced in size. You are going to lose all data on those partitions, so you have
to have a complete backup available (file backup, no image backup!). Using
fdisk, you delete all partitions and install the new ones. Next, you format
these partitions, install your OS and copy all data from your backup back to
disk (remember that you must have your backup program on your boot disk).
OS/2
Here, you have the following possibilities:
32
2.4
Tips and Tricks
• Reduce your OS/2 partitions. To accomplish this, you must backup all
data on your OS/2 partition, delete these partitions using OS/2’s fdisk and
reinstall them reduced in size. The space now available will be used later
for your Linux partitions.
• If you plan to use Linux in future instead of OS/2, all you have to is
change the partition type later on to Linux, or delete all OS/2 partitions
and recreate them later as Linux partitions.
• Buy a new hard disk. Formatting and partitioning it will be done later
with YaST.
6. Reboot your computer.
7. Check whether your old system is still running! Linux partitions on the
freshly created new space will be installed later using YaST.
Possible problems
The following problems can occur:
• The partition might not be adequately reduced in size because defrag cannot
move some files.
• In DOS/Windows your CD-ROM now has another hard disk identifier; in
Windows 95/98 the computer hangs.
2.4.2
Booting with CD 2
As well as CD 1, the second CD is also bootable. While on CD 1 a 2.88 MB
boot image is used, the second CD contains a traditional image of 1.44 MB in
size.
You should use CD 2 when you know for certain that you can boot from CD, but
when things don’t work with CD 1 (the “fallback” solution). Unfortunately not
every BIOS correctly recognizes the large images.
2.4.3
Creating a Boot Disk In DOS
Requirements
You need a formatted 3.5" floppy disk and a bootable 3.5" floppy drive. If you
are working in Windows 95/98, you must launch setup from MS-DOS mode,
and not from within a DOS window.
Additional information
CD 1 in the directory /disks contains a number of disk images. Such an image
can be copied to a disk with the help of suitable auxiliary programs, this disk is
then called a boot disk. Also on these disk images are the “loader”, Syslinux and
33
2
Your first SuSE Linux installation
program linuxrc. Syslinux allows you to select a specific kernel for the booting
process, and to add parameters for your hardware, if necessary. The program
linuxrc supports the loading of kernel modules specially for your hardware and
then starts the installation.
Normally the SuSE boot disk supplied can be used to boot with. Only for exotic
hardware not supported by the modularized kernel of this boot disk or if you
download a disk image from the Internet (for example from
ftp://ftp.suse.com), do you need to create your own boot disk as described
here.
With Setup
Step by step
Here’s how to create a boot disk:
1. Start setup directly from CD 1.
2. Select ‘floppy’ and press ←- , next select ‘Boot’ and again ←- .
3. Now you have to select a disk with a suitable kernel that, for example, supports your SCSI adapter if you have one. setup shows the essential part of
the kernel descriptions. If you need further information, you can look it up in
\disks\readme.dos. Remember the name of your your kernel. You will
need it later. Now press ←- .
4. Now you’re ready to create the boot disk. Insert the (DOS-formatted) disk
into the 3.5" drive and select the disk you want to create.
• Only the boot disk is needed (‘Root’ is not needed
anymore for SuSE
Linux.) Move the cursor onto ‘Boot’ and press ←- .
• setup requests you to confirm that you have inserted a disk. Press ←- and the disk is written.
• When this is finished, press ←- .
• Now select ‘Done’ to exit this screen and setup.
With rawrite
Alternatively you might want to use the (perhaps slower) DOS program rawrite.exe
(CD 1, directory \dosutils\rawrite) to write the disk at the boot prompt.
The standard disk images are contained on CD 1 in the directory /disks; please
read the file README. The image bootdisk or scsi01 is the usual choice for
the standard disk. All the actual kernels can be found in the directory /suse/
images (without extensions). Also please read the README file there.
If you need the standard disk which is supplied with every SuSE Linux, proceed
as follows: It is assumed that you are in the directory of the CD:
Q:> dosutils\rawrite\rawrite disks\eide01
Q:> dosutils\rawrite\rawrite disks\bootdisk
34
2.4
Tips and Tricks
If you need a specific type of support, another disk image should be used instead
of bootdisk. If problems arise, k_i386 can be implemented as a fallback
kernel.
2.4.4
Creating a Boot Disk with UNIX
Requirements
You need access to a Unix/Linux system with an accessible CD-ROM drive and
a formatted disk.
This is how you create a boot disk:
1. If you need to format the disks first:
earth: # fdformat /dev/fd0u1440
2. Mount the first CD (disk 1) (e. g., to /cdrom):
earth: # mount -tiso9660 /dev/cdrom /cdrom
3. Change to the disks directory on CD:
earth: # cd /cdrom/disks
4. Create the boot disk with
earth: # dd if=/cdrom/disks/bootdisk of=/dev/fd0 bs=8k
In the README file in the directory disks you can read about what features
specific kernels have; these files can be read with more or less. .
5. If you need a different kernel, another disk image can be used in place of
bootdisk. If problems arise, k_i386 can be implemented as a fallback
kernel.
Somewhat more complex is using a self-compiled kernel during installation. In
this case, write the default image (bootdisk) to the disk and then overwrite the
actual kernel (linux) with your own kernel (refer to Section 9.5 page 237):
earth:
earth:
earth:
earth:
#
#
#
#
dd if=/cdrom/disks/scsi01 of=/dev/fd0 bs=8k
mount -t msdos /dev/fd0 /mnt
cp /cdrom/suse/images/eide.ikr /mnt/linux
umount /mnt
2.4.5
Does Linux support my CD-ROM?
Almost every CD-ROM drive is now supported by Linux.
• Using ATAPI drives (those drives connected to an EIDE controller), there
should be no problems at all.
35
2
Your first SuSE Linux installation
• Using SCSI CD-ROM drives, it is only important whether the SCSI controller is supported by Linux (supported SCSI controllers are listed in the
Appendix). If your SCSI controller is not supported and there is a HD connected to it, you will have a problem anyway.
• Lots of proprietary CD-ROM drives are supported under Linux (see Appendix). Here is the most likely place for problems to occur. If your drive is
not mentioned, you could try choosing a similar type.
• In the meantime parallel port CD-ROM drives have become very popular.
Unfortunately there is no standard, leading to unexpected trouble. SuSE
Linux contains a number of alpha drivers for some devices. If none of them
works, you have to install via DOS. Please keep in mind that you may access
some of these devices only after they have been set up under DOS. You might
need a warm reboot.
2.4.6
ATAPI CD-ROM Hangs While Reading
If your ATAPI CD-ROM is not recognized or it hangs while reading, this is most
frequently due to incorrectly installed hardware. All devices must be connected
to the EIDE controller in the correct order. The first device is master on the first
controller; the second device is slave on the first controller. The third device
should be master on the second controller, and so forth.
It often occurs that there is only a CD-ROM besides the first device. The CDROM drive is sometimes connected as master to the second controller (secondary
IDE controller). This is wrong and can cause Linux not to know what to do with
this “gap”. You can try to fix this by passing the appropriate parameter to the
kernel (hdc=cdrom) (see Section 10.3.2 page 243).
Sometimes one of the devices is just “mis-jumpered”. This means it is jumpered
as slave but is connected as master, or vice versa. When in doubt, just check your
hardware settings and correct them where necessary.
In addition, there is a series of faulty EIDE chipsets, most of which have now
been identified; there is a special kernel to handle such cases. (see the README
in /disks of the installation CD-ROM). The kernel parameters needed are described in detail in Section 10.3.2 page 243 and Chapter 9 page 233.
Note
If booting does not work straightaway, try using the following kernel parameters. At the boot prompt (boot:), enter:
boot: linux <relevant parameters> (see below) Note: Don’t forget to add the name of the kernel (linux) before the actual parameters!
hd<x>=cdrom – <x> stands for a, b, c, d etc. and is to be interpreted as
follows:
• a – Master on the 1st IDE controller
36
2.4
Tips and Tricks
• b – Slave on the 1st IDE controller
• c – Master on the 2nd IDE controller
• ...
An example of <parameter to be entered>: hdb=cdrom
With this parameter you can specify the CD-ROM drive to the kernel, in case
it cannot find it itself and if you have an ATAPI CD-ROM drive.
ide<x>=noautotune – <x> stands for 0, 1, 2, 3 etc. and is to be interpreted
as follows:
• 0 – 1st IDE controller
• 1 – 2nd IDE controller
• ...
An example of <parameter to be entered>: ide0=noautotune
This parameter is often useful for (E)IDE hard disks.
Note
Further kernel parameters can be found in Section 10.3.2 page 243. In
case of problems with SCSI systems or with connecting network cards, you
should also look here.
2.4.7
Problems with CD-ROM Drives on Parallel Port
All available drivers are listed by linuxrc at the installation. Normally there are
no peculiarities.
Unfortunately, lots of drives (e. g. Freecom) are not supported yet. It may be that
you cannot use them although the manual claims that the type is identical. The
manufacturer apparently has changed the internals without making these changes
public.
Some of the devices need to be initialized by the DOS driver for making them
available under Linux:
1. Boot DOS and load the CD-ROM driver.
2. Insert a Linux boot disk.
3. warm reboot the machine
If your drive is not supported you will have to install from a DOS partition, as
before (see Section 2.3 page 28).
For current information on parallel port programming have a look at: http:
//www.torque.net/linux-pp.html.
37
2
Your first SuSE Linux installation
2.4.8
Loadlin Doesn’t Have Enough Memory to Load the
Kernel
You don’t have enough free memory below 640 KB. Try to remove drivers from
your startup files or shift them to high memory.
If you use compressed drives under Windows 95/98 and shifting the driver to
high memory doesn’t work, you have to decompress those drives.
2.4.9
Loadlin Doesn’t Start
If you encounter any problems using loadlin, you should start loadlin using the
following options: -v, -t or -d.
It is best to write the debug information into a file, debug.out.
C:\> loadlin -d debug.out <other parameters>
You could send this file to the SuSE support. For <other parameters> you need
to enter your system-specific values (see Section 4.9.1 page 114).
2.5
Partitioning Tips
Is Linux and its file systems completely new to you? Then you probably ask
yourself questions like: How much space should I assign to Linux? What’s
the minimum I need? What’s best for my needs? How should I divide up the
available space?
Partition Types on a PC
Every hard disk contains a partition table has space for up to four entries. Each
entry may be either a primary or an extended partition. Only one extended partition may be assigned.
Primary partitions are a continuous section of cylinders which are assigned to
one operating system. Using primary partitions, you would only be able to create
four partitions. More will not fit into the partition table.
An extended partition itself is also a continuous section of cylinders, but you can
divide an extended partition into multiple logical partitions which, in turn, don’t
need a separate entry in the partition table. The extended partition is more or less
a container for logical partitions.
If you need more than four partitions, you have to make one an extended partition
in which you may assign logical partitions. The maximum is 15 partitions for
SCSI systems and 63 for (E)IDE systems.
Linux doesn’t care on what kind of partition it is installed. It can be primary or
logical.
38
2.5
Partitioning Tips
Time to Decide
Let’s start with the minimum SuSE Linux install: 180 MB. This only works if
you use the machine for a simple purpose, e. g., you only work on a text console (no X Window System). If you want to take a look at X and start a few
applications, you will need 500 MB. Both values include swap.
What is a reasonable size for an installation? 1 GB – in this world of several
gigabyte hard disks, this is quite a modest requirement. And there is no upper
limit.
What’s the best for your needs? That depends on what you want to do:
• Working in X and using applications such as Applixware and Netscape will
require 1.2 GB.
• To create your own applications in X, you also need 1.2 GB.
• Both of the above items: 2 GB.
• To compile your own X servers, write your own CD’s together with the items
mentioned above: 4 GB .
• To set up an Internet/FTP server: 700 MB minimum.
Tip
With the robustness of the Linux file system which has now been achieved, it
is a very good idea, especially for novices, to follow the strategy suggested
by YaST: a small partition at the beginning of the hard disk for /boot (at
least 2 MB, for large drives, 1 cylinder), a partition for swap (64-128 MB), all
the rest for /.
If you want to partition something, but also as little as possible, then the following simple rules are valid:
How should you divide up the hard disk? This simple question cannot be answered easily. Apply these guidelines:
• up to 500 MB: swap partition and a root (/)
• approx. 500 MB to 4 GB: small boot partition for the kernel and LILO at the
very beginning of the hard disk (/boot, approx. 8-16 MB or 1 cylinder), a
swap partition and the rest for the root partition /.
• more than 4 GB: boot (/boot, swap, root (250 MB), home (/home with
approx. 200 MB per user) and the rest for applications (/usr); posssibly a
further partition for /opt (see on the following page) and for /var.
Note
If you plan to start Linux directly from the hard disk, you will need a Linux
partition below the “1024 cylinder limit” as a boot partition (you can read
more on this in page 93). This doesn’t concern you if you are starting Linux
from DOS/Windows with loadlin. Usually, the boot partition (/boot) will be
the same as the root partition.
39
2
Your first SuSE Linux installation
You should bear in mind that some programs (mostly commercial programs) install their data in/opt; if you are installing a number of these, either create a
separate partition for /opt or enlarge the dimensions of the root partition accordingly. Specifically this involves the program packages or demo programs
listed in table 2.2, calculated with size increases in mind (in the table mentioned
there are also programs which are not included in SuSE Linux)
Just in case, either provide a partition for /opt or make the root partition big
enough. Some examples are shown in table 2.2.
KDE
GNOME
htdig
Fortify
susehelp with htdig full text search
Wabi
Netscape
Arcad
Applixware
Eagle
StarOffice
Cyberscheduler Software
Cygnus Source-Navigator
SNiFF+
Insure++
pep
Oracle 8.1.7
Sybase – Adaptive Server Enterprise
virtuoso – OpenLink Virtuoso Lite Edition
170 MB
155 MB
5 MB
2 MB
40 to 300 MB
10 MB
45 MB
350 MB
400 MB
18 MB
260 MB
30 MB
20 MB
45 MB
45 MB
18 MB
900 MB
170 MB
55 MB
Table 2.2: Packages in directory /opt
2.6
Partitioning for Experts
In Section 2.5 page 38 and Section 3.3.11 page 58, details are given of the various
ways to partition your system. This section should provide more detailed information for tailoring a system that best suits your needs. This section is mainly
of interest for those who want an optimized system as far as security and performance are concerned and who are prepared to reinstall the complete system
where necessary.
It is absolutely essential that you have extensive knowledge of the functions of a
UNIX file system. You should be familiar with the topics mount point, physical,
extended and logical partitions.
It should be mentioned here that there is no golden rule for all, but many rules
for each situation. Don’t worry, you will find concrete figures in this section to
help you.
40
2.6
Partitioning for Experts
First, you need to gather the following information:
• What is the purpose of the machine (file server, compute server, stand-alone
machine)?
• How many people are going to work with this machine (simultaneous logins)?
• How many hard disks are installed? How big are they and which kind (EIDE,
SCSI or even RAID controllers)?
2.6.1
Size of Swap Partition
Quite often you will read:
“Swap should be at least as large as physical RAM”. This is a relic of times when
8 MB was regarded as a lot of RAM Memory.
Applications that need considerable memory have shifted these values up. Generally 64 MB of virtual swap should be sufficient. Do not be stingy. If you compile a kernel in X and want to have a look at the manual pages using Netscape
and have an emacs running, you will already take up all 64 MB.
To be safe, opt for at least 128 MB of virtual memory. One thing you should
never do is not assign swap space at all! Even on a machine with 256 MB RAM,
there should be a swap partition.
Do you plan to run extensive simulations and need gigabytes of memory? When
in doubt as to whether Linux suits your needs, please read Section 2.6.2 on the
following page (Example: compute server).
2.6.2
Computer Used as Stand-alone Machine
The most common use for a Linux machine is as a stand-alone computer. To
make decisions as easy as possible for you, we provide you with some concrete
figures which you can use at home or at your company. Table 2.3 is an overview
of size requirements for different Linux systems.
Installation
minimum
small
medium
large
Disk space needed
180 MB to 400 MB
400 MB to 800 MB
800 MB to 4 GB
4 GB to 8 GB
Table 2.3: Examples of disk space requirements for different installations
Example: stand-alone machine (small)
You have a 500 MB spare hard disk to hold Linux: use a 64 MB swap partition
and the rest for / (root partition).
41
2
Your first SuSE Linux installation
Example: stand-alone machine (average)
You have 1,2 GB available for Linux. A small boot partition /boot (5-10 MB or
1 cylinder), 128 MB for Swap, 800 MB for / and the rest for a separate /home
partition.
Example: stand-alone machine (luxury)
If you have more than 1.2 GB available, there is no standard way to partition.
Please read Section 2.6.3.
Using as a file server
Here, hard disk performance is really crucial. You should use SCSI devices if
possible. Keep in mind the performance of the disk and the controller.
A file server is used to save data centrally. This data might be home directories,
a database or other archives. The advantage of this is that administration of the
data is simple.
If the file server will serve a huge net (20 users and more), optimizing hard disk
access is essential.
Suppose you want to provide a file server for 25 users (their home directories). If
the average user requires 100-150 MB for personal space, a 4 GB disk mounted
under home will probably do.
If there are 50 such users, you will need an 8 GB disk. In this case, it would be
better to split home into two 4 GB disks, as now they would then share the load
(and access time!).
Using as a compute server
A compute server is generally a powerful machine that carries out extensive calculations over the net. Normally, such a machine is equipped with extensive
main memory (512 RAM or greater). The only point where fast disks are needed
is for the swap space. The same rule applies here: if you have a number of hard
disks you can spread swap partitions across them.
2.6.3
Optimizations
The disks are normally the limiting factor. To avoid this bottleneck, there are two
possibilities which should be used together:
• separate the load onto multiple disks
• use an optimized file system (e.g. reiserfs).
• equip your file server with enough memory (at least 256 MB)
42
2.6
Partitioning for Experts
Parallelizing multiple disks
This needs some further discussion. The total amount of time needed for transferring data can be separated into five factors:
• time elapsed until the request reaches the controller
• time elapsed until this request is send to the disk
• time elapsed until the hard disk manages to set its head
• time elapsed until the media has turned to the right sector
• time elapsed for transferring data
The first factor depends on the network connection and has to be regulated elsewhere. We do not cover this here. The second factor can be ignored, because it
depends on the controller. The third factor is the vital part. The time is counted in
milliseconds. Relative to the access time of main memory (measured in nanoseconds), this is a factor of one million! The fourth factor depends on the disk rotation speed. The fifth factor depends on the rotation speed, the number of heads
and the actual position of the data (inside or outside).
For optimized performance, one should consider factor three. Here, the SCSI
feature disconnect comes into play. Let’s look at what happens:
The controller sends the command (in this case to the hard disk) “Go to track x,
sector y” to the device. Now the disk motor has to start up. If this is an intelligent
disk (if it supports disconnect) and the driver itself is also able to do disconnect,
the controller sends a disconnect and the disk separates itself from the SCSI bus.
Now other SCSI devices can do work. After a time (depending on the strategy
or load on the SCSI bus), a connection to the disk is re-established. Normally,
the device has now reached the requested track.
On a multi-tasking, multi-user system like Linux, there are lots of optimizations
that can be done here. Let’s look at an output of the command df (see output 2.6.1).
Filesystem
/dev/sda1
/dev/sdb1
/dev/sdc1
1k-blocks
2974550
2974550
2457832
Used Available Use% Mounted on
892663
1928065 32% /
1948093
872635 69% /usr
1967464
490368 80% /usr/lib
Output 2.6.1: Example of a df command output
So, what benefits does parallelizing bring us? Suppose we enter in /usr/src:
[email protected]:/usr/src/ > tar xzf package.tgz -C /usr/lib
Here, package.tgz will be untarred into /usr/lib/package. To do so, the shell
launches tar and gzip (located in /bin and thus on /dev/sda) then package.tgz
in /usr/src is read (on /dev/sdb). At last, the extracted data is written to
/usr/lib (on /dev/sdc). Using parallelizing, positioning as well as read/write
of the disks’ internal buffers can be activated at the same time.
This is only one example; there are many more. If this example were a frequent
processing requirement, then, as a rule of thumb, if there are many disks (with
43
2
Your first SuSE Linux installation
the same speed), /usr and /usr/lib should physically be placed on different
disks. Here /usr/lib should have approximately 70% of the capacity of /usr.
/, due to its access, should be placed on the disk containing /usr/lib.
From a certain number of SCSI disks onwards (4–5), one should consider buying
a RAID controller. Thus, operations on the disks are not only quasi-parallel but
parallel. Fault tolerance is one of its famous by-products.
Processing speed and size of main memory
The size of main memory is more important in Linux than the processor itself.
One reason – if not the main reason – is Linux’ ability to dynamically create
buffers of hard disk data. Here, Linux uses lots of tricks, such as “read ahead”
(getting sectors in advance) and “delayed write” (saving writes until there is a
bundle to write). The latter is the reason why you should not switch off your
Linux machine. Both items are the reason why Linux is so fast and why the
memory seems to fill rapidly. Linux works with shared libraries, that is, lots of
programs and applications share the same library. A library call has only to be
allocated once. This also means that your memory fills up rather quickly. So if
you do not know whether to purchase another main board or some more memory,
we recommend you do the latter as it increases the speed of Linux.
total
Mem:
255
-/+ buffers/cache:
Swap:
261
used
246
178
3
free
9
76
257
shared
0
buffers
23
cached
44
Output 2.6.2: Output of free -m
Output 2.6.2 shows that some 23 MB are being saved in buffers. If you want to
access data that is already buffered, this data is almost immediately available.
44
3
YaST – Yet another Setup Tool
3 YaST – Yet another Setup Tool
YaST (yast) is a very important part of SuSE Linux. YaST installs the system, manages the software (Installation and uninstallation) and provides system
administration support.
This chapter outlines many important features of YaST, some of which are used
during system installation.
Note
Your SuSE Linux 7.2 comes with the most recent version of YaST. Consequently it is possible that the screen shots included in this chapter may differ
in detail from what is displayed on your monitor.
3.1
Basic Usage and Keyboard Layout
You can start YaST as user ‘root’ from the Prompt simply by typing the command yast:
earth:~ # yast
Navigate
the menus and the screens in YaST with the arrow-keys andthe tab-key
(Tab ). You can move around in lists with the cursor
and
keys
and with Bild ↑ Bild
↓
.
Items
in
the
lists
can
be
selected
with
Space
.
Normally
you
can
use
the Enter
(or
←)
key
to
confirm
your
choice.
To
return
to
a
previous
menu,
use the Esc key. If you want to save a particular
choice (such as the selection of
a package you wish to install), use the F10 key which both saves the selection
and returns to the previous menu.
Where you are prompted for a yes or no response, you can use the Tab key to
switch back and forth between the two options. If you use YaST in color mode,
the active selection is always highlighted in blue.
In rare cases, such as when you are accessing YaST remotely from a non Linux
terminal,the function
keys may
not be usable. In these cases,the key combi
nation, Ctrl <number> . To
+f <number> can be used as a substitute
forF
simulate the F10 key, use the key
combination
Ctrl +
f
0
.
There
are
no
substitute mappings for the F11 and F12 function keys.
45
3
YaST – Yet another Setup Tool
3.2
The YaST Main Menu
When you first start YaST, you will be in the “main menu” (Figure 3.1 on the
following page).
Figure 3.1: The “main menu”
‘General help for installation’ As the title suggests, this menu option
provides some general tips on installation.
‘Adjustments of installation ->’ This option will bring you a submenu
for making adjustments to your installation. (see Section 3.3 on the next page
for more details).
‘Package management (Update, Installation, Requests)’ This menu
option will bring you to the YaST package manager utility which is used to
install software packages and remove them from the system (see Section 3.4
page 66).
‘Update system’ In case some packages need to be updated.
‘System administration ->’ Yet Another Self-explanatory Title. (see Sec-
tion 3.6 page 73).
‘Show README file for installation media’ Important late-release in-
formation can be found here.
‘Copyright’ The lawyers have their say.
‘Exit YaST’ But not forever....
46
3.3
3.3
Adjustments of Installation
Adjustments of Installation
Adjustments to your installation can be made in one of the
of ‘Ad submenus
justments of installation’ (Figure 3.2). With the Esc key you can return to the main menu.
Figure 3.2: The menu for ‘Settings for installation’
The actual installation can only be started once you have specified the target
partitions! A number of items can be selected after the installation, which is
useful if you want to update settings!
3.3.1
Selecting the Language
With ‘Select language’, the language of the YaST mask can be changed.
The value is stored in the variable DEFAULT_LANGUAGE in /etc/rc.config;
see Section 12.9 page 305.
3.3.2 Selecting Keyboard Layout
With ‘Select keymap’, the keyboard layout can be changed. The value is
stored in the variable <KEYTABLE> in /etc/rc.config (see Section 13.6
page 316). Please choose a keytable according to the default language.
3.3.3
Installation Medium
Selecting the menu option ‘Select Installation Medium’ will give you to
select the source medium. From this menu (Figure 3.3 on the next page) you
can select the medium from which you would like to install. This selection is
made for installing the initial system and for adding packages to an existing system. YaST allows you, in another menu, the opportunity to select an installation
47
3
YaST – Yet another Setup Tool
medium, but this is for applying patches or updates to an existing system. This
process is discussed later on in this chapter.
Figure 3.3: Selection of the installation medium in YaST
In most cases you will want to install Linux directly from the CD-ROM so you
will choose ‘Installation from CD-ROM’.
With the menu option ‘Installation from hard disk-partition’ you
have the option to install from a hard disk that contains the necessary source
files. This option is helpful if your CD-ROM is not supported under Linux (see
also Section 3.3.5).
With the menu options ‘Installation via NFS’ and ‘Installation from
a FTP-Server’, you can install Linux on a system that does not have a CDROM drive, but is connected by Ethernet to another computer that does have
a CD-ROM drive. For additional information on these options, please refer to
Section 3.3.6 on the next page and Section 3.3.8 page 51.
3.3.4
Installation from CD-ROM
If you plan to install via CD-ROM, you must specify your CD-ROM drive (see
Figure 3.4 on the next page). If unsure, try ‘ATAPI EIDE’ drives.
3.3.5
Installation from a Hard Disk Partition
If your CD-ROM drive is not directly supported, you can still install Linux on
your system. To accomplish this, however, you will need to use a different installation medium.
48
3.3
Adjustments of Installation
Figure 3.4: Selecting a CD-ROM drive
3.3.6
Installation via NFS
The network installation gives you the option of easily performing installations
on multiple computers. This is especially useful when only one of the computers
has a CD-ROM drive, from which the source files can be placed on an NFS
reachable hard disk. Before attempting to install via NFS, you should be familiar
with how to configure NFS servers.
It is also possible to use this method to install Linux onto notebooks which have
a functional PCMCIA network card.
Figure 3.5: Entering network data for an NFS installation
Installation via NFS is not only available to computers that are connected together via ethernet. The NFS installation can also be accomplished with com-
49
3
YaST – Yet another Setup Tool
puters that are “networked” via their parallel port. This feature is of particular
interest for users who want to install Linux onto laptops and notebooks. If you
are planning to attempt such an installation, naturally you must remember, when
booting, to select a kernel that contains PLIP support. Additionally, in this case,
you will need to provide additional entries so that the PLIP interface can be correctly configured:
Figure 3.6: PLIP configuration
If you are directly connected to the NFS server through the parallel port, then
the IP address of the PLIP partners is the same, as is shown in the following
examples of the NFS servers. The PLIP interface in most cases will be plip1.
By “interface” we are referring to the network interface that can be seen and
configured with the command “ifconfig”. The hardware parameters will differ
only in rare cases.
You should be aware that, by using the parallel port as a PLIP interface, printers
will not function on this interface! In many cases a printer connected to such a
port will lead to a permanent reset as soon as the driver kicks in.
In the following screen you must enter the IP address of the NFS server as well
as the directory in which the source files are located. Of course, the NFS server
must have exported this directory so as to make it available to the computer you
are installing!
3.3.7
Installation from a Reachable Directory
With this option it is possible to install addtional software later if you already
have your SuSE Linux running. This is a useful option when you are unable to
install using a CD-ROM, due to the unavailability of drivers.
To be able to access this drive from YaST, first start YaST. Once this is accom plished, you need to switch to another console. For example, with the Alt +F2 key combination you will be presented with the second virtual console. Login as
‘root’.
50
3.3
Adjustments of Installation
From here you must mount the CD-ROM drive manually onto an available mount
point in your directory tree, for example with the command
earth: # mount -tiso9660 /dev/cdrom /cdrom
Now you can follow through with a normal installation. To accomplish this,
in the following screen (Figure 3.7) you must enter the directory in which the
source files are located. This should be the directory onto which the CD has
been mounted, followed by the directory suse.
Figure 3.7: Entering the source directory
If for example you had mounted the drive (or the hard disk partition) onto the
directory /cdrom, then you would use the field as depicted in Figure 3.7:
/cdrom/suse
as the directory for the source files.
3.3.8
Installation via FTP
In a similar way to the NFS install, it is possible to install SuSE Linux onto a
computer that has no CD-ROM at all, via FTP. This will work, but only if the
basic network configurations have been set up correctly.
‘FTP Server [Name|IP]’ The name or the IP address of the FTP server.
‘Server Directory’ The location on the FTP server where the suse direc-
tory is located.
‘[ ] Use Proxy?’ Only select this if you are sure that you must use an FTP
proxy server. Normally this is not necessary.
‘Proxy [Name|IP]’ This is only necessary if you have opted to use the proxy
server.
‘[X] Default FTP Port?’ This should be selected by default.
51
3
YaST – Yet another Setup Tool
Figure 3.8: Entries for the FTP installation
‘Port [Number]’ The default value should be 21.
‘[X] Anonymous FTP?’ This should always be selected if you want to access
a public FTP server.
‘Login’ In the case where you have not selected the anonymous FTP option
above, here you can insert a username and in the following field
‘Password’ the password.
‘Timeout [Seconds]’ 60 is the suggested value.
‘Local /tmp directory’ The local directory that is available for temporary
storage.
3.3.9
Partitioning Your Hard Disk
The most critical point of installing a new operating system is partitioning the
hard disk. Generally, every operating system uses at least one partition.
Tip
With Linux it is also possible to install the system on an existing MS-DOS
file system, but you should use this option only to “browse through”. The
performance is substantially less than when installing Linux in its own Linuxspecific partitions and the system is not as secure since there are no file
check systems available for MS-DOS and Linux could be influenced while
DOS is running.
With Linux systems, you will generally want at least two partitions, one for files
and programs and one for memory data swapping which is performed by the
52
3.3
Adjustments of Installation
running system. You might consider creating multiple partitions for files and
programs. The number and sizes of partitions in a Linux system is a question of
personal taste and philosophy (see Section 2.5 page 38 and Section 2.6 page 40);
a detailed example of partitioning can be found in Section 3.3.11 page 58.
In addition to the partition (or partitions) that you create for Linux, you should
also create a swap partition to increase the size of the computer’s virtual memorymemory (see Section 2.6.1 page 41) It is possible to use a swap file instead of
a swap partition. For performance reasons, however, this is not recommended.
Every time your system accesses this file, it must do it through the file system.
Systems with limited memory should always use a swap partition.
If you have more than one hard disk on your system, you will be prompted to
select the drive that you wish to partition. Once you have selected the drive, you
will see a menu which shows you the current status of the partitions on your hard
disk (Figure 3.9).
Figure 3.9: Partitioning with YaST
The arrow keys ↑ and ↓ can be used to navigate through the list of existing
partitions. To change the type of filesystem associated with a partition, for
example
from
DOS
to
ext2,
use
the
F3 key.
To
delete existing partitions, use the
key. To create new partitions, use the F5 key.
F4 Changing the type of the partitions (using the F3 -key) is necessary, if you’re creating a swap-partition. Sometimes it’s not necessary to change the partitioning
at all, especially when you decided to use the partition-layout from the operating
system
installed before. In this case just select the respective partition and press
the F3 -key.
Be aware that Linux has no preferences regarding on what type of partition it
gets installed:
It is equally acceptable to install Linux on either a primary partition or a logical
partition within an extended partition.
The logical partition is a workaround
to limitations of modern day hardware. It was introduced to overcome the fact
53
3
YaST – Yet another Setup Tool
that the partition table is only large enough for four entries. If you are interested
in having more than four partitions on your hard disk, you will need to create
one extended partition. Once the extended partition is created, you will be able
to create multiple logical partitions within this one large extended partition.
Note
Extended as well as logical partitions are known to DOS as extended DOS
partition or logical drive, although this concept applies to any operating system.
3.3.10
Setting Target Partitions/File systems
After you have completed partitioning your hard disk, you must next specify how
the partitions will fit into the Linux directory tree. Select the menu option ‘Set
target partitions/filesystems’.
Figure 3.10: Assigning file systems
In Figure 3.10), you can see an example of partitioning a hard disk. For each
individual partition you can select if and how it should be formatted as well as at
what location in your directory tree it should be “mounted”.
You must specify one partition as the “root” partition! This partition is necessary
because it is the starting point of the entire directory structure, and yes, this is
analogous to the function that roots provide for trees! Make sure you assign
Mountpoint ‘/’ as the mount point for your “root” partition.
The menu at the bottom of your screen defines the different function keys that can
be used to manipulate the file system. As a rule you only have this functionality
available to you on Linux partitions. If you highlight partitions that are formatted
54
3.3
Adjustments of Installation
for other
file systems, the function keys will not be available for use, except for
the F3 key which is used to select the mount point.
Setting the file system type
With F3 you can choose between the two file systems, ext2 and reiserfs.
‘ext2’ – The ext2 file system (second extended file system) has been estab-
lished for many years as the standard file system.
‘reiserfs’ – ReiserFS is a file system for the next generation; although this
file system is still very new, it is already widely used – among other things,
on a number of our internal systems. You really should read the notes in
/usr/share/doc/packages/reiserfs/README.
In close cooperation with the developer group surrounding H ANS R EISER
and C HRIS M ASON, SuSE has extended the high-performance file system to
include a “journaling file system”. Through journaling, it is guaranteed that
even for large servers, a file system check can be carried out within a few
seconds.
Caution
Please do not use ReiserFS together with RAID 5 software. For hardware RAID solutions there are no such limitations. At present a ReiserFS partition must be at least 34 MB in size.
To ensure there are no problems, create a separate boot partition with the
ext2 file system and install LILO there. This is the standard SuSE Linux
configuration.
The following points should be noted if you want to use ReiserFS for an NFS
server:
• knfsd generally works, but problems may arise with the extensive renaming of special files (“device files”, “named pipes”) via NFS across different directories.
• unfsd functions reliably if the file system in question is exported with the
option no_cross_mounts or if unfsd is started with --no-cross-mounts.
• Exporting entire file system hierarchies (possible with unfsd) does not
function reliably with ReiserFS.
The utilities for ReiserFS are in the package reiserfs, series a. Current
information can be found at:
http://www.namesys.com/
55
3
YaST – Yet another Setup Tool
Mountpoint
The F4 key can be used to select the location where the selected partition should
be mounted on the directory tree.
Just a reminder: You must have one partition assigned as the root partition (/).
If you already have DOS/Windows partitions on your drive, you can also create
mount points for them. For example, you could create a mount point of /dosc
for the first DOS partition and a mount point of /dosd for the second.
Caution
Make sure that you assign absolute path names (starting with (/) ) for all
of your mount points and that you create one (and only one) unique mount
point for each partition! In addition, you should never create separate partitions for the /etc, /bin, /sbin, /lib and /dev directories. These directories, which contain important commands, libraries and configuration files
that are necessary for mounting the rest of the file system, must reside on
the root partition!
An important note regarding DOS/Windows partitions! These partitions can be
connected to the directory tree as one of three different types.
• As a “normal” DOS partition (= msdos), with all of the normal limitations of
a DOS file system,
• as a FAT-Win95 (= vfat) in which long filenames are possible
• in the third case, as the UMSDOS partition, which permits the use of long
filenames in a “normal” DOS partition. This type is only required, however,
if you want to store Linux files on a DOS partition; this is not very efficient,
though, if you only need the DOS partition to store data. Whenever possible,
you should avoid UMSDOS!
Expert Menu for Fine Tuning of the File system Inode Density
Here in the Expert menu fine tuning can be performed.
The Inode density is used to define the anticipated average file size (per inode)
on a particular partition. If, for example, you choose a density of 4096 Bytes per
inode, this means that you expect the average file size to be about 4096 Bytes
(4 KB).
When a file system is created on a partition, the system computes the number of
inodes it will need, using the inode density number and the size of the partition.
The number of inodes represents the number of files that can be created on a
given partition.
In the example above, if the partition’s size is 4 megabytes, the partition would
have less than 1000 inodes. If this partition is filled with many files that are all
56
3.3
Adjustments of Installation
Figure 3.11: Expert menu for setting file systems
approximately 1 KB, then only one fourth of the partition could be used before
all of the inodes were exhausted. No more files could be added to the partition.
The inode value of 4 KB per file has proven to be a good default value (an
excessive number of inodes would result in the unnecessary consumption of disk
space, since inodes need disk space too, of course). If a particular partition is
to be used to perform spooling (necessary for the NEWS service, for example)
a density of 2048 Bytes per inode is recommended, because news articles are
typically very small files.
Deciding on the block size has a direct influence on how long a file system check
lasts: The duration of the file system check is quadratically inversely proportional to the block size - i. e. the smaller block, the more blocks and therefore
longer check time. The suggested block size is 1024 (= 1 KB) for partitions up
to 1 GB, stepping to 4096 (= 4 KB) for 4 GB partitions.
Specify the area reserved for ‘root’. For ‘root’ you should always reserve
an area if partitions are to be used both by system programs and by regular users.
A separate /home partition means that space does not have to be set aside for
‘root’.
The behavior on errors can be specified. If an error occurs in the file system,
operation can proceed as normal (continue), the partition can be re-mounted
as read-only (remount-ro), or the complete system can be halted immediately
(panic).
Caution
The option you choose depends on what for your system is used. The
default continue should remain reserved for experienced system administrators.
57
3
YaST – Yet another Setup Tool
Formatting the Partitions
With the F6 key you can select if and how the partitions should be formatted.
With brand new disks it is not necessary to check for bad sectors while formatting, but to be on the safe side you can choose to do so. Selecting the formatting
and check option will take quite a bit longer than just formatting a partition.
Reading the fstab File
The file fstab tells Linux what file systems to mount when itloads.
If you have
Linux already installed on your hard disk, you can press the F7 key to read an
existing fstab file. The mount points listed in the fstab file will be automatically included for existing non-swap partitions on your hard disk. Entries in the
fstab file for other types of file systems (swap, proc, nfs-mount, CD-ROM
entries, etc.) will appear grayed out and cannot be changed. They will remain
unchanged when you save the fstab file.
This feature is used when you are updating your entire base system (see Section 11.1.3 page 276) . In such cases YaST needs to know how your file system
and partitions are divided. It is possible to have more than one Linux system
installed on your computer.
3.3.11
Configuring Your Hard Disk Manually
Configuring Partitions
What’s it all about?
In Section 2.1.3 page 14, you have decided to interactively partition your hard
disk. Here we describe the menus.
Background information on the various partition types can be found in a document by Andries Brouwer (http://www.win.tue.nl/~aeb/partitions/).
Step by step. . .
This is how to proceed when setting up your partitions:
1. YaST presents you with a screen that is divided into several parts (see figure 3.9 page 53):
• At the top, you should see your hard disk’s parameters.
• The second part shows warnings and error messages
from the program
fdisk. You can take a closer look by pressing F6 .
• At the bottom you can see the partitions fdisk has found. Here, you should
see the partitions of your former operating system and the swap partition,
if you have already assigned one.
58
3.3
Adjustments of Installation
2. If you want to remove existing partitions to use the space for new partitions,
you should do that now.
Highlight the partition you want to remove. Remember ↓ and ↑ lets you
scroll through
the correct
partition is highlighted. Then
the list. Make sure and confirm by pressing ←- .
press F4 Caution
If you remove a partition, all data on this partition will be lost.
If you want to remove multiple partitions, you should do that now.
3. If you want to use existing partitions of other systems for Linux, you may do
so simply by altering the partition type.
Caution
If you alter the partition type, other operating systems such as DOS and
Windows may not be able to access data contained on them!
Now highlight the partition which you want to change, using und ↑ . If
↓ you are sure you have marked the “correct” partition, just press F3 . Now you
are presented with a dialog box where you select
the
partition type. Select
either normal or swap and confirm by pressing ←- .
4. If you want to assign new partitions(this
is the normal case), you should
create them sequentially. Just press F5 . If this doesn’t have any effect, it
means that the disk is already full with partitions. Then you may have to
delete partitions. (See above).
A dialog box pops up letting you select the type of partition. (figure 3.12 on
the next page)
You may select between either ‘primary partition
extended par’, ‘
tition’ or ‘logical drive’. Confirm by pressing ←- . Remember: you
may assign up to a maximum of four primary partitions. If you need more,
you need to assign at least one as an extended partition. Within this extended
partition, you may assign logical partitions. See Section 2.5 page 38.
When you have assigned a primary or logical partition, you must enter the
device name. YaST displays a list of the available device names. Normally,
you should just select the uppermost entry, e. g., ‘/dev/hda2’ and press
.
←- The next step lets you set the size of the partition. YaST recommends starting
at the first cylinder of the first free partition. Normally, you should confirm
this default. To set up the size, you may select one of three alternatives:
the number of the last cylinder (e. g., 976), the number of cylinders ofthe
partition (e. g., +66) or the size in megabytes (e. g., +100M
). Pressing ←- should now move you to ‘Continue’. Here, just press ←- .
59
3
YaST – Yet another Setup Tool
Figure 3.12: YaST – Assigning Partitions
Now you should see your freshly assigned partition in the lower
part
of the
screen. If you are not satisfied, you may remove it by pressing F4 .
5. One of your partitions
to be a swap partition. If there isn’t already a
needs
swap partition, use ↓ and ↑ to select a proper one. Information
on
the size
of a swap partition may be found in Section 2.5 page 38.
Press
F3
and select
‘Linux Swap Partition’ and confirm by pressing ←- .
6. Is everything to your satisfaction? The drive should be completely populated with partitions. Did you
the swap partition? Now move the
remember
then moves you to the ‘Assigning mount
cursor to ‘Continue’ and ←- points’ menu.
Under certain circumstances, YaST checks your swap partition to make sure no
errors occurred.
3.3.12
File systems and Mount Points
What’s it all about?
In the previous section all partitions were written to the partition table. In this
step you will now provide additional information for the Linux partitions which
have just been configured, and also for any DOS/HPFS partitions, if they exist.
You have created all necessary partitions and these partitions have been added
to the partition table, but they are still not written to disk. There are some vital
parameters still missing which will be added in this step.
Summary
This information is partially written to the file system table, /etc/fstab, which
contains all the relevant information on the file systems you want mounted. Each
60
3.3
Adjustments of Installation
entry includes the device, its position in the directory tree and the type of file
system.1
Furthermore, YaST needs this data to create Linux file systems on the formatted
drives. The swap partition is not touched in this step as it has been already
created in Section 3.3.11 page 58.
In contrast to the partition table entries (see Section 3.3.11 page 58), the /etc/
fstab entries are Linux-specific and have no influence on other operating systems.
Also worthy of explanation:
• In Linux, all file systems are linked to one “directory tree”. You must assign
each file system a branch on this tree. This is called its mount point. Even
DOS and HPFS file systems can be linked into the Linux directory tree.
• Hard disk space for file systems is administered in Linux by using Inode.
An inode is just a small file that points to the corresponding data for a given
file. The number of inodes is assigned while creating a file system. If you
want to create lots of small files, you will need many inodes, which require
some space of their own as well. For file systems containing many large
files, fewer inodes are necessary. For more detailed information on this, see
Section 3.3.10 page 56.
Step by step
You are now in ‘Set target partitions / file systems’ (see figure 3.10
page 54). To determine the file systems of your new partitions, proceed as follows:
1. First some information about what is to be done:
• For each of your DOS and HPFS file systems (in DOS and HPFS partitions), you may create a mount point.
• For each of your new Linux partitions:
–
–
–
–
you must select a mount point
you may select a file system ‘F3=choose type’ (ext2 or reiserfs).
you may do some fine tuning, with ‘F5=Expert menu’
you may change the suggested formatting mode ‘F6=Formatting’
(with or without a check).
• The function ‘reading fstab’ is normally not needed.
2. You can set the type of the Linux file system with F3 . Currently the tried
and tested ext2 or the new reiserfs, with advanced options, are available.
1 As
well as information for dump and fsck; see manpage for fstab (man 5 fstab).
61
3
YaST – Yet another Setup Tool
Figure 3.13: YaST – mount DOS/Windows partitions
Caution
ReiserFS can not be used in conjunction with RAID 1 or RAID 5 software. For hardware RAID solutions there are no limitations. reiserfs
is very new in comparison to ext2. Please bear this in mind if you
decide on reiserfs. There is more information about ReiserFS on
page 55.
3. If you
want to access a DOS or HPFS partition in Linux, select it and press
F4
. Now a window pops up and you can enter a directory. In this directory,
you will mount your DOS or HPFS file system. For example,
enter /dosc
(don’t forget the slash!). Confirm this action by pressing ←- .
If you have selected a DOS partition, another window appears (figure 3.13).
Here, you can choose which method to use to access DOS in Linux (see
Section 3.3.10 page 56). Generally you will want to use your DOS file system
independently and only occasionally want to access the DOS partition from
Linux, for example, to transfer files. For this purpose, choose ‘DOS’ or ‘FATWin95’ (= vfat). UNIX file attributes and long file names, as provided by
the UMSDOS file system, are only needed if you want to install SuSE Linux
on a DOS partition – do this at your peril!
4. Next, enter the mount points for your Linux
Just select your Linux
partitions.
partitions one after the other and press F4 . A window will pop up letting
you decide where to mount this partition on your file system tree. Enter the
complete path beginning with the “slash” (/).
Which mount points you choose for your partitions depends on how you plan
to organize them. In any case, you definitely need a root directory /, which
62
3.3
Adjustments of Installation
is the “root” for the whole file system. All other file systems and their mount
points more or less depend on your preferences. You should create a mount
point for each Linux file system. You will not be able to access unmounted
file systems.
Caution
Directories which are needed at boot time must be located directly under /. At this stage, the separate branches are not yet put together
(mounted). For this reason you may not assign /bin, /dev, /lib,
/etc, and /sbin to other partitions.
5. You should ignore the ‘Expert menu’ if you are just starting out with Linux;
as a rule defaults are set automatically to guarantee a secure operation. Only
change the suggested values if you really know what you are doing (see
page 56)!
6. You must now decide whether (and how) you want to format your Linux
partitions. Since you just created those partitions in Section 3.3.11 page 58,
they must now be formatted. If you own a fairly new hard disk, do ‘normal
formatting’. If your storage media is not that new, it is better to choose
‘Formatting and checking’.
Figure 3.14: YaST – Mount points
Select the Linux partitions one after another and press F6 to select the appropriate formatting. At the end the menu should resemble figure 3.14 (it is
possible you have not specified an NFS directory!).
7. After selecting ‘Continue’, a dialog box pops up asking you whether you
are sure. Then YaST formats your partitions.
63
3
YaST – Yet another Setup Tool
3.3.13
Configuring the Logical Volume Manager
The Logical Volume Manager (LVM) enables you to distribute the hard disk
space over the various file systems in a flexible manner. LVM was developed to
alleviate the relative complicated process of modifying partitions on a running
system: It makes a virtual “pool” (Volume Group – or VG for short) of memory
space available, from which logical volumes (LV) can be generated as needed.
The operating system will then access these instead of the physical partitions.
Figure 3.15: YaST – Logical Volume Manager
Features:
• Multiple hard disks/partitions can be combined into one large logical partition/.
• If a LV (e.g. /usr) gets full, you can expand it given the appropriate configuration.
• With the LVM, you can even append hard disks or LVs on a running system. “Hot–swapable” hardware is, however, required for such intervention
procedures.
Using LVM is even worthwhile for home PCs used extensively or even for small
servers. If you have a growing data stock such as in the case of databases, MP3
archives or user directories etc., the Logical Volume Manager is just the right
tool for you. With this, you can have file systems, for example, which are larger
than a physical hard disk. Another advantage of the LVM is this: You can create
up to 256 logical volumes. Please note that working with the LVM, however, is
quite different from working with conventional partitions.
Further information on configuring the “Logical Volume Manager” (LVM) can
be found in the official LVM Howto:
http://www.sistina.com/lvm/Pages/howto.html
64
3.3
3.3.14
Adjustments of Installation
Installation to a Directory
With YaST you can with a running system, make a complete installation to a
directory. Thus it is possible, for example, to update another computer via NFS,
to set up a “chroot environment”, or to perform a Linux installation on a second
hard disk from the running system.
This installation mode is only intended for special cases. If certain devices are
mounted in the directory specified, you must take care of this yourself before
installing with this method.
You must especially ensure yourself that the installed system is bootable. Modifications to the fstab file created by YaST will also probably be necessary in
the newly installed system.
Now type in the entry field which directory you want to install to.
65
3
YaST – Yet another Setup Tool
3.4
Determining the Size of the Installation
After you have completed configuring your file system, you are ready to select the packages to be installed. From the main menu, select the option for
‘Choose/Install Packages’. The reader should be aware that during the
installation process, after you have finished configuring your file system, YaST
will automatically present you with the necessary menu; you will not have to select this menu option from the main menu. The menu list that appears provides
a few options for managing packages, including loading, saving and creating an
installation profile.
Figure 3.16: YaST Determining the size of the installation
In addition, from this menu, you are able to start installing or to have a look at
the implications of your selection of packages on the space available on your
hard disk.
3.4.1
Load Configuration
There are several predefined configurations listed under
‘Load
Configuration’.
You can choose any of them, using the
arrow
keys,
↑
and
↓ to move to a pre
defined “configuration”; with Space you can select or unselect an item. Among
them there is one labeled “Minimum system”. You should choose this if you are
running YaST from a floppy disk and have very little RAM. Choosing the minimal system will not prevent you from adding packages once it has been installed.
YaST will perform much better after it is installed on the hard disk.
If you have created and saved your own configuration (list of packages) you can
use this menu option to load your configuration. This feature is useful if you are
installing an identical configuration on many systems.
If you have already installed a system, you should be careful when you load a
different configuration since all packages installed on your system which do not
66
3.4
Determining the Size of the
Installation
belong to the chosen configuration will be marked for deletion. If you want to
keep the packages already installed, merely answer no when you are asked if
you want to delete or not. If you want to delete most of those packages then
you must manually unselect the ones that you do not want
delete. To unselect
to .
them, change the ‘[D]’ back to a ‘[i]’ by pressing Space 3.4.2 Save Configuration
With this menu option you can save your current configuration. If YaST is running from a floppy, this will be used to save your configuration. If you have
booted from a CD-ROM, you will be prompted to insert a formatted floppy.
YaST will save your configuration to this.
3.4.3 Changing Your Configuration
If you select ‘Change/create configuration’ you will be presented with a
list (Figure 3.17) of series. These series are logical groupings or categories that
are used to subdivide all of the packages on the distribution. You can decide
which packages to install and also select previously installed packages to be
deleted. You can also change an already existing configuration (see Section 3.4.1
on the preceding page).
Figure 3.17: Selecting package series in YaST
You canmove up and down the list of series with the keys ↑ , ↓ , Page ↑ and
Page ↓ . In the lower window is a description
of the current status of the different partitions on your system. The ←- key opens the
highlighted
currently
series and shows you the contents of that series. The Esc key can be used to
exit out of the package selection without
any changes. If you have made
saving
changes to the package selection, the F10 key can be used to save those changes
and return to the previous menu.
67
3
YaST – Yet another Setup Tool
Figure 3.18: Re-sorting packages in YaST
The F4 key can be used to select alternate views of the packages(Figure 3.18).
You have the choice to view, along with the ‘series’ (which is the default) and
‘RPM groups’ ‘All Packages’:
‘Series’ The usual categorization according to series.
‘RPM groups’ Order according to RPM group defaults.
‘All packages’ ‘All packages (no sources)’; ‘Base system packages’ and ‘All sources’.
If you press ←- on a series you will be put into ’package selection’ mode for
that series (Figure 3.19 on the next page shows the contents of the series a).
If you have loaded a configuration already, the packages belonging to this configuration are marked with an ‘X’. In the bottom window you can see a short
description of the highlighted package. In the right hand window you will see
the amount of space that is required for your current configuration.
These values are updated as you
select
and
deselect packages. The status windows can be enlarged with the F3 and F2 keys respectively. If you are installing
your system for the first time and find that your current partition configuration
does not provide enough space for the packages that you want to install, you can
go back to the beginning of the installation and recreate the partitions as necessary. If you are trying to add packages to an existing system and find that you do
not have enough space, you will need to find another solution (add another hard
disk or perhaps delete some unwanted packages).
Each package name is preceded by its current state:
‘[ ]’ indicates that this package is not yet installed
‘[X]’ indicates that this package will be installed
68
3.4
Determining the Size of the
Installation
Figure 3.19: Selecting packages to install: series a1, base system
‘[i]’ indicates that this package is already installed
‘[D]’ indicates that this package will be deleted
‘[R]’ indicates that this package will be replaced
By pressing ←- you can change the
status
of the package. If the package has
not already been installed, pressing ←- will change the status from ‘[ ]’
to
‘[X]’ and back again. If the package has already been installed, pressing ←- will toggle the status between ‘[i]’, ‘[R]’ and ‘[D]’. F6 causes the corresponding sources package to be installed as well.For information on source
packages, see also Section 11.3.4 page 285 . As stated earlier, if you
want
to
save changes that you have made in the package
selection,
use
the
F10
key. If
you do not want to save any changes, use the Esc key.
If, by any chance, you run out of space on your partitions, you can easily switch
back to the main menu and repartition your hard disk. The actual partitioning
will take place only after you have left YaST.
If you are running YaST from a floppy, only install a minimal system. After you
have completed the minimal install, go back and install the remaining packages.
With the YaST features described above you have all the tools necessary to test
out various desired configurations and their hard disk requirements.
3.4.4 What if...
This menu item was created to give you a chance to review all of the changes
that you have made to a configuration before committing them. Since YaST can
be used to install, uninstall and replace (update) packages and there are so many
packages on the distribution, this option can be a useful way to verify that you
have not unintentionally marked packages for deletion or installation.
69
3
YaST – Yet another Setup Tool
3.4.5
Start Installation
This menu option will start the installation of packages. All of the packages
that you have selected for installation are copied from the installation medium,
uncompressed and written to the appropriate location on your hard disk.
If you have changed the partition tables during this YaST session, installation is
not yet possible. After changing the partition tables, your computer needs to be
rebooted in order to write this modified partition data to the partition tables. This
can only be done after leaving YaST.
During installation, status messages will be shown in the lower window. The
upper window informs you about the current package being installed.
After installation,
want, you can jump back to the installation log window
if you
by pressing the Tab key. This will allow you to view any messages that may
have appeared during the installation of a particular package.
3.4.6
Checking Package Dependencies
YaST can be used to check package dependencies. Some packages are depen-
dent on the presence of other packages. The converse is also true. Some packages should not be installed with other packages. YaST will check the packages
marked for installation against the packages already installed on your system.
YaST will also take into consideration packages that are marked for deletion. All
unresolved package dependencies are displayed in a list.
The Boolean logic that is used to define and check these dependencies is described below.
AND
OR
EXCL
means that if this package is installed, all listed packages should be
installed too. For example, if you install the compiler, you will also
need the include and lib files.
means that if you install this package, at least one of the listed packages should be installed as well.
means that if this package is installed, none of the listed packages
should be installed.
Table 3.1: Package dependencies
3.4.7
Index of all Series and Packages
This option simply provides a list of all packages included on the distribution.
Those packages marked with an ‘*’ are either already installed or have been
selected for installation. This option gives you a quick overview of your installation selection.
70
3.4
3.4.8
Determining the Size of the
Installation
Searching for Packages
In the event that you cannot find a particular package, but know where it is on
the SuSE Linux distribution, you can use the menu option ‘Package Information’ to find it. You may either search through the installation medium, or
through the entire system, or both. There is even an option for doing a case sensitive search. YaST looks for the string of text that you have entered in the search
field and presents you with a list of relevant packages.
3.4.9
Installing Packages
The ‘Install packages’ menu option is useful for installing packages that are
not on the distribution. Most importantly, this menu option can be used to update
packages directly from our FTP server ftp.suse.com, provided that you have
some form of Internet access. The packages on the FTP server are typically bug
fixes or newer versions. The ‘Install packages’ menu option can also be
used to install packages directly from your hard disk, a disk, or another source
medium. Such packages could include, but are not limited to, packages that you
have received from an alternate site, packages that you have created yourself, or
simply packages that you have downloaded from our FTP server and saved on
your hard disk. A couple of formats are supported: tar archives (.tgz), RPM
packages (.rpm, .spm and .src.rpm) as well as special patch packages (.pat)
that are available, if required, from our FTP server.
The installation procedure is divided into three steps (press F1 for complete
instructions):
• Selection of the installation medium
• Selection of the packages offered
• Installation of the packages
First you select the package medium by entering ‘Source:’ and pressing ←- .
The following options are available: ‘Directory’, ‘FTP’, ‘Source medium’
and ‘Floppy’. You may need to change the default path (if you have selected
‘Directory
’ or ‘FTP’). YaST will connect to the source medium when you
press ←- . Thereafter, provided that you have selected the correct directory, you
will be presented with a list of packages to be installed. With ‘FTP’ it is thus
possible to install directly from the Internet. The address is ftp.suse.com:
/pub/suse/i386/update/7.2 (refer to Figure 3.20 on the next page). It is
not yet possible to install packages via a “proxy”; you need to have direct access
to the appropriate ftp server.
Tip
If you get an error message such as "530 User ftp access denied",
this means that too many people are currently logged on. You will have to
try again later.
71
3
YaST – Yet another Setup Tool
Figure 3.20: Installing packages in YaST via FTP
First, find the directory that has the rpm packagethat you
want to install. Then
you can select the packages to be installed
with
Space
. Once the package has
been selected for installation, press F10 to install it. The package is first copied
to the /tmp/ftp<processID> directory and then installed. If something goes
wrong, you can still install it manually(see Section 11.3.2 page 282).
3.4.10
Deleting Packages
Selecting ‘Deleting Packages’ will provide you with a list of the packages
that are currently installed. This list includes “foreign” packages – packages
which are not part of the SuSE distribution. YaST cannot update these packages
or check for any dependencies unless they were installed in an RPM format.
It is easiest to replace these packages with packages from the SuSE distribution.
Just select the packages that you
need
to replace. A short description is displayed
for each package ifyou press
F2 , but only if that package contains
description
information. Press Space to select a package to be deleted, and F10 to delete it.
Afterwards you can reinstall those packages from the SuSE CD’s.
3.5
Updating the System
You should only use the menu item ‘Update System’ if your base system is a
fairly recent one – that is, fitting in with the source medium. If there is doubt,
YaST will tell you in no uncertain terms. You can begin a system update as
described in Chapter 11 page 275; individual packages can be updated with YaST
as explained in Section 3.4.9 on the preceding page.
72
3.6
3.6
System Administration
System Administration
In addition to assisting you with the installation, YaST is a powerful tool for
performing system administration.
Select ‘System administration’ from the main menu (see Figure 3.21).
Figure 3.21: Administering your system
From the main menu in YaST (see Figure 3.1 page 46) you can choose the menu
option ‘System Administration’ to access the system administration features of YaST (Figure 3.21).
3.6.1 Integrating Hardware into the System
With this option you can specify the hardware that you are using. In most cases,
YaST will create a link from the standard device to your particular hardware
device. This will make it easier for you to access this device without having to
remember the exact name of the device.
The printer configuration is a bit more complicated. This is described in the
following section.
Printer configuration
Accessing a printer under Linux is not trivial. The technical background is described in detail in Chapter 8 page 201.
YaST provides an interface for easily setting up apsfilter for your printer (Figure 3.23 page 75):
Under the menu option ‘Printer name’ you will be presented with a list of
printers that are supported by Ghostscript. You can select your printer from this
list. If your printer does not appear on this list, you can select ‘Other printer’
73
3
YaST – Yet another Setup Tool
Figure 3.22: Hardware configuration
and then the option ‘<userdefined>’. You will be presented with a screen
where you can enter your printer type. The command gs -h will display a list
of printers that are supported by the currently installed version of Ghostscript.
If your printer appears on this list, you can enter it as the ‘<user-defined>’
printer type. The configuration of uniprint drivers can be best accomplished
with YaST2 or the SETUP (lprsetup) program. This program is part of the
apsfilter package. Please see Section 8.5 page 212 for more information.
Most normal printers are connected to the parallel port (printer port) or USB
port. In most cases /dev/lp0 will be the correct port – that is, the first parallel
port.
Tip
If in doubt, first set the following values in the BIOS for the parallel port:
• IO address 378 (hexadecimal)
• interrupt 7
• as mode: normal (or SPP)
• and switch off DMA (should be switched off in normal mode)
These are the normal standard values.
The settings for the menu option ‘Resolution in dpi’ should be verified. If
you are unsure, you will have to refer to your printer documentation.
74
3.6
System Administration
Figure 3.23: Setting up apsfilter with YaST
3.6.2
Kernel and Boot Configuration
This set of sub-menus can be used to configure your system’s boot setup as well
as which kernel you want to use:
Figure 3.24: Kernel and boot configuration
Selecting a boot kernel
You can install one of the available precompiled kernels (from the SuSE-CD)
with the menu option ‘Select boot kernel’, in the event that you want a
75
3
YaST – Yet another Setup Tool
different kernel than the one you chose during installation. In addition to installing the kernel that you select, YaST will also copy the kernel configuration
file (.config) to the kernel source directory (/usr/src/linux).
Select the appropriate kernel for your computer. Then, as a rule, you should have
LILO installed again, using YaST, if you have already booted successfully with
LILO. Otherwise see below, the guide on configuring LILO.
Advanced Linux users might want to consider recompiling their own kernel (see
Chapter 9 page 233). One advantage of recompiling the kernel is that it can be
customized to fit your exact hardware configuration, and it can be made smaller
and faster. If you are new to Linux it is highly recommended that you use the
precompiled standard kernels. Only if you are using the standard kernel are you
qualified for “Installation support”. In other words, by recompiling your own
kernel you no longer qualify for “Installation support”.
Creating a rescue disk
An “emergency” or “Rescue disk” is also a good idea, in the event that your
computer will not start at all – see Section 12.6 page 299 for details on how to
use this floppy disk).
Configuring ‘LILO’
YaST also provides a front-end to LILO (Linux Loader) to ensure correct configuration (Figure 3.25). LILO can be used to boot other operating systems such as
OS/2, DOS or Windows 95/98, but with Windows NT you should be careful.
Additional information on the individual configuration options is available in
Chapter 4 page 89.
Figure 3.25: LILO: Installation
76
3.6
System Administration
The ‘append line for kernel parameters’ usually remains empty unless you already need to use additional parameters for booting; only if this is
the case should you enter these parameters here (but without the preceding kernel name linux!).
Details can be found in Section 4.4.2 page 97.
‘Where do you want to install LILO?’: If Linux is the only operating
system on your computer, then Master boot record is the correct choice. If
you are using “another” boot manager, select
Boot sector of the /boot partition. If you have not created a /boot
partition, select
boot-sector of the root partition. The choice On floppy disk
speaks for itself. The technical background of these choices is given in Section 4.3 page 93.
‘Boot delay’: This entry is in seconds. 10 seconds is a reasonable value to
use.
‘"linear" Option’: In most cases this option is not necessary.
For additional information please see Section 4.4.2 page 97.
The ‘F4=New Config’ menu option can be used to create a “new configuration”. It is recommended that you use the standard configuration linux as the
configuration name. To edit an existing configuration, use the ‘F5=Edit config’ menu option. When using either of these keys, YaST will present you with
a configuration screen, as shown in Figure 3.26. The individual options on this
screen are described below:
Figure 3.26: LILO: Boot configuration
‘Configuration name’: You can choose as you wish, but linux is a good
name for your first configuration.
‘Which operating system’: Your three choices are Boot linux, Boot DOS/Win
- this option is for Windows 95/98 as well – and Boot OS/2. ‘(root-) par-
77
3
YaST – Yet another Setup Tool
tition to boot’: This detail is pre-defined. As a rule, you should not change
anything here. Press ‘F3’ and choose the appropriate partition.
‘Kernel optional’: Only select this option if the kernel is not permanently
available. This would be chosen if you wanted to boot to a test kernel only once.
‘Kernel to be booted by Lilo’: here as well you do not need to change
anything. The usual location in SuSE Linux is /boot/vmlinuz; By pressing
‘F3’ you can browse through the directories and select the kernel. With ‘Continue’ LILO is installed, with ‘Cancel’ you can stop the installation of LILO.
Tip
If you are planning on compiling your own kernel, we recommend that you
create a second configuration in LILO. The purpose of this new configuration is a backup option in case your newly compiled kernel does not
boot. Create a new configuration and call it old, and configure it to use
the /boot/vmlinuz.old kernel. You should also copy the current kernel
/boot/vmlinuz to /boot/vmlinuz.old. When configuring this option,
you should also enable the ‘Kernel optional’ option. Now, in the event
that you have compiled a new kernel (see Chapter 9 page 233) which for
some odd reason will not boot, you still have a way to boot to your original
kernel.
3.6.3
Network Configuration
General network configurations can be done with YaST as well.(see Figure 3.27
on the facing page). Even if you are not connected to a network, it is a good idea
to configure your network. Many programs depend on a correctly configured
network to be able to function properly.
‘Network base configuration’ This is where you can configure the IP-
Address(es) for the appropriate network interface (network card, PPP, or
ISDN, etc.) (Figure 3.28 page 80).
Here you can also select the services DHCP or BOOTP via ‘F3=Auto-IP’, to
use an automatic IP configuration.
Using ‘F6=IP-Address’ gives you the ability to change the ‘MTU’. In case
of doubt keep the entry blank or use the provided default value.
MTU is the “Maximum Transfer Unit” and sets the maximum size of packages used on that network device.
Sometimes your provider forces you to use a special value for ‘MTU’. The
standard value (and maximum) is ‘1500’. In case the connection to the
provider is pretty bad, you should reduce the value of ‘MTU’.
‘Change hostname’ The hostname and domain name of your computer can be
set here.
78
3.6
System Administration
Figure 3.27: Network configuration
‘Configure network services’ With this option you can configure basic
network services such as: inetd (for telnet, ftp, printing etc..) portmap (for
NFS server and NIS) and rpc.nfsd (for NFS server).
‘Configuration Nameserver’ It is possible to specify one or more name-
servers. (see Section 21 page 319 for more information).
‘Configure YP client’ This option will only be active if you have installed
the package ypclient, series n.
‘DHCP Client’ This option will only be active if the package dhclient, series
n has been installed.
‘Configure Sendmail’ With this option it is possible to install a configuration file for sendmail. There are a few configuration files available that will
suit most needs.
‘Administer remote printers’ With this option you can configure your
machine to be able to access a printer which is on a TCP/IP network. The
configuration options in this screen are relatively self-explanatory. ‘Name of
printer’ refers to the name by which the local machine refers to the printer
(a good choice would be remote). ‘Spool directory’ will be automatically configured according to the name given above. ‘Server name’ is the
IP address or the name of the print server. ‘Name of printer’ is the name
by which the print server refers to the printer (in most cases this will be lp).
If you need a prefilter for this printer, please refer to Section 8.7 page 218.
‘Connect to printer via Samba’ This option will only be active if the
package samba, series n, has been installed. With this menu item it is possi-
ble to connect to a printer that is connected to a Windows computer.
79
3
YaST – Yet another Setup Tool
Figure 3.28: Network base configuration
‘Connect to a printer via Novell network’ This option will be active
only if the package ncpfs, series n has been installed.
‘Configure ISDN parameters’ This option will only be active if the package i4l, series n, has been installed. Follow the detailed menus that are
available.
‘Configure a PPP network’ Here PPP can be set up.
3.6.4
Login configuration
Here you can set whether the system will boot to a text mode or to a graphical
mode with the X Window System. If you want to use the graphical login, you
have two choices: XDM or KDM. If you choose KDM you can also select which
users are permitted to shutdown the system. The other login option is via the
text console. With this option you can start the X Window System with the
command startx (Figure 3.29 on the facing page).
Note
If you are not absolutely sure that the X Windows System is configured
correctly, you should not activate either of the graphical logins. Please test
whether you can start the X Windows System first, from the console, before
activating the display manager.
If you do configure your system to start with a graphical login, the file /etc/
inittab will be configured to set Runlevel 5 as the default runlevel (see Section 21 page 323). If Runlevel 5 serves another purpose on your machine, then
neither XDM nor KDM will be activated.
80
3.6
System Administration
Figure 3.29: Login Configuration
3.6.5 Settings for susewm (the Window Manager)
With this menu option you can set the “Graphical Desktop”.
Figure 3.30: Setting up susewm
Please select your default window manager. You could also tell susewm which
configuration files it should create and maintain.
3.6.6 User Administration
YaST provides a convenient means of creating, deleting and maintaining user accounts. The menu option for managing users is titled ‘User Administration’
81
3
YaST – Yet another Setup Tool
and is a sub-menu of ‘System Administration’.
Figure 3.31: User Administration with YaST
Here you can enable ‘Access to Modem’; if you do this you are added to the
groups ‘uucp’ and ‘dialout’. All members of these groups are able to connect and disconnect by means of PPP connections.
When new user accounts are created, default configuration files are copied from
the /etc/skel directory into the home directory of the new user. This is a
process by which the personal configuration files can automatically be created.
Users are free to change those configuration files in their home directory as they
wish, of course.
When creating or deleting user accounts, YaST runs the following two scripts:
• When creating a user account, the script /usr/sbin/useradd.local is
run, if it exists. This script will create the necessary entries in the /etc/
passwd and /etc/shadow files. The home directory is created and the files
in /etc/skel are copied to it.
• Before deleting a user account, the script /usr/sbin/userdel.local is
called. The relevant lines in passwd and shadow are removed. The home
directories will remain.
Both scripts can take the username as a parameter. If additional information
is needed (user ID, login shell, home directory), it can be found in the /etc/
passwd file.
If you are an advanced user and you do not want to use YaST to create user
accounts, you have the programs useradd and userdel at your disposal.
Notes on PAM
The configuration files on PAM Pluggable Authentication Modules can be found
in /etc/pam.d. Documentation for programmers and system administrators is
82
3.6
System Administration
located in /usr/share/doc/packages/pam.
SuSE Linux is able to handle MD5 passwords. With MD5 encryption, passwords
can be longer than 8 characters (up to 128 characters). Since MD5 encryption
is not compatible with the standard Unix crypt() function, most commercial
Unix systems and some programs don’t work with MD5 passwords. So be careful if you enable this feature.
Notes on configuration can be found in /usr/share/doc/packages/pam/
md5.config.
3.6.7
Group Administration
YaST can also be used to create user groups.
Figure 3.32: Group administration with YaST
Under Linux (as with UNIX in general) each user must be assigned to at least
one group. This is necessary because permissions (for certain files) depend on
which group the user belongs. User groups can be used to restrict (or allow)
users access to certain directories. Group passwords can also be used to restrict
(or allow) access to certain directories.
Some groups already exist under Linux, for example the user groups ‘users’,
‘root’ and many more.
The group name, such as with ‘users’, is just a textual representation of the
group. Linux recognizes the groups according to the "GID" (Group ID). The
configuration file for groups is in /etc/group.
This is just background information that most regular users do not need to know.
With YaST it is easy to create groups. In the menu ‘System Administration’
there is a submenu for ‘Group Administration’. This screen is described in
Figure 3.32.
83
3
YaST – Yet another Setup Tool
3.6.8
Creating Backups
This option helps you to back up all modified and new files and packages to a
file or tape. These are configuration files in most cases.
Figure 3.33: Backup with YaST—choosing directories to exclude
The dialog consists of three parts (see Figure 3.33):
1. Choosing the files to be backed up:
Here you can tell YaST which directories should be excluded from the backup.
Predefined are /tmp /dev and /proc. You should add mounted CD-ROM’s
or NFS-mounted file systems to this list. The less you want to be backed
up, the faster it willrun,
since
unnecessary comparisons with package lists
are omitted.
Using
+
and
, you can add new directories or remove them.
- Pressing F10 leads to the next step.
2. Searching:
In this step, YaST searches for files which should be backed up. The number
and size of the packages found are updated while searching. After this has
been done, there will be a list with all the
filesthat have been found. Here
you can still de-select files by using the Space bar.
3. Entering commands:
Here you decide how those files are going to be saved. You can give archive
names, options and more.
This back up mechanism can only work if the dates of the files have not been
otherwise changed. Furthermore, this function requires considerable RAM. Filenames of an ordinary CD take up to 6 MB RAM. Also, you need enough free
disk space to save the backup archive. Compressing the archive will lead to a file
reduced in size—approximately half of the original. The best way to do backups
is to use a tape.
84
3.6
3.6.9
System Administration
System Security Settings
Only change the defaults if you have detailed knowledge of the measures in
question.
Note
If you do not want to allow any ‘root’ logins via ssh, then /etc/ssh_
config must be adjusted. In /etc/sshd_config, the default is set to
PasswordAuthentication yes. If ssh is correctly configured, ‘root’
logins are secure across a network.
3.6.10
Setting the Console Font
Here, we will focus on the screen for the font settings in the Linux console.
Linux enables you to load various fonts for the console. In this settings screen,
you can try out the different available fonts and apply one as your standard font.
If you select ‘don’t load font’, the font saved on your graphics card will
still be applied.
All of this, of course, does not have any effect on the fonts in a graphical interface
such as KDE or Gnome. You can see the results in YaST if you have started YaST
directly from the ASCII console, but not if you have started it from a kterm or an
xterm.
Figure 3.34: Setting the console font
85
3
YaST – Yet another Setup Tool
3.6.11
Setting the time zone
The time zone has been preset during the SuSE Linux installation, but you can
change
or correct
these settings later. Simply move the blue bar using the cursor
keys ↑ and ↓ to the desired selection and then confirm with ‘Next’.
Afterwards, a window will appear which will ask you if you want to set your
BIOS clock to the local time or leave it set to GTM (Greenwich Mean Time).
3.6.12
Configuring XFree86(TM)
The X Window System (XFree86) can be configured with different configuration tools.You should first try to use SaX. SaX is described in more detail in
Section 5.3 page 124.
The technical details can be read in Chapter 5 page 121.
3.6.13
Configuring gpm
This screen controls whether to load the mouse support and with which parameters to start it. This allows you to cut and paste text between several virtual
ASCII consoles. Again, this entire process is only relevant for ASCII consoles,
since the mouse is controlled on the graphical interface by X11 and thus not
affected by the gpm settings.
Figure 3.35: Configuring gpm
86
3.6
3.6.14
System Administration
Changing the Configuration File
SuSE Linux is maintained by one central configuration file, /etc/rc.config,
and the out-sourced files in the /etc/rc.config.d directory. These files are
read at boot time by the boot scripts that configure your system.
It is possible to change individual variables in these files with YaST. By doing
this you can make configuration changes to your system without having to know
every detail about all the special configuration files that have been effected by
these changes.
Figure 3.36: Editing the configuration file with YaST
The menu option for changing the configuration file is under the ‘System Administration’ in the menu titled ‘Change Configuration file’ With the
cursor, select the variable that you want to change and press the ←- or F3 key.
After you have used YaST to change one of the values the script SuSEconfig will
run automatically.
If you decide to manually change this value (by editing the file /etc/rc.config)
please remember that you must manually run the script SuSEconfig. This script
will do the necessary updates to the relevant configuration files, according to the
values that have been set (or changed) in /etc/rc.config. Additional details
on this subject can be found in Section 13.6 page 315.
87
3
88
YaST – Yet another Setup Tool
4
Booting and Boot Managers
4 Booting and Boot Managers: LILO,
loadlin, etc.
This chapter describes various methods of Booting a Linux system. To have a
better understanding of what is involved, we will first illustrate some technical
details of booting a PC.
4.1
Booting a PC
After turning on your computer, the first thing that happens is that the BIOS
(Basic Input Output System) takes control, initializes the screen and keyboard,
and tests the main memory. Until this task is completed, no external devices or
external storage media are known to the system.
Once the basic system has finished its internal setup, it starts to verify the hardware around it. Date, time, and information about some of the most important
external devices are read from the CMOS settings (usually referred to as the
CMOS setup). After reading the CMOS, the BIOS should recognize the first
hard disk (including details such as its geometry). It can then start to load the
operating system (OS) from there.
To load the OS, the system loads a 512-byte data segment from the first hard disk
into main memory and executes the code stored at the beginning of this segment.
The instructions contained there determine the rest of the boot process. This is
the reason why the first 512 bytes of the hard disk are often called the Master
Boot Record (MBR) (MBR).
Even though the whole process is rather complicated and this description is oversimplified, it should be clear that up to this point (loading of the MBR), the boot
sequence is independent of the installed operating system, is identical on all
PC’s, and all the PC has to access peripheral hardware is those routines (drivers)
stored in the BIOS.
Master Boot Record
The layout of the MBR has been certified by an independent convention. The
first 446 bytes are reserved for program code. The next 64 bytes offer space for
a partition table for up to four partitions. The last two bytes have to contain a
special “magic number” (AA55). Any MBR which replaces this number by a
different number is rejected.
89
4
Booting and Boot Managers
Boot Sectors
Boot sectors are the first sectors on a hard disk partition except for the extended
partition which serves as a “container” for other partitions They offer 512 bytes
of space and are designed to contain code which is able to launch an operating
system on this partition. Boot sectors of formatted DOS, Windows, and OS/2
partitions do exactly that. In contrast, Linux boot partitions are empty at the
very start. A Linux partition cannot be started directly, although it may contain
a kernel and a valid root file system.
A valid boot sector follows the conventions and enters the “magic number” of
the MBR into the last two bytes.
Booting DOS or Windows 95/98
The MBR contains information that determines which partition of a hard disk is
“active”, i. e., which partition should be searched for the operating system to be
booted. Therefore, DOS has to be installed on the first hard disk. The executable
code in the MBR (“first stage boot loader”) tests whether the marked partition
contains a valid boot sector.
If this is the case, the “second stage boot loader” can be started from there. DOS
system programs can now be loaded and you will see the usual DOS prompt.
In DOS, only primary partitions can be marked active. Therefore, you cannot
use logical partitions inside an extended partition as bootable DOS partitions.
4.2
Boot Concepts
The simplest boot concept affects only one machine with one operating system
installed. A widely deployed PC configuration is DOS or Windows 95/98 as the
only system installed. The boot sequence for this case has already been outlined.
A similar concept can be used for Linux if it is the only operating system being
used. In this case, one could theoretically skip the installation of LILO. The big
disadvantage of doing this is that you can’t pass additional parameters to the
system kernel at boot time.
As soon as there is more than one operating system installed, there are a number
of new boot possibilities.
Booting another OS from a floppy disk: An OS can be booted from the hard
disk. Other operating systems can be booted by using boot disks.
• Requirements: the floppy drive must be bootable.
• Example: install DOS or Windows 95/98 on the hard disk and boot Linux
from a floppy disk.
• Advantage: you can skip the potentially tricky boot loader installation.
• Disadvantage: you have to ensure that you are not running out of working
boot disks.
90
4.3
An Overview of LILO
• It might be an advantage or disadvantage that your Linux is not capable
of booting without a boot disk, depending on what it is to be used for.
• The boot process will take slightly longer.
Boot chaining of additional systems: The same OS is always booted and oth-
ers can optionally be started from within the first OS.
• Requirements: adequate programs for chain booting of operating systems
must be available.
• An example is the loading of Linux from DOS using loadlin or starting a
NetWare server from DOS with server.exe.
Installing a boot manager: Theoretically, this allows you to use an arbitrary
number of operating systems on a single machine. The choice of systems is
done at boot time. Changing operating systems requires a reboot.
• Requirements: the boot manager must work smoothly with all installed
operating systems.
• Examples of co-existing boot managers (at least under certain circumstances) are OS/2 and the DOS boot loader boot.sys.
The following section describes the installation and configuration of a boot manager, using the Linux boot manager LILO. A complete description of LILO’s features can be found in [Alm94].
This file can be printed by entering
earth:/usr/share/doc/packages/lilo # lpr user.dvi
This is followed by a description of loadlin.
4.3
An Overview of LILO
The Linux boot loader is usually installed in the MBR (details below, page 93 and
Section 4.5 page 100). When started, LILO already has access to both real mode
hard disks and, due to its installation, is able to find all the data it needs from
the raw hard drives without needing any information on partitioning. Because of
this, operating systems can be booted from the first as well as from the second
hard disk. The entries in the partition table that the standard DOS MBR uses to
mark the active partition are ignored when using LILO in the MBR.
An important difference to the standard DOS boot sequence is that you can select
any of the installed systems at boot time when using LILO. After loading the MBR
into memory, LILO is started and you are asked to select one of the installed
operating systems (see on the next page).
What is LILO?
LILO is a versatile boot manager. It can launch an operating system in the fol-
lowing ways:
91
4
Booting and Boot Managers
• by loading the boot sector of a partition and starting an operating system
from this partition. This is what other boot managers also do.
• by loading the Linux kernel and starting Linux. This cannot be done by most
other boot managers.
Furthermore, LILO provides an important option of being able to pass a command
line to the kernel. For security reasons, this can be protected totally, or partially,
with a password.
How Do You Boot with LILO?
When LILO is launched, it displays the text LILO and a greeting message (which
you entered during installation). Thereafter, a command prompt appears:
boot:
Here, you select your operating system by entering its name, which is then
booted. The name of the operating system has previously been set during installation. At this point, you can pass a parameter line to the Linux kernel.
You
can also get a list of all the operating system names available by pressing TAB .
The Components of LILO
Tip
The boot sectors installed by LILO contain a typical virus boot sequence.
DOS virus scanners typically claim to have found the AIRCOP boot sector virus in files such as /boot/any_b.b or /boot/any_d.b. Also, you
should disable any BIOS protection of the MBR.
The LILO machinery consists of the following components:
• the beginning, or first step, of the LILO code in a boot sector which activates
the system boot
• the heart of the LILO code, localized in /boot/boot.b
• a map file, normally /boot/map, where LILO enters the location of Linux
kernels and other data during its installation
• optional: a message file whose contents are displayed as a welcome message
before the LILO boot selection. Its usual location is:
/boot/message (or similar)
• the different Linux kernel and boot sectors that LILO should offer
92
4.3
An Overview of LILO
Caution
Any write access (even through file movements) on any of these files corrupts the map file, thus requiring you to reinstall LILO. This is only relevant
when you change to another kernel.
Where LILO Can Be Installed
This is referring to the above-mentioned first step of LILO. Before going into
detail, we would like to point out a very important general restriction:
Depending on the BIOS version on your computer, it may be required that the
kernel image /boot/vmlinuz be located on the first 1024 cylinders of the hard
disk. This can be achieved by a small extra partition which can be “mounted” in
the directory /boot, and all of which is located within the first 1024 cylinders.
This is because these are the only cylinders available when the BIOS starts the
system. With older BIOSes and IDE drives, you can also be restricted to either
of the first two hard disks (/dev/hda and /dev/hdb).
If you have a very old BIOS, it is possible that the existence of (E)IDE hard disks
could prevent your SCSI devices from booting.
Many newer BIOSes allow access to additional devices, for example, in connection with EIDE hard disk controllers for up to 4 EIDE devices. Many modern
SCSI host adapters even allow SCSI devices to be “pushed to the front” in order
to make them bootable. If you want to make use of this feature with LILO, have
a look at the disk options on page 98.
For the sake of simplicity we will combine all this under the heading “1024
cylinder limit”. It should all be considered before a first-time installation (Section 2.4.1 page 30) — afterwards it may be too late, and may cause a lot of extra
work. For more information, see 4.8.2 page 109.
The following locations are possible to store the LILO boot sector.
• on a floppy disk. This is the most secure, but also the slowest alternative for
booting with LILO (see Section 4.6 page 103). Choose this alternative if you
do not want to change boot sectors.
• in the boot sector of a primary Linux partition on the first hard disk.
This leaves the MBR untouched. Before it can be booted, the partition has
to be marked active, with fdisk. If Linux is fully installed on logical drives
or partitions on the second hard disk, there is only the boot sector of the
extended drive of the first drive left (if there is one). Linux fdisk can also
activate such a partition.
If you want to boot multiple systems from hard disk, this is quite longwinded. Every time you want to boot, you have to activate the corresponding
boot sector beforehand. The next two variants are much less cumbersome.
93
4
Booting and Boot Managers
• in the Master Boot Record. This variation offers the highest flexibility.
Moreover, this is the only alternative possible if all of the Linux partitions
reside on the second hard disk and there is no extended partition on the first
drive. Every setting of the MBR must be edited with extreme care since
errors may have severe consequences. The safety aspects are described in
Section 4.5 page 100.
• If you have used another boot manager until now and you want to continue
using it. Depending on its flexibility and power, there are several variations.
A common case: you have a primary Linux partition on the second hard disk
where you boot Linux. Your boot manager is able to boot this partition via
a boot sector. Then you can activate your Linux partition by installing LILO
into this boot sector and telling your boot manager that it is active.
Caution
Be careful if you try to make a logical Linux partition bootable by installing LILO onto it. Success is not guaranteed at this point in time,
even if your other boot manager is able to launch logical partitions.
Try it if you like. The safest way is to try it with a tiny Linux installation to
see if it will work. Perhaps you will be lucky. The recommended way is still
to create a primary and bootable Linux partition.
4.4
Configuring LILO
LILO is a flexible boot manager that offers many ways of adapting a configuration
to one’s needs. The most important options and meanings are described below.
If you want to go into more detail, look at [Alm94].
Configuration of LILO is done in /etc/lilo.conf. If you are installing LILO
for the first time, we recommend you use YaST to configure LILO. You can finetune, by editing /etc/lilo.conf, at a later stage.
Note
/etc/lilo.conf should only be readable for ‘root’, as it might contain
passwords (see Section 4.4.2 page 97. This is the default setting with SuSE
Linux. If in doubt, just check by invoking the following command as root:)
earth: # chmod 0600 /etc/lilo.conf
It is recommended you keep any existing old (and working) lilo.conf backed
up in a safe place. Your settings only take effect when you reinstall LILO after
changing /etc/lilo.conf (see Section 4.5 page 100).
94
4.4
4.4.1
Configuring LILO
Structure of lilo.conf
/etc/lilo.conf starts with a global section followed by one or more
system sections for each operating system LILO should start. A new section
is started by a line beginning with either image or other.
The order of entries in /etc/lilo.conf only matters in as much as the first
one in the list is booted by default if no user interaction is taken —this can be set
to delay and timeout.
A sample configuration for a machine with both DOS and Linux is shown in
File contents 4.4.1. There are two Linux kernels (/boot/vmlinuz and /boot/
vmlinuz.old) on /dev/hda7, as well as MS-DOS (or Windows 95/98) on
/dev/hda1. The program MemTest86 is also alwailable.
### LILO global section
boot
= /dev/hda
# LILO installation target: MBR
backup = /boot/MBR.hda.990428 # backup file for the old MBR
# 1999-04-28
vga
= normal
# normal text mode (80x25 chars)
read-only
menu-scheme = Wg:kw:Wg:Wg
lba32
# Use BIOS to ignore
# 1024 cylinder limit
prompt
password = q99iwr4
# LILO password (example)
timeout = 80
# Wait at prompt for 8 s before
# default is booted
message = /boot/message
# LILO’s greeting
### LILO
image
label
root
initrd
Linux section (default)
= /boot/vmlinuz
# Default
= linux
= /dev/hda7
# Root partition for the kernel
= /boot/initrd
### LILO Linux section (fallback)
image = /boot/vmlinuz.suse
label = suse
root
= /dev/hda7
initrd = /boot/initrd.suse
optional
### LILO other system section (DOS/Windows)
other = /dev/hda1
# Windows partition
label = windows
### LILO memtest section (memtest)
image = /boot/memtest.bin
label = memtest86
File contents 4.4.1: Sample configuration in /etc/lilo.conf
95
4
Booting and Boot Managers
Anything between a ‘#’ and the end of line is regarded as a comment. Spaces
and comments are ignored by LILO and can be used to improve readability.
Now we go through the most important lines step by step:
• Global section (Parameter part)
– boot=<bootdevice>
The device on whose first sector LILO should be installed.
<bootdevice> may be: a floppy disk drive (/dev/fd0), a partition (e. g.,
/dev/hdb3), or an entire disk (e. g., /dev/hda). The last means installing LILO in the MBR. Default: if this option is missing, LILO is installed on the current root partition.
– lba32
With this option you can ignore the 1024-cylinder-limit of LILO if your
BIOS supports this.
– prompt
Forces the LILO prompt to be displayed. The default is: no prompt (compare with delay further down). This is recommended if LILO needs to
manage more than one system. In addition, timeout should be set to
guarantee an automatic reboot if nothing is entered at the prompt.
– timeout=<tenth-seconds>
Sets a timeout for the prompted option, thus enabling an automatic reboot
if no entry occurs in the given time. <tenth-seconds>
is the remaining
time in 0.1 s. increments. Pressing Shift ⇑ starts the timeout over. Default: infinite, e. g., no automatic reboot.
• Linux section
– image=<kernelimage>
Here the name of the kernel image to be booted, including its directory
location, should be entered. With your new system, this is most probably
/boot/vmlinuz, or /vmlinuz for older SuSE Linux systems.
– label=<name>
This name has to be unique in /etc/lilo.conf. Otherwise, you can
freely choose a name for the system (e. g., Linux). Maximum length is
15 characters. You should use only letters, numbers and underscore for
names – no blanks or special characters, for example. For more on the
specific rules for which characters to use, see [Alm94], 3.2.1. The default
is the filename of the kernel image (e. g., /boot/vmlinuz).
By entering this name at the LILO prompt, you select which system to
boot. It is recommended that, if there are many systems installed, that you
keep track of them in a special message file (message).
– root=<rootdevice>
This is to give the kernel the name of the root partition (e. g., /dev/hda2)
of your Linux system. This is recommended for security reasons. If this
option is omitted, the kernel takes its own root partition <kernelimage>.
96
4.4
Configuring LILO
• Linux part (Fallback)
Even if you installed a customized kernel, you are still able to boot the SuSE
standard kernel to start a stable system.
– optional
If you decide to delete /boot/vmlinuz.suse (not recommended), this
section will be skipped without an error message during LILO installation.
• Other systems
– other=<partition>
other tells LILO to start the partitions of other systems (e. g., /dev/
hda1).
– label=<name>
Name (your own choice) for the system. Recommended, because the
default—the raw device name—is less informative.
4.4.2
Other LILO configuration options
The previous section covered the entries required in /etc/lilo.conf. Other
useful options are discussed below.
Those options that are marked as image options belong to the appropriate section
of the operating system. The others are intended for the global parameter section
of /etc/lilo.conf.
• backup=<backup>
The file where LILO backs up the boot sector. The default is
/boot/boot.xxxx, where xxxx is the internal device number of the installation partition.
We do not recommend use of a cryptic name (see our example above). You
will not be able to use the implemented uninstall feature of LILO, but we think
it is better to this carefully by hand, anyway. (see Section 4.5 page 101)
Caution
If the backup file exists, LILO does not create a new one. Make sure
you use a name not already in use.
• compact
This option is recommended if you want to install LILO onto a floppy disk.
If enabled, LILO tries to read more sectors at a time, resulting in a faster boot
process. This does not work on every machine. We do not recommend that
you set this as the normal way is safer and it only provides a difference of
one or two seconds.
97
4
Booting and Boot Managers
• loader=<Boot loader>
To load a boot sector that belongs to another operating system, LILO constructs a pseudo MBR in its map file. At boot time, LILO first starts this
pseudo MBR, which in turn starts the other boot sector. This option specifies
the file where the code for the pseudo MBR is to be found.
Default: /boot/chain.b (usually, this is correct).
Sometimes another OS that needs to be booted from the first hard disk (e. g.
DOS) is supposed to boot from another hard disk using LILO. There are additional options that cause the hard disks to swap according to their device
numbers:
map-drive=<Number> and to=<Number>. See: File contents 4.4.2 ( on
this page).
The loader os2_d.b serves to load OS/2 from the second hard disk. 1 New
in LILO-Version 20: “switching” devices has to be set explicitly now (see
File contents 4.4.2 )
# Booting DOS from the second hard disk
# DOS bootable partition config begins
other = /dev/hdb1
label = DOS
loader = /boot/chain.b
map-drive = 0x80
# first hd: BIOS number 0x80
to
= 0x81
# second hd: BIOS number 0x81
map-drive = 0x81
to
= 0x80
table = /dev/hdb
# DOS bootable partition config ends
File contents 4.4.2: /etc/lilo.conf Extract: Booting DOS from 2nd hard
disk
• table=<ptable>
<ptable> sets the source device for the partition table written into the pseudo
MBR (normally /dev/hda or /dev/sda).
• disk=<device file>
bios=<BIOS device number>
cylinders=<amount>
heads=<amount>
sectors=<amount> Here you can tell LILO precisely which BIOS device
number and geometry it should use. This is scarcely ever needed. There is
one major exception: IDE-SCSI system: If you own a BIOS that is capable
of switching the boot devices SCSI prior to IDE and you want to use this
feature, you need to tell LILO the switched order from the perspective of the
BIOS. This is achieved by an extra entry in the global section of lilo.conf.
1 any_b.b
(Booting from B:) and any_d.b (Booting from second hard drive) are obsolete from
LILO-Version 20.
98
4.4
Configuring LILO
An example for a system with one SCSI and one IDE disk may be seen in
File contents 4.4.3.
# Enable LILO to correctly access /dev/sda and /dev/hda
# at boot time if their boot order is interchanged in
# the BIOS:
disk = /dev/sda
#
The SCSI disk is regarded as ...
bios = 0x80
#
... first BIOS disk;
disk = /dev/hda
#
the IDE disk is regarded as ...
bios = 0x81
#
... second BIOS disk.
File contents 4.4.3: lilo.conf Extract: Boot order: SCSI prior to IDE
• linear
Giving this option when installing LILO causes all references to hard disk
sectors to be stored as logical instead of physical addresses, so that they are
independent of any hard disk geometry. This option is intended for cases
where, when booting, the BIOS detects a different geometry than that of the
Linux system running. Only needed in rare cases!
The linear option does not release you from the constraints of the 1024cylinder-limit, which is determined by the BIOS geometry of the boot hard
disk. Refer also to file:/usr/share/doc/sdb/de/html/kgw_lilo_
linear.html.
• message=<message-file>
Points to a text file that should be shown on screen at system boot up. It
should not contain more than 24 lines and can present an overview of
the
LILO boot selection to augment the information available by pressing TAB .
Recommended.
Note
If this option is set, the message file is then part of the LILO boot machinery and, after every change to this file, LILO has to be reinstalled
(Section 4.5 on the next page).
• password=<password>
May be located either in a global or system-specific section. Provides secure
access to LILO services or booting the corresponding system by means of a
password. If you take this seriously, you should remove the password from
lilo.conf after you have used it for the first time. As ‘root’, you can
set a new password for LILO any time you like (you just need to reinstall
it afterwards) It is recommended to also set the option restricted, otherwise it could be possible to launch a shell, see manpage for lilo.conf
(man lilo.conf)!
• read-only
99
4
Booting and Boot Managers
This option tells the kernel to initially mount the root partition read-only,
which is normal when starting Linux systems. If this is omitted, the kernel
uses its internal settings.
• delay=<tenth-seconds>
If the prompt
is not
explicitly
set, you can order a prompt by pressing
, Ctrl , Alt . The delay= option sets the time to elapse before
Shift ⇑ LILO boots the first system in its list. The default is 0, that is, no waiting.
The delay option has no effect if a prompt is specifically requested by
prompt.
• vga=<mode>
Selects VGA mode at startup. Valid modes are normal (80x25), ext (80x50)
or ask (ask at boot-time).
• append="<parameter>" Image option for Linux kernel. Enables kernel
parameters and hardware components to be specified, in the same way that
this is possible at the LILO prompt. The kernel first gets the append line,
then the prompt. append="mcd=0x300,10".
4.5
Installing and Uninstalling LILO
During a new Linux installation, or at a later time, YaST will lead you through
the steps of how to install LILO interactively.
In this section, we assume that some action is required that goes beyond what
YaST can accomplish, and we take a closer look at how LILO works during the
installing and uninstalling process.
Caution
The installation of a boot manager is tricky! Ensure in advance that you are
100% able to boot Linux and other mounted systems. You must have fdisk
installed on a crash recovery disk, otherwise you might find yourself in the
awkward situation of not being able to access your hard disk at all!
Installation After Changing the Configuration
If any of the LILO components have changed, or you have modified your configuration in /etc/lilo.conf, you will have to reinstall LILO. This is easily done
by launching the “Map Installer” like this:
earth: # /sbin/lilo
What happens now is that LILO writes a backup of the target boot sector, writes
its first step into it and creates a new map file (see also Section 4.3 page 92).
LILO now announces each installed system—for an example see Output 4.5.1 on
the next page.
100
4.5
Added
Added
Added
Added
Installing and Uninstalling LILO
linux *
suse
windows
memtest86
Output 4.5.1: Output after launching LILO
When the installation is complete, the machine can be rebooted:
earth: # shutdown -r now
During reboot, the BIOS first performs its system test and directly afterwards
you will see LILO and its command prompt, where you can enter
and
parameters
select a boot image from the recently installed configurations. TAB shows you a
list of all systems installed.
Installation After Recompiling a Kernel
If you want to include a freshly created kernel into your LILO boot setup, the
Linux kernel Makefile offers an all-in-one solution. All the commands to configure and create the kernel are put together in the file /usr/src/linux/Makefile;
here the INSTALL_PATH=/boot is specified (see Section 9.5 page 237). This
Makefile has a target called bzlilo which, after a kernel compilation, automatically copies the currently installed kernel /boot/vmlinuz (this used to be
/vmlinuz) to /boot/vmlinuz.old, the new kernel to /boot/vmlinuz, and
then reinstalls LILO. This can be done by entering the command:
earth:/usr/src/linux # make bzlilo
instead of make zImage. This is only useful if you have edited /etc/lilo.
conf in advance and if your current kernel really is located in/boot/vmlinuz.
The new, as well as the old, kernel should now be listed. See File contents 4.4.1
page 95 for an example of the resulting /etc/lilo.conf.
At the LILO prompt, you can launch either of the two kernels. This makes your
boot more secure because you can still boot your old kernel even if the new one
fails.
For more on creating a new kernel, see Chapter 9 page 233.
Uninstalling LILO
Caution
Uninstalling a boot manager is tricky! Please ensure in advance that you
are 100% able to boot Linux and other systems with their respective boot
disks. You should have fdisk installed on every boot disk, otherwise you
might find yourself in the unfortunate situation of not being able to access
your hard disk at all!
Perhaps one day it will be necessary for you to uninstall LILO. This is accomplished by writing back the target boot sector where LILO has been installed. This
101
4
Booting and Boot Managers
is not a problem in Linux if there is a valid backup (see Section 4.4.2 page 97,
option backup).
Caution
A boot sector backup is no longer valid if the partition in question has got
a new file system (for DOS users: has been formatted). The partition table
of an MBR backup becomes invalid if the hard disk in question has been
repartitioned in the meantime. Obsolete “backups” are time-bombs. It is
best to delete them as soon as possible. Unpacking old and invalid backups
into system sectors is a direct route to data loss!
It is very simple to get back a DOS, Windows 95/98 or OS/2 MBR. Just enter
the MS-DOS command (available since 5.0)
C:\> FDISK /MBR
or on OS/2
C:\> FDISK /NEWMBR
These commands only write the first 446 bytes (the boot code) into the MBR and
leave partitions untouched.
For other restorations, first make a backup of the LILO sector in question—just
to be on the safe side. Now you should check (at least twice) whether your old
backup file is the correct one and if it is exactly 512 bytes in size! Finally, write
it back (but do not confuse if= and of=)!
• If LILO resides in partition yyyy (e. g., hda1, hda2,. . . ):
earth: # dd if=/dev/yyyy of=New-File bs=512 count=1
earth: # dd if=Backup-Date of=/dev/yyyy
• If LILO resides in the MBR of zzz (e. g., hda, sda):
earth: # dd if=/dev/zzz of=New-File bs=512 count=1
earth: # dd if=Backup-Date of=/dev/zzz bs=446 count=1
The last command is “cautious” and does not overwrite the partition table. Again,
do not forget: with fdisk you should mark the desired starting partition as
bootable. By the way, note how easy and fast a boot sector backup is done.
We recommend you do this frequently!
4.6
Creating a Linux Boot Disk
A Linux boot disk consists (somewhat simplified) of one or more Linux kernels,
possibly managed by LILO. It serves to start up your system even if it is not
possible to boot directly from hard disk (possible reasons: overwritten MBR,
misconfigured boot manager, errors while installing, etc.).
A boot disk such as this loads only the kernel. Everything else, including working
system programs and init start scripts, must be provided by the installation on
102
4.6
Creating a Linux Boot Disk
the hard disk. The connection between the boot disk and the system on the hard
disk is established by the fact that in the kernel the root partition in question is
set as the root device.
Do not confuse this with the SuSE boot disk which is used for installation and
emergencies. If you need to create a new SuSE boot disk, you copy the appropriate image from the directory disks on the SuSE CD-ROM to a floppy disk
(see Section 12.6 page 299 ).
Boot Disk Without LILO
Normally, if your hard disk controller support has been integrated into your kernel, your kernel does not need any additional command line with hardware info,
etc. The easiest way to create a boot disk is to just write the actual kernel onto a
raw disk and to adjust the root device (if this has not been done before).
earth:
earth:
earth:
earth:
#
#
#
#
/sbin/badblocks -v /dev/fd0 1440
dd if=Your_Kernel of=/dev/fd0 bs=18k
rdev /dev/fd0 Your_Root_Partition
rdev -R /dev/fd0 1
The last command makes sure that the kernel initially mounts root as read-only
(the startup scripts expect this).
Boot Disk with LILO
You can create a much more capable boot disk with a greeting, prompt, kernel
parameters and other LILO goodies, by transferring the complete LILO booting
start machinery onto the disk (see Section 4.3 page 92). For this, the disk needs
a file system; the Minix file system is best suited for this.
To do this, proceed as follows:
• Create a Minix file system on a new and empty floppy disk and mount the
disk to, for example, /mnt with the commands:
earth: # /sbin/mkfs.minix -c /dev/fd0 1440
earth: # /bin/mount /dev/fd0 /mnt
• Now copy your kernel files and the LILO file /boot/boot.b to /mnt, for
example, onto the floppy disk.
• Optional: create a message file /mnt/message.
• Create lilo.conf on /mnt. You need to adapt this to your needs (give the
correct name of the kernel, etc.). See File contents 4.6.1 on the following
page for an example.
• If you are using an initrd, don’t forget to add it to lilo.conf – as described in 12.4.3 page 291.
• Install LILO with this lilo.conf:
earth: # /sbin/lilo -C /mnt/lilo.conf
103
4
Booting and Boot Managers
# LILO Configuration file bootdisk
# Start LILO global Section
boot=/dev/fd0
# Installation: Floppy
install=/mnt/boot.b
# Of course LILO and
map=/mnt/map
# map file onto floppy!
message=/mnt/message
# optional
prompt
timeout=100
# Wait at prompt: 10 s
vga = normal
#
# End LILO global section
#
# Linux bootable partition config begins
image = /mnt/vmlinuz
#
default
root = /dev/Your_Root_Device # Here is your root partition!
label = linux
# Linux bootable partition config ends
#
# System sections for more kernel here:
File contents 4.6.1: lilo.conf for a bootdisk
• Unmount the floppy—that’s it!
earth: # /bin/umount /mnt
• Do not forget to check your boot disk at the next system start to check
whether it works or not.
4.7
Sample Configurations
If Linux is the only operating system on your machine, there is nothing to do,
since everything needed has already been done by YaST.
Now we will give you some example configurations for multi-system computers.
Further information can be found under /usr/share/doc/howto/en/mini/
Linux+*.gz.
4.7.1
DOS/Windows 95/98 and Linux
Requirements: There must be at least a primary partition for each of DOS/Windows 95/98 and Linux which is below the 1024 cylinders limit (Section 4.3
page 93).
For this case, we have already discussed a configuration (File contents 4.4.1
page 95) — only the settings for root, image and other have to be adapted.
LILO is installed in the MBR.
Save your /etc/lilo.conf and be sure you have a Linux boot disk. Windows 95/98 feels especially inclined to eliminate “foreign” MBRs. If you can
still boot Linux using your boot disk, this problem is quickly solved with the
command
104
4.7
Sample Configurations
earth: # /sbin/lilo
which will complete your LILO installation.
4.7.2 Windows NT and Linux on One Hard Disk
1. If Windows NT and Linux need to co-exist on the same hard disk, you should
use the NT boot manager for booting. This can either start the kernel images
or the boot sectors themselves. Execution of the following steps prepares
everything for a peaceful coexistence of Linux and Windows NT:
• Install NT.
• Partition the NT disks (using FAT so that Linux can write on it).
• Install Linux as usual (in our example, the root partition is on /dev/
sda3). Mount either the DOS partition or an error free DOS floppy disk
(for example, on /dos).
• Install LILO, but install it in Linux’s root partition (/dev/sda3), not in the
MBR (/dev/sda). You may still configure a selection of Linux kernels
for LILO. See File contents 4.7.1 for an example lilo.conf.
# LILO Configuration file
# Start LILO global Section
boot=/dev/sda3
# Target of installation
backup=/boot/boot.sda3.970428 # Backup previous boot sector;
# 28. Apr 1997
prompt
timeout=100
# Wait at prompt: 10 s
vga = normal
# force sane video state
# End LILO global section
# Linux bootable partition config begins
image = /vmlinuz
#
default image to boot
root = /dev/sda3
# Here the root partition!
label = Linux
# Linux bootable partition config ends
File contents 4.7.1: lilo.conf for booting a Linux root partition
• Copy the LILO boot sector to a location where NT can find it; e. g.:
earth: # /bin/dd if=/dev/sda3 bs=512 count=1 of=/dos/bootsek.lin
This step as well as the following has to be performed after every kernel
update.
• Boot NT. Copy bootsek.lin from data disk to main directory of NT’s
system drive (if it is not already there).
• In boot.ini (first setting attributes), supplement at the end:
c:\bootsek.lin="Linux"
105
4
Booting and Boot Managers
• After the next boot (if everything went smoothly), there should be an entry
in NT’s boot manager.
2. Another possibility: install LILO in the MBR and claim that it’s DOS to
Windows NT (as in our previous example).
Caution
NT 3.5* and 4.0 do not recognize Linux partition types 82 and 83. Make
sure that no NT program tries to “repair” your partition table. This would
result in loss of data! Always have valid backups of the LILO boot sector at
hand.
4.7.3
OS/2 and Linux
1. Use the OS/2 boot manager for booting. It can launch unlimited primary and
logical partitions provided they are below the 1024 cylinders limit. The user
is responsible for the partitions. This boot manager is configured by OS/2’s
fdisk.
Preparation on the Linux side: consists merely of making a partition bootable
(usually this is the root partition) with LILO. You can use the same lilo.
conf as in the Windows NT example, but there is one thing that you have to
consider in advance. . .
Preparation on the OS/2 side: OS/2 not only uses the conventional and obvious entries for existing partitions in MBRs on hard disks, but also uses
“waste” space in these sectors for additional information. If these are inconsistent, OS/2’s fdisk considers these partitions faulty and refuses to provide
boot manager services. The fdisk commands of other systems do not know
how to handle these extra partitions. Conflicts are inevitable.
Therefore: before installing Linux, load OS/2 (the installation system is sufficient) and create the Linux partitions with OS/2’s fdisk, at least the logical
drives. This initially creates additional OS/2 partitions, which might get in
the way.
Solution: immediately after creating the partitions, load the Linux installation system (or the rescue disk from the SuSE Linux CD) and change the
partition types to 83 (Linux native) using fdisk. Now these partitions will be
ignored by OS/2.
2. 2nd option: LILO is used as the main boot manager on a primary partition on
the first hard disk. This is a special case in the following example, which also
includes DOS. Using the MBR is less advantageous, since repartitioning with
another fdisk could erase the MBR and thus remove LILO. This special case
is also considered in our next example, where DOS is additionally involved.
106
4.7
4.7.4
Sample Configurations
DOS, OS/2 and Linux
1. If you have used the OS/2 boot manager for DOS and OS/2 and want to
continue using it, simply add Linux to its start menu as described in the
previous example.
2. If you have LILO installed as the main boot manager on a primary partition
of the first hard disk, then the following, intentionally complicated example
for lilo.conf (File contents 4.7.2) assumes that the DOS and Linux boot
partitions are primary and on the first hard drive, whereas OS/2 resides on
the second hard disk—all of them below the 1024 cylinders limit. OS/2 is
on the second drive. This is why a special loader (/boot/os2_b.b instead
of /boot/chain.b) is used. The MBR code might be either from DOS or
OS/2 (it doesn’t matter which). The LILO boot partition (/dev/sda4) must
be marked as active, with any fdisk.
# LILO Configuration file
# Start LILO global Section
boot = /dev/sda4
# LILO in Linux root partition
backup = /boot/boot.sda4.970428
message = /boot/message # Greeting message
prompt
delay = 100
vga
= normal
#
# Linux bootable partition config begins
image = /vmlinuz
label = linux
root = /dev/sda4
# Linux bootable partition config ends
#
# OS/2 bootable partition config begins
other = /dev/sdb5
table = /dev/sdb
label = os2
loader = /boot/os2_b.b
# OS/2 bootable partition config ends
#
# DOS bootable partition config begins
other = /dev/sda1
table = /dev/sda
label = dos
# DOS bootable partition config ends
File contents 4.7.2: LILO with DOS, OS/2 and Linux on two hard disks
107
4
Booting and Boot Managers
4.8
LILO Problems
Some Guidelines
Some simple guidelines at the beginning will avoid most LILO problems in advance (this is taken from the LILO documentation [Alm94]):
• Don’t panic! If anything does not work, try to find the error or the cause first;
check the diagnosis before you start fixing the problem.
• Always have an up-to-date and tested boot disk at hand.
• SuSE Linux contains a full Linux system on its boot disk and installation CD
(for the rescue system, see Section 12.6 page 299) to allow you to reach all
your Linux partitions. Tools are included for repairing almost any problems
that can occur.
• Read the complete LILO documentation, especially if the system does not do
what you want it to do.
• Check /etc/lilo.conf before using the map installer (/sbin/lilo).
• Be careful if you are using a large hard disk, or multiple ones. You need to
be aware of the 1024 cylinders limit.
• Try with and without the linear option (normally it should be better without!).
4.8.1
Diagnosis of Errors: LILO Start Messages
This is mainly section 5.2.1 from [Alm94].
When LILO loads itself, it displays the word ‘LILO’. Each letter is printed before
or after performing some specific action. If LILO fails at some point, the letters
printed so far can be used to identify the problem.
nothing No part of LILO has been loaded. Either LILO is not installed at all or
the partition on which it’s boot sector is located isn’t active.
‘L’ error . . . The first stage boot loader has been loaded and started, but it can’t
load the second stage boot loader (/boot/boot.b). The two-digit error
codes indicate the type of problem. This condition usually indicates a media
failure or a geometry mismatch.
‘LI’ The second stage has been invoked but could not be started. This can either be caused by a geometry mismatch or by moving /boot/boot.b without reinstalling LILO.
‘LIL’ The second stage of boot loader has been started, but it can’t load the
descriptor table from the map file. This is typically due to a physical error of
the boot device or a faulty disk geometry.
108
4.8
LILO Problems
‘LIL?’ The second stage boot loader has been loaded at an incorrect address.
This is typically caused by a subtle geometry mismatch or by moving /boot/
boot.b without reinstalling LILO.
‘LIL-’ The descriptor table (in the map file) is corrupt. This can either be
caused by a geometry mismatch or by moving /boot/boot.b without reinstalling LILO.
‘LILO’ All parts of LILO have been successfully loaded.
The most common causes for geometry errors are not physical defects or invalid
partition tables but errors in LILO installation, including:
• disregarding the 1024 cylinders limit (see next section)
• an unsuccessful attempt at starting LILO from a logical partition
4.8.2 The 1024-Cylinder Limit
Note
Recently BIOS versions are available which enable you to start operating
systems above the 1024 cylinder limit. The current LILO version can use
this BIOS extension. YaST and YaST2 will inform you accordingly of these
options for your BIOS while configuring LILO. If your BIOS should not include this extension, you should definitely continue reading here.
As emphasized before (e.g. page 93), the entire LILO machinery (e. g., any data
that is needed for booting) must be able to process BIOS calls (which means it
must reside below the 1024 cylinders limit on the hard disk). The sections of the
hard disk that can be used (these are called allowed sections) have already been
discussed.
This restriction affects only the boot-up machinery. It is not required that LILO
be installed on the Linux root partition. It is even possible (but quite dangerous,
too) to put the boot machinery onto partitions of other operating systems to which
Linux has read and write access.
Caution
Never install the LILO boot sector onto an unknown partition because you
will severely damage the file system!
• The best method is to create a primary partition (within the allowed section)
and to install all LILO files (including the LILO boot sector) into this partition.
This will be, in most cases, the Linux root partition.
You can also add it to /boot with YaST. The only condition is that there has
to be enough space for
109
4
Booting and Boot Managers
– boot.b, map, message, and
– the Linux kernels that LILO should boot.
A few megabytes is enough. It does not matter where you put the rest of your
partitions. There are no more restrictions. As soon as the kernel runs, you
have unrestricted access to all installed drives.
But what to do if there is no space for such a partition? If you neither want to
repartition your hard disk, upgrade to SCSI, or want to purchase a new BIOS
version, there are still two (makeshift) possibilities:
• Use a boot disk instead of LILO on the hard disk or, if you are also running
MS-DOS, you can use loadlin as well.
• Install the LILO boot machinery onto a Linux partition which is in the permitted section and where Linux has write access (e. g., a FAT/VFAT drive). We
cannot put the LILO boot sector there as well! So there are only two places to
put it. Either at the start of an extended partition on the first drive—as long
as it is beneath the 1024 cylinders limit—or on the MBR.
Suppose that the partition in question is mounted on /mnt, that LILO is installed in the MBR (/dev/hda), and that you also boot DOS from /dev/
hda1. Then you should proceed as follows:
– Create a new directory (e. g., /mnt/LINUX) and copy the LILO files mentioned above to it: boot.b, map, message, as well as the chain loader of
other operating systems (normally chain.b) and finally the Linux kernels
that LILO should boot.
– Create a /mnt/LINUX/lilo.conf where all paths point to /mnt/LINUX
(see File contents 4.8.1 on the facing page).
– Install LILO with this lilo.conf:
earth:
# /sbin/lilo -C /mnt/LINUX/lilo.conf
After that, LILO should work. Boot MS-DOS and protect the LILO files
as well as possible against write access (just to remind you: any write
access disables LILO). To accomplish this, you should assign to all files in
X:\LINUX (where the ‘X’ is the DOS drive mounted to /mnt) the DOS
attributes system and hide.
In conclusion, we point you toward two HOWTOs in /usr/share/doc/howto/
en/mini/—LILO.gz and Large-Disk.gz.
4.8.3
Special Boot Problems with Kernels from 2.0 Onwards
Problems
Problems booting with LILO might occur after part of the kernel has been loaded.
(e. g., a SuSE installation kernel)
You can select a kernel at the LILO prompt and this kernel is loaded (some dots
are output onto the screen) but starting the kernel fails. Before reaching "uncompressing Linux" the system crashes with different behaviors.
Possible error messages:
110
4.8
LILO Problems
# LILO Configuration file
# Start LILO global Section
boot=/dev/hda
# Installation target
backup=/mnt/LINUX/hda.xxxx # backup of old MBR
install=/mnt/LINUX/boot.b # Of course LILO and
map=/mnt/LINUX/map
# map file are in /mnt/LINUX!
message=/mnt/LINUX/message # optional
prompt
timeout=100
# Wait at prompt: 10 s
vga = normal
#
# End LILO global section
#
# Linux bootable partition config begins
image = /mnt/LINUX/First_Kernel
#
default
root = /dev/Your_Root_Device
# Root partition!
label = linux
# Linux bootable partition config ends
#
# System section for other kernels:
#
# End Linux
# DOS bootable partition config begins
other = /dev/hda1
# MSDOS system drive
label = dos
loader = /mnt/LINUX/chain.b
table = /dev/hda
# DOS bootable partition config ends
File contents 4.8.1: lilo.conf for other partitions
111
4
Booting and Boot Managers
• System reboots
• System just hangs
• "crc-error"
• "no free space"
• "Error 0x00"
• "Error 0x01"
• "incomplete literal tree"
Thereafter, access on the floppy is attempted but the system hangs.
Cause
The cause lies in a combination of a big kernel, LILO and faulty hardware. This
affects roughly 1% of all machines.
We assume that this is due to a faulty BIOS that has problems with fast memory
access.
This problem does not occur, if:
• the machine is booted via loadlin
• the kernel has been copied to a floppy
dd if=/vmlinuz of=/dev/fd0
and booted from there
• a smaller kernel is used, which has been created with
make zImage
(e. g., an older 1.2.13 kernel) is booted via LILO
The following BIOS settings do not cause any problems either:
• Disable Internal Cache
• DRAM Precharge Wait State value: 1 and
• DRAM Wait Burst Timing value: 0x3333
Solution
First of all, you should be able to install a system. So, if you can neither boot
via loadlin nor via setup, you should use an old kernel 1.2.13 boot disk for installation. If you do not have such a disk at hand, you should change the BIOS
settings accordingly.
After a successful installation, the question is how you want to boot in the future.
First, you should use the same media as during installation. loadlin from DOS
112
4.9
Starting via loadlin
should not cause any problems. With a boot disk, you should enter the following
parameters:
load_ramdisk=0 root=/dev/???
where ??? is your root partition (e. g., /dev/hda1). Thereafter, you should
build your own kernel, since this can be booted using LILO.
4.9
Starting via loadlin
Now we want to offer an alternative to boot SuSE Linux, loadlin. The program
loadlin is a DOS program that is capable of booting a Linux kernel from a DOS
directory. Thus loadlin perfectly integrates itself into an existing DOS/Windows 9x
environment. As no entry in the MBR is needed, Windows only notices one or
more partitions with unknown ID’s. The risk of unwanted side effects due to a
Linux installation is thus minimized.
The procedure described below works on both Windows 95 and Windows 98.
The files themselves have been written in Windows 95; for this reason we will
just talk about Windows 95.
In principle, there are two ways of activating loadlin. One is to switch between
various systems via a boot menu, or to start Linux via loadlin from another running system.
Both methods have advantages and disadvantages:
• A boot menu saves you the trouble of having to start another operating system
first, before you can start Linux.
• You can add other configurations to your boot menu to create a universal
starting mechanism.
• You need to modify start files, however, to build a boot menu; which you will
have to do by trial and error.
• Changing to Linux from the DOS prompt is very simple.
• A Linux start can be very nicely integrated into a Windows 95 session. Double clicking an icon will start Linux (Windows 95 contains DOS 7.0).
Tip
You should use a boot menu if you are using DOS or Windows 3.x. If using Windows 95, you can start most easily from the running system. Start
menus in Windows 95 are a very complex matter. We are only able to give
you some hints about them.
113
4
Booting and Boot Managers
4.9.1
Necessary Steps for all loadlin Users
This is what you need to do, whether you decide to use a boot menu, or to start
from a running system (in DOS, Windows 3.x, or Windows 95):
1. You may have already installed loadlin. If not, do so now using setup.
2. Change to c:\loadlin in MS-DOS. There you will find the file linux.par.
Create a file with the editor named startlin.bat (you can give it another
name) in this directory. Now insert the line described in File contents 4.9.1:
c:\loadlin\loadlin @c:\loadlin\linux.par
File contents 4.9.1: Example of a batch file for starting Linux
Next, edit the file linux.par (File contents 4.9.2).
c:\loadlin\vmlinuz
# first value must be
# the filename of the Linux kernel
root=/dev/xxx
# the device which gets mounted as root FS
ro
# mount root read-only
File contents 4.9.2: Example of the file linux.par with customized values
Instead of xxx, enter your root partition’s device name (you wrote down
this name in Section 3.3.12 page 60). startlin.bat starts Linux. The
file linux.par is used by startlin.bat as well as by config.sys, and
contains essential parameters. Later on, when you are more familiar with
Linux, you can add or replace parameters here. If you have built a kernel
of your own, just copy it to c:\loadlin\vmlinuz and from then on this
kernel will be booted.
4.9.2
Setting up Boot Menus
Here’s how to configure a boot menu in DOS or Windows 3.x:
1. First, define a boot menu section in your c:\config.sys file.
Open c:\config.sys in an editor and enter something similar to the File
contents 4.9.3 on the facing page.
Under the label [Menu], define an entry in the boot menu for each OS you
want to boot. Also, define the menu’s color and after how many seconds each
OS will be automatically started.
2. Below these entries, enter the labels [Common], [Win], [DOS], and [Linux].
Commands entered in [Common] are always executed. All other entries are
OS specific. See the example in File contents 4.9.4 on the next page. As a
114
4.9
Starting via loadlin
[Menu]
menuitem=Win, starting Windows,...
menuitem=DOS, starting DOS, MS-DOS...
menuitem=Linux, starting Linux...
menucolor=15,1
menudefault=Win,5
File contents 4.9.3:
Example of first part of Linux boot menu in
c:\config.sys
[Common]
device=c:\dos\himem.sys /testmem:off
device=c:\dos\emm386.exe noems I=E000-F4FF
dos=high,umb
files=30
buffers=10
shell=c:\dos\command.com
[Win]
devicehigh=c:\dos\dblspace.sys /move
devicehigh=c:\cd\slcd.sys /D:SONY_000 /B:340 /M:P /V /C
[DOS]
devicehigh=c:\dos\dblspace.sys /move
devicehigh=c:\cd\slcd.sys /D:SONY_000 /B:340 /M:P /V /C
[Linux]
shell=c:\loadlin\loadlin.exe @c:\loadlin\linux.par
[Common]
rem Remains blank
File contents 4.9.4:
Example of second part of Linux boot menu in
c:\config.sys
115
4
Booting and Boot Managers
guide, you can use the lines in your own config.sys. An example may be
found in: File contents 4.9.4 on the preceding page.
Now save the file with your changes.
3. Next, edit c:\autoexec.bat. Here you must put the same labels and assign
entries to labels, but the notation differs slightly. See the example in File
contents 4.9.5. Notice that the Linux case is not mentioned here because
Linux is booted using loadlin directly from the c:\config.sys file. The
variable %config% contains the selected label (:Win or :DOS). Customize
the code to fit your machine.
@echo off
rem Entries for all Configurations
switches= /f
set comspec=c:\dos\command.com
prompt $p$g
loadhigh c:\dos\keyb gr,,c:\dos\keyboard.sys
loadhigh c:\dos\doskey
set temp=c:\temp
loadhigh c:\dos\mscdex.exe /D:SONY_000 /E /V /L:H
c:\logimaus\mouse.exe
goto %config%
:Win
c:\dos\smartdrv.exe a- b- c+ 2048 1024
path c:.;d:.;c:\windows;c:\dos;c:\util;
win :
c:\dos\smartdrv /C
goto ende
:DOS
path c:.;d:.;c:\dos;c:\util;
goto ende
:ende
echo * Goodbye *
File contents 4.9.5: Example of autoexec.bat supporting Linux boot menu
4. If you now boot your machine, the boot menu appears and you have five
seconds to choose an operating system. Then Windows starts automatically
(menudefault=Win,5). If you select ‘Linux’, Linux starts and awaits your
login.
4.9.3
Starting Linux from Within Windows
To create a start icon for Linux to boot Linux from within a running Windows 95
session:
116
4.9
Starting via loadlin
1. Open Windows Explorer. Change to c:\loadlin. With the right mouse
button, click on the file startlin.bat and select ‘Create Shortcut’.
2. Drag the shortcut onto the desktop.
3. Click on ‘Shortcut to startlin.bat’ with the right mouse button and
select ‘Properties’. Go to tab ‘Program’, click on the button ‘Advanced’
and click ‘MS-DOS mode’ on. Confirm with ‘OK’.
4. Click the ‘Change icon’ button and select a nice icon; give the shortcut a
suitable name; Voila!
5. Double clicking this new shortcut should bring up a dialog box telling you
that Windows 95 is about to switch to DOS mode. If this dialog box bothers
you, turn it off in the properties menu.
4.9.4
The Windows Boot Menu
This is how you install a boot menu for Windows 95:
1. You must edit the file c:\msdos.sys. First, make the file visible by entering: C:> attrib -R -S -H c:\msdos.sys
This is a text file where you have to enter some lines to deactivate the Windows 95 start menu. The [Options] label should resemble File contents 4.9.6.
[Options]
BootGUI=0
BootDelay=0
BootMenu=0
Logo=0
File contents 4.9.6: msdos.sys to start Linux using a Windows 95 boot menu
The parameter Logo=0 is optional and avoids switching to graphics mode
before Windows 95 is started. Booting is much faster and you avoid lots of
trouble if you plan to use the DOS emulator in Linux later on.
The parameter BootGUI=0 is for booting Windows 95 directly into DOS
mode. To start Windows from this you have to enter:
C:> win but this is already done by our example c:\autoexec.bat if you
have selected Win95 from our menu.
2. Next, define your boot menu in c:\config.sys. See File contents 4.9.7 on
the next page) for an example.
Under the Label [Menu], define entries for the boot menu, its color and the
delay in starting up automatically.
3. Further down in config.sys, enter labels [Win95], [DOS], [Linux],
and [Common]. [Common] is for entries that apply every time (this will
very rarely be the case in Windows 95). All other labels are for the corresponding operating system. Use those lines that are already written in your
117
4
Booting and Boot Managers
[Menu]
menuitem=Win95, start Windows 95...
menuitem=DOS, start MS-DOS...
menuitem=Linux, start Linux...
menudefault=Win95,5
File contents 4.9.7: Example config.sys (part one) for starting Linux using
a boot menu with Windows 95
config.sys. The example in File contents 4.9.8, should only be regarded
as a hint.
[Win95]
dos=high,umb
device=c:\windows\himem.sys /testmem:off
[DOS] device=c:\plugplay\drivers\dos\dwcfgmg.sys
dos=high,umb
device=c:\windows\himem.sys /testmem:off
device=c:\windows\emm386.exe noems I=B000-B7FF
devicehigh=c:\cdrom\torisan.sys /D:TSYCD3 /P:SM
[Linux]
shell=c:\loadlin\loadlin.exe @c:\loadlin\linux.par
[Common]
accdate=C+ D+ H+
switches= /F buffers=20
File contents 4.9.8: Example config.sys (part two) for starting Linux using
a boot menu with Windows 95
Now save this file.
4. Next, edit c:\autoexec.bat. Here, the same labels are entered, but the
notation is slightly different. The label which has been selected is written
to the variable %config%. Notice that the Linux case is not included here,
because Linux is booted using loadlin directly from the config.sys file.
Your entry should look something like File contents 4.9.9 on the next page.
When you have finished editing the file, don’t forget to save it.
5. If you now boot your machine, the Windows 95 boot menu should appear,
giving you two seconds to select an entry. If you choose Command line, your
own boot menu will be displayed. Now you have five seconds to select an
operating system. After this delay, Windows 95 starts automatically. If you
select ‘Linux’, Linux starts and awaits your login.
118
4.9
Starting via loadlin
@echo off
loadhigh keyb gr,,c:\windows\command\keyboard.sys
goto %config%
:Win95
win
goto ende
:DOS
path c:.;d:.;c:\windows\command;c:\util;
loadhigh c:\windows\command\mscdex.exe /D:TSYCD3 /L:x
loadhigh c:\windows\command\doskey
c:\windows\command\mouse.exe
goto ende
:ende
echo * And now? *
File contents 4.9.9: Example autoexec.bat for starting Linux in Windows 95
119
4
120
Booting and Boot Managers
5
The X Window System
5 The X Window System
5.1
Historical Background
The X Window System is the de facto standard GUI for UNIX. Yet the X Window System is far more than this – X11 is a network-based system. Applications
running on the machine earth can display their results on the machine helios,
provided the two machines are connected via a network. The network could be
a local one (LAN) or a connection between computers thousands of miles away
via the Internet.
X11 was first developed as an enterprise of DEC (Digital Equipment Corporation) and the project Athena at MIT (Massachusetts Institute of Technology).
The first release of X11R1 was in September 1987. Since release 6, the X Consortium, Inc. has been responsible for the development of the X Window System.
XFree86 ™ is a freely available implementation of X servers for PC systems. It
was developed by a handful of ambitious programmers who founded the XFree86
team in 1992. In 1994, this team went on to found The XFree86 Project, whose
aim is to continue research and development on X11 and to provide it to the
public. Since March 2000 the completely revised major release XFree86-4.0
has been available for download from http://www.XFree86.org. By default,
SuSE Linux installs XFree86-4.0. Below we will take a closer look at the features of the new version.
SuSE would like to thank the XFree86 team for their help and for their permission to include beta servers on our CD’s1 , without which their production would
have been much more difficult, if at all possible.
The next sections are about configuring the X server. For this purpose SaX2
2 and xf86config will be discussed, simple tools for configuring the X Window
System. SaX2 is intended for configuring XFree86-4.0, SaX is used to configure the XFree86 3.3.x versions.
In contrast to the text-based xf86config, the two SaX versions work directly with
the X-server and they can be operated with the mouse. So install, using YaST, the
program SaX (package sax, series x) or SaX2 (package sax2, series x), together
with their dependent packages. Whereas XFree86-4.0 contains all the necessary
graphics drivers in the base package, if you use XFree86-3.3.x, especially the
package xvga16 – and if it is already known – the X server which matches your
graphics card must be installed; the X servers are listed in the series xsrv (see
1 Parts of this documentation are taken from chapter XFree86 Konfigurieren from [HHMK96] which
was kindly given to us by D IRK H OHNDEL
SuSE Advanced X Configuration Tool The configuration program SaX2 (sax2) to configure
XFree86-4.0 makes XF86Setup (package xfsetup, series x) obsolete.
2 SaX:
121
5
The X Window System
Section 3.4.3 page 67). If you have forgotten to select a server, SaX will detect
this and install a suitable server, by means of YaST. In XFree86-4.0 the necessary
graphics drivers are already included in the base selection.
In order to make optimal use of the hardware available (graphics card, monitor, keyboard), you can optimize the configuration manually. Certain aspects
of this optimization will be explained. Even more detailed information on configuring the X Window System can be found in the directory /usr/share/doc/
packages/xf86 as well as in the manpage for XF86Config (man XF86Config).
Caution
Be very careful when configuring your X Window System! Never start the
X Window System until the configuration is finished. A wrongly configured
system can cause irreparable damage to your hardware (this applies especially to fixed-frequency monitors). The authors of this book and SuSE
cannot be held responsible for damage. This information has been carefully
researched, but this does not guarantee that all methods presented here
are correct and will not damage your hardware.
5.2
The New Version 4.0 of XFree86
This version of SuSE Linux contains the current version, 4.0, of XFree86 which
varies in a number of ways from version 3.3, used until now. Overall there
are hardly any differences for the user when operating the graphical desktop;
applications such as the graphical desktop KDE or GNOME behave with the
new version in the same way as the version 3.3.6 used until now.
What advantages does the new version provide?
The new X server is no longer a monolithic program, but just a relatively small
basic scaffolding to which the necessary program modules can be later added, if
and when required. For example there are no longer many different X servers
for different graphics cards, as in the previous version, but just one executable
program called XFree86, which can be found in the directory /usr/X11R6/bin.
This is also the actual X server. The graphics driver, which then takes on the task
of controlling the graphics card, is a loadable module.
A similar method is used to support the various input devices, fonts or X protocols. This again consists of individual modules which can be later loaded by
the X server. As a rule you don’t need to worry about these modules, the configuration of the modules to operate the graphical desktop on your computer is
managed as far as possible by SaX2.
Through this module concept, it is easy for a vendor to implement a driver for exotic hardware, such as touchscreens or brand-new graphics cards. The developers have even ensured that the necessary modules for various operating systems
122
5.2
The New Version 4.0 of XFree86
only need to be made available once, which means that a graphics driver module
which was compiled in FreeBSD, for example, can also be used in Linux, and
vice-versa. This portability, however, is of course limited to the same hardware
platform: a module which was compiled for Linux on Power PC’s cannot be
used on an Intel PC.
Support for the mouse has also been significantly improved. Especially under
heavy loads, the reaction of the mouse to mouse movements is considerably
faster and more direct than with the previous XFree86 X server. Overall the
output speed has also been improved, so that graphics operations are generally
performed more quickly than on the old X server due to the completely revised
XAA (XFree86 Acceleration Architecture).
Compared to XFree86 3.3.x, the configuration file has a slightly different format
and is now located in /etc/X11/XF86Config: if you want to ‘fine tune’ your
X configuration, details on the structure of the configuration file, and how it
functions, can be found in section 5.6 page 158.
Error logging has also been improved. The X server creates a very detailed log
file, which you can always find after the X server has started in the file /var/
log/XFree86.0.log.
One of the further features of the new version is the support of special options
such as True Type fonts. Other features also include the provision of the 3D
protocol extension, glx, gamma correction of the screen and the support of multiple graphics cards for Multihead configurations. More information on
this can be found in Section 5.6 page 158.
What has changed?
XFree86-4.0 is, of course, based on the version 3.3.x. Unfortunately not all
drivers are included, as some are very complex and could not be ported to the
new XAA architecture. If these graphics cards were supported by SuSE Linux
before, you can still use these with the XFree86 version-3.3.x. For such cards,
please use the XFree86 version 3.3.6, also contained in SuSE Linux. You can
continue to use SaX to configure these cards, as before.
The graphics cards concerned here are those which were until now used together with the following X servers: XF86_S3, XF86_Mach8, XF86_Mach32
and XF86_8514.
In the case of S3 cards, those which previously required the S3 server are not
supported by XFree86-4.0, while those which previously worked with the SVGA
server will work correctly with XFree86-4.0.
Basically these are the graphics cards S3 Trio3D, Savage4, Savage3D and Savage2000 chips, and almost all S3 Virge cards.
Graphics cards which needed the other X servers listed above (Mach8, Mach32
and 8514) are no longer very common. For these graphics cards – as for all the
old S3 cards – the XFree86-3.3 version continues to be available.
123
5
The X Window System
5.3
Configuration Using SaX2
The program SaX2 (SuSE Advanced X Configuration Tool) provides a simple
installation of the X Window System. This is a successor to the tried-and-tested
SaX program. SaX was used to configure XFree86-3.3.x, SaX2 is now used for
the configuration of XFree86-4.0.
If your system is already set up with the X server of XFree86-4.0, then you can
start SaX2 straight away. If you are using an XFree86-3.3.x X server, then a
message will be displayed when starting SaX2 telling you that the system is set
up with XFree86-3.3.x, meaning that SaX needs to be used for the configuration.
If you still continue, XFree86-4.0 will be set up. Strictly speaking, this is not
entirely correct: the base system, that is the libraries and the X11 base programs,
are always taken from XFree86-4.0, merely the X server and the programs xinit
and xf86config are replaced.
Note
As already mentioned in Section 5.2 page 122, not all graphics cards are
supported by XFree86-4.0. To configure these graphics cards you should
use SaX. This program is described in Section 5.4 page 142.
You can use the mouse or the keyboard directly in the graphical desktop in SaX2.
Apart from a few special cases, such as very modern or very old hardware, it can
detect the components used on its own, and configure them to a large extent
automatically, so that installing an X server is a simple affair.
5.3.1
First-time installation
For the very first installation of the X Window System – the graphical user interface of every Linux system – a few details about the computer must be known:
• The monitor model and technical specifications (if known).
• The keyboard type.
• The mouse type and the port to which it is connected.
• The name and vendor of the graphics card.
Note
You have to start the program SaX2 (sax2) as the user ‘root’. You
can also start SaX2 from YaST: ‘System administration’ and then with
‘Configure XFree86[tm]’ (see Section 3.6 page 73).
At the command line the program is started with:
earth:/root # sax2
124
5.3
Configuration Using SaX2
As soon as the program is started, a utility belonging to SaX2 called sysp searches
for installed PCI and AGP graphics cards. It also determines the keyboard and
mouse types. A configuration file is then put together from the data detected,
which is used to start the X server. If, for example, an AGP or PCI graphics card
was found in the computer, this is identified and the matching X server module
is immediately loaded.
SaX2 remembers the settings it finds and stores them in a file. To force a completely new hardware detection, you can start SaX2 with the option -f. Then all
the hardware relevant to X11 is freshly examined.
Automatic configuration
If the graphics card can be uniquely identified with a PCI scan and a graphics
driver is available, SaX2 then tries to detect the monitor automatically via DDC
(“Direct Data Connection”). If this is successful, the optimal resolution for the
monitor is set. This is shown to you in the box ‘Do you like it’ and you can
apply these by clicking on the ‘OK’ button. When you do this, make sure that in
the selection box next to the ‘OK’ button ‘Save’ is also selected.
Figure 5.1: SaX2: Fully automatic configuration
In the selection box next to the ‘OK’ button you can select further items. Click
on ‘OK’ after you have selected the item you require.
• Via the item ‘Adjust’, you can alter the appearance of the image on your
screen within certain limits, before you save the configuration.
• SaX2 does try and identify your hardware as far as possible, but to be absolutely sure that the configuration is complete and correct, you should always
check all the settings of SaX2 and change them if necessary. You can, via
the item ‘Run SaX’, start SaX2 again and change the settings of the X server
there. This is particularly important if you have more than one graphics card
in your computer or if the mouse does not work correctly at first.
• ‘Exit Sax’ closes down the program sax2.
In case your mouse is not correctly configured, you can also use the program
with the keyboard. By repeatedly pressing the Tab key you can activate the
125
5
The X Window System
individual entry
fields
of an index tab. To reach the various index tabs, just keep
on pressing Tab until the heading of the current tab card is highlighted with
a
black
frame;
you
can
select
the
required
index
tab
using
the
cursor
keys,
or
← . After confirming your choice with ←- (= Enter ) this index tab is then
→ displayed. Alternatively
in SaX2 you canuse
a “virtual” mouse. To do this,
Shift ⇑ key
and
use
the
L
keyto
hold downthe
move the mouse
cursor
to
the
right,
J
to
the
left,
K
to
move
it
down
and
I
to
move
it
up.
Shift
⇑
and
A
produces
a
“click”
with
the
left
mouse
button,
Shift
⇑
and
S
one
with
the
middle button, and Shift ⇑ and D , a “click” with the right mouse button.
To select an entry in alist
press the Tab key again until the relevant box
box,
is highlighted. With ↑ and ↓ you can look
foran entry through the colored
highlighting, which is then set by pressing Enter , i.e. becomes active.
Tip
SaX2contains
itsown help system which can be reached by pressing the
keys Ctrl +
F1 . Here all the key combinations and mouse functions of
SaX2 are listed.
By pressing the middle mouse button you will reach a special menu via which
you can, among other things, take a closer look at the error log file of the X server.
This can be extremely helpful in finding errors. An explanation of the protocol
file of the X server, which is stored in the file /var/log/XFree86.0.log, can
be found in Section 5.3.1 page 139.
...and manual configuration
After selecting the item ‘Run SaX’, the welcome dialog of SaX2 appears. After
a few moments whilst SaX2 reads in a few data files, the program is ready. You
can choose from two index tabs, ‘Configuration’ und ‘Expert’. You also
have the option of reading in a configuration file which may have been created
in an earlier session.
Note
Via this item you can only read XFree86-4.0 configuration files.
XFree86-3.3.x configuration files cannot be read here.
Old
You can influence the further behavior of SaX2 via the items ‘Custom’ or ‘Easy’.
If you select ‘Custom’, you can, in addition to the settings offered in ‘Easy’, also
change the paths for fonts, mouse and keyboard manually. In ‘Easy’ these settings will be made automatically, or taken from the already configured system.
If you have chosen the item ‘Easy’, clicking on ‘Next’ will take you directly
to the dialog configuring the graphics driver and the menus to configure mouse,
keyboard and paths are omitted. The parameters needed to configure mouse and
keyboard will then be taken from the automatic hardware detection, which was
126
5.3
Configuration Using SaX2
Figure 5.2: SaX2: Welcome screen
run when SaX2 was started. For language settings the contents of the environment variable, LANG, are used. For the search paths a sensible default is chosen.
In Section 5.6.1 page 162 there is a description of how you can adjust the font
paths in your system. This is of special interest if you want to process foreign
language texts on your system.
Below is a description of the individual menu items if you have chosen the item
‘Complex’.
Mouse
After clicking on ‘Next’, the mouse configuration dialog will appear. If the
mouse does not seem to function correctly, you can, of course, also use the keyboard in this dialog,
see
Section 5.3 on the following page. To do this, click
repeatedly on theTab key
until the field ‘Mouse Tree’ is highlighted, and thus
activated. Press Enter and select ‘Vendor’ and ‘Name
thevendor and mouse
’, type, and confirm your choice with ‘OK’. With the ↓ and↑ keys
you can select
both a vendor and mouse type and confirm this with the Enter key.
If your mouse type is not listed here, you can also configure it manually. To
do this return to the dialog ‘Mouse settings’ and activate the selection box
‘Protocol’ in the field ‘Mouse Properties’. At this point you can choose
between activating the entry field yourself, or activating
the selection
list (the
small symbol to the right of the entry field). Press the space bar to call up the
selection list, or you can alternatively enter the X11 mouse protocol name in the
entry field. You could also use the item ‘Device’; here you need to select the
device file through which the connected mouse is reachable. If you have already
set up the mouse with YaST2, just select /dev/mouse, otherwise you can look
for the matching interface. Sensible settings are suggested in the selection box —
/dev/psaux for PS/2 mice, /dev/ttySx for serial ones and /dev/usbmouse
127
5
The X Window System
Figure 5.3: SaX2: mouse configuration
for USB mice. Refer to table 5.1 for an overview of the various mouse types and
their configurations in the X Window System.
Protocol used
mouse type
2 or 3 button mouse on the USB port or on the PS/2 mouse
connection.
IMPS/2
Wheel mouse with 3 or more buttons and one or more scroll
wheels, connected to the USB port or the PS/2 mouse connection.
Microsoft
2 and sometimes 3 button mice, connected to the serial port.
MouseSystems 3 button mice on the serial port.
Intellimouse Wheel mouse with 3 or more buttons and one or more scroll
wheels connected to the serial port.
Auto
Automatic detection of the serial mouse connected.
PS/2
Table 5.1: Different mice and the protocols used
For special settings you should take a look at the ‘Expert’ menu. Here two
settings deserve a special mention: activating the third mouse button via ‘Extensions’ and the item Wheel Mouse. If you only have a two button mouse,
then you should activate the item Emulate 3 buttons. Then you can simulate
a third mouse button by pressing on both mouse buttons simultaneously.
If you are left-handed and would like to switch the order of the mouse buttons,
you can do this later on. You don’t need to make any special settings for this
here.
If you want to use the wheel on your “Intellimouse” set, in Wheel Mouse,
the item Z Axis Mapping to Buttons. So that the X server “knows” what
128
5.3
Configuration Using SaX2
it should do when the wheel is moved, you must assign ‘Negative movement’
and ‘Positive movement’ to a mouse button. As buttons 1, 2 and 3 are already used for the normal buttons, you should use buttons 4 and 5 for ‘Positive’ and ‘Negative movement’. In the configured X Window System you
can then, with the program imwheel, package imwheel, series ap (applications
which do not need X11) pass on movements on the wheel to X11 applications.
You should also read Section 5.6 page 158.
Close this dialog by selecting the item ‘Next’.
Keyboard
As you might imagine, here you can set the keyboard language. If you have a
“Win95” keyboard, this has 105 keys, and so you should choose
Standard 105 Key in the menu ‘Keyboard Model’. Under ‘Keyboard Language’ you should set the appropriate language. If you have a keyboard without
“Windows”, then you should choose the 101/102 key keyboard. Even if you
have a laptop or a special type of keyboard with more or less keys than this, you
can still choose the 102 or 105 key keyboard, since the key codes generated will
match those of the standard PC keyboard in practically all cases.
If you click on ‘Apply’, the keyboard selected will be activated. In case you
don’t have an English keyboard, you should check to see if the keyboard
layout
is set with dead keys. You can check this by pressing the AltGr and + keys
together. If the tilde sign does not appear immediately, but only after pressing
the space bar, then the “dead keys”
activated.
are With dead
keys you can easily
add diacritical marks. Pressing AltGr and + and then n will produce “ñ” on
the screen.
You can toggle the dead keys via the ‘Expert’ menu under the item ‘Eliminate
Dead Keys’. Set this item to Yes to deactivate the dead keys. After configuring
the keyboard you can move to the next dialog on configuring search paths, by
pressing the ‘Next’ button.
Search paths
You can now change the search path for fonts and change various “server flags”.
To move a font directory up or down, mark it with the left mouse button, hold
the button down and move the line up or down, bringing this directory more to
the front or the rear of the search path. With the ‘New’ and ‘Delete’ buttons you
can add or remove directories accordingly.
Please note that the X server needs at least the directory with the “misc” character
fonts, otherwise you will receive an error message from the X server when you
try and start it. Section 5.6.1 page 162 describes how you can integrate further
fonts into the X Window System and process texts in other languages.
Leave this dialog by clicking on the item ‘Next’. The dialog for configuring the
graphics card will appear.
129
5
The X Window System
Configuring the graphics card(s)
Figure 5.4: SaX2: Configuring the graphics card(s)
SaX2 carries out a scan of the PCI and AGP bus and displays the graphics cards
found in the field ‘Card Tree’. As a rule, you will see the graphics card which
is installed in your machine. Via a database contained in SaX2, the matching
XFree86-4.0 driver module is selected and displayed in the field ‘Card properties’ under Driver. Under ‘Videoram’ you can define the video memory
size of the graphics card.
One innovation in XFree86-4.0 is the possibility of permanently allocating a
driver to a card in a specific slot. SaX2 can carry out this allocation: normally
this simply needs to be applied. For your information the slot is displayed in
‘Bus ID’. If, however, you later move the PCI graphics card to a different slot,
then you will have to configure it again, since the Bus ID has been changed. To
do this you can also set this item to Single, but you shouldn’t use this setting if
you have more than one graphics card in your computer.
Tip
ISA graphics cards cannot be detected automatically. They must be configured manually via ‘Select Model’ or by directly selecting a driver. Only
one ISA graphics card may be used in the same computer.
In ‘Select Model’ you can manually select the graphics card, if it was not
automatically detected. To do this click on ‘Select model’ and choose the
vendor and type of graphics card from the list.
Tip
If your PCI or AGP graphics card is not supported by XFree86, you still
almost always have the option of using the “Framebuffer driver”.
130
5.3
Configuration Using SaX2
If you have more than one graphics card installed, you can configure the other
cards by clicking on the next graphics card symbol in the selection list. If this
involves an ISA card, which cannot be automatically detected, you can add another graphics card by clicking on the ‘New’ button and configure this like the
primary graphics card, by clicking on the symbol in the selection list.
In ‘Expert’ you will find further settings. Options such as sw_cursor which
influence the behavior of the graphics driver can be set here under ‘Option’.
You normally only need special options if you can see presentation errors on the
screen. For this please refer to Section 5.3.3 page 136.
Configuring the desktop
If you conclude the graphics card configuration by clicking on ‘Next’, you are
given the chance to configure the screen. In this dialog you can adjust the monitor
used and its resolution and color depth.
Figure 5.5: SaX2: Configuring the monitor and the desktop
For most graphics cards XFree86-4.0 can itself read DDC data from the monitor
which it then displays in the selection dialog. You can see if automatic detection
has worked by clicking on the small “+” symbol next to the monitor display. If
the monitor was successfully “DDC probed”, DDC-probed will be shown in the
list alongside Vendor and Name. If the automatically set monitor frequencies do
not work, they can be set manually. To do this select the item ‘Select Model’.
A selection list appears with vendor names through which you can browse. If
you select a vendor, the model names which can be chosen appear on the righthand side. Highlight your monitor here and leave the dialog by pressing the‘OK’
button.
If you have a modern flat screen with LC display, or if you have or want to use
the screen installed in your laptop, you should choose the item LCD liquid crystal
131
5
The X Window System
display right at the top of the selection list. Through this the vertical frequency
is limited to 60 Hz, which is usually the ideal refresh rate for LC displays.
If your monitor is not listed and the automatic detection went wrong, you can still
enter your monitor data by hand. This is what the two fields are for in the section
‘Monitor properties’. Here you can set the allowed limits of the vertical
and horizontal frequencies. Normally this data will be listed in the “technical
data” section of the monitor users manual.
Caution
You should take special care when manually entering the frequency limits.
Above all, a too high horizontal frequency on some monitors can quickly
cause damage to your monitor.
As a rule the screen resolution and color depth is already suggested in
Color depth/Resolution. If you are using a TFT or flat screen with LCdisplay, then you should take care to select the screen resolution matching the
display resolution, otherwise the image will have to be scaled. SaX2 is able to
detect the resolution of a digitally connected TFT or DSTN display, and will
generally tell you the display’s resolution.
In setting the color depth, the settings 16, 256, 32768, 65536 and 16.7 million
colors at 24 and 32 bit are available. To get a decent picture, you should set at
least 256 colors. If however, you are using the“generic” VGA driver (XFree86
driver name vga, sometimes also referred to as the VGA16 server), then you can
unfortunately only use 16 colors.
With a color depth of 24 bit with 16.7 million colors you have a choice between
24 and 32 bpp bits per pixel. These two items only differ in the way that internal
graphics memory is used by the graphics card. The 4 bytes per pixel (32 bpp,
“padded pixel mode”) is more easily managed than the 3 bytes per pixel (24 bpp,
“packed pixel mode”). This means that graphic representation in 32 bpp mode
is usually somewhat faster than in the 24 bpp mode of the graphics card. Some
graphics cards cannot manage this “packed pixel mode” with 24 bpp. The 65535
colors setting usually represents a fairly good compromise between use of video
memory and display quality.
With the ‘Expert’ index tab you can make further settings. If you happen to
have an unusual resolution, you can specify it here by hand. You can also stop
SaX2 from calculating the screen parameters itself (this item is called
Calculate Modelines). If you deactivate this, the VESA modes programmed
into the X server are used which, however, are limited to a maximum of 75 Hz
picture refresh rate.
Tip
If an existing configuration was loaded when SaX2 was started, the modelines of this configuration are taken over and no new modeline parameters
are calculated. If you are adding a new mode to an existing configuration
and don’t want to use a VESA mode, then you must explicitly activate the
item Calculate Modelines.
132
5.3
Configuration Using SaX2
If you are using just one graphics card, clicking on ‘Next’ will take you directly
to the X server test. Otherwise you can specify the server layout in the next step.
Layout
If you have more than one graphics card installed you will have the chance, after
configuring the screen, to determine the screen distribution. You can specify
in this dialog which monitor represents which “screen” and in what order these
monitors are to be used (on top of or next to each other). The layout and the X
server are adjusted accordingly. The ‘One Screen/Xinerama’ setting allows
you to combine the two screens into one large desktop. This setting functions
only if you are using the same resolution and color depth for both screens.
Tip
If you are using a “Multihead Setup”, that is, a configuration with 2 or more
screens, then you should deactivate Xinerama the first time it is run, otherwise in the next step you will just get a fine-tuning dialog, which only allows
you to configure the first graphics card. You should therefore switch off
Xinerama in the first run through and only activate it later on.
Testing the configuration
Click — when you are ready — on the ‘OK’ button of the information box. After
a short time the window shown here will appear.
Figure 5.6: SaX2: Testing the configuration
On the right-hand side you will find the two key fields, Size and Position,
allowing you to adjust the picture. The arrow keys in the Size field allow you
133
5
The X Window System
to stretch or squeeze the picture horizontally and vertically. In the Position
field you can change the relative position of the picture on the screen. Use this
to adjust the picture to your own requirements.
As a control that the picture is correctly adjusted, you will see four squares in
the corner of the monitor screen. For an optimal picture position these should be
completely visible without any false colors or distortion.
Note
If the test picture seems to be very dark, if you see a bright line on the
edge of the picture, or if thepicture
overall
is much
too small, you should
immediately press the keys Alt +
Ctrl +
. This will take you back to
the SaX2 desktop configuration dialog. Then you must reduce the allowed
frequencies of the monitor.
7−→
After correcting the picture position via the SaX2 settings or via the correction
options provided by the monitor, you can end the test dialog.
To do this, select:
‘Save’: You will end your X Window Systemconfiguration and save the current
settings. You return to SaX2. It will then ask you if you want to leave the
program. The X Window Systemconfiguration is saved in the file /etc/
X11/XF86Config. At the same time the X server used is set. This means
that a link is created, /var/X11R6/bin/X, which points to the executable
program, /usr/X11R6/bin/XFree86.
‘Abort’: This takes you back to the configuration dialogs of SaX2 without
your settings being saved.
5.3.2
Reconfiguring
SaX2 also provides firm suppport if you want to customize a configured X server
to your own requirements.
For this you can start SaX2 while the X server is running. If you wish, SaX2 can
read the existing configuration file, /etc/X11/XF86Config, in which the X
Window System saves and analyzes the configuration data. Then it is no longer
necessary to go through the entire settings, from the mouse to the monitor, as
SaX2 takes over the existing, functioning configuration of the X server. SaX2
then makes this data available in the above described menus. Note that you must
explicitly select the reading in of the existing configuration.
However the user has all the freedom he wants in reconfiguring his X server.
SaX2 also provides a convenient interface to manage the amount of color depth
and resolutions of the graphics card, which can be quickly found via the dialog,
‘Desktop setup’.
134
5.3
5.3.3
Configuration Using SaX2
Troubleshooting
This section is intended to help you configure the X server if there are problems
getting the graphical interface to run at all, or if it runs but with a poor quality
display.
Here the main and most frequent problems are discussed which can occur when
configuring X with SaX2:
The graphics card is not supported
Using the framebuffer
Unfortunately there are not yet Linux drivers for all graphics cards. If your
card is not supported, you can still usually get a graphical display using the
framebuffer method. If your graphics card is VESA 2 compatible, this method
should certainly work.
The advantage of this is that it works with almost every modern graphics card and
also practically with every laptop. Because the graphics controller of the card is
bypassed, the display will be unaccelerated. The X server simply accesses the
framebuffer directly after the graphics mode is switched on when the kernel is
started.
This works in the following way: when it starts the Linux kernel calls up — even
before it switches to 32-bit protected mode — the VGA BIOS of the graphics
card and instructs this to switch to a specific VESA graphics mode. The text
depiction (that is the text console) then continues in this set graphics mode. The
VGA BIOS is written in 16 bit code and therefore cannot be called up while
the Linux system is running. As a result, this video mode specified at the start
remains until the Linux system is shut down.
In order to now use this VESA framebuffer, support must exist in the kernel for it
and the graphics mode must be selected when booting. The SuSE Linux kernel,
of course, contains support for the VESA framebuffer. However you need to
select the required graphics mode when booting the system. To do this enter the
parameter vga=x at the LILO boot prompt, where x stands for a value to be taken
from table 5.2.
Desired color depth
256 (8 bit)
32768 (15bit)
65536 (16bit)
16.7 Mill. (24bit)
Resolution in pixels
640x480 800x600
769
771
784
787
785
788
786
789
1024x768
773
790
791
792
1280x1024
775
793
794
795
Table 5.2: Possible VESA modes
You can also specify this parameter directly as a vga parameter in the file /etc/
lilo.conf. The line vga=x should be included as a separate line in this configuration file, not as part of the append line. The installation of LILO is described
in more detail in Section 4.4 page 94.
135
5
The X Window System
After starting the Linux system you should log in to the system as the user root
and start SaX2 in the following way:
earth:/root # sax2 -m 0=fbdev
Note that the 0 here is a “zero”, and not a capital “o”.
This instructs the X server to use the driver for the framebuffer. Since resolution, color depth and the frequency rate is fixed, you can — if you are satisfied
with mouse and keyboard settings — have SaX2 directly save the automatically
detected data and leave SaX2 again.
Using the VGA16 server
If your graphics card is not capable of any of the VESA modes, or if you have an
ISA card, you should still be able to configure it to run with the vga module. This
will be suggested to you if the graphics driver is not automatically detected. Select the vga driver in SaX2 in ‘Configure graphics card’ under ‘Driver’.
This will limit you in ‘Desktop’, to a resolution of 640x480 pixels with 16 colors (4 bit color depth). If your graphics card supports the VESA framebuffer,
the framebuffer method described above is usually preferable, because of this
limitation of the vga driver. To use the standard vga driver straight away when
starting SaX2 enter the following command:
earth:/root # sax2 -m 0=vga
As this parameter only defines which X server SaX2 is to use during configuration, it can be useful to start the X server with this option with a graphics card
which is supposed to be supported by XFree86.
In the case of certain “exotic” graphics cards, SaX2 may fail to start in the correct
mode initially: if so, do the configuration using the vga module, but then choose
the necessary options for the required driver module in the ‘Expert’ menu of
the ‘Graphics cards’ dialog.
Selecting the mouse directly when starting SaX2
If SaX2 is unable to detect your mouse automatically, you can specify the mouse
type when starting SaX2, thus avoiding the automatic mouse detection. For this,
there are two command line parameters to determine the mouse protocol and
port used. The -t parameter is used for defining the protocol used, and the -n
parameter for the device file of the mouse. The following example configures an
Intellimouse connected to the PS/2 port:
[email protected]:/root > sax2 -t imps/2 -n /dev/psaux
Refer to the available protocols shown in table 5.1 page 128 in Section 5.3.1
page 127 and the manpage on the configuration file of the X server, XF86Config.
Correcting various display errors
In general, SaX2 will configure the graphics card correctly: however there are
occasional cases where the display quality is poor. This can be corrected by
changing an option in the X server configuration file /etc/X11/XF86Config.
136
5.3
Configuration Using SaX2
This section aims to illustrate errors which occasionally occur when the X server
is running and also to provide possible solutions. As a rule the graphic depiction
is error-free after configuring with SaX2, but when using certain graphics cards
depiction errors may occur which can be removed using an option in the X server
configuration file, /etc/X11/XF86Config.
Sometimes depiction errors are also caused by hardware limitations; especially
if the graphics card uses cheap DRAM memory, it is possible that the bandwidth
of the memory is simply no longer adequate for high resolutions with 32 bpp and
high frequencies.
Sometimes optimized BIOS settings will get their “revenge”: Linux or the X
server does not “like” the BIOS setting Video memory cache mode which
other new BIOS versions provide. Everything functions normally in text mode,
but apparently the chip set of the computer then “optimizes” access to the input/output register of the graphics card which can completely mess up the picture with the wrong colors when the X server starts and sometimes cause a total
system crash.
If the X server does not start at all, this is almost always because of a syntax or
logical error in the configuration file /etc/X11/XF86Config and it is possible
that the hardware specified in the configuration file cannot be found in the computer. It can be useful to look at the X server logfile and refer also to Section 5.3.4
page 139 when doing this.
Solutions to various possible problems are outlined below.
• Many display problems are caused by the vertical synchronization frequency
(vsync) being set too high, which results in incorrect values for hsync and
DotClock.
A reduction of the picture frequency rate to 80 Hz, for instance, will still
produce a picture which doesn’t flutter, and which is also a great deal sharper
than one set at 160 Hz. At a picture frequency rate of 80 Hz the pixel rate is
only half of that at 160 Hz.
You should, therefore, try reducing the maximum vertical frequency rate
used. To do this, choose the ‘Monitor’ tab in SaX and, in the ‘Advanced’
section, set a lower maximum frequency rate. For modern monitors a normal
picture frequency rate lies between 80 and 90 Hz.
• Sometimes there are also problems with the “hardware cursor”. You will
see a square block or something which looks like a “barcode” where the
mouse should be. The solution to this: add the Option "sw_cursor" to
the Section "Device".
• The best place to look for information and hints on configuration is in the
README files which are sorted by chipset manufacturers’ names in the directory /usr/X11R6/lib/X11/doc/. The manpages of the X servers and
the XFree86 FAQ are also useful (http://www.xfree86.org). The SuSE
website also has information at:
(http://www.xfree86.org) and the SuSE pages for updates:
http://www.suse.de/en/support/xsuse/
137
5
The X Window System
The following table is ordered in terms of probability, i.e. as a rule you will be
successful with step 1, otherwise with the second step. Step 3 is usually a last
resort . . .
All the options are listed in the device section of the file /etc/X11/XF86Config.
• No mouse cursor, but a colored, square “barcode”.
1. Add the option sw_cursor to the Section "Device".
2. Add the option no_imageblt or no_bitblt.
3. Add the option noaccel.
• Picture is too narrow or squashed. The monitor settings are already at
their limits.
1. The frequency rate or the hsync frequency is probably set too high and is
at the limit of the monitor. Remedy: reduce the vsync and/or the hsync
frequency.
2. Adjust the picture with the program xvidtune. It is possible that just one
mode is not quite correct.
3. Add the parameters +hsync +vsync to the modeline and try replacing +
with -.
• When moving windows, stripes, “lumps” or parts of windows stay where
they are. They do not disappear even when the movement is stopped.
They only disappear when the desktop is refreshed.
1. Reduce the picture frequency rate or the resolution.
2. Depending on the chip set, use the relevant options from the README files
in /usr/X11R6/lib/X11/doc/. For example the options
fifo_conservative or slow_dram. Note: the options required depend
on the particular chipset.
3. The noaccel option, but possibly the options no_imageblt or no_bitblt
may be sufficient.
• “Noise” – Image interference when moving windows or viewing videos
which disappears when the image is stationary.
1. Reduce the frequency rate, color depth or resolution.
2. Reduce the frequency rate of the card, or add or remove wait states. This
sometimes works with set_mclk (not with all chip sets!). More detailed
information can be found in the README directory. Attention: this option
is dangerous, the card could be set at too high a frequency).
3. It is possible that the bus rate is set too highly. Check the bus rate on the
PCI/VLB or ISA bus.
• When starting XFree86, the screen turns black.
1. Reduce the frequency rate.
138
5.3
Configuration Using SaX2
2. Check the BIOS settings of the computer. Deactivate all “Optimization
settings” of the BIOS. Consult your mainboard manual if in doubt. Common culprits are the options Video memory cache mode,
AGP Aperture size and all options which control PCI bus access, such
as PCI Peer concurrency or similar. You will nearly always find these
settings in a menu called Advanced Chipset Features.
3. Consider other possible sources of error: check the system for IRQ conflicts (e. g. PS/2 mouse needing IRQ 12).
5.3.4
The X server logfile
To analyze problems with the X server there is a very detailed log file which
the X server creates when it starts. This file is created by the XFree86-4.0
X server according to the following pattern /var/log/XFree86.Display.
Screennummer.log. If you start just one X server (which is the normal case)
and this display is assigned the number “0”, the filename of this log file will usually be called /var/log/XFree86.0.log. Note that SaX2 here is an exception
to this rule: here, at least temporarily, two X servers are running (Display :0) for
the configuration dialogs and later a second one (Display :1) to test settings.
You should be aware that the format of this file has changed drastically compared
to XFree86-3.3.x. Now a much clearer distinction is made between information
messages, values taken from the configuration file, data originating from the
computer hardware, and warnings and errors.
SaX2 allows you to view the X server log file with the middle mouse button.
Here the various types of messages (error, informal, warning, etc.) are shown in
different colors. This helps you to find the problem quickly if the X server does
not start.
In general the beginning of such a log file appears as shown in 5.3.1.
XFree86 Version 4.0 / X Window System
(protocol Version 11, revision 0, vendor release 6400)
Release Date: 8 March 2000
If the server is older than 6-12 months, or if your card is
newer than the above date, look for a newer version before
reporting problems. (see http://www.XFree86.Org/FAQ)
Operating System: Linux 2.2.13 i686 [ELF] SuSE
Module Loader present
(==) Log file: "/var/log/XFree86.0.log", Time: Sat May 20 13:42:15 2000
(==) Using config file: "/etc/X11/XF86Config"
Markers: (--) probed, (**) from config file, (==) default setting,
(++) from command line, (!!) notice, (II) informational,
(WW) warning, (EE) error, (??) unknown.
(==) ServerLayout "Layout[all]"
(**) |-->Screen "Screen[0]" (0)
(**) |
|-->Monitor "Monitor[0]"
File contents 5.3.1: Extract from the X server log file
This provides you with the following information:
139
5
The X Window System
This is an XFree86 X server in version 4.0 compatible with X11R6.4 “vendor
release 6400”. The release date is 8th March, 2000.
The line Operating System: Linux 2.2.13 i686 [ELF] SuSE refers
to the system on which the X server was compiled. The kernel version and CPU
definition can thus be different from your own system.
After these version messages the first login entries appear which the X server
creates when it starts. First of all, is this the correct log file? Next to Time:
the time is specified when the log file was created. Sometimes you might be
searching in the wrong log file ;-)
The same thing is valid for the configuration file if you did not specify a different file at the command line, this will always be /etc/X11/XF86Config on a
normal SuSE Linux system.
The following table 5.3 explains the meaning of the two bracket characters at the
beginning of further lines:
Symbol
(==)
(--)
(**)
(++)
(!!)
(II)
(WW)
(EE)
Meaning
Defaults of the X server
Values taken from the system by automatic hardware detection.
Settings fixed in the configuration file.
Parameters which you have entered at the command line.
Here the X server tells you in detail what it “is doing”.
Version numbers of X server modules, etc. are usually recorded
as “informational messages”.
Warnings: here the X server tells you why it is not carrying out
certain actions specified in the configuration file or which should
be activated by default.
Error! These messages lead to the start procedure or the X server
crashing. Look out for lines in the log file starting with (EE) if
the X server does not start. You can remedy most errors yourself
by means of these messages.
Table 5.3: Message types in the X server log file
You can also check the log file within the SaX2 configuration program by pressing the middle mouse button. Errors and warnings of the X server are highlighted
in color. This file is also displayed if the X server which is called up by SaX2
for test purposes does not start or breaks off with an error.
If something unexpected happens when starting SaX2 or during the configuration
steps, then all errors and steps concerning SaX2 are logged in the file /var/
log/SaX.log. X server errors are logged, as described above, in the file /var/
log/XFree86.0.log. By means of these files you will find clues on how you
can carry on from here.
140
5.3
5.3.5
Configuration Using SaX2
Starting the X Window System
The X Window System is started with the command startx. A preconfigured GUI
for the fvwm window manager is provided for the sample user. We recommend
you starting the X Window System from this account, and not as ‘root’. X11
server error messages are saved in the ~/.X.err file. The startx command
has a few options; for instance, you can select 16 bit color depth by typing
[email protected]: > startx -- -bpp 16
141
5
The X Window System
5.4
Configuration Using SaX
The original version of SaX (SuSE Advanced X Configuration Tool) – as opposed to SaX2 – is the configuration tool for the versions 3.3.x of XFree86. If
you are using XFree86 version 4.0 you should use SaX2 as described above. If
for some reason you need to use XFree86-3.3.x, you should follow the instructions below.
Note
You have to start SaX (sax) as user ‘root’. You can also start SaX from
YaST : ‘System administration’ and then ‘Configure XFree86[tm]’
(cf. Section 3.6 page 73).
The program is started from the command line by typing:
earth:/root # sax
As soon as the program starts it looks for any PCI cards which are installed. If
a PCI graphics card is found, it will be identified and displayed in the program
under ‘graphics card’.
After the PCI scan, the main window is opened to present the tab windows for the
mouse (‘mouse’), keyboard (‘keyboard’), graphics card (‘graphics card’),
monitor (‘monitor’) and desktop (‘desktop’). (You can change to each window by simply clicking on the appropriate tab). SaX then loads its own hardware
database (this may take a few seconds). The data found during the system scan
will be presented in its respective categories; the relevant graphics card, for example, can be found in the tab window ‘desktop’.
SaX will do its best to recognize what hardware it can, but to be sure that the
configuration settings are correct, you should check them all and modify them if
necessary.
Essentially, the program provides you with five “index cards”, i.e. ‘Mouse’,
‘Keyboard’, ‘Graphics Card’, ‘Monitor’ and ‘Desktop’. All cards can be
accessed simply by clicking on the appropriate title (“tab” of the card in question).
If your mouse is not yetcorrectly
configured, you can still access SaX via the
keyboard. Pressing the Tab key repeatedly will cyclethrough
each of the entry
fields. To change to a different tab window, press Tab until the desired tab
window title is highlighted
with
a black frame; then you
can
select
the
desired
tab window using ← or → , and enter it by pressing ←- (= Enter ). In each
tab window there are a number of selection elements, such as buttons, listboxes
and entry fields. These
can also be accessed by keyboard. To use a button (e. g.
‘Apply
’),
press
Tab repeatedly until the desired button is highlighted. Pressing
or activates the button; the desired action is carried out.
←- To select an entry in alistbox,
push the Tab button until the desired box is high lighted. By
pressing
↑
or
↓
you
can
look
for
an entry by way of its coloring,
pressing Enter will then activate it.
142
5.4
Configuration Using SaX
The Mouse
The ‘Mouse’ tab window is the first to appear when the program starts (Figure 5.7).
Figure 5.7: SaX: Mouse settings
If you have already configured your mouse when first installing Linux, e.g. while
setting up gpm, these settings will be used by SaX and your mouse will work
immediately in the X Window System – then you can ignore this.
If you have not configured your mouse, you should do it now. Press Tab twice
and
choose
the
relevant
mouse
type
in
‘
Vendor’ (move through the list with
); use Enter to set the correct vendor name. Go to the selection list
↑ and↓ using Tab and choose the relevant type. If you press the ‘Apply’ button you can
check to see if your choice was correct. The mouse cursor should move across
the screen.
If you’re not sure exactly what mouse type you are currently running on your
system, your mouse is not included in the list, or if a serial mouse ‘Microsoft’
cannot run under the ‘Standard Mouse’ protocol, choose the sub-menu ‘expert’ to set the mouse protocol directly. There you can set further options, such
as the baud rate and “three-button emulation”.
Via ‘Expert’ the following tab windows are available:
‘driver’: If the vendor is not known, then the mouse protocol can be set here.
The device file must also be selected. If you have a bus mouse you can try
out the corresponding PS/2 variety.
‘Properties’: fine-tuning settings, determining how fast the mouse should re-
act.
‘options’ 3-button emulation, etc.
143
5
The X Window System
Figure 5.8: SaX: Expert Mouse Settings
‘Test’: You can test the mouse configuration using the lower part of the frame
‘Test field’ (Figure 5.8.) If the mouse has been installed correctly, the
mouse button symbols on the screen should react when you click on them.
The Keyboard
A Windows 95/98 keyboard with an English keyboard mapping has been set
as the default. (Figure 5.9 on the next page). If you want to you use another
keyboard, you must enter the correct settings, since the keyboard is one of the
few hardware components not to be recognized independently by the hardware
scan.
By comparing your keyboard with the ‘Keyboard Image’ shown on the screen
you will be able to find the right model connected to your system. Don’t forget to
set the ‘language’ to English, if this is not already the case. Next to the delete
tab there is a test field where you can check the settings made for the keyboard
by entering various characters and seeing if they come out properly.
The switch ‘Use "Dead" keys’ serves with e. g. German keyboards to enable
all signs on the keyboard buttons under X.
You probably do not need the settings in ‘Expert’ . . .
The changes are put into effect by pressing the ‘Apply’ button.
The Graphics Card
On the ‘card’ tab window, select the card vendors in the left hand list and the
card version in the right hand list (Figure 5.10 page 146). SaX tries to recognize
144
5.4
Configuration Using SaX
Figure 5.9: SaX: Keyboard
the graphics card independently, which nearly always works for PCI cards. The
utility accesses an extensive database of current hardware to achieve this, which
can also be found at http://cdb.suse.de/ . Hardware that has been found
will be highlighted in color.
Note
Sometimes a graphics card of the same series undergoes various “revisions”, in which the hardware has been changed (different Ramdac). So it
is possible that SaX may display values which are different to those in the
manual of the graphics card. In these cases you should use the details from
the hardware vendor’s manual. Select the ‘Expert’ button to do this.
There are advanced options hidden beneath the ‘Expert’ button (Figure 5.11
page 147). These are relevant if you choose the X server directly (‘Server
settings’). If you want to set memory size or specify the RAMDAC value or
if you would like to set a special RAMDAC or clock chip value (in ‘chipsets’),
these options are also important. If the screen image looks distorted – if, for example, during a move-window operation, the window fragments or the window
title suddenly blink – then you should reduce the RAMDAC value.
Some graphics cards need special ‘options’ which can be found in this expert
menu; normally they are not needed.
Tip
ISA cards will not be recognized “automagically”; for these, you have to
select the relevant server “by hand”.
145
5
The X Window System
Figure 5.10: SaX: Graphics Card
If you see the error message "The SVGA Server is not installed...",
you must install the above-mentioned package via YaST (see Section 3.4 page 66).
The Monitor
The monitor settings are the last great hurdle on your road to a running X server.
You find the same divisions in the left tab window list on ‘Monitor’ to choose
the monitor ‘Vendor’. Clicking one more option, you can choose your model
on the right hand list (‘Type’). Should you be unable to find your own monitor
on the list, you can still enter horizontal and vertical frequencies specific to your
monitor by pushing the ‘Expert’ button. Normally you should be able to find
these in your monitor handbook.
In case you do not have any monitor data available, SaX will set horizontal frequencies to 29-61 kHz and vertical frequencies will be set to 60-70 Hz. Most
monitors should not be harmed by these settings.
If the screen remains dark for more than a few seconds after starting the X
server
or
it
flickers
wildly,
you
should
shut
down
the
server
immediately
with
+
Ctrl Alt + ( denotes the “backspace button”) If you don’t, this might
damage to your monitor.
7−→
7−→
The Desktop
If your graphics card installation was successful, you will have a large number
of resolutions and color depths to choose from. They can be administered from
the ‘desktop’ menu (Figure 5.12 page 148).
The ‘desktop’ tab window might remind you of another operating system ;-)
146
5.4
Configuration Using SaX
Figure 5.11: SaX: Graphics Card – Expert Options
In this window you can choose a different resolution (‘resolutions’) for each
color depth (‘color’).
If you would like to set a list of several resolutions for a particular color depth,
you can do this in expert mode (‘Expert’, Figure 5.13 page 149).
On the tab window ‘Resolution’ you will see:
‘Resolution’ This tab window is divided into three sections:
‘Possible’ resolutions.
‘Current’ resolutions.
‘Colors’ the list of color depths.
First you should choose your preferred color depth on the vertical button
panel to the right (‘Colors’); the resolutions have to be adjusted to these as
well.
The X server can start in several color depths, e. g. in 8 bit color depth. 256
colors can be shown on the desktop. Each color depth, in turn, can have different screen resolutions, e. g. 800x600. Not all resolutions are available for
each color depth. Thus for some cards a resolution of 1600x1200 pixels at
32-bit color depth is not possible as too little graphics memory is available.
For 8 bit color depth there are several resolutions available, from 1600x1200
down to 640x480; they are listed in the
List’. You
‘Actual
Resolution
can change resolutions
by
pressing
Ctrl +
Alt +
+
to
cycle
forwards
through
the
list
or
Ctrl +
Alt +
-
to
go
backwards.
(you
must
use the
keys + and - on the number pad). The first entry in the list is always
chosen by the X server when it is initialized.
You must copy the desired resolution from the list of ‘possible’ resolutions
to the list of ‘current’ resolutions. First you click on the resolution to mark
it; then you click on the button ‘I’ to copy the desired resolution to the list of
‘current’ resolutions. By clicking ‘R’ you remove the current resolution.
147
5
The X Window System
Figure 5.12: SaX: Desktop
The sequence of ‘current’ list entries can be changed via the arrow buttons
at the lower end of the list window. First you mark the entry you want to
move and then you left-click the up or down arrow. In this way the entry
swaps places with its predecessor or successor.
When you are happy with your settings at 8 bit color depth, you can select
another color depth in the box on the right, such as 16 bit. Now you will
see a list of ‘possible’ resolutions at this color depth. They can be changed
in the same way as described above.
‘Virtual resolution’: this tab window lets you set the virtual resolution of
your desktop. If you want to configure a virtual desktop you need to increase
the values ‘Virtual X’ (= width) and ‘Virtual Y’ (= height). Generally,
this feature is not chosen by most people. Background information: the X
Window System is capable of defining a virtual desktop that is larger than
the actual screen size, for example, using a virtual resolution of 1152x864
with a screen resolution of 800x600.
‘Special’: the ‘special’ tab window allows user-defined entries. In addition
you can determine the ‘quality’ of the “modelines”, i.e. you can choose
between two different calculation methods.
Now you should set the default color depth with which the X server should start.
To do this you need to select the color depth you want in the ‘screen’ tab window (with ‘colors’) as your current color depth; once this is done you should
move to the next item on ‘Change current mode’; this should start the X
server check . . .
148
5.4
Configuration Using SaX
Figure 5.13: SaX: Screen
Testing the Configuration
After a short time a message box appears; if you are satisfied, click on ‘OK’. Then
a background image and a split window should appear; in the left half there is
information on your current resolution and on the horizontal and vertical monitor
frequencies.
In the right half you should see two button fields, ‘size’ and ‘position’, which
allow the image to be adjusted. The arrow boxes in ‘size’ allow the horizontal
and vertical image size to be increased or decreased; in the ‘Position’ box you
can change the position of the image relative to the monitor. Adjust the screen
image to suit you.
Small rectangular image controls can be found in all four corners of the screen
image. Ideally they should be all be visible and not display any distortion in
color.
Tip
You can only make fairly small monitor adjustments using SaX; it cannot
replace manual adjustment using the controls on the monitor itself !
After adjusting the screen image, there are two ways of closing the window:
‘Save’: End your X Window System configuration, saving the current settings.
This takes you back to the command line.
‘Cancel’: Interrupt your X server setup and discard the settings.
Press Alt + F1 if you want to return to the first console.
149
5
The X Window System
5.4.1
Reconfiguring
SaX can also be used to adjust an X server which is already running to your
specific needs.
SaX reads, in the existing file /etc/XF86Config, where the X Window System
stores and analyzes the configuration data. This is why you don’t really need to
make all the settings from the screen, since SaX adopts the existing, functioning configuration of the X server. SaX displays this data in the tab windows
mentioned above.
You are free to do as you want, however, in making new settings for your X
server configuration: you can select hardware from a comprehensive monitor
database, thereby better adapting the configuration to the monitor’s capabilities,
as well as adjusting the screen position.
SaX also provides a comfortable GUI to administer color depths and resolutions.
It is easily accessed, simply by clicking on the ‘screen’ tab window.
5.4.2
Troubleshooting
Here are the main and most frequent problems encountered when configuring X
windows with SaX:
• If the screen image flickers during the configuration test, or the image turns
black, you must shut down the X server immediately, since the monitor could
suffer damage if you continue to run the present configuration.
+ Alt + Press Ctrl You should select the ‘Monitor’ tab window and look for a different monitor, or enter the monitor data by hand; the procedure is the same if the image
begins to flicker while the screen is being adjusted.
7−→
• In particularly tricky cases, SaX has some command line options available,
such as:
--server vga16: This will start SaX with the VGA16 server instead of
the server appropriate for your card. This server should run on almost all
VGA cards. This server is automatically used if your graphics card is not
recognized, or if you have an ISA card.
Up-to-date documentation on SaX can be found in the directory /usr/share/
doc/packages/sax. If something unexpected happens when starting SaX or
during the configuration steps, then this will be logged in the files /root/
ServerLog and /root/StartLog. These files will provide you with clues
on how best to proceed.
150
5.5
5.5
Configuration Using xf86config
Configuration Using xf86config
In most cases, XF86Setup is superior to xf86config as a simple configuration
tool. There are, nevertheless, some rare cases where XF86Setup fails. If so, just
use xf86config, which almost always works.
XFree86-4.0 includes a similar text-based program, xf86config. At some points
this contains dialogs which have been somewhat modified and, of course, it
writes the configuration file to /etc/X11/XF86Config. In XFree86-4.0 however, the use of xf86config is usually not needed, since “problem” graphics cards
can also be configured with the “Framebuffer” or with the vga module as described in Sections 5.3.3 page 135 and 5.3.3 page 136.
Make sure you have the following information available:
• mouse type, port to which the mouse is connected and baud rate (the baud
rate is normally optional).
• specifications of the graphics card
• monitor data (frequencies, etc.)
If these settings are known, or you have your manuals at hand, you can start
configuring. Remember that you have to be ‘root’ to do this.
The configuration is started with:
earth:/root # /usr/X11R6/bin/xf86config
Mouse
After the welcome screen, you are asked about your mouse type. You are offered
the following selections (see Output 5.5.1:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
Microsoft compatible (2-button protocol)
Mouse Systems (3-button protocol)
Bus Mouse
PS/2 Mouse
Logitech Mouse (serial, old type, Logitech protocol)
Logitech MouseMan (Microsoft compatible)
MM Series
MM HitTablet
Output 5.5.1: Mouse selection for X
While selecting the mouse, you should bear in mind that many of the new Logitech mice are either Microsoft compatible, or use the MouseMan protocol. The
selection Bus Mouse refers to any bus mouse, including Logitech!
Selection is made by entering the relevant number. There may be a question
whether “ChordMiddle” should be activated. This is necessary for some Logitech mice or trackballs, to activate the middle mouse button.
Please answer the following question with either ’y’ or ’n’.
Do you want to enable ChordMiddle?
151
5
The X Window System
If you have a two-button mouse, you can emulate the third button by answering
‘y’ to the next question.
Please answer the following question with either ’y’ or ’n’.
Do you want to enable Emulate3Buttons?
The middle button is emulated by simultaneously pressing the two mouse buttons.
Next you must specify the mouse’s interface:
Now give the full device name that the mouse is connected to, for example
/dev/tty00. Just pressing enter will use the default, /dev/mouse.
Mouse device:
If you have already entered a port for your mouse during the system installation,
just enter /dev/mouse.
Keyboard
Next you are asked whether to assign Meta (ESC) to the left Alt-key and to
assign ModeShift to the right Alt-key.
Please answer the following question with either ’y’ or ’n’.
Do you want to enable these bindings for the Alt keys?
If you answer
keyboard via the right Alt , and
‘y’, you can access the German
the left Alt can serve as the meta key. 3
Monitor
Next you should specify your monitor. You should be extremely careful with
vertical and horizontal frequencies! These can be found in your monitor handbook.
Caution
Setting frequencies incorrectly can lead to irreparable damage to your monitor! The X Window System only addresses video modes which operate the
monitor in the given frequency range. Entering frequencies for which the
monitor was not designed can cause severe damage to it!
Some monitors are listed under /usr/X11R6/lib/X11/doc/Monitors 4 .
To enter the horizontal frequency, the following selection is displayed (see Output 5.5.2 on the facing page):
You should only choose one of the predefined modes if you are unsure of the settings for your monitor. Selection ‘10’ allows you to enter your own frequencies.
3 e. g.,
4 We
152
in Emacs.
cannot be held liable, of course, if this information is inaccurate!
5.5
Configuration Using xf86config
hsync in kHz; monitor type with characteristic modes
1 31.5;
Standard VGA, 640x480 @ 60 Hz
2 31.5 - 35.1;
Super VGA, 800x600 @ 56 Hz
3 31.5, 35.5;
8514 Compatible, 1024x768 @ 87 Hz interl.
(no 800x600)
4 31.5, 35.15, 35.5; Super VGA, 1024x768 @ 87 Hz il.,
800x600 @ 56 Hz
5 31.5 - 37.9;
Extended Super VGA, 800x600 @ 60 Hz,
640x480 @ 72 Hz
6 31.5 - 48.5;
Non-Interlaced SVGA, 1024x768 @ 60 Hz,
800x600 @ 72 Hz
7 31.5 - 57.0;
High Frequency SVGA, 1024x768 @ 70 Hz
8 31.5 - 64.3;
Monitor that can do 1280x1024 @ 60 Hz
9 31.5 - 79.0;
Monitor that can do 1280x1024 @ 74 Hz
10 Enter your own horizontal sync range
Enter your choice (1-10):
Output 5.5.2: Entry for the monitor’s horizontal frequency
The next screen asks you to enter your monitor’s vertical frequency (see Output 5.5.3). Again, using the known values (i.e., choice ‘5’) is preferable to using
one of the items ‘1’ to ‘4’.
1
2
3
4
5
50-70
50-90
50-100
40-150
Enter your own vertical sync range
Enter your choice (1-5):
Output 5.5.3: Vertical frequency choices
Next you should enter a name, vendor name and model for your monitor:
Enter an identifier for your monitor definition:
Enter the vendor name of your monitor:
Enter the model name of your monitor:
These are just descriptive names used to document your configuration
which do
not affect the configuration itself. Merely pressing Enter will select the default
values which are usually sufficient.
Your monitor configuration is now complete.
Graphics Cards / X server
Next you must specify your graphics card:
Do you want to look at the card database?
If you enter ‘y’, a selection of predefined cards is presented.
Here you can select your card by pressing the corresponding number. Do not
trust this list blindly, since there can be differences in clock chip and RAMDAC5
settings!
5 Random
Access Memory Digital-to-Analogue Converter.
153
5
The X Window System
This is why there is a menu item later to select a RAMDAC and a clock chip,
even though you have entered them already. Then the predefined settings for this
card will be presented as an extra option.
The card definitions contain information on clock chips, RAMDAC and the X
server to be used. Furthermore, some valuable information concerning the card
is written to the device section in XF86Config.
If your card is not listed, do not panic. You should switch back to the normal
configuration by selecting ‘q’. Only select one of the defined cards if it matches
your card exactly! Selecting a card with a similar name is not recommended.
Similar names do not necessarily refer to similar hardware.
Further information on how to configure your card is given in chapter Section 5.6
page 158.
After specifying your card, the X server is next. xf86config displays the choices,
as seen in Output 5.5.4.
Choice ‘5’ only appears if you have selected one of the predefined cards in the
previous step. In this case, choose ‘5’ to select the X server most suitable for
your card.
1 The XF86_Mono server. This a monochrome server that should work on
any VGA-compatible card, in 640x480 (more on some SVGA chipsets).
2 The XF86_VGA16 server. This is a 16-color VGA server that should
work on any VGA-compatible card.
3 The XF86_SVGA server. This is a 256 color SVGA server that supports
a number of SVGA chipsets. It is accelerated on some Cirrus and WD
chipsets; it supports 16/32-bit color on certain Cirrus
configurations.
4 The accelerated servers. These include XF86_S3, XF86_Mach32,
XF86_Mach8, XF86_8514, XF86_P9000, XF86_AGX, XF86_W32 and
XF86_Mach64.
These four server types correspond to the four different "Screen"
sections in XF86Config (vga2, vga16, svga, accel).
5 Choose the server from the card definition, XF86_S3.
Which one of these four screen types do you intend to run
by default (1-4)?
Output 5.5.4: Selecting an X server
When you have selected a server, you are asked if you want to create a symbolic
link to /usr/X11R6/bin/X. If you answer with ‘y’, you are asked whether you
want to put it in /var/X11R6/bin/X.
Do you want to set it in /var/X11R6/bin?
Reply with ‘y’, since it may not always be possible to write to /usr.
Afterwards, if you have selected ‘4’ (the accelerated servers) in the previous
selection, a menu is presented of all available accelerated X servers, as shown in
Output 5.5.5 on the facing page.
After selecting your X server, you now have to configure your graphics. First
you should specify the amount of memory the card has, as seen in Output 5.5.6
on the next page.
154
5.5
Configuration Using xf86config
Select an accel server:
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
XF86_S3
XF86_Mach32
XF86_Mach8
XF86_8514
XF86_P9000
XF86_AGX
XF86_W32
XF86_MACH64
Which accel server:
.
Output 5.5.5: Accelerated X server options
How much memory do you have on your graphics card:
1
2
3
4
5
6
256K
512K
1024K
2048K
4096K
Other
Enter your choice:
Output 5.5.6: Selecting video memory
Next, you must enter the name, vendor name and type for your graphics card.
These are merely descriptive
entries.
If you earlier selected a card from the
predefined list, pressing Enter will enter this as the default.
Enter an identifier for your graphics card definition:
Enter the vendor name of your graphics card:
Enter the model (board) name of your graphics card :
If you chose an accelerated X server, you must enter the RAMDAC settings.
This only applies to the S3 and AGX servers.
In most cases, simply pressing Enter will suffice. If you have selected a graphics card that supports a specific RAMDAC, this should be chosen here (see Output 5.5.7 on the following page).
After answering this question, you can enter a clock chip for accelerated cards,
if you have one (see Output 5.5.8 on the next page). Entering a clock chip avoids
clock lines, as the clocks needed can be programmed.
If a card without a clock chip is selected, just press Enter (thus not selecting a
clock chip). If a card has been selected, the clock chip is set as default (if there
is one).
If no clock chip has been set, xf86config suggests running X -probeonly to determine the clock timings supported. These are automatically written in XF86Config
in a separate clocks line.
Here, we must explain why the automatically defined settings can be really dan-
155
5
The X Window System
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
AT&T 20C490 (S3 server)
AT&T 20C498/21C498/22C498 (S3)
AT&T 20C505 (S3)
BrookTree BT481 (AGX)
BrookTree BT482 (AGX)
BrookTree BT485/9485 (S3)
Sierra SC15025 (S3, AGX)
S3 GenDAC (86C708) (autodetected)
S3 SDAC (86C716) (autodetected)
STG-1700 (S3)
TI 3020 (S3)
TI 3025 (S3)
att20c490
att20c498
att20c505
bt481
bt482
bt485
sc15025
s3gendac
sdac
stg1700
ti3020
ti3025
Output 5.5.7: Setting a RAMDAC
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
AT&T 20C490 (S3 server)
AT&T 20C498/21C498/22C498 (S3)
AT&T 20C505 (S3)
BrookTree BT481 (AGX)
BrookTree BT482 (AGX)
BrookTree BT485/9485 (S3)
Sierra SC15025 (S3, AGX)
S3 GenDAC (86C708) (autodetected)
S3 SDAC (86C716) (autodetected)
STG-1700 (S3)
TI 3020 (S3)
TI 3025 (S3)
Normal DAC
att20c490
att20c498
att20c505
bt481
bt482
bt485
sc15025
s3gendac
s3_sdac
stg1700
ti3020
ti3025
normal
Output 5.5.8: Setting the clock chip
gerous: if the card has a programmable clock chip, the X server, when probing,
cannot distinguish between the different clocks and only recognizes clocks 0, 1,
and sometimes, 2. All other values are more or less random numbers (normally,
clocks 0, 1, and 2 are repeated and are replaced by zeros).
All clocks apart from 0 and 1 are strongly influenced by the pre-programmed
clock chip. Thus, clock 2 could have a different setting when probed (and which
was written to the file XF86Config) than when the X server is later started. Then
all the timings would be wrong and the monitor could be severely damaged!
A good indication of a programmable clock chip (and the problems this might
entail) are many zeros or repeated timing values. Never ever write such values
to XF86Config!
To configure clock chips, follow these steps:
• The best way is to enter an existing (programmable) clock chip if there is one.
It will be programmed accordingly and your XF86Config will not contain
clock lines. You can compare chips on the card with the chips offered in the
menu. Most newer S3 cards have a programmable clock chip.
• If you do not have a programmable clock chip, you should launch X -probeonly
and compare these values with those in the manual. If these values correspond (±2), you should enter them in XF86Config. If there are no hints
in the manual, you can determine the values by running X -probeonly (this
156
5.5
Configuration Using xf86config
works best on an unloaded machine). Check whether the values are correct, since clock values cannot be determined for every card. (Many zeros
or repeating values are a sign of invalid settings.) Enter the correct values
into XF86Config. Do not omit any values; do not try to rearrange them or
change them in any way. The values have to be entered in their exact order.
Exception: if the P9000 server is used, the order is irrelevant; just enter the
modes for the desired clock in the clocks line.
• In general: if there is a programmable clock chip, there should be no clocks
line in XF86Config (exception, P9000).
For cards without a programmable clock chip, there should be a clocks line
in XF86Config. This avoids the tedious (and sometimes even dangerous)
testing at each startup. Furthermore, for cards with unreadable values, there
are no invalid values and there is no risk to your monitor.
After having read the previous section, if you want to let clocks be recognized
automatically, just answer ‘y’ to the following question:
Do you want me to run ’X -probeonly’ now?
Now the screen will turn black and then a list of probed clocks will be presented,
or a message will appear that no clocks could be found. If you have selected a
clock chip, this question will not appear, since the clocks are then programmed
automatically. In this case, this section is skipped.
Caution
If the previous question has been answered with ‘y’ and the screen remains
black
for morethan
30
seconds,
you
should cancel testing immediately with
Ctrl
+
Alt
+
←
,
or
Ctrl
+
. If this does not work, switch off the
c monitor and the computer to prevent the hardware from being damaged!
Saving your Configuration
Now the configuration file has to be written. It is recommended that you write
it to /etc/XF86Config to ensure that, even in a networking environment, each
machine has its own configuration file—even if they share the /usr file system.
xf86config first suggests that it should write XF86Config to the current directory. You should answer ‘no’ to this:
Do you want it written to the current directory as ’XF86Config’?
Then you are asked where to save your configuration:
Please give a path + filename to write to:
Here, you should enter: “/etc/XF86Config”.
Now xf86config exits to the command line. This completes the configuration of
the X Window System.
157
5
The X Window System
5.6
Optimizing the Installation of the X Window
System
This section describes the configuration file, /etc/X11/XF86Config. Each
section starts with the keyword Section <name of section> and ends with
EndSection. Below there is a rough outline of the most important sections.
Afterwards you will learn how to integrate additional fonts, how you can configure input devices and how 3D acceleration is implemented. This is also managed
in certain sections of the XF86Config file, of course, although integrating an
additional font requires the help of external programs, which are included with
SuSE Linux or are part of the default installation. The methods discussed here
aim to illustrate the possibilities available and serve as an incentive, but they do
not claim to cover all eventualities.
The programs SaX2 and xf86config (for XFree86-4.0) create the file XF86Config,
by default in /etc/X11. This is the primary configuration file for the X Window
System. You can find all the settings here concerning your graphics card, mouse
and monitor.
XF86Config is divided into several sections, each one dealing with a certain
aspect of the configuration. A section always has the same form:
Section <name of section>
entry 1
entry 2
entry n
EndSection
The following types of sections exist:
Files
ServerFlags
InputDevice
Monitor
This section describes the paths used for fonts and the
RGB color table.
General switches are set here.
Input devices are configured in this section. In contrast to
XFree86-3.3, both keyboards and mice as well as special
input devices (touch pad, joysticks etc.) are configured
via this section. Important terms here are Driver and the
options which are defined by Protocol and Device.
Describes the monitor used. The individual elements of
this are the name, which is referred to later in the Screen
definition, the bandwidth and the allowed sync frequencies (HorizSync and VertRefresh). Settings are given
in MHz, kHz and Hz. Normally, the server refuses any
modeline that does not correspond with the specification
of the monitor. This is to prevent too high frequencies
from being sent to the monitor by accident.
Table 5.4: continued overleaf...
158
5.6
Optimizing the Installation of the X
Window System
The modeline parameters are stored here for the specific
screen resolutions. These parameters can be calculated by
SaX2 on the basis of the values given by the user and normally do not need to be changed. You can intervene manually at this point, however, if, for example you want to connect a fixed frequency monitor. An exact explanation of
the individual parameters would be too much for this book.
You can find details on the meaning of individual number
values, however, in the HOWTO file /usr/share/doc/
howto/en/XFree86-Video-Timings-HOWTO.gz.
Device
This section defines a specific graphics card. It is referenced by its descriptive name.
Screen
This section puts together a Driver (e. g., vga2), a
monitor and a Device to form all the necessary settings
for XFree86. In the Display subsection you can specify
the size of the virtual screen (Virtual, the ViewPort and
the Modes) used with this virtual screen.
ServerLayout This section defines the layout of a single or multihead
configuration. The input devices InputDevice and the
display devices Screen are combined into one section.
Modes
Table 5.4: Sections in /etc/X11/XF86Config
We will now take a closer look at Monitor, Device and Screen. Further
information on the other sections can be found in the manpage for XFree86
(man XFree86) and manpage for XF86Config (man XF86Config).
There can be several different Monitor sections in XF86Config. Even multiple
Screen sections are possible; which one is started depends on the server started.
Screen Section
First we will take a closer look at the screen section. As mentioned above, this
combines a monitor with a device section and determines which resolution using
which color depth, should be used.
A screen section might look like the example in File contents 5.6.1 on the following page.
The line Identifier (here Screen[0]) gives this section a defined name with
which it can be uniquely referenced in the following ServerLayout section.
The lines Device and Monitor, specify the graphics card and the monitor which
belong to this definition. These are just links to the Device and Monitor sections
with their corresponding names or “identifiers”. These sections are discussed
later in more detail.
Using DefaultColorDepth, you can select which color depth mode the server
will start with if this is not explicitly stated.
159
5
The X Window System
Section "Screen"
Driver
"accel"
Device
"Miro Crystal 40SV"
Monitor
"EIZO T563-T"
DefaultColorDepth 16
Subsection "Display"
Depth
8
Modes
"1024x768" "800x600" "640x480"
ViewPort
0 0
Virtual
1024 768
EndSubsection
Subsection "Display"
Depth
16
Modes
"1280x960" "1152x864" "1024x768" "800x600"
ViewPort
0 0
Virtual
1280 960
EndSubsection
Subsection "Display"
Depth
32
Modes
"1024x768" "800x600" "640x480"
ViewPort
0 0
Virtual
1024 768
EndSubsection
EndSection
File contents 5.6.1: An example of the screen section in /etc/XF86Config
There is a Display subsection for each color depth. Depth assigns the color
depth which is valid for this subsection. Possible values for Depth are: 8, 16,
24 and 32. Not every X server supports all these modes. For most cards, 24 and
32 are basically the same, some take 24 for packed-pixel 24bpp mode, whereas
others choose 32 for padded-pixel mode.
After the color depth, a list of resolutions is set (Modes). This list is checked
by the server from left to right. For each resolution, a suitable Modeline is
searched for, which has to correspond to one of the given clock rates or a clock
rate to program the card.
The firstresolution found is the so-called Default mode. With Ctrl + Alt
+
gray
+
,
you
can
switch
to
the
next
resolution
in
the
list
to
the
right,
with
Ctrl
+ Alt + gray - , to the left, thus enabling you to vary the resolution while X
Windows is running.
The last line of the Display subsection with Depth 16 refers to the size of
the virtual screen. The maximum possible size of a virtual screen depends on the
amount of memory installed on the graphics card and the desired color depth, not
on the maximum resolution of the monitor. Since modern graphics cards have a
large amount of video memory you can create very large virtual desktops. You
should note, however, that you may no longer be able to use 3D functionality if
you fill practically the entire video memory with a virtual desktop. If the card
has 16 MB video RAM, for example, the virtual screen can be up to 4096x4096
(!) pixels in size at 8-bit color depth. Especially for accelerated cards, however,
it is not recommended to use up all your memory for the virtual screen since this
memory on the card is also used for several font and graphics caches.
160
5.6
Optimizing the Installation of the X
Window System
Device Section
A device section describes a specific graphics card. You can have as many device
entries in XF86Config as you like, as long as their names are differentiated,
using the keyword Identifier. As a rule — if you have more than one graphics
card installed — the sections are simply numbered in order the first one is called
Device[0], the second one Device[1] etc. In the file 5.6.2 you can see the
section from the Device section of a computer in which a Matrox Millenium
PCI graphics card is installed.
Section "Device"
BoardName
"MGA2064W"
BusID
"0:19:0"
Driver
"mga"
Identifier
"Device[0]"
VendorName
"Matrox"
Option
"sw_cursor"
EndSection
File contents 5.6.2: The device section of the file /etc/X11/XF86Config
If you use SaX2 for configuring, then the device section should look something
like the above diagram. Both the Driver and BusID of course are dependent on
the hardware installed in your computer and are detected by SaX2 automatically.
The BusID defines the PCI or AGP slot in which the graphics card is installed.
This matches the ID which is displayed by the command lspci. Note here that the
X server wants details in decimal form, while lspci displays these in hexadecimal
form!
Via the Driver parameter you can specify the driver to be used for this graphics
card. If the card is a Matrox Millenium then the driver module is called mga. The
X server then searches through the ModulePath defined in the Files section in
the drivers subdirectory. In a standard installation this is the directory /usr/
X11R6/lib/modules/drivers. For this purpose simply _drv.o is added to
the name, so in the case of the mga driver the driver file mga_drv.o is loaded.
The behavior of the X server or of the driver can also be influenced through
additional options. An example of this is the option sw_cursor which is set
in the device section. This deactivates the hardware mouse cursor and depicts
the mouse cursor using software. Depending on the driver module, you have
various options available which can be found in the description files on the driver
modules in the directory /usr/X11R6/lib/X11/doc. Generally valid options
can also be found in the manpage for XF86Config (man XF86Config) and
manpage for XFree86 (man XFree86).
Monitor Section
Monitor sections each describe, in the same way as the device sections, one
monitor. The configuration file /etc/X11/XF86Config can again contain as
many Monitor sections as you want in XF86Config. The server layout section
specifies which monitor section is relevant.
161
5
The X Window System
The same applies for monitor definitions: they should only be set by experienced
users. A critical part of the monitor section is the modelines which set horizontal and vertical timings for the appropriate resolution. The monitor properties,
especially the allowed frequencies, are stored in the monitor section.
Caution
Unless you have an in-depth knowledge of monitor and graphics card functions, nothing should be changed in the modelines, since this could cause
severe damage to your monitor!
For those who may want to develop their own monitor descriptions, the documentation in /usr/X11/lib/X11/doc might come in handy. The section
[FCR93] deserves a special mention. It describes in detail how the hardware
functions and how modelines are created.
Luckily a “manual” setting of the modelines is hardly ever needed nowadays.
If you are using a modern multisync monitor, the allowed frequencies and optimal resolutions can, as a rule, be read directly from the the monitor by the X
server via DDC, as described in the SaX2 configuration section. If this is not
possible for some reason, you can also use one of the VESA modes included in
the X server. This will function with practically all graphics card and monitor
combinations.
5.6.1
Inserting Additional (True Type) Fonts
A standard X11R6 X server installation also includes a large number of fonts.
These can be found in the directory /usr/X11R6/lib/X11/fonts, each divided into logically connected groups in subdirectories. Make sure that only
subdirectories of the X server are used which –
• are entered in the files section, Files of the file /etc/X11/XF86Config as
FontPath.
• contain a valid fonts.dir file.
• were not closed while the X server was running using the command xset −fp.
• or which were started while the X server was running using the command
xset +fp.
Since version 4.0, XFree86 can use not only its own format Type1 (a PostScript
format) for scalable fonts and pcf for bitmap ones, but also the ttf (True Type
font) of this file format. As described in Section 5.2 page 122, this support is
provided via loadable modules of the X server. Thus you can also use directories
containing True Type fonts together with the X server. To do this, hardly any
preparation is needed.
A big advantage of most True Type fonts, apart from their very good scalability,
is that these fonts almost always contain more than the normal 255 characters
162
5.6
Optimizing the Installation of the X
Window System
of the font for western Europe coded in “iso-8859-1”. With these fonts you can
display Cyrillic, Greek or eastern European languages without any problem, and
with special software, even Asian languages.
This description is essentially about the use of fonts as 8-bit character sets. If
you want to use characters of Asian languages (Japanese, Chinese, etc.), you can
use special editors which are also available in SuSE Linux.
An 8-bit character set contains 255 characters and basically consists of the USASCII character set, which defines only the first 128 of 255 possible characters,
to be able to expand further characters. One text character thus occupies 8-bits in
the computer memory. As 127 characters are certainly not enough to record the
special characters, for example, of all European languages, the various languages
are combined into groups and this group is then given a short name. The relevant
character set is named according to the appropriate norm as the “iso-8859-x”
character set, where by the x stands for a number from 1 to 15. The exact order
of characters in the iso-8859-1 character set can be found from the manpage
for iso-8859-1 (man iso-8859-1).
The more well-known codings are listed in table 5.5 : further ones can be taken
from the above-mentioned manual page.
Font
iso-8859-1
iso-8859-2
iso-8859-5
iso-8859-7
iso-8859-15
Supported regions, contains special characters
West European languages: Spanish, German, French,
Swedish, Finnish, Danish and others
Central and Eastern Europe: Czech, Rumanian, Polish, German and others
Cyrillic characters for Russian
Greek characters for Greek
As iso-8859-1, but with characters for Turkish and the Euro
sign.
Table 5.5: Important font codings
The user must then — depending on the language used — select the matching
coding. Especially when transferring texts between different computers, the coding used must also be transferred. The advantage of this procedure is obvious:
To receive support for regional special characters you only need to select the correct coding and immediately (nearly) all programs will be able to portray these
special characters, since (nearly) all programs use an 8-bit value (one byte) to
represent a text character. If the wrong coding is chosen then the special characters will be wrongly depicted. With most X applications, as well as with the
KDE desktop, you can usually select the coding of the character set when you are
configuring the font to be used. In X applications the coding is usually referred
to as Encoding.
The disadvantage of this method is that some language combinations are impossible: You can not, for example, easily write a German text with umlauts in
which you mention Russian place names in Cyrillic.
This dilemma can only be solved using a different approach, with the use of
Unicode. Unicode codes characters — differently to ASCII — not with one but
163
5
The X Window System
with two or even more bytes, allowing considerably more characters to be represented. Only if you use Unicode can you depict Asian languages with more
than 127 characters, such as Chinese, Japanese or Korean, on the computer. The
disadvantage of this method is that most existing software cannot handle these
characters and that you can only read or write texts yourself with Unicode characters using special software. If you want more information on using Unicode
fonts in Linux, take a look at the URL http://www.unicode.org. It is expected that in future more and more programs will support Unicode characters.
In SuSE Linux there is the program yudit to enter texts in Unicode. The program yudit can be found in package yudit, series xap or after installation via
the SuSE menu, under Office and then under Editors.
After these observations, we now have a step by step description of the installation of additional fonts, using the example here of True Type fonts.
Locate the fonts that you want to install in your X Window System. If you have
licensed True Type fonts then you can simply use these on your system. Mount
the partition containing these fonts.
You should create a font directory — if this does not yet exist — and change to
it. SuSE Linux already has a directory called /usr/X11R6/lib/X11/fonts/
truetype, you can copy the relevant fonts to this directory.
earth:/root # cd /usr/X11R6/lib/X11/fonts/truetype
Create links to the ttf files and create the font directory. Note that for True Type
fonts you need a special program called ttmkfdir, package ttmkfdir, series xap
to create the file fonts.dir. Traditional X fonts are included using the command mkfontdir. Instead of the path /path/to/the/fonts, set the corresponding path in which these fonts are located.
earth:/usr/X11R6/lib/X11/fonts/truetype #
ln -s /pfad/zu/den/fonts/*.ttf .
earth:/usr/X11R6/lib/X11/fonts/truetype #
ttmkfdir -o fonts.dir
If the X server is already running, you can now make the fonts dynamically
available. To do this enter:
[email protected]:/home/newbie > xset +fp /usr/X11R6/lib/X11/fonts/truetype
Tip
The xset command accesses the X server via the X protocol. It must therefore have access permissions for the X server currently running. This is the
case, for example, if the user newbiehas started the X server. You can find
more on this in the manpage for xauth (man xauth)
To set up the fonts permanently you should add this search path to the XF86Config
file. You can use SaX2 to do this. To change the fonts path you must select the
‘Custom’ configuration mode of SaX2. In ‘Path dialog’ you can add the
directory, with ‘Add’, to the directories already listed.
You should test if the fonts were set up correctly. To do this use the command
xlsfonts. If the fonts are correctly installed, the list of all installed fonts, including
164
5.6
Optimizing the Installation of the X
Window System
the newly installed True Type Fonts, is displayed.You can also use the KDE
program, kfontmanager, which displays the installed fonts with an example text.
[email protected]:/home/newbie > xlsfonts
These newly installed fonts can then be used in all X applications.
5.6.2
Setting up input devices
If you wanted to describe all the possible settings of input devices you could
write a whole book on it, simply because there are a huge number of input devices available in the computer world.
The following section will try to give you a few recipes with which you can
configure these input devices. The somewhat abstract term “input devices” refers
to the mouse and keyboard, but also to touch pads, etc. Look for the relevant
heading below to find more information on your relevant topic.
You can, of course, find more detailed information in the X server documentation, especially in the manpage for XF86Config (man XF86Config).
Mouse
If you have set up the mouse with SaX2, then you can also use the
basic functionality. You might have a mouse with a wheel (a so-called “wheel
mouse”), in which case you would like to use this wheel in X applications, e.g.
for scrolling. If you have such a wheel mouse with SaX2 as described in Section 5.3.1 page 127, with the extended settings in the SaX2 mouse menu, ‘wheel
mouse’, then movements on the wheel are passed on to applications as movements on buttons 4 and 5. Unfortunately, only a few X applications can handle
this. To be able to use the wheel in all programs, you just need to install the
program package imwheel, series ap, in the running X server.
Wheelmice
You can do this in the file ~/.xinitrc. You can insert the program command,
for example directly under the commentary line finally start the window
manager. This small utility converts the “mouse clicks” which are produced by
moving
thewheel, to configurable key clicks. These are preconfigured to PgUp and PgDn , the program can also be configured via the file /etc/imwheelrc.
In this way you can operate every X program which can be used via the keyboard, with your wheel mouse as well. If you copy the configuration file to
~/.imwheelrc, then you can also make changes as a normal user, not just as
‘root’.
To swap the left and right mouse
button functions, you can enter the following command:
Using the mouse for left-handed people
[email protected]:/home/newbie > xmodmap -e "pointer = 3 2 1"
You can also include this command in the file ~/.xinitrc.
165
5
The X Window System
It is no problem if you want to include a second
mouse or a touch pad. Again, we would advise you to use SaX2. Chose the
‘Custom’ configuration mode and in the ‘mouse’ menu, add a further mouse
symbol, using the ‘New’ button. This second mouse will not be configured automatically, but you can enter the data yourself by hand. Under ‘Drivers’ you
can chose the relevant driver mouse if this is another mouse, or you can select
one of the drivers listed for touch pads. Under ‘Protocol’ and ‘Connection’,
the procedure is similar. The setting ‘Protocol’ only makes sense if you are
using the mouse driver. Otherwise you should select the pads type settings in the
Expert dialog. If you have a touch pad driver, select None in the ‘Protocol’
section.
In the ‘Expert’ menu then choose additional options in ‘Miscellaneous’. The
option Send Core Events deserves special mention here; if you activate this
action you can use input devices in a parallel fashion. Otherwise you can switch
between the two input devices using the command xsetpointer. You can use the
command
Two mice or a touch pad
[email protected]:/home/newbie > xsetpointer -l
to have a list of possible input devices displayed.
Keyboard
By nature there is not as much to write about the subject of “Keyboard” as there
is on other input devices. Usually there is nothing special to configure here.
The following programs and files can however be useful in certain cases: To
make changes or just to test the keyboard layout during operation there is the program xkeycaps, package xkeycaps, series xap . In the file ~/.Xmodmap you
can then save changes permanently to individually changed characters. For the
format of this file, see the manpage for xmodmap (man xmodmap).
In KDE the program kikbd (“International keyboard layout”) is available in the
‘System’ menu of KDE. With this you can switch very conveniently between
different keyboard layouts. This program is very useful if, for example, you
want to use an English keyboard for programming (here the brackets {} and []
are much more easily accessible) and a German keyboard to write texts.
5.6.3
3D acceleration
With a number of graphics cards it is now possible to use 3D acceleration with
XFree86. Please note that a number of 3D drivers are still at a beta stage!
Unfortunately the newly introduced “DRI” Direct rendering infrastructure in
XFree86-4.0 can only be used with the “Hacker kernel versions” 2.3. This DRI
ensures that the X server can access the 3D acceleration functions of the graphics
card directly with kernel support.
XFree86-3.3.x does not use any special kernel module for 3D support. Here there
is a server module called glx.so which is configured in the Modules section of
the file /etc/XF86Config. If you have not already activated 3D support during
166
5.6
Optimizing the Installation of the X
Window System
installation with YaST2, install the matching 3D module for your graphics card,
using YaST. The module can be found in the series x3d.
This module provides support for 3D hardware acceleration. In the file /etc/
XF86Config — if that was not already set up during installation — add the line
Load ”glx.so” in the ”Modules” Section. This module ensures that the X
server understands the 3D commands and can interpret them correctly. A similar
procedure is used in XFree86-4.0, only here you must omit the ending .so, as
this ending is added automatically by the X server.
The 3D commands are then used by the OpenGL-compatible MESA graphics
library. This library is in each case — always matching the graphics cards in
question — contained in the same package as the glx module for the X server
and accesses directly this 3D extension of the X server. This library therefore
does not need to be installed again separately. Strictly speaking, the 3D support
consists of 2 parts: a “shared library” which is installed in the system and which
is used by applications like other shared libraries, and a modular extension of the
X server.
Installed 3D applications can now directly use acceleration functions. A number
of demo programs can be found in the package glutdemo, series x3d. After
installing 3D acceleration, you can try for example, the following command in
an xterm:
[email protected]:/home/newbie > /usr/share/glutdemo/demos/atlantis/atlantis
167
5
168
The X Window System
6
Linux and Hardware
6 Linux and Hardware
6.1
Preliminary Notes
It is now possible to integrate almost all hardware components into a Linux system with little (or more) trouble. How this is achieved in individual cases and
which software is available is the subject of this chapter. For problems involving
printing, see Chapter 8 page 201. PCMCIA hardware is described in Chapter 7
page 187.
6.2
Cards
In a standard PC, normally the PCI (“Peripheral Component Interconnect”) bus is
used. Most times the ISA (“Industry Standard Architecture”) bus is still present
in systems.
The AGP (“Accelerated Graphics Port”) is an exception to this, as devices on
this port are also visible on the PCI bus. They are treated logically in exactly the
same way as PCI bus cards. PCMCIA bus cards are found mostly in portable
computers such as laptops and notebooks. These cards are described in Chapter 7 page 187.
6.2.1
PCI and ISA Cards
We shall now take a closer look at PCI and ISA bus cards. The configuration of
these cards will then be explained using sound cards as an example.
PCI cards
PCI bus cards normally don’t need to be configured at all by the user. The agreement on the PCI bus standard was an attempt to remove many restrictions of the
old bus system. In this respect, a sensible automatic configuration of the cards
was planned. Each PCI card is activated by the computer’s BIOS when booting.
In many cases you can influence the distribution of the interrupts through settings in the computer BIOS. When Linux starts, it reads the configuration of the
PCI devices directly from the PCI BIOS and, from this point on, uses this data
for all information about the PCI subsystem.
With the command
earth:/ # lspci -tv
169
6
Linux and Hardware
you can be shown a list of all the devices on the PCI bus recognized by Linux;
see output 6.2.1.
-[00]-+-00.0 Intel Corporation 440BX/ZX - 82443BX/ZX Host bridge
+-01.0-[01]----00.0 Nvidia Corporation Riva TNT
+-04.0 Intel Corporation 82371AB PIIX4 ISA
+-04.1 Intel Corporation 82371AB PIIX4 IDE
+-04.2 Intel Corporation 82371AB PIIX4 USB
+-04.3 Intel Corporation 82371AB PIIX4 ACPI
+-06.0 Adaptec 7890
09.0 Digital Equipment Corporation DECchip 21140 [FasterNet]
Output 6.2.1: Output of the command lspci -tv
In the following subsection we will also configure a PCI sound card.
ISA cards
The ISA card is the oldest form of PC-compatible card. The bus is 8 or 16 bits
wide, and has a maximum frequency of 8 MHz. Many motherboards provide
the option of increasing the frequency of the ISA bus – but this often leads to
problems. ISA bus cards can be divided into three categories:
Legacy cards: These cards must be configured entirely by hand. Resources
such as I/O addresses, interrupts and DMA channels must be set through
jumpers or microswitches on the cards themselves. You must also ensure
that resources such as IRQ or DMA channels are not used by two or even
more cards simultaneously. Therefore the configuration of such cards often
turns out to be somewhat difficult.
Jumperless cards: Jumperless cards, compared to the first generation of ISA
cards, have the advantage that the setting of resources is no longer made via
jumpers, but via a special configuration program. These programs, however,
are usually only available for DOS, and thus cannot be used in Linux.
PnP cards: Plug and Play cards are the logical progression from jumperless
cards. These cards contain data on their configuration and a list of possible
configurations. A special program or a driver can now query the PnP cards
in the system and configure all cards so they do not conflict with each other.
If a card has not been configured, then in practice it is not available to the
system.
To configure PnP cards in Linux running a 2.2.x kernel, the package isapnp from the series ap is used. This package contains the two programs,
pnpdump and isapnp.
How are PnP cards activated with isapnp tools?
Proceed as follows:
• Change to the user ‘root’.
170
6.2
Cards
• If the file isapnp.conf already exists in the directory /etc, you should
first make a backup copy by changing its name.
earth:/ # mv /etc/isapnp.conf /etc/isapnp.conf.bak
• By entering
earth:/ # pnpdump -c > /etc/isapnp.conf,
you will create the file /etc/isapnp.conf. The parameter -c ensures that
pnpdump prepares the output file in such a way that the PnP devices are
activated immediately.
• If you enter
earth:/ # isapnp /etc/isapnp.conf,
the PnP cards in your computer will be activated. – In SuSE Linux this is
activated automatically each time the system is booted.
Possible sources of error
Symptom: pnpdump gives the output: "No boards found". It may also be
the case that one or more of the installed ISA PnP cards cannot be recognized.
Possible Explanations:
• There are no PnP cards installed on your system: check which cards are
installed on your system and read the documentation about them. If necessary, ask the dealer from whom you bought your computer which cards
are installed on it.
• The cards are defective: check if the cards are correctly positioned in the
slots. See if the cards work correctly under a different operating system.
• There are certain cards which can either be run as ISA PnP cards, or which
can be allocated fixed resources. (Example: a number of 10 MBit NE2000
ISA Ethernet cards). Usually you can switch between the two modes
using a DOS program.
Depending on the configuration of such cards, these do not appear in the
output of pnpdump.
• There are a few ISA PnP cards which will not work together with other
ISA PnP cards in the same system. In such cases, only one of the cards is
visible in the output of pnpdump. It is possible that one of the cards can be
configured so that it is no longer driven as an ISA PnP card (for example,
with a jumper directly on the card so that it uses fixed resources).
• There seem to be (in very few cases) cards which perform a reset after
pnpdump is run. If this involves a SCSI card, for example, a controller
on which the root partition is dependent, this can cause the computer to
hang. If this problem occurs, you must try and configure the card in such
a way that it no longer functions as an ISA PnP card.
Otherwise you can do away with initializing the card in Linux completely
and boot the system with the help of loadlin; in this case, the card is already initialized.
171
6
Linux and Hardware
Symptom: When running the command isapnp or when booting, you will see
an error message like this:
*
*
*
*
*
LD setting failed, this may not be a problem.
Try adding (VERIFYLD N) to the top of your script
Error occurred requested ‘LD2‘ on or around line 319
--- further action aborted
Solution: Follow the advice of the error message, and at the beginning of the
file /etc/isapnp.conf, insert the line
(VERIFYLD N)
that is:
# [...]
# (DEBUG)
(VERIFYLD N)
(READPORT 0x0203)
(ISOLATE)
(IDENTIFY *)
# [...]
Symptom: When running the command isapnp or when booting, you see an
error message like this:
[...]
/etc/isapnp.conf:66 -Fatal - resource conflict allocating 16 bytes
of IO at 220 (see /etc/isapnp.conf)
/etc/isapnp.conf:66 -- Fatal - IO range check
attempted while device activated
/etc/isapnp.conf:66 -- Fatal - Error occurred
executing request ’<IORESCHECK> ’ --- further
action aborted
Solution: You probably have a conflict between the values selected in the file
/etc/isapnp.conf and those resources already being used in your system.
You should compare your /etc/isapnp.conf with the information on the
resources in question, which can be found in /proc; this should not be necessary if you allow pnpdump to undertake this allocation itself by using the
option -c.
Caution
In many cases difficulties can arise if, in the setup of the computer, the
automatic configuration of ISA PnP resources is switched on through the
BIOS. You should switch this off. Since the configuration is performed by
means of pnpdump or isapnp, this setup option is not necessary.
In case of problems which go deeper than this, you should consult the extensive
documentation on the package isapnp. This can be found on your system in the
172
6.3
Sound Cards
directory /usr/share/doc/packages/isapnp. At the end of this subsection
we will take a closer look at configuring a PnP card, using the example of a
sound card.
6.3
Sound Cards
Today, mainly PCI sound cards are available on the market. Sometimes you may
also find ISA bus sound cards.
In SuSE Linux there are now two methods for supporting sound cards. The
simplest method is to use YaST2. YaST2 uses drivers which were developed by
the ALSA -project. Information on this project can be found at the URL: http:
//www.alsa-project.org. You also can install the ALSA -drivers with the
program alsaconf.
6.3.1 Configuring Sound Cards with YaST2
To configure your sound card (if you didn’t do this during the installation, e.g.
because you added the sound card later to the system) just start YaST2 as user
‘root’ and choose the module ‘Hardware/Sound’.
YaST2 now tries to automatically detect your sound card and brings up a list of
drivers and corresponding sound card models suitable for your hardware. Select
the driver and sound card model matching your card. Consult the sound card
manual if necessary. If the sound card was not autodetected, click on ‘Manual’
and choose your sound card and the corresponding driver from the list. By selecting ‘Options’, you can enter some options specific for the selected card.
The manual to your sound card gives more details.
By selecting ‘Next’ you will get to the “Test screen” to check the configuration
of the sound card. The buttons ‘+’ and ‘-’ allow you to change the sound volume.
You should start at a level of about 10% to avoid damage of your audio system
or your ear. Also check the volume control of your audio system. By clicking on
‘Test’ you should hear a test sound. If there’s no sound, you should check the
volume of your audio system first. If you heard the sound and the volume is ok,
click on ‘Next’.
This finishes the configuration and the volume settings are saved. Click on
‘Next’ again to get back to ‘YaST2 System configuration and administration’.
You can change the volume and mixer-settings later by using programs like kmix
or gamix.
6.3.2 Configuring Your Sound Card With alsaconf
ALSA (Advanced Linux Sound Architecture) is supported by many developers
and the number of drivers available for it is growing steadily. Along with a native
interface, ALSA offers the OpenSoundSystem, an interface compatible to OSS .
Thus you can continue to use applications that were originally developed for
173
6
Linux and Hardware
OSS . All the sound configuration options can only be taken advantage of fully
via the ALSA interface itself.
ALSA is completely based on the modular concept of the kernel. The required
modules are located in the kernel module directory (/lib/modules/...) in
the misc directory. Configuring ALSA takes place by means of entries in the
/etc/modules.conf file. YaST2 takes care of creating these entries for you.
However, ALSA offers its own program as well, alsaconf, which can be used in
place of YaST2 for configuration.
With ALSA , you can run multiple sound cards simultaneously at any time. To do
this, the /etc/modules.conf file only needs to be extended using the required
parameters.
Proceed as follows to integrate your sound card into your SuSE Linux using
alsaconf:
• Log in to a text console as user root.
• Start the program alsaconf
earth:/ # alsaconf
• alsaconf will at first attempt to detect the sound card. It not only searches for
ISA bus cards, but also for PCI bus cards. Plug and Play cards on the ISA
bus are scanned as well.
• alsaconf shows you a list of the sound cards it found and offers a configuration for them. If a card has not been found, a selection list of potential cards
will immediately appear.
• Now you will be asked whether the /etc/modules.conf file should be
modified. You should confirm this by selecting YES.
• The necessary entries are now created in /etc/modules.conf and the
driver will be given a trial run.
• Subsequently, you have the option of testing the sound card. A “test sound”
will be played back for this purpose. Do not turn the speakers up too loud.
• The drivers will automatically be loaded the next time you start your system.
You can also manually load and unload them.
Enter
earth:/ # rcalsasound start
to load and
earth:/ # rcalsasound stop
to unload the drivers.
174
6.4
6.4
6.4.1
Ports on a Computer
Ports on a Computer
PS/2 Ports
PS/2 ports were developed by IBM for the PS/2 platform. The ATX Standard,
in which this type of port is included, has found widespread use in the last few
years. You can attach a mouse and a keyboard on the PS/2 port.
Configuring the PS/2 port is not necessary under Linux because it is supported by
the kernel. The system automatically detects existing PS/2 ports and can control
the devices attached to them. The ports can be found and addressed under the
device name /dev/kbd and /dev/psaux.
6.4.2
Serial Ports
The serial port (RS232) of your computer is often used for external modems.
You can also attach a mouse with an RS232 plug on this port.
For the support of this port in Linux, installation of the kernel module serial.o
is required. This module is automatically loaded when the port is addressed by
certain software. For instance, supposing you’ve configured your Internet access
such that a modem on COM1 is used, the module is automatically post-installed
before the connection to your provider is established.
You can change your serial port configuration using the program setserial. This
program is run at every system start by the script /sbin/init.d/serial. For
more information on setserial see the manpage for this program. Serial ports can
be found and addressed under the device file(s) /dev/ttyS0, /dev/ttyS1, etc.
6.4.3
Parallel Ports
The parallel port of your computer is primarily used to connect printers. Many
other devices such as ZIP-Drives and CD-ROM/RAM Drives can also be connected to this port.
The “parport” subsystem of the current Linux-kernels 2.2.xx is designed to operate a number of devices on the parallel port simultaneously.1 As an example,
you can attach a ZIP drive to the parallel port and, in turn, connect a printer to
the ZIP drive.
Initializing parport
The parport and parport_pc kernel support are required for this.2 parport
is the actual subsystem of the kernel and parport_pc takes care of the hardware
connections of the PC port as well as for those of some AXP computers. With
the command
1 For
the “old” kernel 2.0.xx only one device can be used exclusively on a port; as a rule “multiple”
connections also cannot be used!
2 You don’t need to compile your own kernel; the necessary modules are pre-compiled and are
included in SuSE Linux!
175
6
Linux and Hardware
earth: # modprobe parport_pc
you can attach the modules manually. Check if the ports could be found and
configured by entering the command lsmod; the parport and parport_pc
ought to appear in the list of modules. You can also look in the file /var/log/
messages to check which values were used to initialize parport (see File
contents 6.4.1). The entries in the file 6.4.2 are responsible for configuring the
Jun
3 09:15:53 tux kernel: parport0: PC-style at 0x378 [SPP,
ECP]
File contents 6.4.1: /var/log/messages: parport initialization
interfaces; the entry which is commented out indicates how to integrate another
parallel interface.
alias parport_lowlevel
parport_pc
options parport_pc io=0x378 irq=none
# If you have multiple parallel ports, specify them this way:
# options parport_pc io=0x378,0x278 irq=none,none
File contents 6.4.2: /etc/modules.conf: parport configuration
Note
In case of problems, you should first check in the BIOS of the computer
how the port in question is specified there. The port should have its own explicit address (if possible, 0x378) and its own interrupt. “Automatic” settings
should be avoided.
Sometimes it is also necessary to switch on the devices in the correct sequence;
please look in the appropriate handbooks! One recommended method is to first
switch on the computer, and then – before booting has commenced – to immediately switch on the external devices.
Using parport: Printers, ZIP Drives, PLIP, etc.
If one parallel port device is to be used, its relevant module must also be loaded;
in the case of a printer, this is the lp module:
earth: # modprobe lp
lsmod ought to show us, amongst other things:
parport_pc
parport
lp
176
5568
6884
5116
1
1
0
(autoclean)
[parport_pc lp]
(unused)
6.4
Ports on a Computer
As with other cases, further details are supplied in the file /var/log/messages
and also in the proc file system in /proc/parport. If everything is running
correctly, you won’t need to load the modules manually – Kmod will do this for
you automatically (Section 9.2 page 235) if, for example, a printer job is sent.
ZIP-drives are not served either by ppa or by imm – see below, Section 6.5.3
page 181.
Further Suggestions
Look in the kernel sources, in directory /usr/src/linux/Documentation,
at the files parport.txt and paride.txt.
Information on the current status of parport programming can be found on
the web at http://www.torque.net/linux-pp.html and http://www.
torque.net/parport/.
6.4.4 USB – Universal Serial Bus
In 1994 Compaq, Intel, Microsoft and NEC cooperated to setup the specifications for the “Universal Serial Bus” (USB). They aimed to create an easy-to-use
connection to the telephone and an extension of the already available connection
types (serial, parallel). Using this bus system, you are able to connect various
devices like mice, keyboards, printers, scanners and joysticks to your computer.
The different cabling used to connect these devices should be replaced by one ,
unified connection type. The USB bus is capable of mounting and unmounting
devices to your computer while it is running – the computer does not need to be
rebooted.
The first version of the USB bus was released in 1996 and extended it’s capabilities from release to release. In the current version (USB 1.1) 127 devices are
supported. The maximum bandwidth is limited to 12 Mbits/s.
In Linux, support for the USB bus is constantly growing. Numerous devices are
already supported and can be configured easily. From kernel version 2.4 on, the
usage of USB devices with Linux will be standard.
Available Modules
In the following section we are going to give you an overview on the available
modules and will give you details which module should be loaded for which
device. The listed modules are located in the directory /lib/modules/xxx/
usb. Details on the modules can be found in the directory /usr/src/linux/
Documention/usb/.
If we talk about “input events” or “events” in general here, you should think
about mouse movements, keystrokes, etc.
input.o This module needs to be loaded before other USB input devices can
be supported by Linux. It is used to control the communication between the
hardware (via USB) and the processing of the events. More information on
177
6
Linux and Hardware
that can be found in the file input.txt in the directory /usr/src/linux/
Documentation/usb.
usbcore.o USB core is the USB-subsystem that simplifies the communication
with the installed hardware which depends on the data structures, macros
and functions of the hardware. By using a general interface to the operating
system (API) common routines of all USB devices and host controllers are
supported.
usb-uhci.o / usb-ohci.o This module enables the USB host controller of your
motherboard. Most of the motherboards available today have the USB host
controller integrated in the chipset. Older motherboards can be upgraded by a
PCI card. The USB host controller is then integrated on this PCI card. There
are two standards making the USB host controllers compatible: The Universal Host Controller Interface (UHCI) Intel and the Open Host Controller
Interface (OHCI) defined by Compaq.
The module usb-ohci.o enables the OHCI-chipset (Compaq, NEC, iMacs,
OPTi, SiS, ALi, Lucent, CMD, etc.) whereas the usb-uhci.o module enables the UHCI-chipset (Intel, VIA) controllers.
Tip
If you are logged in as user root, you are able to read out the type
of USB host controller on your motherboard by using the command
lspci -v | grep USB. You can then load the respective module.
hid.o HID (Human Interface Devices) is a device class accessed by this generic
module. Supported devices are keyboards, mice, joysticks, digitizers etc.
For some devices there are two modules available in the modules directory: The *dev.o module is a “high-layer”-module (“*” standing for e.g.
“mouse”) and is meant to as an interface between the hardware and the users
program like “X” or “games”; usb*.o is a “low-layer”-module which generates the input events. Both modules are needed, whereas the “low-layer”module can be replaced by the hid.o module.
There are two modes to describe the event input of a USB device: HID enables support of all functions of a device so requires the quite complex module hid.o: HIDBP (HID boot protocol) is a very simple mode and only
supports the basic functionality of a device to make it accessible by the computers BIOS.
usbkbd.o This module enables the usage of the basic functions of a key-
board in the HIDBP-mode, but for this device class the access should be
enabled via the hid.o module. Unlike the hid.o module, only keyboards
will be enabled with this module.
usbmouse.o This module enables using the basic functionality of a mouse
in HIDBP-mode. The usage of the hid.o should be preferred as this
enables event management for all other input devices as well.
178
6.4
Ports on a Computer
keydev.o This module “translates” input events to the architecture depen-
dent RAW mode of the keyboard. This module is still under development
but works fine for almost every architecture.
mousedev.o This module converts the input events of a mouse, digitizer or
tablet to PS/2 compatible events. As it is not finished yet, you should use
the evdev.o module or, if you are using a “wheel”-mouse, the hid.o
module.
acm.o Load this module if you plan to use communication devices like modems
or ISDN adapters of the device class “ACM” (Abstract Control Model).
“ACM” is a method to control modems. You can find a list of supported modems in the file acm.txt in the directory /usr/src/linux/
Documentation/usb.
audio.o enables audio devices and supports digital mixers, wave devices and
loudspeakers.
dabusb.o supports amateur radio devices.
dc2xx.p enables digital cameras of the Kodak DC-2xx series and also some nonKodak-cameras. You can find more information on this in the file dc2xx.
txt in the directory /usr/src/linux/Documentation/usb.
evdev. “evdev” is a general interface (API) controlling the input of devices as
event codes are identical and hardware-independent on all architectures. This
module supports this API.
ibmcam.o is used for supporting the IBM(C-It) and Xirlink-Webcams, but not
all features are supported now. You may find more details on that in the file
ibmcam.txt in the directory /usr/src/linux/Documentation/usb.
joydev.o is used to communicate with joysticks.
ov511.o enables the “OV511” chip from Omnivision Techonolgies which
is used in some webcams.
In addition, the OV511/OV511+- and
OV7610/20/20AE CCD-chips are supported. This driver is compatible with
most “Video4Linux” applications, but not to some video conferencing applications. For details on the supported resolutions, please read ov511.txt in
the directory /usr/src/linux/Documentation/usb.
printer.o is used to communicate with USB printers.
scanner.o was developed to support USB scanners from Hewlett Packard (HP)
first, but became more and more hardware independant later.
Read more about it in input.txt in the directory /usr/src/linux/
Documentation/usb.
usb-serial.o With this module you can control serial devices on the USB bus.
The serial signal are converted to USB signals. Up to 256 connections can
be used simultaneously. Details can be found in the file usb-serial.txt
in the directory /usr/src/linux/Documentation/usb.
179
6
Linux and Hardware
usb-storage.o enables USB mass storage devices like ZIP, floppy disk drives,
hard disks and smart media card devices. The driver isn’t quite stable at the
moment.
wacom.o enables support for the Wacom Graphire and Intuos Tablets. Al-
though support should already be included with the HID-module, it was only
possible to use a Wacom PenPartner.
wmforce.o enables the use of Logitech WingMan Force joysticks with USB-
interface. The driver works well, but the “Force Feedback” function is not
yet supported.
Configuring a USB mouse and keyboard
For a common configuration with USB mouse and keyboard the following modules should be loaded:
• input.o
• mousedev.o
• keybdev.o
• usbcore.o
• usb-uhci.o or usb-ohci.o
• hid.o
Further sources
More information on the USB-implementation and on supported devices can be
found at
• http://www.linux-usb.org
• http://www.qbik.ch/usb/devices/
6.5
Removable Drives
A variety of removable drives can be used under Linux: Floppy Disk Drives,
ZIP-, JAZ- or SyQuest Drives. Magnetic Optical drives can also be used in
Linux.
6.5.1
Floppy Disk Drives
The package mtools was developed for easy access of MS-DOS formatted
floppy disks.
You can also read and write to disks formatted with non-MS-DOS file systems
(e.g. ext2 or minix). Many other file systems are also available. In order to
accomplish this, however, you’ll first need to use the command mount to access
the medium.
180
6.5
6.5.2
Removable Drives
LS-120 Drives
LS-120 drives are connected at the (E)IDE port of the computer and are seen by
the system as hard disks, meaning that they, too, need to be accessed first with
the command mount.
6.5.3 ZIP Drives
There are ZIP drives for different interfaces: parallel, ATAPI and SCSI, as well
as USB.
For IDE and SCSI, you don’t need a special device driver. They can be connected
on the bus and addressed without extra configuration using the bus’s device driver
(IDE or SCSI). The devices are addressed by the device names,
/dev/hda - /dev/hdd for IDE (ATAPI)
and
/dev/sda - /dev/sdm for SCSI
The device needs to be tied into the directory tree with the command mount.
The installation of the parallel port version proves to be somewhat more complicated. You’ll need SCSI hard disk support, parport, parport_pc support (see
Section 6.4.3 page 175) as well as ppa or the imm driver of the kernel. 3 imm is
needed for more modern drives (e. g. for the ZIP 250). Furthermore you should
make sure that, in the BIOS of the computer, the EPP mode for the parallel port
is set. If you are unsure as to which kind of drive you have, try loading imm:
earth: # modprobe imm
If this doesn’t work try the same with ppa:
earth: # modprobe ppa
With this, the parport subsystem will be automatically initialized. If this does
not function, look at Section 9 page 175.
Sometimes an entry in /etc/modules.conf can help matters (see File contents 6.5.1). The alias scsi_hostadapter may only be used if you don’t
have a standard SCSI host adapter in your system. An alternative is to write
the necessary modprobe commands into the boot script /sbin/init.d/boot.
local; For more information on this file, see Section 13.4 page 311.
# alias scsi_hostadapter ppa
pre-install ppa modprobe "-k" parport_pc
File contents 6.5.1: /etc/modules.conf: ppa-configuration
After this, ZIP disks can be accessed in the same manner as SCSI hard disks. It
is also necessary to “mount” the medium.
3 ppa-
and/or the imm driver are contained in the “SCSI low-level drivers” – but you don’t need
to compile your own kernel; the necessary modules are pre-compiled and included with SuSE
Linux
181
6
Linux and Hardware
Adding support for USB ZIP drives is quite easy to manage. First, make sure
that the USB subsystem is loaded (see Section 6.4.4 page 177). The following
modules need to be loaded:
usbcore
usb-uhci
or
usbcore
usb-ohci
In addition you have to load the modules named usb-storage.
Then you can access the ZIP drive just like SCSI hard drive. You need to mount
the media first.
6.6
Modems
6.6.1
External Modems
External modems are normally attached directly to the serial port of the computer. Programs can address them via device files with the name(s) /dev/
ttyS0, /dev/ttyS1. etc.
6.6.2
Internal Modems
Internal modems in desktop machines are either PCI or ISA devices. Please see
Section 6.2 page 169 for information about these devices.
Since modems are accessed through serial ports, internal modems must make
these ports available for themselves.
Table 6.1 gives you a list of standard resources for serial ports.
Device file
Name
Interrupt
IO-Address
/dev/ttyS0
/dev/ttyS1
/dev/ttyS2
/dev/ttyS3
COM1
COM2
COM3
COM4
4
3
4
3
0x3f8
0x2f8
0x3e8
0x2e8
Table 6.1: Standard resources for serial ports
PCI modems
If you have a PCI modem, it is most likely a “Winmodem”. Winmodems are
not modems. They are hardware devices which need a special driver that allows
them to emulate a real modem. This driver is generally written by the makers of
the Winmodem and currently only runs on Microsoft Windows.
182
6.6
Modems
You can obtain current information about Linux-compatible modems and the
development of Winmodem drivers at: http://www.o2.net/~gromitkc/
winmodem.html.
If the modem is not a Winmodem, you should be able to use it in SuSE Linux.
A certain amount of manual work is necessary, however, since these modems
cannot be configured automatically.
ISA modems
With ISA modems, there are two main considerations:
• The modem itself needs to be configured (IRQ and IO addresses for the port).
• The kernel needs to know what IRQ and port the card is using.
Initializing the modem
As described in Section 6.2 page 169, ISA cards can be jumpered, jumperless or
Plug and Play. The initializing of PNP cards is also described in that section.
Some suggestions about settings:
Setting your modem to use /dev/ttyS1 (COM2) with IRQ 3 will usually present
the least number of problems. /dev/ttyS3 (IRQ 4) can also be used, but you
may have a conflict if you are also using ttyS0 (COM1), as this port also normally
uses IRQ 4. So if you have the mouse on /dev/ttyS0 you should not use /dev/
ttyS0 or /dev/ttyS2.
Generally, IRQ 5 and IRQ 7 should also be avoided, as these are often used for
sound cards or printers. In fact, if you are going to use a sound card, you should
configure it first because it claims many resources.
Passing parameters to the kernel
After you have established the port and IRQ for your modem, you need to tell the
kernel what values the card is using. If you have used a standard port and IRQ
(/dev/ttyS0 or /dev/ttyS1), your card will be automatically recognized the
next time you reboot.
If you are using other IO-port/IRQ combinations, you can manually tell the kernel the device’s IRQ, using setserial:
earth:/ # setserial /dev/ttyS3 irq 10
You can now configure the modem for Internet connection.
If the modem is recognized, you can automate the setserial command by modifying the appropriate line in the file /sbin/init.d/serial:
Change the line:
# run_setserial /dev/ttyS3 $AUTO_IRQ autoconfig
to:
run_setserial /dev/ttyS3 irq 10
183
6
Linux and Hardware
6.7
Scanners
In order to use a scanner in Linux, as well as any other operating system, a
collection of special drivers and programs is needed. The package sane (series
gra) offers such a collection. With the help of SANE you can, in Linux, use a
scanner that is connected to a kernel-supported SCSI adapter.
Scanners that are connected to the parallel port (printer port) of the computer are
not yet supported although device drivers are in development as for USB.
Because SANE is in continual development the list of supported scanners is
growing. For a list of the latest supported scanners go to http://www.
mostang.com/sane/sane-backends.html.
How Do You Configure a Scanner In Linux?
Scanners are addressed as “generic scsi devices” in Linux. The respective device
names are: /dev/sg0, /dev/sg1 ...etc.
To find the matching file in your system, use the program sgcheck:
earth:/ # sgcheck
You should receive the following output:
Assignment of generic SCSI devices,
device host/channel/ID/LUN type(numeric type) vendor model:
/dev/sg0 0/0/0/0 Direct-Access(0) SEAGATE ST32550N
/dev/sg1 0/0/1/0 CD-ROM(5) PIONEER CD-ROM DR-U10X
/dev/sg2 0/0/5/0 Processor(3) HP C2500A
Scanners have a device description like Processor or SCANNER. In the example
above you could address the scanner with the device name /dev/sg2.
You need to make a symbolic link to the device to /dev/scanner:
earth:/ # ln -s /dev/sg2 /dev/scanner
Finally you need to change the permissions for the generic SCSI device. SANE
needs read as well as write permissions for the device (it sends commands to the
scanner as well as receiving information):
earth:/ # chmod 777 /dev/sg2
Problems
If SANE doesn’t find your scanner, check first to make sure that your SCSI
controller is found and correctly configured:
earth:/ # cat /proc/scsi/scsi
You should receive output that resembles the following:
184
6.8
Attached devices:
Host: scsi0 Channel: 00
Vendor: SEAGATE Model:
Type:
Direct Access
Host: scsi0 Channel: 00
Vendor: PIONEER Model:
Type:
CD-ROM
Host: scsi0 Channel: 00
Vendor: QUANTUM Model:
Type:
Direct-Access
Host: scsi0 Channel: 00
Vendor: SCANNER Model:
Type:
Scanner
Id: 00 Lun: 00
ST32550N
Id: 01 Lun: 00
CD-ROM DR-U10X
Tape Drives
Rev: 0016
ANSI SCSI revision: 02
Rev: 1.07
ANSI SCSI revision: 02
Id: 02 Lun: 00
FIREBALL TM3200S Rev: 1.07
ANSI SCSI revision: 02
Id: 06 Lun: 00
Rev: 2.00
ANSI SCSI revision: 01 CCS
If you can’t find an entry like “SCANNER” or “PROCESSOR”, your scanner
hasn’t been identified by the SCSI controller. Check to see that the scanner is
switched on and that it, as well as the SCSI bus itself, are correctly attached.
6.8
Tape Drives
Tape drives, also known as streamers, are mainly used for high-capacity backup
purposes. There are tape drives on the market for a variety of ports.
SCSI Tape Drives
Tape drives that attach to the SCSI bus are the most common. You can assume
that all devices that are attached to a Linux-supported SCSI controller can be
used, although if your device has extra functions, special software is needed to
access these.
A SCSI tape drive is controlled in the following way:
• The first tape drive in the system is controlled using the device files
/dev/st0 and /dev/nst0, the next with /dev/st1 and /dev/nst1,
etc. /dev/stX stands for a drive that automatically rewinds after use.
/dev/nstX on the other hand stands for a tape drive that leaves the tape
in the current position after use.
We suggest using /dev/nstX, because, using mt, you have exact control of
the drive.
• Use the command mt to control a tape drive:
earth:/ # mt -f /dev/nst0 retension
Adjusts the tape tension by rewinding and then fast-forwarding the tape.
earth:/ # mt -f /dev/nst0 rewind
Moves the tape to a point just after the last recorded information. Used to
add information to a partially used tape.
earth:/ # mt -f /dev/nst0 eof
Moves the tape to a point just after the last recorded information. Used to
add information to a partially used tape.
185
6
Linux and Hardware
earth:/ # mt -f /dev/nst0 erase
Erases all information on a tape. Be careful, there is no way to recover erased
information!
IDE Tape Drives
IDE tape drives are connected to the IDE bus of the computer. The drive is
found automatically by Linux. You can address the device under the device files
/dev/ht0 or /dev/nht0.
You can control the device using the command mt, as given in Section 6.8 on the
page before.
Floppy Tape Drives
Floppy tape drives are simply attached to the floppy disk port of your computer
(almost every computer has a floppy port).
Because these devices need to be controlled with precise timing, errors often
occur while saving and writing backups.
To use these devices in Linux, you’ll need a special driver, the ftape driver. This
driver is included in the kernel. Read the documentation in /usr/src/linux/
Documentation/ftape.txt for more information on the configuration of this
device. The entire documentation for the ftape subsystem can be found on the device driver developers’ homepage: http://www.instmath.rwth-aachen.
de/~heine/ftape/.
186
7
Notebooks – PCMCIA, APM, IrDA
7 Notebooks – PCMCIA, APM, IrDA
Notebooks, in particular, have special components and requirements, among
these are “Advanced Power Management” (APM), Infrared ports (IrDA) and PC
cards (PCMCIA). Occasionally these components can also be found in desktop
computers. Because the differences between the two types are insignificant, the
use and configuration of both will be described in this chapter.
Those interested in specific notebooks should visit the “Linux laptop homepage”
at http://www.cs.utexas.edu/users/kharker/linux-laptop. Another
good source of information is the “Moblix” homepage at http://mobilix.
org/index.html (MobiliX – Mobile Computers and Unix). There you can find
an interesting Laptop HOWTO as well as an IrDA HOWTO. In addition, there
is an article Laptops and Notebooks (PCMCIA) in Linux (file:/usr/share/
doc/sdb/de/html/laptop.html) in the SuSE support database.
7.1
PCMCIA
7.1.1 Hardware
PCMCIA stands for “Personal Computer Memory Card International Association” although it is commonly used as a collective term for both the hardware
and the associated software. The essential part is the PCMCIA card, of which
two types exist:
PC cards: This is the most common type. With a 16-bit bus bandwidth, most
are relatively inexpensive and are usually trouble-free and stable.
CardBus cards: This is a new standard. They have a 32-bit bus bandwidth
and are quicker, although also more expensive. Because the data transfer
rate is often limited at other points in the system, the increase in bandwidth
is often unjustified. In the meantime there are quite a few drivers for these
cards as well, although they are often unstable – depending on the PCMCIA
controller.
When the PCMCIA service is active, the card type can be found with the command cardctl ident. A list of supported cards can be found in SUPPORTED_
CARDS in /usr/share/doc/packages/pcmcia. There you’ll also find the
actualized version of the PCMCIA-HOWTO.
The second important component is the PCMCIA controller, or the PC card or
CardBus bridge. This creates a connection between the card itself and the PCI
bus or, in older devices, the ISA bus. These controllers are most often compatible
to the i82365 chip from Intel; all models are supported. The type of controller
can be found with the command probe. In the case of PCI devices, the command
lspci -vt also offers interesting information.
187
7
Notebooks – PCMCIA, APM, IrDA
7.1.2
Software
All necessary drivers and programs can be found, as long as they are not already
integrated into the kernel, in package PCMCIA, series a1. The modules pcmcia_
core, i82365 (or tcic, less often) and ds form the basis and are normally
automatically started when booting. They initialize the PCMCIA controller and
supply basic functions.
Because PCMCIA cards can be added or removed at run time, a daemon is
needed to check the activities of the slots. This is done by the Cardmanager
(cardmgr), which is automatically started after loading the base modules. When
a card is inserted into a slot Cardmanager determines the type and function and
loads the necessary module. You can check which modules are loaded with the
command lsmod. If all modules are successfully loaded Cardmanager, depending on the function of the card, starts predetermined initialization scripts that
build the necessary network connections or mount the necessary external SCSI
drives. When the card is removed Cardmanager, using the same scripts, ends
the diverse card activities, after which the modules that are no longer needed are
unloaded. Theoretically, you can simply remove the card. This works very
well with network, modem, or ISDN cards as long as there is no active network
connection. It does not work with mounted partitions, external drives, or NFS
directories. For this you need to be certain that the devices are synchronized and
cleanly unmounted. If in doubt the following command can be of help
earth: # cardctl eject
This command deactivates the card, as long as it is still in the notebook.
7.1.3
Configuration
When the PCMCIA package is installed, four PCMCIA variables will be found
in /etc/rc.config. START_PCMCIA determines whether the service should
be started when booting. It can be started with the command rcpcmcia start
even when START_PCMCIA is set to no. PCMCIA determines the type of PCMCIA controller. This value is automatically set at installation and almost always has the value i82365. The other two variables, PCMCIA_PCIC_OPTS and
PCMCIA_CORE_OPTS involve options for the basis modules and can normally be
left empty.
Because the selection of driver modules is taken care of by Cardmanager (cardmgr)
no other hardware related settings are necessary.
Ethernet and Token Ring
Ethernet or token ring connections can be easily configured using YaST. In
the menu item ‘System administration’ → ‘Network configuration’,
these devices can be configured in the same manner as normal hardware devices
withthe exception that the device must be marked as a PCMCIA device with
; see also Section 3.6.3 page 78. The following points should be taken into
F9 consideration:
188
7.1
PCMCIA
• When more than one ethernet or token ring device is marked as PCMCIA,
only the first device configuration is used.
• The settings,
in contrast to normal network cards, are immediately activated
with F10 .
• The device names shown (eth0, eth1, tr0. . . ) should only be seen as information relating to the type of device because the numeration of PCMCIA
devices is determined dynamically.
• When a non-active device is reactivated
with F4 the device must also be
marked as a PCMCIA device with F9 again.
ISDN
ISDN-PC cards are configured in much the same manner as other cards. The
only difference is that the device must be marked as a PCMCIA device under
the menu
items ‘System administration’ → ‘Network configuration’
with F9 . In the ‘Configuration of ISDN hardware’ dialog, IRQ, IO port,
and the ISDN protocol (Euro-ISDN or 1TR6) should not be changed.
ISDN modems are also available as PCMCIA cards. They are modem or multifunctional cards with an additional “ISDN Connection Kit” and are handled as
modems.
Modems
Modem PC cards normally have no specific settings. After insertion, the card is
available in /dev/modem. The configuration of the device with wvdial (wvdial)
follows that of a normal modem.
SCSI and IDE
The necessary driver modules are loaded by Cardmanager. After insertion, the
device is ready for use. The device name is determined dynamically. Information about available SCSI or IDE devices can be found under /proc/scsi or
/proc/ide.
Note
Before inserting external hard disks, CD-ROM drives and similar devices be
sure that the device is on. SCSI devices must be actively terminated.
Important: Before a SCSI or IDE device is removed from the slot, the partitions or device must be unmounted. If this step is left out, the device can
only be accessed after rebooting although the system is still stable.
It is possible to install Linux entirely on such an external drive, but the boot
process is somewhat more complicated. A “boot disk” will be needed which includes the kernel and an init RAM disk (initrd); more information on this can
189
7
Notebooks – PCMCIA, APM, IrDA
be found in Section 12.4 page 290. The initrd includes a virtual file system
with all the necessary PCMCIA modules and programs. The SuSE Linux “boot
disk” and boot disk images include these, enabling booting of your external installation. It is, however, somewhat uncomfortable having to load the PCMCIA
support every time you boot your system; advanced users can create their own
boot disks that are tailored to their systems1 .
7.1.4
Configurations for Changing – “Schemes”
Mobile computers often have different configurations. For example, one for
work and one for home. For PCMCIA devices this proves to be quite easy, although the configuration files need to be edited by hand; YaST cannot yet handle
this task at the moment . 2 .
Singular configuration profiles for PCMCIA are known as “Schemes”. The
configuration files found in /etc/pcmcia/*.opts can include more than one
scheme. The data for a specific scheme is included in configuration blocks and
selected with an “address”. The addresses are comma-separated words. The first
word is the name of the scheme. The other words contain information such as
the slot in which the card is inserted or the number of a hard disk partition. Detailed information can be found at the beginning of the /etc/pcmcia/*.opts
files as well as in the PCMCIA-HOWTO. The standard scheme used by SuSE
Linux has the name SuSE. The SuSE scheme is edited with SuSEconfig, when
the network connection is configured with YaST. Due to this, manual alterations
to this scheme will be lost by using SuSEconfig.
We’ll use an ethernet card configuration as an example scheme configuration,
making two schemes named work and home. The file /etc/pcmcia/network.
opts (see file 7.1.1 on the facing page) will have several configuration blocks
with the following addresses:
• SuSE,*,*,*: This block already exists and should be left as is, in case you’d
like to use YaST for future configurations.
• work,*,*,*: This block is for the network configuration on the job.
• home,*,*,*: The configuration for home.
• *,*,*,*: This block already exists as well and should be left as is for use
in future configurations.
It is easiest to use YaST to configure a scheme and then change the name, after
running SuSEconfig, from SuSE to work or home. Those who wish to edit
everything themselves can find more information about terms such as NETMASK,
BROADCAST, etc., and all specific values in PCMCIA-HOWTO (in /usr/share/
doc/packages/pcmcia you’ll find the current version).
1 Tips
can be found in the PCMCIA-HOWTO in Section 5.3 “Booting from a PCMCIA device.”
ISDN devices, with the same network address and the same default route, can be configured. These are not started automatically, but selectively. In the case of modems, several different
profiles can be configured with the wvdial
2 Several
190
7.1
PCMCIA
# The address format is "scheme,socket,instance,hwaddr" .
case "$ADDRESS" in
SuSE,*,*,*)
INFO="This scheme is to be configured by YaST/SuSEconfig"
# [... abbreviated ...]
;;
work,*,*,*)
INFO="Network configuration for the company via DHCP"
IF_PORT=""
BOOTP="n"
DHCP="y"
IPADDR=""
NETMASK=""
NETWORK=""
BROADCAST=""
GATEWAY=""
DOMAIN=""
SEARCH=""
DNS_1=""
MOUNTS=""
start_fn () { return; }
stop_fn () { return; }
;;
home,*,*,*)
INFO="Network configuration for home, using a fixed address"
IF_PORT=""
BOOTP="n"
DHCP="n"
IPADDR="10.0.1.23"
NETMASK="255.255.255.0"
NETWORK="10.0.1.0"
BROADCAST="10.0.1.255"
GATEWAY="10.0.1.1"
DOMAIN="home.de"
SEARCH="home.de work.de"
DNS_1="10.0.1.1"
MOUNTS=""
start_fn () { return; }
stop_fn () { return; }
;;
*,*,*,*)
INFO="Sample private network setup"
# [... abbreviated ...]
;;
esac
File contents 7.1.1: /etc/pcmcia/network.opts
191
7
Notebooks – PCMCIA, APM, IrDA
image
root
label
alias
append
#
image
root
label
alias
append
#
image
root
label
alias
append
=
=
=
=
=
/boot/vmlinuz
/dev/hda7
work
w
xzx SCHEME=work xzx
=
=
=
=
=
/boot/vmlinuz
/dev/hda7
home
h
xzx SCHEME=home xzx
=
=
=
=
=
/boot/vmlinuz
/dev/hda7
suseconf
s
xzx SCHEME=SuSE xzx
File contents 7.1.2: PCMCIA: example from lilo.conf
Scheme changes can be made at boot or run time. The active scheme is defined
by the command cardctl scheme. The changes can be made at run time with
the same command using the syntax cardctl scheme <Scheme_name>. These
settings are not lost when restarting the system, which means that the last selected scheme is still active at the next boot unless specifically changed.
This is done either in the ‘boot options’ or directly at the boot prompt (LILO:)
by adding the following variable to the command: SCHEME=<Scheme_name>;
more information on giving parameters at the boot prompt can be found in Section 10.3.2 page 243.
You can use the boot manager to create one or more fixed boot schemes. We will
continue with our example and create three boot configurations. The append
parameter in /etc/lilo.conf is used for this and other purposes as can be
seen in File 7.1.2. After reconfiguring /etc/lilo.conf the command lilo
needs to be called.
Using the example configuration, in the file 7.1.2 by simply adding w, h or s
when booting, a specific scheme can be started.
7.1.5
If Things Still Don’t Work
Some notebooks have problems with specific PCMCIA cards. Most can be easily solved when you look at the matter systematically. First check to see if
the problem lies with the card or the PCMCIA base system. To do this, boot
the computer without any cards inserted. Only after the base system functions
correctly should you insert a card. All important messages can be found in
/var/log/messages. Therefore this information should be observed with
earth: # tail -f /var/log/messages
while the necessary tests are running. Doing so can reduce the problem to one
of the following two errors.
192
7.1
PCMCIA
The PCMCIA base system does not function properly
If the system hangs when booting, after you receive the message "PCMCIA:
Starting services:" or other strange things happen, you can prevent PCMCIA from starting at the next boot by entering the parameter NOPCMCIA=yes at
the boot prompt (LILO:) . After the system is running you should load the modules, one after the other, manually, with the commands modprobe pcmcia_core,
modprobe i82365 or – in very rare circumstances – modprobe tcic and
modprobe ds. The critical modules are, in each case, the first ones.
If the problem occurs when loading pcmcia_core help can be found in manpage
for pcmcia_core (man pcmcia_core). The options described in this can be
tested in conjunction with the modprobe command.
As an example, we can shut off the APM support of the PCMCIA module; in rare
instances, this can lead to difficulties. For this, we can use the option do_apm;
via do_apm=0, the power management will be de-activated:
earth:~ # modprobe pcmcia_core do_apm=0
If this option is successful, you should set the variable PCMCIA_CORE_OPTS in
/etc/rc.config to:
PCMCIA_CORE_OPTS="do_apm=0"
Also, from time to time, verifying free IO regions can cause some distress if other
hardware components are disturbed by it. You can bypass this via probe_io=0.
If you want to use a number of options, they should be separated by a space:
PCMCIA_CORE_OPTS="do_apm=0 probe_io=0"
If the problem occurs when loading i82365, help can be found in manpage for
i82365 (man i82365).
This error is the result of a resource conflict, which means that an interrupt,
an IO port, or a memory area is being shared by two devices. The module
i82365 checks for such sharing but sometimes this check itself leads to problems. Checking the interrupt 12 (PS/2 devices), for example, can lead, on some
computers, to the mouse or keyboard being blocked. In this case the parameter
irq_list=<List_of_IRQs> helps. This list should include all interrupts to be
used by the base system and has the following syntax:
earth: # modprobe i82365 irq_list=5,7,9,10
or permanently in /etc/rc.config:
PCMCIA_PCIC_OPTS="irq_list=5,7,9,10"
In addition to this there are the files /etc/pcmcia/config and /etc/pcmcia/
config.opts which are used by Cardmanager. The settings in these files are
used for the loading of driver modules for the PCMCIA cards. IRQs, IO-Ports
and memory areas can be assigned or unassigned in the file /etc/pcmcia/
config.opts as well. The difference between this and the above option is that
when resources are unassigned in this file the PCMCIA card does not use them,
but the base system module i82365 still checks them.
193
7
Notebooks – PCMCIA, APM, IrDA
The PCMCIA card doesn’t function (correctly)
There are three possibilities for errors: the card is not correctly detected, the card
causes a resource conflict, or the card is not supported.
If the card is not properly detected, the message "unsupported card in Slot
x" will appear in /var/log/messages. This message only means that Cardmanager cannot correctly assign a driver. /etc/pcmcia/config is used for
this purpose; it is, so to speak, a “driver database”. You can add entries to
the “driver database” using existing entries as an example. Using the command
cardctl ident, you can determine the identification information for the card.
More information on this topic can be found in the PCMCIA-HOWTO, Section 6 (“Dealing with unsupported cards”) as well as the manpage for pcmcia
(man pcmcia). After changing /etc/pcmcia/config be sure to reload it with
rcpcmcia reload.
Generally speaking, it doesn’t matter which IRQ or IO port a PCMCIA card
uses as long as these are not shared by another device (CD-ROM on 2. IDEController: IRQ 15; serial or IrDA Port: IRQ 3, IRQ 4; sound, printer: IRQ 5,
IRQ 7). In cases of resource conflicts, these should be specifically defined in
/etc/pcmcia/config.opts. If the problem still exists, these settings can
be further specified as a module option in config.opts. For example, if the
module pcnet_cs should use IRQ 5 the following entry would be made:
module "pcnet_cs" opts "irq_list=5"
Most available options are described in the manpages3 . If the manpage does not
include the information needed, there are several options available in manpage
for i82365 (man i82365) or the answer lies in the source code of the module.
One common problem with 10/100 Mbit-Network cards is incorrect detection
of the transfer rate. In this case the command ifport can be of help. With
this the transfer rate can be shown and changed; see also manpage for ifport
(man ifport). The correct setting can be entered in the variable IFPORT in
/etc/pcmcia/network.opts.
7.1.6
Installation via PCMCIA
In some cases PCMCIA support is needed to install SuSE Linux. For this you
should choose ‘Load PCMCIA Module’ from the menu item ‘Kernel-Module
(Hardware Drivers)’ in linuxrc. At first two entry fields will appear. Here
you can specify options for the modules pcmcia_core and i82365. Normally
these can be left empty. The manpages for pcmcia_core and i82365 can be
found as text files on the first CD in the directory docu. During installation,
systemmessages
displayed on several virtual consoles and can be viewed
are
+ F<x> .4
using Alt After the first part of the installation, the system is partially or totally rebooted. In
rare cases the system hangs when starting the PCMCIA system. The installation
3 Tip: rpm -ql pcmcia | grep man gives a list all
4 In YaST2 you must use Ctrl + Alt + F<x>
System.
194
package pcmcia manpages.
because YaST2 runs under the X Window
7.1
PCMCIA
is far enough along that you can use the boot option NOPCMCIA=yes to boot
Linux without PCMCIA support, at least in text mode. More information on this
can be found in Section 7.1.5 page 192.
7.1.7 Other Help Programs
The program cardctl has already been mentioned several times. cardctl is an important tool for finding information about PCMCIA devices or taking specific
actions. Details can be found in manpage for cardctl (man cardctl) or simply give the command cardctl to receive a list of command options.
Figure 7.1: PCMCIA – Cardinfo
This program has a graphical front-end, as well, which can be started with the
command cardinfo (See Figure 7.1). Most options can be controlled with this
although, unfortunately, you cannot change between “schemes” using this tool.
Friends of KDE can also use the program kardinfo. This tool is basically the
same as cardinfo.
More help can be found in package pcmcia with ifport, ifuser, probe and
rcpcmcia although they are not often needed in every day problems. To discover all that exists in package pcmcia, use the command rpm -ql pcmcia.
7.1.8 Compiling PCMCIA
If you update the kernel and do not find a compatible PCMCIA package on the
SuSE FTP server, you will then have to compile the PCMCIA package yourself.
It is important that the correct kernel is running when you are recompiling, since
some information will need to be extracted from there. The package pcmcia
should already be installed but should not be started; to be safe, run another
rcpcmcia stop. Then install the PCMCIA source package using YaST and,
following that, enter:
195
7
Notebooks – PCMCIA, APM, IrDA
earth: # rpm -ba /usr/src/packages/SPECS/pcmcia.spec
That was it. Now even a new binary packet can be found in /usr/src/packages/
RPMS which you can use for other systems, given that you implement the same
kernel.
7.2
7.2.1
APM – Power Management
Fundamentals
Power management can be used, assuming that the necessary hardware and BIOS
routines exist. Most notebooks and desktops include these – the diverse energy
saving functions are usually only important for mobile computers. These functions are described below:
Standby – In this operating mode the display is turned off and, by some ma-
chines, the processor power is reduced.
Suspend (to memory) – In this mode all system information is written to RAM
and the entire system is then suspended. Here the computer uses very little
energy; so little, in fact, that the computer can run in this mode from between
12 hours to several days on one battery. The advantage of this is that within
seconds you can resume working at the same point at which you left, without
rebooting or restarting any programs. This is where using Linux becomes interesting – you never need to turn the computer off – other operating systems
become unstable in time. With most modern notebooks you only need to
close the lid, suspending the system, and simply open it again later to resume
working.
Hibernation (Suspend to disk) – In this operating mode the computer can run
right through the winter. That is, all information is saved to the hard disk and
the system is turned off. Resuming operation takes about 30 - 90 seconds and
the system is back to the same point where you left off. Some manufacturers
offer interesting mixes of suspend and hibernation.
Battery Control – Very interesting.
Automatic Shutdown – Interesting for desktops. After a “shutdown” the com-
puter is completely turned off.
hard disk power off – This function saves not only energy but, for those with a
loud hard disk, also stress. Problems can occur, however, with, for example,
an editor that automatically saves changes, causing the drive to turn back on,
again and again.
Some of these functions are implemented by the BIOS alone. Standby and suspend can be invoked, on many notebooks, with a combination of keys or by
simply closing the lid. The operating system has nothing do with these functions
although with the correct kernel and packages installed these can also be invoked
with a command. This is helpful if you like to perform certain actions every time
the mode is invoked.
196
7.2
7.2.2
APM – Power Management
The Correct Kernel
For advanced APM functionality a kernel which supports this is needed. Several of the SuSE standard kernel includes this functionality. You can check to
see whether these functions are supported with the command cat /proc/apm.
If a line appears with diverse numbers everything is okay and the command
shutdown -h should turn the computer off. Because some BIOS’s do not correctly support the standards strange things can sometimes happen. Some of these
problems can be solved by using a special kernel configurations. More information can be found in our Support Database at http://sdb.suse.de/sdb/en/
html or on the “Linux Laptop Homepage” at http://www.cs.utexas.edu/
users/kharker/linux-laptop.
7.2.3 The APM Daemon
The daemon apmd, found in package apmd, series ap, serves to watch the battery and can take specific actions when “standby” or “suspend” is started. This
package is not always necessary but can often be of use. In order to start this at
boot the variable START_APMD in /etc/rc.config should be set to yes. You
can also start this with the command rcapmd start.
Several variables can be configured in /etc/rc.config.d/apmd.rc.config.
Because this file contains comments about the settings of these variables we
won’t go into detail here.
• Although PCMCIA in SuSE Linux is compiled with APM support, you can
still sometimes run into difficulties here. Some of the card drivers do not
return properly from a suspension (e.g. xirc2ps_cs). Therefore, apmd
can deactivate the PCMCIA system before the suspension and reactivate it
afterward. To this end, the variable APMD_PCMCIA_EJECT_ON_SUSPEND is
set to yes.
• If the clock time is no longer correct following a suspension,
APMD_SET_CLOCK_ON_RESUME is set to yes.
• If the X Window Systemis causing problems,
APMD_LEAVE_X_BEFORE_SUSPEND=yes helps once the system is up again.
• Likewise the sound modules can be unloaded during suspension.
APMD_STOP_SOUND_BEFORE_SUSPEND=yes functions for this purpose. Caution: when unloading, sound applications may quit or else the modules were
not unloaded. If you are editing audio data, save it first to be safe.
In addition, you can set the “spindown” behavior of the hard disk differently for
the battery mode or even tell the computer to shutdown when the battery reaches
a critically low level. Advanced users can add functionalities themselves in the
file /usr/sbin/apmd_proxy.
197
7
Notebooks – PCMCIA, APM, IrDA
7.2.4
More Commands
The package apmd has a few other useful programs. With apm you can check
the actual battery capacity and put the system into standby (apm -S) or suspend
(apm -s mode); see also manpage for apm (man apm).
The command apmsleep suspends the system for a certain amount of time; see
also manpage for apmsleep (man apmsleep).
To observe a log file without having the hard disk continuously running use the
command tailf instead of tail -f.
There are also tools for the X Window Systemas well as the command xapm
which shows a graphic representation of the battery status. If you’re using KDE
or at least kpanel – the program kbatmon shows battery status and can suspend
or put the system to sleep.
7.2.5
Pause for the Hard Disk
The hard disk can be turned off when not needed with the program hdparm.
This program also has other useful hard disk functions. The drive can be placed
in standby mode with the command option -y or completely turned off with -Y.
The drive will automatically turn off after 30 seconds with the option hdparm -S 6.
The number in this command is the number of 5 second intervals (in this case 6,
so 6 ∗ 5 = 30). This function is turned off with a value of 0. With larger numbers
the interval is also increased, more information can be found in the manpages for
this program.
You can set the standby behavior to be dependent on whether the computer is
plugged in or in battery mode by configuring /etc/rc.config.d/apmd.rc.
config but if you do so be sure to set the variable APMD_CHECK_TIME to 0.
Because the hard disk is often needed the sleep function is often useless because many programs, for example, text editors, regularly write temporary data
to the drive. Programs intended to help, such as tail -f <logfile> often
cause this as well. Replacing this command with tailf <logfile> solves
this problem.
7.3
IrDA – Infrared Data Association
IrDA (Infrared Data Association) is an industry standard for wireless communications that uses light in the infrared spectrum. Many laptops delivered today
have an IrDA compatible sender/receiver that enables the communication with
other devices, such as printers, modems, LANs, or even other laptops. The transfer rate varies from 2400 bps up to 4 Mbps.
Note
Support for this protocol in the Linux kernel is not yet complete. The project
is still seen as “experimental” (beta status). Therefore this funtionality is not
included in the standard kernel. This implies that the driver has not been
fully tested yet and may not be as stable as other parts of the kernel.
198
7.3
IrDA – Infrared Data Association
Software
The package irda, series n supplies support for infrared ports as well as the
IrDA Protocol itself. After installation of this package you can find the documentation under /usr/share/doc/packages/irda/README.
>From the package howto you can install the IR-HOWTO. After installation it can
be found under /usr/share/doc/howto/en/IR-HOWTO.gz. For more information on the Linux IrDA-Project visit the URL http://irda.sourceforge.
net/.
Configuration
In a normal installation, the variables START_IRDA, IRDA_PORT and IRDA_IRQ
are set in the file /etc/rc.config . Normally the use of IrDA is deactivated;
with the command
earth: # rcirda start
you can manually activate the port. You can deactivate it with the parameter
stop. When activated the necessary kernel modules are loaded.
With IRDA_PORT (Default /dev/ttyS1) and IRDA_IRQ (Default 3) you can
configure the IrDA port; they are set by the script /etc/irda/drivers when
support for the infrared port is activated.
If you give START_IRDA a value of yes support for the infrared port will be
activated at boot. Unfortunately IrDA uses noticeably more electricity due to the
so-called “discovery” packets that are broadcast every few seconds, which look
for other devices with IrDA communication ports with which to communicate.
Application
In order to print using the infrared port you need to send the print data to the
device file /dev/irlpt0. This device file has the same attributes as the normal “wired” port /dev/lp0, the only difference being the wireless transmission
through infrared light.
You can configure a printer to use this port in the same manner as a parallel port
or serial port printer using YaST (see Section 3.6.1 page 73). When printing
be sure that the printer is in sight of the computer and that the IrDA support is
started.
If you want to communicate with other computers, mobile telephones or the like,
address the device using the device file /dev/ircomm0. With the Siemens S25
mobile telephone, for instance, you can use the program wvdial to access the
internet.
Troubleshooting
If devices do not respond when using the infrared port, check to see if the device
is found by the computer using the command irdadump as ‘root’:
199
7
Notebooks – PCMCIA, APM, IrDA
earth: # irdadump
In the case of a Canon BJC-80 printer in “sight” of the computer earth, you’ll
receive the following output in regular intervals (see Output 7.3.1).
21:41:38.435239
21:41:38.525167
21:41:38.615159
21:41:38.705178
21:41:38.795198
21:41:38.885163
21:41:38.965133
xid:cmd
xid:cmd
xid:cmd
xid:cmd
xid:cmd
xid:cmd
xid:rsp
5b62bed5 > ffffffff S=6 s=0 (14)
5b62bed5 > ffffffff S=6 s=1 (14)
5b62bed5 > ffffffff S=6 s=2 (14)
5b62bed5 > ffffffff S=6 s=3 (14)
5b62bed5 > ffffffff S=6 s=4 (14)
5b62bed5 > ffffffff S=6 s=5 (14)
5b62bed5 < 6cac38dc S=6 s=5 BJC-80 \
hint=8804 [ Printer IrCOMM ] (23)
21:41:38.975176 xid:cmd 5b62bed5 > ffffffff S=6 s=* erde \
hint=0500 [ PnP Computer ] (21)
Output 7.3.1: IrDA: irdadump
If you receive no output or the device does not respond, check the configuration
of the port. Are you using the correct port? Sometimes the infrared port can be
found under the device file /dev/ttyS2 or /dev/ttyS3 or the device is not
being assigned to Interrupt 3. These settings can be changed on nearly every
laptop in the BIOS setup.
It is important to note that you can only communicate with devices using IrDA
if the device you wish to communicate with supports the protocols Printer or
IrCOMM. With the help of special programs (irobex_palm3 or irobex_receive,
please make note of the descriptions in IR-HOWTO) you can communicate with
devices that use the IROBEX Protocol (e. g.3Com Palm Pilot). Which protocol
your device supports can be taken from the output of irdadump in brackets after
the device name. Support for the IrLAN Protocol is still a “Work in progress”
and will be included in future versions of Linux.
You can check to see if the IrDA port is actually emitting light with a normal
video camera. In contrast to humans, most video cameras can “see” infrared
light.
200
8
Printing
8 Printing
This chapter describes the essential procedures which occur “behind the scenes”
when printing takes place.
8.1
Basics and Requirements for Printing
In Linux, data is normally sent to a printer via a “print queue”. The “print
spooler” is responsible for queuing the print jobs and sending them to the printer
in the correct order, thus ensuring that they do not interfere with each other.
The data to be printed often requires conversion to a suitable format before the
printer can handle it: graphics files must normally be first converted to a printable
format, for example. The “print filter” is a piece of software which is responsible
for this conversion.
8.1.1
Different Standard Printer Languages
ASCII text – Most printers can at least print out ASCII text directly. There are
two general types of exception to this: those printers which first require the
text to be converted to another of the printer languages listed below and the
“GDI printers” which are designed only to work with Windows (TM) and,
by default, are capable of printing neither ASCII text or data offered to them
in any of the other standard printer languages.
PostScript – PostScript is the standard printer language in Unix/Linux. If no
PostScript printer is available, a special filter program (Ghostscript) is used
in Linux to convert PostScript data into one of the following standard printer
languages.
PCL 5 or PCL 6 – These printer languages are common among laser printers.
PCL 3 – This printer language is used by most HP DeskJet printers and com-
patible models.
ESC/P, ESC/P2 and ESC/P Raster – These printer languages are used by most
Epson printers and compatible models.
8.1.2 The Problem with GDI Printers
Many printers are sold as “Windows printers” or “GDI printers”. (GDI stands
for the Windows Graphical Device Interface: such printers are designed to work
201
8
Printing
with only one operating system.) They are often difficult or impossible to set up
to work with Linux: some of them are capable of using other standard printer
languages and are thus usable, while others will only work at all with Windows
(TM). You should consult the CDB, at http://cdb.suse.de/, or check with
the hardware manufacturer if you are unsure.
With GDI printers, the manufacturer does without a standard protocol completely
and controls the printer directly with control sequences of the specific model.
However, there are printers on the market which can act both as GDI printers
and also work with “proper” printer languages.
8.1.3
Hardware and Software Requirements
You should check the following points:
• You should check whether your printer is supported by SuSE Linux. You can
do so by looking at the lists which can be found on the installed system and
on the internet at:
– /usr/share/doc/packages/ghostscript/catalog.devices
– http://cdb.suse.de
– http://www.linuxprinting.org → ‘The Database’ (http://www.
linuxprinting.org/database.html)
– http://www.cs.wisc.edu/~ghost/printer.html
Note
You will sometimes hear of printers which require the current version of
“Aladdin Ghostscript”. For licensing reasons, SuSE Linux includes the
slightly different “GNU Ghostscript”. In most cases, a GNU Ghostscript
driver can be found which is suitable for any given printer.
• You should check that you can make the necessary physical and logical connection to the printer. See Section 8.2 on the facing page for details of this.
• You should note that a self-compiled kernel could lack the necessary support
for printing: if in doubt, you should first install and boot from a standard
SuSE kernel. (This can be done through YaST.)
• It is recommended that you install the ‘SuSE Default System’ packages
using YaST or the ‘Standard-System’, using YaST2. The following packages are necessary along with the ‘SuSE Minimal System’ for drives with
little space to print ASCII and PostScript files:
– package a2ps, series ap
– package aps, series ap
– package gs_x11, series ap
– package gs_fonto, series ap
202
8.2
Connecting the Printer Locally
– package gs_fonts, series ap
– package gs_lib, series ap
– package lprold, series n
For the installation of additional packages, see Section 3.4 page 66.
If in doubt, you can orient yourself with the current version of the SDB article
file:/usr/share/doc/sdb/de/html/jsmeix_print-einrichten.html.
Possible Problems
• If you have updated an older SuSE Linux, there may be inconsistencies in the
printing system’s packages and (configuration) files. In this case, it makes
sense to reconfigure the entire printing system.
8.1.4
Defining a Suitable Printer Driver
In the lists mentioned in Section 8.1.3 on the facing page Ghostscript drivers
for specific printer models are provided. If your supplier cannot give you any
Linux-specific information on your printer model, the following tips may help
you:
• Find out if your printer is compatible with a model which does run in Linux
and then use the Ghostscript driver for this compatible model.
“Compatible in Linux” means that your printer can print correctly with the
same binary control sequences as the compatible model – i. e. the printer
can “understand” the same printer language directly (rather than just being
capable of emulating it in Windows through the use of driver software).
The fact that two printers have similar names is not always a guarantee that
they are compatible. This is because printers with similar names do not always understand the same printer language directly.
• The best way of finding out what printer language your printer understands
is from the manufacturer. The printer language is often also specified in the
technical data of the printer manual. The most common printer languages
are listed in Section 8.1.1 page 201.
• Ghostscript includes a special uniprint driver with parameter files for various printers with the extension .upp. If a parameter file exists for your
printer, it can be configured in this way.
8.2
8.2.1
Connecting the Printer Locally
Parallel Ports
Connecting a printer to a Linux system is usually done via a parallel port. A
printer on a parallel port is addressed via the parport subsystem of the kernel.
203
8
Printing
The parallel ports are made known to the parport subsystem by loading additional architecture-specific drivers (see Section 6.4.3 page 175.). In this way,
a number of devices in series can be used simultaneously via one parallel port.
The numbering of device files for parallel port printers starts with /dev/lp0. To
be able to print via the first parallel port, the modules parport, parport\_pc
and lp must be loaded – this is normally performed automatically via the kmod
(Kernel Module Loader - see Section 9.2 page 235), as soon as a print job is sent.
If the parallel port is not found, you can remedy this by using kernel parameters
; see also page ??.
Configuring the first parallel port
The first parallel port, /dev/lp0, is configured by an entry in /etc/modules.
conf (File 8.2.1).
alias parport_lowlevel parport_pc
options parport_pc io=0x378 irq=none,none
# If you have multiple parallel ports, specify them this way:
# options parport_pc io=0x378,0x278 irq=none,none
File contents 8.2.1: /etc/modules.conf: First parallel port
io stands for the first address of the parallel port. The entry irq=none none
puts the parallel port into “polling mode” rather than interrupt driven mode. This
is generally a better option and is slower only on very old computers.
In order for these settings to work, the following settings for the first parallel port
must be made in the BIOS, or via the computer’s firmware:
• IO-address 378 (hexadecimal)
• Interrupt 7 (not relevant in polling mode)
• Mode Normal or SPP (other modes do not always function)
• DMA is switched off (should be switched to Normal mode)
Testing the first parallel port
If the printer is able to print ASCII text, then, as user ‘root’ (System administrator), you should be able to print out a page with the word hello, using the
command
earth: # echo -en "hello\f"
>/dev/lp0
.
Configuring the second parallel port
A second parallel port, which can be addressed via the standard IO address 278
(hexadecimal) (e. g. which can be set by jumper on an ISA port card), can also
204
8.2
Connecting the Printer Locally
alias parport_lowlevel parport_pc
# options parport_pc io=0x378 irq=none,none
# If you have multiple parallel ports, specify them this way:
options parport_pc io=0x378,0x278 irq=none,none
File contents 8.2.2: /etc/modules.conf: Two parallel ports
be configured with an entry in /etc/modules.conf (File 8.2.2 on the facing
page).
After a reboot or restarting all services (see on the next page), the second parallel
port will be available.
Testing the second parallel port
If the printer is able to print ASCII text, then, as user ‘root’, you should be
able to print out a page with the word hello, using the command
earth: # echo -en "hello\f" > /dev/lp1
.
8.2.2 Special Slot Cards: ISA-PnP and PCI
If the IO address of an additional parallel port is not known beforehand, this must
be found out.
ISA PnP cards
Sometimes fixed values for IO address, interrupt and mode can be set on such
cards, either by jumper or – if you have DOS/Windows – via an included
DOS/Windows program. If this is possible, you should set fixed values for IO
address, interrupt and mode.
Otherwise the values for IO address, interrupt and mode are only entered on
the ISA PnP card when Linux is started up. The values entered can either be
seen in the Linux boot messages, or you can proceed as described in Chapter 6.2
page 170.
PCI cards
Which IO addresses and which interrupts can be considered for a PCI card can
be seen from the following command (see Output 8.2.1 on the next page):
earth: # /sbin/lspci -vv | less
In each case two IO addresses, separated by 400 (hexadecimal), belong together
with a parallel port. The configuration entry must appear as shown in File 8.2.3
on the following page.
After a reboot or restart of all services (as described below), all three parallel
ports will become available.
205
8
Printing
...
00:0a.0 Parallel controller: ...
...
Flags: stepping, medium devsel, IRQ 10
I/O ports at b400
I/O ports at b000
I/O ports at a800
I/O ports at a400
...
Output 8.2.1: Extract from lspci -v for a PCI port card
alias parport_lowlevel parport_pc
# options parport_pc io=0x378 irq=none,none
# If you have multiple parallel ports, specify them this way:
options parport_pc io=0x378,0xb400,0xa800 irq=none,none,none
File contents 8.2.3: /etc/modules.conf: PCI card with 2 parallel ports
Testing all parallel ports
If you have a normal (ASCII-capable) printer, you should, as the user ‘root’,
have a page printed out with the word hello, using the commands
earth: # echo -en "hello\f" > /dev/lp0
earth: # echo -en "hello\f" > /dev/lp1
earth: # echo -en "hello\f" > /dev/lp2
Instead of rebooting, it is enough, as the user ‘root’, to update the list of kernel
module dependencies and – if only the printer is connected to the parallel ports
– stop the printer daemon, unload the kernel modules which concern the parallel
ports, reload them again and restart the printer daemon:
earth:
earth:
earth:
earth:
earth:
earth:
earth:
earth:
earth:
earth:
earth:
#
#
#
#
#
#
#
#
#
#
#
/sbin/depmod -a
rclpd stop
rmmod lp
rmmod parport_probe
rmmod parport_pc
rmmod parport
modprobe parport
modprobe parport_pc
modprobe parport_probe
modprobe lp
rclpd start
8.2.3
USB Connections
If you intend to use a USB printer, you should check that USB support is enabled in the BIOS. In an Award BIOS, for example, in the menu ‘PNP AND PCI
SETUP’ (or similar), the entry ‘USB IRQ’ (or similar) must be set to Enabled
(or similar).
206
8.2
Connecting the Printer Locally
You can test if the USB printer reacts by entering, as the user root:
earth: # echo -en "hello\f" > /dev/usblp0
Providing that there is a printer on the first USB port, /dev/usblp0, that can
print ASCII text, a page with the word hello should be printed.
It may sometimes be the case that the USB printer can no longer be addressed –
e. g.if you remove the USB plug during printing. Then you will need to stop all
processes which access /dev/usblp0, unload the kernel modules involving the
USB printer and reload these again, by entering the following commands as user
root:
earth:
earth:
earth:
earth:
earth:
earth:
earth:
earth:
earth:
#
#
#
#
#
#
#
#
#
fuser -k /dev/usblp0
rmmod printer
rmmod usb-uhci
umount usbdevfs
rmmod usbcore
modprobe usbcore
mount usbdevfs
modprobe usb-uhci
modprobe printer
# or:
rmmod usb-ohci
# or:
modprobe usb-ohci
Check beforehand, with lsmod, which USB modules are loaded (either usb-uhci
or usb-ohci) and if further module dependencies exist; for example, the display
usbcore
...
[printer usb-uhci]
means that the module usbcore is still needed by the modules printer and
usb-uhci. In this case, therefore, the modules printer and usb-uhci must
be removed before the module usbcore.
8.2.4
Serial Ports
To set up a serial printer, use lprsetup. This menu-driven configuration script
is described in Section 8.5 page 212.
After ending lprsetup the lines shown in 8.2.4 in the file /etc/printcap
must appear in addition to the normal entries.
:br#9600:\
:ty=ixon -imaxbel -ixany -ixoff -crtscts:\
File contents 8.2.4: /etc/printcap: Serial ports
With br, the baud rate of the serial port is specified. ty stands for the stty
options. You may need to adjust both values, depending on the hardware you
have.
If there are problems, you can use, instead of the standard spooler from the package lprold, the print spooler from the package plp as follows (both packages
are in the series n):
1. Log in as user ‘root’.
207
8
Printing
2. Stop the print spooler with:
earth: # rclpd stop
3. Uninstall the package lprold, using YaST.
4. Finish YaST and restart it to install the package plp.
5. Start up the print spooler with:
earth: # rclpd start
Additional information
The parameters of the serial port can be set with the program setserial; for
this, see the manpage for setserial (man setserial).
If a matching setserial command is written in /etc/init.d/boot.local,
this will be automatically carried out each time the computer is booted (see also
/etc/init.d/serial).
In the manpage for stty (man stty) many options are explained.
8.3
lpd: the Print Manager and Tools
8.3.1
The Print Manager in the Background
The lpd Line Printer Daemon is launched by the /etc/init.d/lpd script
and runs in the background, assuming the corresponding option START_LPD=yes
has been set in /etc/rc.config.
lpd checks /etc/printcap to see which print queues are defined. Its job is to
organize the execution of spooled jobs:
• it manages local print queues: it sends every job’s data file through the appropriate filter—which is assigned by the entry in /etc/printcap and by
an explicit setting in the control file—and then to the printer port;
• it takes care of the order of the jobs;
• it checks the status of queues and printers in the local spool directories;
• it sends jobs to an lpd on a remote machine;
• it accepts requests from remote machines for local queues or refuses them if
authorization fails.
Authorization: only requests from hosts listed in /etc/hosts.lpd are executed. It is also possible to enter the name in /etc/hosts.equiv, but this
has far-reaching consequences as far as access and security are concerned and,
therefore, should be avoided.
Additional definitions of the queue can restrict access to certain users, or users
with an account on the local machine.
208
8.3
8.3.2
lpd: the Print Manager and Tools
Additional Tools and Control Tools for the User
If you are printing a file, for example via the raw queue, which is not available in
printer-specific format, the printer will not know what to do with this data: large
amounts of paper will be printed with meaningless characters. The same thing
will happen if the print filter is not properly configured, and produces printerspecific data for an incompatible printer model.
If you want to remove such a print job from the queue you can use the following
commands to process the print queues.
Note
You need to have ‘root’-permissions to be able to manipulate the print
queues, i.e. if you want to delete other people’s print jobs, for example, you
must work as ‘root’.
lpq shows your own jobs in the queue: For example:
[email protected]: > lpq -Pqueue
queue is ready and printing
Rank
Owner
Job Files
active newbie
676 Hello.txt
1st
newbie
677 letter.dvi
2nd
newbie
683 picture.gif
Total Size
259420 bytes
11578 bytes
37464 bytes
Output 8.3.1: Example output of the command lpq.
lprm removes your own jobs from a queue. Thus entering this:
[email protected]: > lprm -Pqueue 676
will produce the following output:
dfA676Aa05005 dequeued
cfA676Aa05005 dequeued
Output 8.3.2: Example output of the command lprm.
A print job belongs to the user who initiated it. This user, as well as the job
number, are displayed with the lpq commmand. The same job number can
appear in different queues, so you always need to give the name of the queue.
If no job number is given, the currently active job is removed from the relevant queue—if it is your own job.
lprm -Pqueue deletes the current job from the specified queue, as long as
this belongs to the user who issued the lprm command. The printer will still
print the data which is already in its buffer.
lprm -Pqueue deletes all print jobs of the user from the specified queue.
If ‘root’ enters this command, all print jobs are deleted from the specified
queue.
209
8
Printing
lpc controls the print queues: these can be specified by name, or you can specify
all. Most of the lpc commands listed below can only be executed by “root”.
The most important options are:
status queue Provides a status report. If the <queue> argument is miss-
ing then this functions like <all>, i. e. a status report for all queues is
displayed.
disable queue Stops new jobs being moved to the queue.
enable queue Enables the queue to accept new jobs.
stop queue Stops jobs from the queue being printed (the job currently
being printed is completed).
start queue Starts printing jobs again from the queue.
down queue Is the same as disable plus stop.
up queue Is the same as enable plus start.
abort queue Is the same as down, except that a job currently being printed
is interrupted immediately. The jobs remain, however, and printing can be
continued after the queue is re-started (up).
You can pass these commands on to lpc directly in the command line (e. g.
lpc status). Or you can run lpc without parameters: then the dialog
mode with its own prompt, lpc> is started, awaiting the entry of lpc-commands. You can end this dialog with quit or exit.
Note
Print jobs remain in the queues even when you shut down the computer
during printing and then start Linux again. A print job which has gone wrong
should be removed from the queue with the commands shown above.
8.4
lpr: Sending off Print Jobs
The lpr is the daily “user interface” for existing print queues. The following
procedure takes place:
1. Either the user himself causes a new print job with lpr or an application uses
the lpr command, when the user chooses its ‘Print’ menu item.
2. lpr saves the data to be printed to the print queue. From there the print
spooler forwards this to the print filter belonging to the print queue.
3. The printer filter converts the data to be printed to a format which the printer
can print directly and then sends this to the printer.
4. After the entire print job has been sent to the printer it is removed from the
print queue.
210
8.4
lpr: Sending off Print Jobs
Normally a job is started using:
[email protected]: > lpr text_file
or:
[email protected]: > lpr [-Pqueue] text_file
If you omit the option -P ( for “Printer”, the queue’s name), the default is taken
from the PRINTER environment variable. If this is not set, the default name lp
is used. The same applies for the commands lpq, lprm and lpc (see below).
Various print queues are needed for the following reasons:
• If a number of different printers are available, these different printers are
addressed via different print queues, such as with
[email protected]: > lpr -Pprinter2 file
for a second printer via the print queue printer2.
• Each print queue uses its own print filter. So for example you might use
a standard print queue for rapid black and white printing and another print
queue (for example with the name color) with a slower print filter which
provides higher quality color printing: you would access this by
[email protected]: > lpr -Pcolor file
If you have configured the printer with YaST1, YaST2 or lprsetup, the following queues are always created by default:
lp – If you print a file via this standard queue, the apsfilter is used as the print
filter. The filter automatically determines what type of data the file contains
and conversion to the printer-specific format is carried out accordingly.
ascii – If you print a file via the ascii queue, with
[email protected]: > lpr -Pascii file
then the apsfilter is used as the print filter, but this does not automatically
define what type of data is contained in the file, rather the command line
specifies that the file contains ASCII text, and conversion to printer-specific
format is carried out accordingly.
raw – If you print a file via the raw queue, with
[email protected]: > lpr -Praw file
then the apsfilter is used as the print filter, but this does not carry out a conversion to printer-specific format – rather the file is sent “raw” to the printer.
So in this case the file must already contain data in printer-specific format.
In all these cases the same printer is always used, but this functions differently,
depending on the print queue involved.
Tip
For especially large print jobs, it may be useful, instead of making a copy
of the data file, to make a symbolic from the file to the spool directory. This
can be done using the lpr option -s. Of course, you should then remove
write permissions to this file until the print job has been completed!
211
8
Printing
8.5
SETUP (lprsetup): Configuring the Print
System
The package aps installs the configuration program /var/lib/apsfilter/SETUP.
This is normally started with the command lprsetup which is symbolically linked
to it. It provides the following services:
• A list of all apsfilter printer configurations
• Allows insertion and deletion of apsfilter printer configurations
8.5.1
Hints on Configuring with lprsetup
lprsetup is menu-driven and can be operated with the keyboard. Moving between the answer fields ‘OK’ and ‘Cancel’ is done in all menus by pressing the
and ↑ to move through selection lists.
Tab key; use the ↓ 1. Start lprsetup as the user ‘root’ on the text console:
earth: # lprsetup
Press ←- and you will reach the main menu:
‘EXIT’ Exit apsfilter setup – end lprsetup.
‘LISTING’ List all apsfilter entries – list all existing queues.
‘ENTRY’ Add/Overwrite/Delete an apsfilter entry – To add a new printer the
menu item ‘ENTRY’ is used. This leads to another menu, ‘Choose your
printer definition’, in which you define your printer.
‘DELETE’ Fast delete an apsfilter entry – To delete an existing apsfilterprinter, select ‘DELETE’, and you will receive a list of current apsfilter-
printers to choose from.
2. Then select ‘ENTRY’. You will see the following:
RETURN
DEVICE
Back to previous menu
Change printer interface
3. Select ‘DEVICE’ (Port).
For printers on a parallel port or a USB port, choose ‘PARALLEL’ and for
ones on a serial port, choose ‘SERIAL’. Parallel ports: /dev/lp0, /dev/
lp1, /dev/lp2; USB printer ports: /dev/usblp0, /dev/usblp1, /dev/
usblp2; serial ports: /dev/ttyS0, /dev/ttyS1, /dev/ttyS2.
Confirm your entry with ‘OK’.
4. Select ‘PRINTER’ and choose the correct printer type from the following list:
POSTSCRIPT
HEWLETT-PACKARD
OTHER
FREEDEF
212
For a real PostScript printer
For an HP DeskJet printer
Another non-PostSript printer
Free definition of driver name
8.5
SETUP (lprsetup): Configuring
the Print System
Confirm this with ‘COMMIT’.
Look through the following list for the matching Ghostscript driver or parameter file (recognized by the ending .upp) and then click on ‘OK’.
5. Enter the resolution. Only leave the defaults if you do not know the correct
resolution. If you are unsure, try the resolutions 300, 360, 600, and 720. If
you are using a .upp paramter file, it is important that the resolution you set
here should match that given in the parameter file. Then click on ‘OK’.
6. Select ‘PAPER’ and go through the following list until you have found the
correct paper size (for laser printers normally a4 and for Inkjet printers normally a4dj). Then click on ‘OK’.
7. Select ‘COLOR’ and enter ‘MONO’ or ‘COLOR’ to make it easier for a later
configuration to distinguish between black and white and color printing –
for this, look at the next item and the following Section, “Configuring the
apsfilter”.
8. If you have not yet configured a standard lp queue, lprsetup will always
create the standard queues lp, ascii, raw and possibly also lp-mono; lp-mono
is only created if you choose‘COLOR’ in the last item. If the standard queues
were already set up you can, when configuring additional queues, enter your
own queue names under ‘SPECIAL’ and ‘NAME’. This should only consist of
letters and numbers, whereby short names with lower case letters are preferable, such as color for a color print queue.
9. Important: With ‘ADD’ the new printer is finally set up. A list is displayed of
which print queues were created on the system with the apsfilter configuration.
This means there are always several queues created, each enabling a different
printer output. Make a note from this list of which print queues were created
### cdjcolor a4dj mono 300 color ###
color-ascii|lp10|cdjcolor-a4dj-ascii-mono-300-color
|cdjcolor a4dj ascii mono 300
color|lp11|cdjcolor-a4dj-auto-mono-300-color
|cdjcolor a4dj auto mono 300
color-raw|lp12|cdjcolor-a4dj-raw-color|cdjcolor a4dj raw
Output 8.5.1: List of print queues
(normally only long lines are given – in the above example, you should note
color-ascii, color and color-raw. Then choose ‘OK’.
10. Now the configuration files for the apsfilter are shown. Any changes should
not be made in the global configuration file /etc/apsfilterrc, but only
in the configuration file allocated to the print queues just created. The latter configuration file has the form /etc/apsfilterrc. <gs_driver>,
where <gs_driver> is the Ghostscript driver chosen in item 4 4.
If the same Ghostscript driver is chosen for a number of configurations you
can still use the same configuration file, since different queues can be distinguished within such a configuration file. For
more
on this, see the following
Section “Configuring the apsfilter”. Press ←- to continue.
213
8
Printing
11. Now choose ‘RETURN’ and then ‘EXIT’.
8.5.2
Testing the printer
If the standard queues are created, you should now be able to print the file /etc/
fstab with the command
[email protected]: > lpr /etc/fstab
If the chosen Ghostscript driver allows color printing, you can test this with:
[email protected]: > lpr /usr/share/ghostscript/5.50/examples/colorcir.ps
8.5.3
Special cases
With the command lpr file the type of file (e.g. ASCII or PostScript) is
automatically defined. If the ASCII file type is to be forced, you can do this
with
[email protected]: > lpr -Pascii file
(e. g.to print a PostScript source text as such, as this will otherwise be interpreted
as a PostScript file).
For files which already exist in printer-specific format, you should use:
[email protected]: > lpr -Praw file
With
[email protected]: > lpr -Plp-mono file
black and white print is forced. To enable this you must first set the relevant
Ghostscript parameters in an apsfilterrc file; refer to Section 8.6.2 on the
next page.
8.6
8.6.1
The apsfilter
How the apsfilter Works
When configuring the printer with YaST1 or lprsetup the following parameters
are saved in /etc/printcap:
• Ghostscript driver; e. g. hpdj, ljet4, stcany.upp.
• Paper format; e. g. a4, a4dj, letter, letterdj.
• Method; ascii or auto or raw.
• Color; if the method is not raw: mono or color
• Resolution; if the method is not raw: e. g. 300, 360, 600, 720.
• Queue name; if this is explicitly given with lprsetup under ‘SPECIAL Settings for your printer’
214
8.6
The apsfilter
color-ascii|lp4|hpdj-a4dj-ascii-mono-300-color\
|hpdj a4dj ascii mono 300:\
:lp=/dev/lp0:\
:sd=/var/spool/lpd/hpdj-a4dj-ascii-mono-300-color:\
:lf=/var/spool/lpd/hpdj-a4dj-ascii-mono-300-color/log:\
:af=/var/spool/lpd/hpdj-a4dj-ascii-mono-300-color/acct:\
:if=/var/lib/apsfilter/bin/hpdj-a4dj-ascii-mono-300-color:\
:[email protected]:mx#0:\
:tr=:cl:sh:
File contents 8.6.1: queue for color in /etc/printcap
The actual print filter, the shell script /var/lib/apsfilter/apsfilter, is
called up via a link in accordance with the if definition in /etc/printcap.
The above parameters are passed on via this link to the print filter.
Example: If an entry exists in /etc/printcap something like what is shown in
File 8.6.1, then the following parameters are passed on to the apsfilter:
Ghostscript driver : PRINTER="hpdj"
Paper format
: PAPERSIZE="a4dj"
Method
: METHOD="ascii"
Color
: COLOR="mono"
Resolution
: DPI="300"
Queue name
: QUEUE="color"
Depending on how these variables are set, apsfilter will behave differently:
METHOD="raw" – The data is sent to the printer device without being converted
(e. g. /dev/lp0).
METHOD="ascii" – It is assumed that the data is ASCII text and that this text
will be converted with a2ps to the PostScript format; see the manpage for
a2ps (man a2ps).
The data in PostScript format is then converted by Ghostscript (gs) to the
printer-specific format and sent to a printer device. The relevant Ghostscript
driver and the resolution are defined in the above variables; further Ghostscript
parameters can be configured with the apsfilter .
METHOD="auto" – apsfilter automatically tries to define what type of file the
data is. The required conversion program is used to transform the data to
the PostScript format. The data in PostScript format is then converted by
Ghostscript to the printer specific format and sent to the printer device.
8.6.2
Configuring the apsfilter
Through special variables, the behavior of the apsfilters can be individually adjusted. These variables are entered in one of the following configuraion files:
• /etc/apsfilterrc
215
8
Printing
• /etc/apsfilterrc.<gs_driver>
where <gs_driver> is replaced by the actual name of the Ghostscript driver.
These configuration files are read in by the apsfilter in the given sequence, i. e.
this driver specific file /etc/apsfilterrc. <gs_driver> overwrites the defaults in the global file /etc/apsfilterrc.
In /etc/apsfilterrc only global defaults for all print queues should be entered. Special settings should be written in the matching /etc/apsfilterrc.
<gs_driver>.
If you configure the printer with YaST2 the parameters are in part saved as above
in /etc/printcap, but especially in /etc/gs.upp/y2prn_<queue>.upp.
Here <queue> stands for the standard queue lp, or else the name which was
assigned with an additional queue (e. g. color). The actual print filter /var/
lib/apsfilter/apsfilter here is also called up via a link in accordance
with the if entry in /etc/printcap. The above parameters are passed on to
the print filter partly via this link and partly via
/etc/gs.upp/y2prn_<queue>.upp. In this file the Ghostscript parameters
are stored which were set by YaST2 during the printer configuration. Only very
special Ghostscript parameter values which can not be adjusted by YaST2 can
be entered here. The variables which define the behavior of the apsfilter must be
entered in one of the following configuration files:
• /etc/apsfilterrc
• /etc/apsfilterrc.y2prn_<queue>.upp
These configuration files are read in by the apsfilter in the sequence specified,
i. e. the settings in /etc/apsfilterrc.y2prn_<queue>.upp overwrites the
defaults in /etc/apsfilterrc.
In /etc/apsfilterrc there are many helpful commentaries on the individual
variables. Here is an overview of the most important ones:
FEATURE allows you to define how ASCII texts are printed:
The options:
FEATURE=1 prints one page of ASCII text per sheet of paper, with header
FEATURE=2 prints two pages of ASCII text per sheet of paper, with header
FEATURE=1n prints one page of ASCII text per sheet of paper, without
header
FEATURE=2n prints two pages of ASCII text per sheet of paper, without
header
FEATURE=1l prints in landscape format, with header
FEATURE=1ln prints in landscape format, without header
GS_FEATURES enables special Ghostscript parameters to be given. The Ghost-
script parameters are very varied, depending on the Ghostscript driver used.
Information on specific parameter settings can be found in
/usr/share/ghostscript/5.50/doc/Devices.htm and
216
8.6
The apsfilter
/usr/share/ghostscript/5.50/doc/hpdj/gs-hpdj.txt; refer also
to Section 8.8 page 222.
Continuing the above example of the file 8.6.1 page 215:
So that the printer really can always print in black and white in the case of
$COLOR="mono", the section from file 8.6.2 should be written into /etc/
apsfilterrc.hpdj, for example.
if [ "$COLOR" = "mono" ]; then
GS_FEATURES="-sModel=unspec -sColorMode=mono"
else
GS_FEATURES="-sModel=unspec -sColorMode=CMYK"
fi
File contents 8.6.2: /etc/apsfilterrc.hpdj: Settings for black and white
By means of the file file:/usr/share/doc/packages/ghostscript/
doc/hpdj/gs-hpdj.txt, you can check if the settings are correct or even
possible for your printer model.
Brief information on this:
• For -sModel=, you can choose between 500, 500C, 510, 520, 540,
550C, 560C, 850C, 855C and unspec.
• For -sColorMode=, you can choose between mono, CMY, CMY+K and
CMYK.
For explanations on the various color models (see file:/usr/share/doc/
packages/ghostscript/doc/hpdj/gs-hpdj.txt):
mono The printer only has a black cartridge, e.g. the models 500, 510 and
520.
CMY The printer can print either with the black cartridge or with the color
cartridge. The cartridges usually have to be changed manually, e.g. the
models 500C and 540.
CMY+K The printer has both a black and a color cartridge, but black and color
cannot be mixed. So for color printing, black is mixed from the colors,
e.g. the models 550C and 560C.
CMYK The printer has both a black and a color cartridge, and black and
color can be mixed, e.g. the models 850C, 855C and most other modern deskjets (unspec).
PRELOADS allows a file to be defined which is processed by the apsfilter before
the actual data is printed. A number of examples of this:
• Adjusting the brightness when printing on color inkjet printers: See file:
/usr/share/doc/sdb/de/html/jsmeix_print-gammakorrektur.
html
• Adjusting page margins when printing PostScript files: See file:/usr/
share/doc/sdb/sdb/de/html/ke_print-margins.html
217
8
Printing
• Switching a PostScript printer to duplex printing or choosing a different
paper tray with a PostScript printer: See file:/usr/share/doc/sdb/
sdb/de/html/ke_print-duplex.html and file:/usr/share/doc/
sdb/sdb/de/html/ke_tray.html
ENCODING allows ASCII text and HTML pages from Netscape to be printed,
in accordance with ISO-8859-1 or ISO-8859-2 – see also the comments in
/etc/apsfilterrc and file:/usr/share/doc/sdb/de/html/jsmeix_
print-iso88592.html.
8.6.3
Finding errors with apsfilter
A protocol recording what passes through the apsfilter when a print job is processed can be of help in looking for errors.
Procedure:
1. Log in as user ‘root’.
2. In the file /var/lib/apsfilter/apsfilter remove the commentary sign
‘#’ in front of set -x.
3. From now on the activities of the print filter are recorded in matching log
files which are specified in /etc/printcap. For lf the relevant log file of
the specific print queues is given e. g.
/var/spool/lpd/hpdj-a4-auto-color-300/log.
The log file of the last printout in each case is appended to the existing log
file, which can lead to these files becoming very large. You can empty these
log files (without deleting them) using a command such as:
earth: # cat /dev/null > /var/spool/lpd/hpdj-a4-ascii-mono300/log
or
earth: # cat /dev/null > /var/spool/lpd/hpdj-a4-auto-color300/log,
but not deleted.
4. After a failed attempt to print, error messages in the log files can help you
to find the cause of the printing problem. The log files in the above example
can be browsed through using less, for example.
8.7
Printing in the TCP/IP Network
What’s it all about?
If you
• use a printer in a TCP/IP network that is attached to another computer
218
8.7
Printing in the TCP/IP Network
• would like to use a printer via a TCP/IP network that is connected to a
“printserver unit”
• wish to use a printer with a TCP/IP network connection
In order to accomplish, this you need to filter the print jobs using apsfilter.
Preliminary Remarks on Concepts
A computer in a TCP/IP network to which a printer is connected will be called a
print server, in contrast to a printserver unit, which is a small device which connects a printer to a TCP/IP network. A printer that itself has a TCP/IP network
connection will be referred to as a network printer and the computer that starts
the print job as the client.
8.7.1 Overview: Specific Cases
The difference is in the filtering of the files to be printed. At some point in the
chain, the files need to be converted to a format which the printer can print –
in the print-language of the printer itself (PostScript, HP PCL, ESC/P). This is
done by apsfilter. In the case of network printers and printserver units apsfilter
runs on the client, which sends the information to the network printers or print
server unit. In the case of a print server apsfilter may be run on the client or on
the print server itself. There exist, then, several possibilities:
Network printers with filtering at the client:
1. Client: convert files to printable files (-apsfilter->)
2. Client: send the printable files to the network printer (-remote->)
Printserver unit with filtering at the client:
1. Client: convert files to printable files (-apsfilter->)
2. Client: send the printable files to the printserver unit (-remote->)
3. Printserver unit: send the printable files to the printer
A printer connected to a print server with filtering at the client:
1. Client: convert files to printable files (-apsfilter->)
2. Client: send the printable files to the print server (-remote->)
3. Print server: send the printable files to the printer
A printer connected to a print server with filtering at the print server:
1. Client: send the files to the print server (-remote->)
2. Print server: convert files to printable files (-apsfilter->)
3. Print server: send the printable files to the printer
219
8
Printing
• A printer forwarding queue is needed at the place where -remote-> is. The
information is not filtered here, only forwarded.
• At the place where -apsfilter-> is, a printer forwarding queue is needed
which filter the files. If the filtering is done at the client this called a “prefilter” for the “printer forwarding queue”. If the filtering is done at the print
server, this is a normal printer forwarding queue such as lp or ascii.
Requirements:
The printer must be supported by SuSE Linux because the prefilter creates printable files in the same manner as that for a local printer. Refer also to Section 8.2
page 203.
There must be a TCP/IP connection to the network printer and it must be functioning properly.
8.7.2
Configuring a Printer Forwarding Queue on the Client
Log in as system administrator ‘root’
a text
on console.
If you have a graphical
login switch to a text console, using Ctrl + Alt + F2 .
1. Enter the command /var/lib/apsfilter/SETUP or lprsetup.
2. Press ←- , to enter the menu ‘APSFILTER SETUP’.
3. Choose first ‘ENTRY’, then ‘DEVICE’ and then ‘REMOTE’.
4. Enter the IP address of the network printer, the printserver unit, or the print
server. If your network has name resolution (DNS) you may alternatively
enter the name of the print server.
5. Enter the description of the forwarding queue on the network printer, the
printserver unit, or the print server. In the case of network printer or the
printserver units you can find the possible descriptions in the documentation
of the device. In the case of a print server is either lp or ascii, depending
upon which is in use on the print server.
6. Choose ‘ADD’.
7. Press ←- .
8. Choose first ‘RETURN’ then ‘EXIT’.
Now remote is configured on the client. After restarting the printer daemon on
the client with the command
earth: # rclpd stop
earth: # rclpd start
the queue remote is ready for use.
With the command
earth: # lpr -Premote <file>
220
8.7
Printing in the TCP/IP Network
the <file> is sent without being filtered on the network printer or printserver
unit. If the printer is connected to a print server the file /etc/hosts.lpd must
include the IP address of the client. If name resolution functions you may also
enter the name of the client here.
After restarting the printer daemon on the print server it will accept print jobs
from the given client. If the printer is connected to the print server and the
filtering is done on the print server you are now done with the configuration.
8.7.3
Configuring a Prefilter on a Client
1. Start lprsetup.
2. Press ←- .
3. First choose ‘ENTRY’, then ‘DEVICE’ and then ‘PREFILTER’.
4. Choose the configured queue remote.
5. Choose ‘PRINTER’.
6. Select the relevant print format from the list ‘POSTSCRIPT’, ‘HEWLETTPACKARD’, ‘OTHER’ or ‘FREEDEF’.
7. Choose ‘COMMIT’.
8. Look through the following list until you’ve found the correct Ghostscript
driver or parameter file and then choose ‘OK’.
9. Enter the correct resolution and then choose ‘OK’.
10. First press ‘RETURN’ then ‘PAPER’.
11. Enter the correct paper size and then choose ‘OK’.
12. Choose ‘COLOR’.
13. Choose either ‘MONO’ or ‘COLOR’ and then press ‘OK’.
14. Choose ‘ADD’. You will receive output telling you which queue will be used
on your system with the apsfilter configuration. Make a note of this then
choose ‘OK’.
15. Press ←- .
16. Press first ‘RETURN’ then ‘EXIT’.
After restarting the printer daemon on the client with the command
earth: # rclpd stop
earth: # rclpd start
your new prefilter queue on the client is ready for use.
With the command
earth: # lpr -Pprefilter-queue <file>
the <file> is sent to the prefilter-queue given. Once there it is converted by
apsfilter into printable files and, through the remote-queue is sent to the network
printer, printserver unit or print server.
221
8
Printing
8.7.4
Problems with Configuration
Checking the prefilter configuration
Connect the printer to the first parallel port on the computer you wish to use
and configure the printer, just for test purposes, locally on the computer.
To do this, proceed with Section 8.2 page 203.
This tests whether the problems lie on the printer or the network. If the printer
functions you’ll know the correct Ghostscript driver and the other parameters
for the configuration were correct. Now you can configure your printer as a
network printer, in accordance with the above instructions.
The network printer or printserver unit doesn’t work properly
There are occasionally problems with the print spooler, e. g.when more than
one printer is attached or when more than one file at a time needs to be
printed. Since these are connected with the print spooler in the printserver
unit or in the network printer, nothing much can be done. It is therefore
generally easier to connect the printer to a print server.
The following remedy may help, however: a single computer serves as a
print server for the printserver unit or the network printer. All clients send
print jobs to this print server, and only this print server takes on the spooling
of print jobs and sends these on to the printserver unit or the network printer.
Filtering can also take place here on the client or on the print server. Details
of this can be found at: file:/usr/share/doc/sdb/de/html/jsmeix_
print-netzwerk.html.
Background information:
The “Printer forwarding queue” and the “Prefilter-queue” cannot be contained in
the same queue because the print daemon lpd (from package lprold) ignores
distant queue filter information given in /etc/printcap – therefore a prefilter
needs its own queue.
8.8 Some Words on Ghostscript
If you don’t own a PostScript printer, Ghostscript is the most popular choice for
a filter. Ghostscript accepts PostScript files and contains many “printer drivers”
for conversion purposes. Ghostscript is much more, though, than just a collection
of useful printer drivers – Ghostscript can also prepare PostScript files for screen
output (for gv) or convert them to PDF format.
Ghostscript – described in
file:/usr/share/doc/packages/ghostscript/doc/Use.htm – is an extensive tool with many command line options. If you invoke Ghostscript from
the command line, it presents you with its own input prompt, GS>. You can leave
this by entering quit.
The help command
[email protected]: > gs -h | less
222
8.8
Some Words on Ghostscript
lists the most important options, the version number of the program as well as the
current list of supported devices; the uniprint details also appear here – the parameter files for uniprint are listed in file:/usr/share/doc/packages/
ghostscript/catalog.devices.
8.8.1 Examples of Working with Ghostscript
In /usr/share/ghostscript/5.50/examples – the Ghostscript version 5.50
is included in SuSE Linux– here you will find a number of PostScript files.
/usr/share/ghostscript/5.50/examples/colorcir.ps is suitable for
testing purposes. In X, the graphical desktop, you can display a PostScript file
on the screen with the command gs:
[email protected]: > gs /usr/share/ghostscript/5.50/examples/colorcir.ps
To close this, press Ctrl + c in the terminal window from which you started
gs.
Converting a PostScript file to the printer-specific format for a PCL-5 or PCL-6
printer can be performed, for example, with the command
[email protected]: > gs -q -dNOPAUSE -dSAFER -sOutputFile=/tmp/out.prn \ sDEVICE=ljet4 -r300x300 \
/usr/share/ghostscript/5.50/examples/colorcir.ps quit.ps
where the command should be written in a single line, and the backslash (‘\’)
must be suppressed. Furthermore it is assumed that the file /tmp/out.prn does
not yet exist.
Converting a PostScript file to the printer-specific format for an HP DeskJet
(color printer with PCL 3) can be done with one of the following commands:
[email protected]: > gs -q -dNOPAUSE -dSAFER -sOutputFile=/tmp/out.prn
-sDEVICE=hpdj -r300x300 \
-sModel=500 -sColorMode=mono -dCompressionMethod=0 \
/usr/share/ghostscript/5.50/examples/colorcir.ps quit.ps
[email protected]: > gs -q -dNOPAUSE -dSAFER -sOutputFile=/tmp/out.prn
-sDEVICE=cdjmono -r300x300 \
/usr/share/ghostscript/5.50/examples/colorcir.ps quit.ps
[email protected]: > gs -q -dNOPAUSE -dSAFER -sOutputFile=/tmp/out.prn
-sDEVICE=cdj500 -r300x300 \
/usr/share/ghostscript/5.50/examples/colorcir.ps quit.ps
[email protected]: > gs -q -dNOPAUSE -dSAFER -sOutputFile=/tmp/out.prn
-sDEVICE=cdj550 -r300x300 \
/usr/share/ghostscript/5.50/examples/colorcir.ps quit.ps
\
\
\
\
(Every command is to be entered on each line without ‘\’.)
The conversion of a PostScript file to the printer-specific format for an ESC/P2
or ESC/P or ESC/P dot matrix printer takes place using one of the following
commands:
[email protected]: > gs -q -dNOPAUSE -dSAFER -sOutputFile=/tmp/out.prn \
@stcany.upp \
/usr/share/ghostscript/5.50/examples/colorcir.ps quit.ps
223
8
Printing
[email protected]: > gs -q -dNOPAUSE -dSAFER -sOutputFile=/tmp/out.prn \
-sDEVICE=stcolor -r360x360 \
-dBitsPerPixel=1 -sDithering=gsmono -dnoWeave sOutputCode=plain \
/usr/share/ghostscript/5.50/examples/colorcir.ps quit.ps
Here you can see the difference in the command when using a parameter file for
the uniprint driver and when using one of the other Ghostscript drivers. Since
all driver-specific parameters are given in the uniprint parameter file, no further
driver-specific parameters need to be given, in contrast to the other Ghostscript
drivers.
After each of the above commands, the printer-specific data is now located in
/tmp/out.prn, which can now be sent by ‘root’ directly to the printer with
the following command
[email protected]: > cat /tmp/out.prn >/dev/lp0
assuming that the printer is connected to the first parallel port, /dev/lp0.
If an ASCII text file is to be printed with Ghostscript, this should first be converted to the Ghostscript format with
[email protected]: > a2ps -1 --medium=A4dj --output=/tmp/out.ps textfile
and then, with
[email protected]: > gs -q -dNOPAUSE -dSAFER -sOutputFile=/tmp/out.prn \
<driver-specific Ghostscript parameter> \
/tmp/out.ps quit.ps
converted to the printer-specific format, which is then, as ‘root’, sent to the
printer with
[email protected]: > cat /tmp/out.prn > /dev/lp0
You can find all the latest information on the Ghostscript Homepage (versions,
printer support, etc.). This is located at the URL:
http://www.cs.wisc.edu/~ghost/.
8.9
8.9.1
Examples of Your Own Print Filters
Preliminary Notes
The aim of this section is not to present an alternative to the apsfilter, but rather
to explain the background to printing in Linux, using the example of a simple
self-created print filter. This means that, in special cases, it is also possible to
use an additional print queue with your own printer filter, if the apsfilter cannot
be properly configured for this special case. The examples given here are kept as
simple as possible to illustrate the essential steps. This is why things like error
correction measures in the bash scripts were left out.
We are assuming here that the printer is connected to the first parallel port,
/dev/lp0. If the printer is connected to a different port onm the computer, then
you should use the device of this port, rather than /dev/lp0 (see Section 8.2
page 203).
224
8.9
Examples of Your Own Print Filters
A print filter receives the data to be printed from the print spooler, via the standard input. The print filter must convert this data into the printer-specific format
and then output this via the standard output. The print spooler ensures that everything that the print filter sends to the standard output arrives at the printer device,
/dev/lp0. The kernel in turn forwards everything which arrives at the printer
device onto the defined port (e.g. to the IO-address 0x378). The hardware ensures that everything that is sent to the IO-address 0x378 is sent via the parallel
connection cable to the printer. The printer interprets this data stream and prints
accordingly.
The following commands can usually only be carried out as the user ‘root’,
since normal users may not directly access the printer device unless the user
‘root’, with the command
earth: # chmod a=rw /dev/lp0
has given all users permission to access the printer device directly.
Commands can be given as follows:
earth: # cat ASCII-text_file >/dev/lp0
Here it should be clear that ASCII-text_file needs to be replaced by the name
of an existing ASCII text file.
8.9.2
A Simple Example of the Basic Method of Working
Through the command
earth: # echo -en "hello\f" >/dev/lp0
no print spooler or print filter becomes active, since the printer device /dev/lp0
is addressed directly. Through this only the ASCII characters ‘h’, ‘e’, ‘l’,
‘l’ and ‘o’ are sent directly to the printer. The character ‘\‘f’’ here stands
for the FormFeed ASCII character, causing a line feed on the printer. As long as
the printer can print ASCII characters directly, it will print the word hello and
issue the page.
With
earth: # cat ASCII_text_file >/dev/lp0
no print spooler or print filter will become active, since the printer device /dev/
lp0 is directly addressed. The ASCII characters from the ASCII text file are sent
directly to the printer.
In Linux, two ASCII text lines are separated only by a linefeed ASCII character
(line break). In the various DOS versions and in Windows (hereafter referred
to as DOS/Windows) two ASCII text lines are separated by a line feed ASCII
character and a carriage return ASCII character.
If you send an ASCII test file directly to the printer with the above command,
this will normally appear on the page as follows:
First Line
Second Line
Third Line
...
225
8
Printing
because the printer will perform a line return, but not a carriage return, since no
ASCII carriage return character was sent.
You can, however, adjust the printer so that it carries out both a line feed and a
carriage return when it receives an ASCII line feed character.
For printers which understand the PCL 3 printing language (HP DeskJets and
compatible models), the printer can be adjusted with the escape sequence \033&k2G,
so that it performs a line feed and a carriage return when receiving an ASCII line
feed character.
With
earth: # echo -en "\033&k2G" >/dev/lp0
the escape sequence is sent to the printer and then with
earth: # cat ASCII-Textfile >/dev/lp0
the ASCII text file is printed with the correct line wrapping. You may still need
to enter
earth: # echo -en "\f" >/dev/lp0
to have the last page removed from the printer.
Usually umlauts will not be correctly printed, however, since they are coded differently in DOS/Windows than in Linux and printers are normally set by default
for DOS/Windows.
With
earth: # cp ASCII-Textfile ASCII-Textfile.ibmpc
earth: # recode lat1..ibmpc ASCII-Textfile.ibmpc
the ASCII text file is first copied to ASCII-text_file.ibmpc and then
ASCII-text\_file.ibmpc is newly coded to conform with DOS/Windows.
If you now enter
earth: # cat ASCII-Textfile.ibmpc >/dev/lp0
both line wraps as well as umlauts should be printed correctly. Since both line
wraps and umlauts in the ASCII-text_file.ibmpc are now coded in accordance
with DOS/Windows, a special escape sequence is no longer needed to adjust the
appropriate line wrapping behavior for the printer.
So, with
earth: # cp ASCII-Textfile ASCII-Textfile.ibmpc
earth: # recode lat1..ibmpc ASCII-Textfile.ibmpc
earth: # cat ASCII-Textfile.ibmpc >/dev/lp0
any ASCII-text file can be correctly printed on any printer which can print ASCII
text.
If this works, the next step is to create a print filter which automatically takes
care of this conversion of the ASCII-text file into the printer-specific format.
Following the pattern of /var/lib/apsfilter, a subdirectory for your own
print filter is created and you change to this subdirectory (as the user ‘root’):
earth: # mkdir /var/lib/myprinterfilter
earth: # cd /var/lib/myprinterfilter
Create a bash script (as an ASCII text file) with the name asciifilter, as
shown in File 8.9.1 on the next page.
226
8.9
Examples of Your Own Print Filters
#! /bin/bash
# make a temporary file
INPUT="$(mktemp /tmp/asciifilter.$$.XXXXXX)"
# First store everything from stdin in $INPUT
# to have the input as a regular file
cat > $INPUT
# Recode the INPUT
recode lat1..ibmpc $INPUT
# Add a FormFeed at the end of $INPUT
# to get the last page out of the printer
echo -en "\f" >> $INPUT
# Send $INPUT to stdout
cat $INPUT
# Remove the INPUT file
rm $INPUT
File contents 8.9.1: /var/lib/myprinterfilter/asciifilter
Make this bash script executable for all users, with
earth: # chmod a+x /var/lib/myprinterfilter/asciifilter
Create a new print queue with lprsetup. Select any Ghostscript driver which
you would normally not use. Resolution and paper size are not relevant. Select
a driver which you would not normally use ‘MONO’. But for ‘SPECIAL Settings for your printer’ enter, under ‘NAME Optional name for the
queue’, af as the name, which should stand for ascii filter, provided you don’t
already have a print queue with this name. The queues are then created by
lprsetup: af-ascii, af and af-raw.
Below, only the af queue is used. The queues af-ascii and af-raw are actually irrelevant, and probably cannot be used, since the Ghostscript driver selected
will not function for the printer connected.
In /etc/printcap you will now find an entry similar to the one shown in
File 8.9.2 (abbreviated).
af...
:if=/var/lib/apsfilter/bin/...-af:\
:[email protected]:mx#0:\
:tr=:cl:sh:
File contents 8.9.2: /etc/printcap: Your own filter
Stop the print spooler with
earth: # rclpd stop
227
8
Printing
and just change the line in the above entry in /etc/printcap
:if=/var/lib/apsfilter/bin/...-af:\
to
:if=/var/lib/myprinterfilter/asciifilter:\
and then, after saving /etc/printcap, start the print spooler again with
earth: # /sbin/init.d/lpd start
and now, with
earth: # lpr -Paf ASCII-Textfile
every user should be able to print via the new af queue.
This new queue does exactly the same as the apsfilter, as long as you set
USE_RECODE_NOT_A2PS="yes" in an apsfilterrc.
To make sure that data is not sent unintentionally to the printer via the irrelevant
queues, af-ascii and af-raw, the lines for these queues should, in each case,
be changed from
:lp=/dev/lp0:\
to
:lp=/dev/null:\
8.9.3
A More Complex Example
Concern
The existing driver is not a Ghostscript driver. In this case you eventually have to
create your own printer driver; you have to distinguish between two variations:
1. There is no Ghostscript driver available for this printer (e. g.the printer is a
“GDI”-printer).
2. A Ghostscript driver is available for this printer, but there’s another nonGhostscript driver available which creates better output (e. g.a driver specially optimized for this printer).
Such drivers are normally used as an addition to the Ghostscript driver by converting the Ghostscript output to the printer specific format.
As this is the most complex situtation, this example can be used to create a
separate printer driver later on.
Requirements
It is assumed that a driver exists with the current version of SuSE Linux or that
a driver can be downloaded from the internet. It’s also assumed that you can
228
8.9
Examples of Your Own Print Filters
handle unix source (e.g. .zip- or .tar.gz-archives and .rpm-packages); see
also Section 11.3 page 281. After unpacking such an archive you normally find
installation instructions in files like README or INSTALL or in a subdirectory
named doc.
Background-Information
In the case of a .tar.gz-archive it’s normally necessary to compile and install
the driver. We assume, that the driver is being installed as
/usr/local/bin/printerdriver
here.
Normally the driver simply converts the Ghostscript output into a printer specific
format (see Section 8.8 page 222).
Therefore Ghostscript needs to be called like this to create a 600 dpi resolution
image:
-sDEVICE=pbmraw -r600x600
-sDEVICE=pnmraw -r600x600
Please have a look at the documentation provided with the driver to find out
exactly which Ghostscript driver and which resolution is needed.
The output of Ghostscript is forwarded to the driver via a pipe:
| /usr/local/bin/printerdriver Parameter
Check the documentation of the driver to find out which parameters are necessary.
The complete command looks like this
gs -q -dNOPAUSE -dSAFER -sOutputFile=- \
-sDEVICE=<device> -r<resolution> \
- quit.ps \
| /usr/local/bin/printerdriver <parameter>
The variables <device>, <resolution>, /usr/local/bin/printerdriver
and <parameter> need to be replaced by the values described in the driver documentation.
For a printer that is supported by Ghostscript, the command line is simplified to
gs -q -dNOPAUSE -dSAFER -sOutputFile=- \
-sDEVICE=<ghostscript-driver> -r<resolution> \
<opt-parameter> \
- quit.ps
where <ghostscript-driver>, <resolution> and <opt-parameter> need to be replaced by valid values (refer to Section 8.8 page 222).
As Ghostscript expects input in the postscript format, the data needs to be converted to postscript before Ghostscript is called.
Normally it will only do a conversion from ASCII-text to postscript, as most
applications create either postscript (e.g. Netscape and StarOffice) or ASCII-text
(e.g. editors). The format of the data can be identified by the file command.
229
8
Printing
ASCII-test can be converted to postscript with the a2ps command. To get details
on the various options of this tool please refer to manpage for a2ps (man a2ps).
Installation and usage
Create a directory /var/lib/myprinterfilter and change to that directory.
Create a bash script called printerfilter (refer to 8.9.3 on the facing page).
You can use this example as it is. All you need to change is the variable GSDEVICE
and DRIVER. Change them to fit to your printer.
For a printer supported by Ghostscript enter:
DRIVER=’cat -’
For a postscript printer, that requires no Ghostscript, enter:
GS=’cat -’
DRIVER=’cat -’
Change the variables A2PSLAYOUT and A2PSENCODING as you prefer; for additional information, refer to manpage for a2ps (man a2ps).
Make this bash script executable to everyone on the system and create a printer
queue with lprsetup. Have a look at Section 8.9.2 page 225 for details on how
to do that.
If the printerfilter doesn’t work as expected, you can have a look at the log file
which is created during a printjob and records all the output of the commands.
Refer to Section 8.6.3 page 218 to read more about this.
230
8.9
Examples of Your Own Print Filters
#! /bin/bash
# For debugging see for stderr in /var/spool/.../log
#set -x
# Define the program calls for the filter pipes
# The a2ps call
A2PSLAYOUT="-1 --center-title= --borders=yes"
A2PSENCODING=’--encoding=ISO-8859-1’
A2PS="a2ps $A2PSLAYOUT $A2PSENCODING --output=-"
# The gs call
# in GSDEVICE the Ghostscript device and parameters have to be
# set
GSDEVICE=’-sDEVICE=Device -rResolution’
GS="gs -q -dNOPAUSE -dSAFER -sOutputFile=- $GSDEVICE - quit.ps"
# The call for an optional printerdriver
DRIVER=’/usr/local/bin/printerdriver Parameter’
# make a temporary file
INPUT="$(mktemp /tmp/printerfilter.$$.XXXXXX)"
# First store everything from stdin in $INPUT
# to have the input as a regular file
cat > $INPUT
# Determine the FILETYPE of the data in $INPUT
FILESTRING=$(file $INPUT | tr ’A-Z’ ’a-z’)
case "$FILESTRING" in
*postscript*)
FILETYPE=postscript ;;
*ascii*|*text*|*english*|*script*) FILETYPE=ascii ;;
*)
FILETYPE=unknown ;;
esac
# Do the filter pipe according to the FILETYPE
case "$FILETYPE" in
postscript)
cat $INPUT | eval $GS | eval $DRIVER ;;
ascii)
cat $INPUT | eval $A2PS | eval $GS | eval $DRIVER ;;
unknown)
echo "Unknown filetype: $FILESTRING" |
mailx -s "pinterfilter" root ;;
esac
# Remove the INPUT file
rm $INPUT
File contents 8.9.3: A Complex Printerfilter
231
8
232
Printing
9
The Kernel
9 The Kernel
The standard SuSE kernel, which is written to disk after installation (and which
is found in a correctly installed system under /boot), is configured to support as
wide a range of hardware and other kernel features as possible. For this reason,
this kernel is not specifically tuned to your own hardware. If you have made the
right selection during the installation or update, then this kernel will be specifically optimized for your processor. However, it is possible that this kernel may
not be ideal for your purposes, most of which relate to network server and routing tasks. In addition, a small amount of RAM will be wasted as a small number
of unnecessary drivers are loaded.
Several Makefiles are provided with the kernel to help automate the process.
These Makefiles handle nearly all the details for you. The only thing you have
to do by hand is to make selections which correspond to hardware settings and
other kernel features.
Installation support is not provided for kernels that are not included with SuSE
Linux; we will be pleased to help you, however, in the context of our Professional
Services.
Note
The description below is based on kernel series 2.4x and 2.2.x. Many of
the issues mentioned here will be valid for 2.0.x, but they might differ in the
details!
9.1
Kernel Sources
To build a kernel, the following packages must be installed: the kernel sources,
(package kernel-source), the C compiler (package gcc), the GNU binutils
(package binutils) and the include files for the C compiler (package glibcdevel). They are located in series D (Development). It is highly recommended
to install the C compiler in any case, since the C language is inseparable from
UNIX operating systems.
The kernel sources are located in /usr/src/linux. If you plan to experiment
with different kernel sources, you can unpack them in different directories under
the directory /usr/src and create a symbolic link, /usr/src/linux , to the
current kernel source. This is what YaST does automatically.
Since there is a lot of software that relies on the sources being in /usr/src/
linux, you should maintain this directory as a symbolic link to your current
233
9
The Kernel
kernel source to provide an error-free compilation of system programs which
need to access the kernel sources.
9.2
Kernel Modules
Many drivers and features no longer have to be compiled directly into the kernel,
but can be loaded at runtime via kernel modules. Which drivers are to be compiled into the kernel and which are loaded as runtime modules is defined in the
kernel configuration.
Kernel modules are located at /lib/modules/<version> , where <version>
is the actual kernel version.
The use of this feature decreases the size and RAM requirements of the kernel,
which is quite desirable. For this reason, it is best to use this feature wherever
it is reasonable. Basically, components which are not required for the system to
boot up may be built as modules. This makes sure that the kernel doesn’t get too
big to be loadable by the BIOS or a bootloader. Drivers which are required for
boot, such as ext2, the SCSI drivers on a SCSI-based system, and similar items
should be compiled into the kernel. In contrast, items such as isofs, msdos, or
sound, which are not needed for starting up your computer system, may be built
as modules.
Handling Modules
The following commands are available for your use:
• insmod
insmod loads the requested module after searching for it in a subdirectory of
/lib/modules/<version>. It is preferrable, however, to use modprobe
(see below) rather than insmod, which should no longer be necessary.
• rmmod
Unloads the requested module. This is only possible if this module is no
longer needed. It is not possible to unload the isofs module (the CD-ROM
file system), for example, while a CD is still mounted.
• depmod
Creates the file modules.dep in /lib/modules/<version> where dependencies of all of the modules are defined. This is necessary to ensure that
all dependent modules are loaded with the selected ones. If START_KERNELD
is set in /etc/rc.config, this file is created each time the system is started.
• modprobe
Loads or unloads a given module while taking into account dependencies of
this module. This command is extremely powerful and can be used for a lot
of things (e. g., probing all modules of a given type until one is successfully
loaded). In contrast to insmod, modprobe checks /etc/modules.conf and
is the preferred way for loading modules. For detailed information on this
topic, please refer to the corresponding manual page.
234
9.2
Kernel Modules
• lsmod
Shows you which modules are currently loaded and by how many other modules they are being used. Modules started by the kernel daemon are tagged by
autoclean, which shows that these modules will be removed automatically
when they reach their idle time limit.
/etc/modules.conf
Loading of modules is further influenced by /etc/modules.conf. See also
manpage for depmod (man depmod).
In this file, the parameters for modules which access hardware directly can be entered as such modules may need system-specific options (e. g. CD-ROM-driver
or network driver). The parameters entered here are, in principle, identical to
those given to the boot prompt of the kernel e. g. for LILO (see Section 10.3.2
page 243), but in many cases the names which are used at the boot prompt are
different (to compare these, see Section 10.3.4 page 255). If a module failed
to load, try specifying the hardware in this file and use modprobe to load the
module instead of insmod.
Kmod – The “Kernel Module Loader”
>From version 2.2.x, the kernel module loader is the most elegant way to use
modules and replaces the old kernel daemon (kerneld). This kernel feature allows the kernel to launch modprobe directly and ensures that the necessary modules are loaded as soon as required by the kernel.
To use the kernel module loader, you must set the corresponding variable in the
kernel configuration ‘Kernel module loader’ (CONFIG_KMOD)
The drivers needed to access the root file system should be compiled directly
into the kernel. So you should not configure your SCSI driver or your file system
(normally: ext2) as modules!
Caution
Because SuSE Linux however, now uses initrd (initial ramdisk) and
integrates the SCSI driver, for example, using this method, you must
make sure when compiling your own kernel that you adjust the variable
INITRD_MODULES in the file /etc/rc.config (Section 13.6 page 317)
and comment out the initrd line in /etc/lilo.conf (see Section 12.4.5
page 293). If you don’t do this the kernel will hang when you boot.
Kernel modules come in handy for rarely used functionality, such as parport
and printer support, drivers for floppy drives and filen systems that are rarely
used.
Kmod is not designed to automatically unload modules; the potential saving in
memory is only marginal for the RAM capacity of computers today; see also
235
9
The Kernel
/usr/src/linux/Documentation/kmod.txt. For reasons of performance,
it is better for server machines which have special tasks to perform and need only
a few drivers to have a “monolithic” kernel.
9.3
Kernel Configuration
The configuration of the kernel that was set up during installation or during an
update can be taken from the file /usr/src/linux/.config (see Section 2.1.8
page 20).
Configuring the kernel can be done in three different ways:
1. On the command line
2. In a menu in text mode
3. In a menu in the X Window System
Here is a short overview of these three methods.
Configuring on the Command Line
To configure the kernel, just change to /usr/src/linux and enter:
earth:/usr/src/linux # make config
You are asked to choose the options that you want supported by
the
kernel
you
are
about to build. There are two or three possible answers here: y , n or m . ‘m’
means that this device is not compiled directly into the kernel but as a module
instead. Any driver that is needed to boot the system should be integrated into
the kernel, and not be loaded as a module. If you press any other key, you get a
short help text about the current option.
Configuring in Text Mode
A much more convenient way of configuring the kernel can be achieved by typing:
earth:/usr/src/linux # make menuconfig
With make menuconfig, you can review your changes, go through the questions
in your own preferred order and, in the event of a mistake, you do not have to go
through all the questions again.
Configuring in the X Window System
If you have installed and configured the X Window System (package xf86) and
Tcl/Tk (package tcl and package tk), you can use:
earth:/usr/src/linux # make xconfig
as an alternative. You will be presented with a GUI (Graphical User Interface)
which makes kernel configuration very user-friendly. You should have started
236
9.4
Settings in the Kernel Configuration
the X Window System as ‘root’ or you will have to take additional steps into
consideration (e. g., taking over the display from another user).
9.4
Settings in the Kernel Configuration
All the individual configuration possibilities of the kernel cannot be covered here
in detail. Please make use of the numerous help texts available on kernel configuration. The latest kernel documentation is always in /usr/src/linux/
Documentation.
9.5
Compiling the Kernel
Tip
You may remove the comment in the main Makefile (app. line 92). That’s
the line containing: export INSTALL_PATH=/boot. This lets you install
your own kernel to /boot.
We recommend that you compile a “bzImage”. As a rule this avoids the problem
of the kernel getting too large, as can easily happen if you select too many features and create a “zImage” (messages such as "kernel too big" or "System
is too big") are then typical.
After adapting the kernel configuration to your needs, start compilation by entering:
earth:/usr/src/linux # make dep
earth:/usr/src/linux # make clean
earth:/usr/src/linux # make bzImage
These three commands can be entered on one line as well. They are started one
after the other. This might be useful if you want to compile a kernel overnight,
for example. Just enter:
earth:/usr/src/linux # make dep clean bzImage
Depending on your system, it now takes just a few minutes (AMD Athlon / Intel
Pentium III ) up to several hours for a 386 with 8 MB.
While compiling, you can still work on one of the other consoles.
After a successful compilation, you will find the compressed kernel in /usr/
src/linux/arch/i386/boot . The kernel-image – the file which contains
the kernel – is called bzImage. If you cannot find this file, in all probability an
error has occurred during the kernel compilation. This can easily be overlooked
due to the large amount of screen output. If an error has taken place, this can be
determined by setting off the kernel compilation again, with
earth:/usr/src/linux # make bzImage
and watching out for corresponding error messages. But don’t worry: errors do
not occur very often when the kernel is being compiled!
237
9
The Kernel
If you are using the Bash shell you may enter:
earth:/usr/src/linux # make bzImage 2>&1 | tee kernel.out
for writing the compilation output to kernel.out. Using the Tcsh this command is invoked as:
earth:/usr/src/linux # make bzImage |& tee kernel.out
If you have configured parts of your kernel to be loaded as modules, you need
to launch the compilation of modules after you have compiled the kernel. This
may be achieved by typing:
earth:/usr/src/linux # make modules
9.6
Installing the Kernel
After having compiled a kernel, you have to make sure that it is available for use
from now on.
If you use LILO, then this must also be reinstalled. In the simplest case, copy
the the new kernel to /boot/vmlinuz (see Section 9.5 on the preceding page)
and then run LILO to protect yourself from unpleasant surprises, however, it is
recommended that you initially retain the old kernel (/boot/vmlinuz.old), so
that you can still boot it if the new kernel does not function as expected:
earth:/usr/src/linux # cp /boot/vmlinuz /boot/vmlinuz.old
earth:/usr/src/linux # cp arch/i386/boot/bzImage /boot/vmlinuz
earth:/usr/src/linux # lilo
The Makefile target make bzlilo performs these three steps, by the way, in
one go.
Now the compiled modules still need to be installed; by entering
earth:/usr/src/linux # make modules_install
you can copy these to the correct target directories in /lib/modules/<Version>.
In doing so, the old modules will be overwritten with the same kernel version;
you can, however, reinstall the original modules together with the kernel from
the CDs.
Tip
You should make sure that modules whose functionality may now
have been compiled directly into the kernel are removed from /lib/
modules/<version>. Otherwise unexpected effects could occur! This
is one reason why the inexperienced user is strongly advised not to compile the kernel himself.
In addition, enter a label Linux.old as boot image in your /etc/lilo.conf
(also see Section 4.4.1 page 95)and rename the old kernel /boot/vmlinuz.
old. Thus you can make sure that you can still boot using the previous kernel if
it does not end up working with the new one. This option is described in detail
in Chapter 4 page 89.
238
9.7
Creating a Boot Disk
When you have adapted /etc/lilo.conf to your needs, you can enter:
earth:/usr/src/linux # lilo
If you boot Linux via DOS using linux.bat (loadlin), you have to copy
the kernel to /dosc/loadlin/bzimage (or to the directory where you have
installed loadlin) for it to become active at the next boot.
If you start Linux via the Windows NT bootmanager you have to copy the LILObootsector to the Windows NT start partition again (see Section 4.7.2 page 105
for details).
Furthermore, the file /System.map contains kernel symbols which are needed
by the modules to launch kernel functions correctly. This file depends on the
current kernel. Therefore, you should copy /usr/src/linux/System.map to
the directory (/boot). If you create your kernel using make bzlilo, this is
done for you automatically.
If you get an error message like "System.map does not match current
kernel", then probably System.map has not been copied.
9.7
Creating a Boot Disk
If you want to create a boot disk with the new kernel, you can use the following
command:
earth:/usr/src/linux # make bzdisk
9.8
Cleaning Your Hard Disk After Compilation
If you are low on hard disk space, you can regain some of the hard disk space
used during compilation, with:
earth: # cd /usr/src/linux
earth:/usr/src/linux # make clean
If there is plenty of space and you plan to compile a new kernel from the same
sources, you might skip the last step. A new compilation will then be faster,
as only those parts of the system which must change based on your choices are
recompiled.
239
9
240
The Kernel
10
Kernel Parameters
10 Kernel Parameters
10.1
Drivers in the Kernel
There is a wide variety of PC hardware components. In order to be able to use
this hardware properly, you need a “driver” with which the operating system (in
Linux, the “kernel”), can access this hardware. In general there are two ways of
integrating drivers into your system:
1. The drivers can be compiled directly into the kernel. Such a kernel (“in one
piece”) is referred to as a monolithic kernel. Some drivers are only available
in this form, justifying the need for monolithic kernels.
2. Drivers can be loaded on demand into the kernel, which is then referred to
as a modularized kernel. This has the advantage that only those drivers are
loaded which really are needed, and the kernel thus contains no unnecessary
ballast. Our SuSE boot disk kernel makes use of modules to support most
hardware configurations.
Regardless of whether the drivers are compiled directly into the kernel or are
loaded as modules, it is still possible that a hardware component may not be
recognized by the kernel. If this is the case, you have the option of specifying
component attributes more exactly.
For monolithic kernels these parameters must be given at the boot prompt or by
means of a boot loader.1 Modular drivers get their parameters via insmod or
modprobe, which load the module itself simultaneously.
You always have to give the parameters, when you boot your computer, as the
kernel does not learn. Later, after the installation, kernel parameters can be set in
the files /etc/lilo.conf or /etc/modules.conf, so that LILO or modprobe
can interpret them automatically.
Unfortunately, the format for parameters that are compiled directly into the kernel is different from that for parameters that are loaded on demand. For this
reason they are divided into two different groups in the following pages. A few
modules now have unified parameters (e. g., CD-ROM drives), so that the same
parameters can be given whether you are using modules or the boot prompt.
1 For
this reason the parameters are also called LILO parameters, named after the time-honoured
loader for X86 architectures
241
10
Kernel Parameters
10.2
Some Tips
Before we present the list of parameters, here are some hints on recognizing
hardware, adding parameters and booting with the SuSE boot disk:
• Most drivers can do an autoprobing, e. g., test different standard addresses
where this hardware can usually be found. While autoprobing, a driver might
initialize an address that does not belong to it. This can cause the machine to
hang.
• Some modules can be loaded successfully, even if their hardware is not installed. This applies mainly to 3Com network card drivers. You should try
autoprobing first. Unused drivers can be easily removed. Hardware that is
not automatically recognized must then be started using the appropriate parameters.
• Finally, there are some hardware components that have more than one driver
(e. g., NCR 53C810 , Ultrastor). As far as we know, there is no significant difference between the two Ultrastor drivers. The BSD driver for NCR53C810
also supports other NCR53C8xx products (e. g., 53C875), whereas the old
NCR driver is the only one that recognizes CD writers. Use the one that suits
your needs.
10.3
The Parameters
10.3.1
Notations and Meanings
Below you will see an alphabetical list of kernel parameters and the corresponding devices. The following parameters always have the same meaning:
<addr>
<irq>
<dma>
<Start address>,
<End address>
hexadecimal port address, (e. g., 0x300)
interrupt the device will use (e. g., 7)
DMA channel of the device (e. g., 1)
hexadecimal memory allocation for shared memory
Table 10.1: Frequently used variable names for kernel parameters
We are mainly concerned with the parameters that are required for a successful
installation. But there are other parameters for special aims and purposes. Please
keep in mind that upper case letters are significant.
A complete introduction to possible kernel parameters can be found after installation in the BootPrompt-HOWTO, in /usr/share/doc/howto as well as in
the kernel sources in the file
/usr/src/linux/Documentation/kernel-parameters.txt.
242
10.3
10.3.2
The Parameters
Kernel Parameters at the Boot Prompt
The parameters listed in this section can only be entered to the kernel, for example, at the SYSLINUX (supplied bootdiskette), at the LILO-Prompt or via loadlin
If you plan to install one of these drivers as a module, please look at the parameters in Section 10.3.4 page 255.
Note
All parameters must be entered directly one after another, separated by
commas. There should be no blanks (whitespace) between the parameters.
For example, to enter the parameters for the aha1542 at the boot prompt you
should enter (please keep in mind that you always have to precede the parameters
with the boot configuration’s name; on SuSE boot disks this is the configuration
with the name linux!):
linux aha1542=0x300
General boot parameters
By means of certain parameters the general behavior of the Linux kernel can be
controlled.
• Reboot mode (shutting down Linux)
reboot=<mode>
Here, you have the following values for <mode>:
Variable
warm
cold
bios
hard
Values / Meaning
warm reboot (no memory check)
cold reboot (with memory check)
BIOS reboot
CPU crash reboot (triple fault)
Example: reboot=cold
This boots the machine after shutdown as if the reset button had been pressed.
• Protecting memory segments (Reserve)
reserve=<start1>,<range1>,...,<startN>,<rangeN>
By means of this parameter, you can reserve memory space for hardware
which does not like being autoprobed, and reacts with a system crash, for
example.
Example: A “sensitive” network card can be protected from being autoprobed and initialized by entering:
reserve=0x330,32 ether=5,0x330,eth0
In this example, the network card has a 32 bit data bus which starts at address
0x330 and uses interrupt 5.
For the full description of network card parameters, see Section 10.3.2 page 251.
243
10
Kernel Parameters
• Passing root partitions
root=<partition>
Variable
<partition>
Values / Meaning
e. g., /dev/hda1, /dev/sdb5
Example: root=/dev/hda5
This boots the kernel and tries to load the root partition from the first logical
drive in the extended partition to the first (E)IDE hard disk.
• Size of RAM (RAM)
mem=<size>
You may enter the size of RAM in bytes, kilobytes or megabytes. Our example shows the different settings for 96 MB RAM.
Example:
mem=96M
mem=98304k
On some rare occasions it might happen that the mainboard cannot free the
total amount of RAM. Please subtract the amount of memory the mainboard
reserves (up to 512 K is considered normal). The exact amount can only be
found by “trial and error”. Let’s assume that it is 512 KB for our example:
mem=5ff8000
When using a Pentium clone
mem=nopentium
this line might make it work.
• Number of CPUs when using SMP
maxcpus=<number>
Set the maximum number of CPUs to <number> when using an SMP kernel.
Example:
maxcpus=1
• Serial console
console=<device>,<options>
Set the device for the system console; this parameter can be used several
times.
Examples:
console=ttyS1,9600
console=tty0
See /usr/src/linux/Documentation/serial-console.txt for more
examples.
244
10.3
The Parameters
The SCSI controller and the SCSI subsystem
Most SCSI controllers can be configured via parameters.
• SCSI Streamers
st=<buffer>,<threshold>[,<max>]
Variable
<buffer>
<threshold>
<max>
Values / Meaning
Buffer size (Amount of 1 KB block)
Write threshold (Amount of 1 KB blocks)
Maximum buffer size (optional) (e. g. 2)
Example: st=1000,2000
• Number of SCSI devices per ID
max_scsi_luns=<number>
Variable
<number>
Values / Meaning
1..8
Example: If you want to use only the first LUN you need to set max_scsi_luns=1
This is typically used for imperfect CD changers where the amount of usable
CDs equals the parameter max_scsi_luns=1.
• Adaptec AHA-1520 / 1522 / 1510 / 1515 / 1505 SCSI host adapter
aha152x=<addr>,<irq>,<id>[,<rec>[,<par>]]
Variable
<id> (SCSI ID of the host adapter)
<rec> (reconnect)
<par> (parity)
Values / Meaning
0, 1
0, 1
0, 1
This driver is used to run multiple low-cost SCSI controllers. All sound cards
with a SCSI controller (except for Pro Audio Spectrum) can be accessed
using the installed Adaptec chip.
For all non-original 152x, the fourth parameter (RECONNECT) seems to be
necessary. For most types, it has to be set to ‘0’. Only the AHA2825 needs
‘1’.
Example: aha152x=0x300,10,7
• Adaptec AHA-1540 / 1542 SCSI host adapter
aha1542=<addr>[,<buson>,<busoff>[,<DMA speed>]]
Variable
<buson>
<busoff>
<DMA speed>
Values / Meaning
2..15
1..64
5,6,7,8,10
Example: aha1542=0x300
245
10
Kernel Parameters
• Adaptec AHA-274x / 284x / 294x Hostadapter
aic7xxx=<modifier>[,<modifier>[, ...]]
Variable
<modifier>
Values / Meaning
extended
activates translation of hard disk geometry
no_reset
disables reset of the
SCSI bus at the host adapter initialization
irq_trigger:<x>
Only for Eisa systems
0 for flange triggered,
1 for lever driven
verbose
receive more messages
reverse_scan
If multiple cards are treated in the wrong
order by the BIOS
7895_irq_hack:<x>
-1 only for Tyan II Motherboards
pci_parity:<x>
if pci_parity is not used at all
parity is even
0 no parity check
1 parity odd
tag_info:„„„
Queue management for performance enhancement,
for experts, see kernel sources
Example: aic7xxx=no_reset,
if the machine hangs while resetting the SCSI bus.
parameters for aic7xxx based SCSI host adaptors are only necessary if they
are faulty or malfunctioning.
From BIOS version 1.3 onwards the AHA-2940 AU causes no trouble. Updates may be obtained from Adaptec support.
The SCSI hostadapter Adaptec 2920 is driven by the Future Domain driver
(see Section 10.3.2 on the facing page)
• AdvanSys SCSI host adapter
advansys=<addr1>,<addr2>,...,<addrN>
Example: advansys=0x110,0x210
This example tells the kernel to search for the AdvanSys host adapter at the
given addresses.
• AM53/79C974 SCSI host adapter
AM53C974=<host-id>,<target-id>,<rate>,<offset>
246
10.3
Variable
<host-id>
<target-id>
<rate>
<offset>
The Parameters
Values / Meaning
the host adapter’s SCSI ID (often 7)
the device’s SCSI ID (often 0..7)
3,5,10 MHz/s max. transfer rate
transfer mode; 0 = asynchron
If the host adapter seems to “swallow” some packages, reduce the maximum
transfer rate for this device (e. g., the first CD-ROM SCSI drive /dev/scd0
with ID 5) on the SCSI bus with:
Example: AM53C974=7,5,3,0
• BusLogic SCSI host adapter
BusLogic=<addr>
BusLogic=<probing>
Example: BusLogic=0x300
Variable
<addr>
<probing>
Values / Meaning
Address of the adapter, e. g. 0x300
NoProbe No adaptor is probed
NoProbeISA No ISA adapter is probed
NoProbePCI No PCI adapter is probed
NoSortPCI Order of multimaster adapter
set by PCI BIOS
MultiMasterFirst Multimaster before Flashpoint
FlashPointFirst Flashpoint before Multimaster
InhibitTargetInquiry For old devices that
cause trouble with scsi_luns > 0
TraceProbe outputs additional messages
at initialization of the adapter
TraceHardwareReset outputs additional
messages at the adaptor hardware reset
TraceConfiguration outputs additional
messages at the adaptor configuration
TraceErrors outputs error messages of the
attached devices
Debug outputs all
This host adapter understands even more parameters. These are for fine tuning the adaptor and are described in /usr/src/linux/drivers/scsi/
README.BusLogic
• Future Domain TMC-16x0 SCSI host adapter
fdomain=<addr>,<irq>[,<id>]
Variable
<id>
Values / Meaning
SCSI ID of the host adapter 0..7
247
10
Kernel Parameters
This driver also controls the Adaptec 2920 .
Example: fdomain=0x140,11,7
• Future Domain TMC-885/950 host adapter
tmc8xx=<addr>,<irq>
Example: tmc8xx=0xca000,5
• NCR 5380 SCSI host adapter family
ncr5380=<addr>,<irq>,<dma>
Example: ncr5380=0x340,10,3
• NCR 53c400 SCSI host adapter family
ncr53c400=<addr>,<irq>
Example: ncr53c400=0x350,5
• NCR 53c406a SCSI host adapter family
ncr53c406a=<addr>[,<irq>[,<fastpio>]]
Variable
<fastpio>
Values / Meaning
0, if no fast PIO mode is required
Example: ncr53c406a=0x330,10,0
• Seagate ST01/02 SCSI host adapter
st0x=<addr>,<irq>
Example: st0x=0xc8000,5
• Trantor T128/128F/228 SCSI host adapter
t128=<addr>,<irq>
Example: t128=0x340,10
(E)IDE controllers and ATAPI devices
Numerous parameters are available to configure the (E)IDE controllers and the
devices connected to them.
• ATAPI CD-ROM on the (E)IDE controller
hd<x>=cdrom
hd<x>=serialize
Variable
<x>
248
Values / Meaning
a, b, c, d
10.3
The Parameters
where:
Variable
a
b
c
d
Values / Meaning
master on 1st IDE controller
slave on 1st IDE controller
master on 2nd IDE controller
slave on 2nd IDE controller
Example: an ATAPI CD-ROM as master on the secondary IDE controller is
set by hdc=cdrom.
• Hard Disk
hd<x>=<cylinders>,<heads>,<sectors>[,<write>[,<irq>]]
Variable
<x>
<cylinders>
<heads>
<sectors>
<write>
<irq>
Values / Meaning
a, b, . . . , h 1 to 8. Hard Disk
number of cylinders
number of heads
number of sectors
cylinders after which write compensation is used
interrupt
If the BIOS is an old one, it is possible that the geometry of the hard drive
is not recognized correctly. The correct parameters will then be passed on so
that the kernel can still access the complete hard disk.
Example: hdc=1050,32,64
hd<x>=<trouble>
Variable
<x>
<trouble>
Values / Meaning
a, b, . . . , h 1st to 8th hard disk
noprobe, if testing an existing hard disk
causes problems
none ignore CMOS entry and don’t test
nowerr ignore WREE_STAT-bit
cdrom wrongly recognized as hard disk
or not recognized at all, or will not boot
autotune the fastest PIO mode is used
slow adds a long break after each access.
This makes it really slow, but it sometimes helps
if it is the only option left
If a CD-ROM drive is not recognized reliably, specifying <cdrom> can
register the device safely.
Example: hdd=cdrom
• EIDE controller chipsets
249
10
Kernel Parameters
Some EIDE controllers have faulty chipsets or cause problems if the secondary controller is used.
Many of these chipsets are now supported in the kernel; this support needs to
be specially activated, however, using a kernel parameter.
The following chipsets can be configured:
CMD 640
RZ 1000
DTC-2278
Holtek HT6560B
QDI QD6580
UMC 8672
ALI M1439/M1445
PROMISE DC4030
This chipset is found on many motherboards.
Since it contains many bugs, the kernel offers a
special support which recognizes the chip and bypasses the problems. Moreover, in some cases,
use of the secondary controller is only possible by using this special support. In PCI systems, this chip is automatically recognized. For
VLB systems, the following parameter is needed:
ide0=cmd640_vlb.
This chip is used on many motherboards that use
the Neptune chipset and it is buggy. If support
for this chip is activated, the system works a little
slower but reliably. An additional activation with
a kernel parameter is not required.
Only activating this driver via ide0=dtc2278
makes it possible to use the secondary controller.
The following parameter is needed to activate the
secondary controller: ide0=ht6560b.
If this driver is activated, it enables a higher
speed: ide0=qd6580.
For activating the secondary controller, the following parameter is needed: ide0=umc8672.
For activating the secondary controller, the following parameter is needed: ide0=ali14xx.
For activating the secondary controller, the following parameter is needed: ide0=dc4030.
CD-ROMs and tapes on the secondary controller
are not supported yet.
Table 10.2: Special EIDE chipsets
If the chipset does not belong to the list of known faulty chipsets, and still is not
recognized, the following parameters can be added instead:
ide<number>=<basis>[,<control>[,<irq>]]
250
10.3
Variable
<number>
<basis>
<control>
<irq>
The Parameters
Values / Meaning
adapter number,
usually 0 or 1, but also 3 or 4
base address of the adapter,
usually 0x1f0, 0x170, 0x1e8 or 0x168
control register of the adapters,
usually 0x3f6, 0x376, 0x3ee or 0x36e
interrupt of the adapters,
usually 14, 15, 11 or 10
If the chipset does not belong to the list of known faulty chipsets, but still causes
problems, the following parameters can be added instead:
ide<number>=<tune>
Variable
<number>
<tune>
Values / Meaning
adapter number, usually 0 or 1, but also 3 or 4
autotune the highest possible PIO value
is tried, not supported by all chipsets
noautotune no improvement in speed
serialize no time overlapping of
operations with the next adapter
If the chipset does not belong to the list of known faulty chipsets, but the highest
possible speed should still be achieved, the bus speed can be passed on; please
refer to your motherboard manual.
idebus=<speed>
Other devices
• Ethernet network cards
ether=<irq>,<addr>[,<par1>[,<par2>...<par8>]],<Name>
The various parameters for <par1> to <par8> have different meanings
for several drivers. Usually, only two parameters are needed, where the first
is the start address and the second is the end address of shared memory. The
first non-numerical argument is treated as the name.
<irq>
<addr>
<start>
<end>
the interrupt used; 0 for autoprobing
port address; 0 for autoprobing
start address for shared memory. Some drivers use the 4
lowest bits for the debug level. The Lance uses them for
its DMA channel.
end address for shared memory. The 3COM 3c503 driver
uses this parameter to distinguish between internal and external transceivers.
Table 10.3: continued overleaf...
251
10
Kernel Parameters
<Name>
The Cabletron E21XX card uses the lowest four bits for
selecting the media.
The interface’s name (normally eth0)
Table 10.3: Variable names for Ethernet network cards
This parameter lets the kernel recognize more than one network card, since
only the first card is searched by default. This can easily be done with:
ether=0,0,eth1
By passing 0 for both IRQ and address, the driver is told to launch autoprobing, which means probing several addresses independently.
• Floppy disk drives
floppy=<drive>,<type>,cmos
Variable
<drive>
<type>
Values / Meaning
0, 1, 2, 3
0 - unknown or not recognized
1 - 5 1/4" DD, 360 KB
2 - 5 1/4" HD, 1.2 MB
3 - 3 1/2" DD, 720 KB
4 - 3 1/2" HD, 1.44 MB
5 - 3 1/2" ED, 2.88 MB
6 - 3 1/2" ED, 2.88 MB
floppy=<value>
For <value>, the following values may be set (Table 10.4 on the next page):
all_drives
asus_pci
daring
0,daring
<addr>,two_fdc
thinkpad
0,thinkpad
omnibook
nodma
dma
more than two floppy disk drives
denies access to 3rd and 4th floppy
disk drives
use only with reliable controllers—
enhances performance
opposite of daring
if the value <addr> is omitted
while using a secondary floppy controller, a port address of 0x370 is set.
IBM Thinkpad machines
not a Thinkpad machine
Omnibook computers
for Omnibook computers
Standard
Table 10.4: continued overleaf...
252
10.3
nofifo
fifo
0xX,fifo_depth
unexpected_interrupts
no_unexpected_interrupts
L40SX
The Parameters
if a "Bus master arbitration
error" occurs
Standard
FIFO threshold standard 0xA
show warnings if something unexpected happens.
and...
this value is the opposite of
unexpected_interrupts.
Table 10.4: Kernel parameter values for floppy
• Logitech bus mouse
bmouse=<irq>
10.3.3
CD-ROM Drives on Proprietary Controllers
• Aztech CDA268-01 CD-ROM
aztcd=<addr>[,0x79]
The value 0x79 has only to be set when the firmware version is unknown.
Example: aztcd=0x320
• Goldstar R420 CD-ROM drive
gscd=<addr>
• Mitsumi CD-ROM drive
mcd=<addr>,<irq>[,<wait>]
Variable
<wait>
Values / Meaning
value for waiting time while starting
You can vary the parameter <wait> between 0 and 10 if the CD-ROM drive
does not react fast enough on system requests ("timeout") and, therefore,
does not find the root image while installing.
Example: mcd=0x300,10,5
• Mitsumi CD-ROM drive (multisession)
mcdx=<addr>,<irq>
Example: mcd=0x300,10
• Mozart interface
isp16=<addr>,<irq>,<dma>,<type>
253
10
Kernel Parameters
Variable
<type>
Values / Meaning
Sanyo, Panasonic, Sony, Mitsumi
This driver is responsible for CD-ROM drives connected to the types ISP16 ,
MAD16 or Mozart. The value of <type> follows the interface plug where
the CD-ROM is connected to the sound card.
Example: isp16=0x340,10,3,Sony
• Optics Storage 8000 AT CD-ROM drive
optcd=<addr>
Example: optcd=0x340
• Philips CM206 CD-ROM drives
cm206=<addr>,<irq>
Example: cm206=0x340,10
• Pro Audio Spectrum 16 - SCSI host adapter
pas16=<addr>,<irq>
On the Pro Audio Spectrum 16 sound card there is a SCSI-host adapter, the
settings of which can be passed to the kernel with this parameter.
Example: pas16=0x340,10
If the card is not recognized, it can be operated without an interrupt. In this
case the interrupt is set to 255.
Example: pas16=0x340,255
• Sanyo CD-ROM Drive
sjcd=<addr>
Example: sjcd=0x340
• Sony CDU 31/33 A
cdu31a=<addr>,<irq>
Autoprobing of this driver has been removed from the kernel. Thus, you have
to set any parameters explicitly.
Example: cdu31a=0x340,5
If there is no interrupt assigned to the drive, and if you can only access it via
polling mode, you have to enter 0 for the IRQ.
Example: cdu31a=0x340,0
As an example, if this drive is connected to a Pro Audio Spectrum card, the
parameter could be as follows:
Example: cdu31a=0x1f88,0,PAS
254
10.3
The Parameters
• Sony CDU 535
sonycd535=<addr>,<irq>
Example: sonycd535=0x340,10
• SoundBlaster Pro 16 MultiCD
sbpcd=<addr>,<type>
Variable
<type>
Values / Meaning
LaserMate, SPEA, SoundBlaster
Example: sbpcd=0x340,10
The parallel port
• Parallelport
parport=<addr0>,[<irq0> [parport=<addr1>,[<irq1>
[parport=<addr2>,[<irq2>]]]]]
Variable
<addrX>
<irqX>
Values / Meaning
address
interrupt
Example: parport=0x3bc parport=0x378,7 parport=0x278,auto
• Printer on the parallel port
lp=<parport0> [lp=<parport1> [lp=<parport2>]]
Variable
<parportX>
Values / Meaning
parallel port
Example: lp=parport0 lp=parport2
10.3.4 modprobe Parameters
This section describes those parameters which can be loaded as modules. If
you encounter difficulties while loading a driver (although you have entered the
parameters), or if there is no section describing the parameter, then you may have
to integrate this driver into a monolithic kernel.
Some drivers cannot be built as modules yet and some recognize your hardware
properly only if they are compiled into the kernel. Despite this, we recommend
you try the “module variant” first.
If a driver is loaded as a module, each and every variable used can be overwritten
on the command line. There is, e. g., the variable io in the NE2000 driver which
255
10
Kernel Parameters
specifies the used I/O range. For this, the correct command for loading this
module is (see Section 9.2 page 234):
earth:/ # insmod ne io=0x300 irq=10
or better with modprobe:
earth:/ # modprobe ne io=0x300 irq=10
Be aware that there should be no spaces before or after the “equal”. Moreover,
hexadecimal values have to be set in the given form (with a leading ‘0x’).
Note
If you want to enter more than one parameter they must be separated by
spaces. This is the main difference to entering parameters at the LILO
prompt, where no blanks should be used within the parameters for one
driver.
The parameters you enter here can also be integrated into
/etc/modules.conf. Here many parameters can be assigned to a particular
module. This is done one line per module. The line should resemble the following:
options <module name> <parm1>=<value1> ...
where:
Variable
<module name>
<parm1>
<value1>
Values / Meaning
name of the module without the extension .o
parameter #1
value that is assigned to parameter #1
An entry for the NE2000 card might look like:
options ne io=0x300 irq=10
SCSI controllers and the SCSI subsystem
• Adaptec AHA-1520 / 1522 / 1510 / 1515 / 1505 SCSI-Hostadapter
Name of module: aha152x.o
Variable
<io>
<irq>
<id>
<rec>
<par>
<sync>
<delay>
<translat>
256
Values / Meaning
<addr>
<irq>
SCSI-ID of the host adapter; by default, 7
reconnect; 0, 1
parity; 0, 1
synchronous mode of operation; 0, 1
bus delay; default 100
"translation of the hard disk geometry; 0, 1
10.3
The Parameters
As at the LILO prompt:
Example: modprobe aha152x aha152x=0x340,10,7,1,1,0,0,0
For a second host adapter:
Example: modprobe aha152x aha152x1=0x140,12,7,1,1,0,0,0
• Future Domain TMC-16x0–host adapter
Name of module: fdomain.o
This driver also serves the SCSI-host adapter Adaptec 2920 , amongst others.
fdomain=<addr>,<irq>[,<id>]
Variable
<addr>
<irq>
<id>
Values / Meaning
<addr>
<irq>
<id>
As at the boot prompt:
Example: modprobe fdomain fdomain=0x140,11,7
• NCR 5380 bzw. NCR 53C400 SCSI-host adapter family
Name of module: g_NCR5380.o
Parameter
ncr_addr
ncr_irq
ncr_dma
ncr_5380
ncr_53c400
Value
<addr>
<irq>; switch off with 255
<dma>
1 for an NCR5380 adapter
1 for an NCR53C400 adapter
For an NCR5380 adapter:
Example: modprobe g_NCR5380 ncr_irq=5 ncr_addr=0x350
ncr_5380=1
For an NCR53C400 adapter with interrupts turned off:
Example: modprobe g_NCR5380 ncr_irq=255 ncr_addr=0xc8000
ncr_53c400=1
This driver serves the widely-used Trantor T130B SCSI host adapter
Network cards
• 3Com 3c501 / 3c503 / 3c505 / 3c507 network cards
Name of module: 3c501.o,3c503.o,3c505.o,3c507.o
Parameter
io
irq
Value
<addr>
<irq>
Example: modprobe 3c509 io=0x300 irq=10
257
10
Kernel Parameters
• 3Com 3c509 / 3c579 network cards
Name of module: 3c509.o
Parameter
irq
xcvr
Value
<irq>
0: internal; 1: external
Example: modprobe 3c509 irq=10 xcvr=0
• 3Com 3c515 network card
Name of module: 3c515.o
Example: modprobe 3c515
• 3Com 3c59x / 3c90x network cards (“Vortex”/“Boomerang”)
Name of module: 3c59x.o
For Compaq computers(PCI), you can try the following parameters:
Parameter
compaq_ioaddr
compaq_irq
compaq_prod_id
Value
<addr>
<irq>
<id>
Example: modprobe 3c59x compaq_irq=10
• Allied Telesis AT1700 network card
Name of module: at1700.o
Parameter
io
irq
Value
<addr>
<irq>
Example: modprobe at1700 io=0x300 irq=10
• Cabletron E21xx network card
Name of module: e2100.o
Parameter
io
irq
mem
xcvr
Value
<addr>
<irq>
<addr>
0: internal; 1: external
Example: modprobe e2100 io=0x300 irq=10 mem=0xd000 xcvr=0
258
10.3
The Parameters
• Digital DE425 / 434 / 435 / 450 / 500 network cards
Name of module: de4x5.o
io=0x<bus><device ID>
Parameter
bus
device ID
Value
number of the PCI bus, usually 0
number des PCI device
With newer PCI BIOSes, these files are displayed when the machine boots,
and in Linux they can be seen with the command
earth: # cat /proc/pci
Example: modprobe de4x5 io=0x007
• Digital DEPCA / DE10x / DE20(012) / DE42, EtherWORKS network cards
Name of module: depca.o
Parameter
io
irq
mem
adapter_name
Value
<addr>
<irq>
<mem>
<name> e.g. DEPCA,
de100, de101,
de200, de201,
de202, de210,
de422
Example: modprobe depca io=0x300 irq=10
• EtherWORKS 3 (DE203, DE204, DE205) network card
Name of module: ewrk3.o
Parameter
io
irq
Value
<addr>
<irq>
Example: modprobe ewrk3 io=0x300 irq=10
• Intel EtherExpress 16 network card
Name of module: eexpress.o
Parameter
io
irq
Value
<addr>
<irq>
Example: modprobe eexpress io=0x300 irq=10
259
10
Kernel Parameters
• Intel EtherExpressPro network card
Name of module: eepro.o
Parameter
io
irq
mem
Value
<addr>
<irq>
<addr>
Example: modprobe eepro io=0x300 irq=10 mem=0xd000
• Intel EtherExpressPro 100 network card
Name of module: eepro100.o
The Intel EtherExpressPro contains the chips i82557/i82558 .
Parameter
options
Value
<duplex operation>
<bus-transceiver>
16 full-duplex
32 100 MBit operation only
64 10 MBit operation only
Example: modprobe eepro100 options=48
This sets full-duplex and 100-MBit operation simultaneously (48 = 32 + 16).
• Fujitsu FMV-181/182/183/184 network cards
Name of module: fmv18x.o
Parameter
io
irq
Value
<addr>
<irq>
Example: modprobe fmv18x io=0x300 irq=10
• HP PCLAN+ (27247B and 27252A) network card
Name of module: hp-plus.o
Parameter
io
irq
Value
<addr>
<irq>
Example: modprobe hp-plus io=0x300 irq=10
• HP PCLAN (27245 / 27xxx)
Name of module: hp.o
260
10.3
Parameter
io
irq
The Parameters
Value
<addr>
<irq>
Example: modprobe hp io=0x300 irq=10
• HP 10/100 VG-AnyLAN (ISA, EISA, PCI) network cards
Name of module: hp100.o
Parameter
hp100_port
Value
<addr>
Example: modprobe hp100 hp100_port=0x300
• ICL EtherTeam 16i / 32 network cards
Name of module: eth16i.o
Parameter
io
irq
Value
<addr>
<irq>
Example: modprobe eth16i io=0x300 irq=10
• Novell NE2000 / NE1000 network cards
Name of module: ne.o
Parameter
io
irq
bad
Value
<addr>
<irq>
bad, only if the card is not recognized
Example: modprobe ne io=0x300 irq=10
• NI6510 (AM7990 “lance” Chip) network card
Name of module: ni65.o
Parameter
io
irq
dma
Value
<addr>
<irq>
<dma>
Example: modprobe ni65 io=0x300 irq=10
261
10
Kernel Parameters
• SMC Ultra network card
Name of module: smc-ultra.o
Parameter
io
irq
Value
<addr>
<irq>
Example: modprobe smc-ultra io=0x300 irq=10
• SMC 9194 network card
Name of module: smc9194.o
Parameter
io
irq
if_port
Variable
<medium>
Value
<addr>
<irq>
<medium>
Values / Meaning
0 auto
1 TP
2 AUI, 10base2
Example: modprobe smc9194 io=0x300 irq=10 if_port=2
• Western Digital WD80x3 network card
Name of module: wd.o
Parameter
io
irq
mem
mem_end
Value
<addr>
<irq>
<mem>
<mem_end>
Example: modprobe wd io=0x300 irq=10
• IBM Tropic chipset Token Ring network card
Name of module: ibmtr.o
Parameter
io
irq
mem_start
Value
<addr>
<irq>
<mem_start>
Example: modprobe ibmtr io=0x300
262
10.3
The Parameters
• D-Link DE620 Pocket-Adapter network card
Name of module: de620.o
Parameter
io
irq
bnc
utp
clone
Value
<addr>
<irq>
1 if a BNC input/output
1 if a UTP input/output
1 if an equivalent device
Example: modprobe de620 io=0x300 irq=10 bnc=1 utp=0
Proprietary CD-ROM drives
The following parameters concern CD-ROM drives attached to special controllers. Whoever possesses one of these “oldies” will certainly know about
it. . .
• Aztech CDA268-01 CD-ROM drive
Name of module: aztcd.o
Parameter
aztcd
Value
<addr>
Example: modprobe aztcd aztcd=0x300
• Goldstar R420-CD-ROM drive
Name of module: gscd.o
Parameter
gscd
Value
<addr>
Example: modprobe gscd gscd=0x300
• Mitsumi CD-ROM drive
Name of module: mcd.o
mcd=<addr>,<irq>[,<wait>]
Variable
<wait>
Values / Meaning
Delay at startup time
You can vary the <wait> from 0 to 10 if the CD-ROM drive does not react
fast enough ("timeout"), thus probably not finding the root image during
installation.
Example: modprobe mcd mcd=0x300,10,5
263
10
Kernel Parameters
• Mitsumi CD-ROM drive (Multisession)
Name of module: mcdx.o
mcdx=<addr>,<irq>[,<addr>,<irq>]
For a number of drivers the settings <addr>, <irq> can be repeated up to 4
times.
• Mozart sound card with port for CD-ROM drives
Name of module: isp16.o
isp16_cdrom_base=<addr>
isp16_cdrom_irq=<irq> isp16_cdrom_dma=<dma>
isp16_cdrom_type=<typ>
Variable
<typ>
Values / Meaning
Sanyo, Panasonic, Sony, Mitsumi
This driver is not a real CDROM driver; it is only responsible for the interface
configuration of the CD-ROM drive when connected to a ISP16 , MAD16 or
Mozart sound card. After this driver is loaded only the interface is loaded
accordingly; the corresponding CDROM driver needs to be loaded as well.
The value for the variable <type> is written on the plug which connects the
CD-ROM cable to the sound card.
Example: modprobe isp16 isp16_cdrom_base=0x300
isp16_cdrom_irq=10 isp16_cdrom_dma=1
isp16_cdrom_type=sony
• Optics Storage 8000 AT CD-ROM drive
Name of module: optcd.o
Parameter
optcd
Value
<addr>
Example: modprobe optcd optcd=0x300
• Philips CM206 CD-ROM drive
Name of module: cm206.o
cm206=<addr>,<irq>
Example: modprobe cm206 cm206=0x300,10
• Sanyo CD-ROM drive
Name of module: sjcd.o
Parameter
sjcd
Value
<addr>
Example: modprobe sjcd sjcd=0x300
264
10.3
The Parameters
• Sony CDU 31/33 A
Name of module: cdu31a.o
Parameter
cdu31a_port
cdu31a_irq
Value
<addr>
<irq>
Example: modprobe cdu31a cdu31a_port=0x300 cdu31a_irq=10
• Sony CDU 535
Name of module: sonycd535.o
Parameter
sonycd535
Value
<addr>
Example: modprobe sonycd535 sonycd535=0x300
• Soundblaster Pro 16 MultiCD
Name of module: sbpcd.o
sbpcd=<addr>,<typ>
whereby <type> can have the following values:
Variable
0
1
2
3
Values / Meaning
LaserMate
SoundBlaster
SoundScape
Teac16bit
Example: modprobe sbpcd sbpcd=0x300,0
Sound cards and sound chipsets
Since the 2.2.xx kernel sound support has been resolved in modular form and
can be controlled by numerous parameters.
• AD1816 Chip
Name of module: ad1816.o
The following cards, amongst others, are supported: Terratec Base 1, Terratec Base 64, HP Kayak, Acer FX-3D, SY-1816, Highscreen Sound-Boostar
32 Wave 3D
Parameter
io
irq
dma
dma2
ad1816_clockfreq
Value
<addr>
<irq>
<dma>
<dma2>
<clockfreq>
265
10
Kernel Parameters
Example: modprobe ad1816 io=0x530 irq=5 dma=1
dma2=3 ad1816_clockfreq=33000
• AD1848/CS4248 Chip (MSS)
Name of module: ad1848.o
Parameter
io
irq
dma
dma2
type
deskpro_xl
Value
<addr>
<irq>
<dma>
<dma2>
<cardtype>
<magic>
• Generic OPLx driver
Name of module: adlib_card.o
Parameter
io
Value
<addr>
Example: modprobe adlib_card io=0x330
• Crystal 423x chipsets
Name of module: cs4232.o
Parameter
io
irq
dma
dma2
Value
<addr>
<irq>
<dma>
<dma2>
Example: modprobe cs4232 io=0x530 irq=5 dma=1 dma2=3
• Ensoniq 1370 chipset
Name of module: es1370.o
see also PCI64/128.
Parameter
joystick
lineout
micz
Value
1: activate joystick
1: line-in in line-out switch over
microphone impedancy
Example: modprobe es1370 joystick=1 lineout=1
266
10.3
The Parameters
• Creative Ensoniq 1371 chipset
Name of module: es1371.o
Refer also to the PCI64/128.
Parameter
joystick
Value
<addr>
Valid values for <addr> are 0x200, 0x208, 0x210 and 0x218.
Example: modprobe es1371 joystick=0x200
• Gravis Ultrasound
Name of module: gus.o
Parameter
io
irq
dma
dma16
type
gus16
no_wave_dma
db16
Value
<addr>
<irq>
<dma>
<dma16>
• MAD16
Name of module: mad16.o
Supports OPTi 82C928, OAK OTI-601D, OPTi 82C929, OPTi 82C930 and
OPTi 82C924.
Parameter
io
irq
dma
dma16
Value
<addr>
<irq>
<dma>
<dma2>
Example: modprobe mad16 io=0x530 irq=7 dma=0 dma16=1
• Turtle Beach Maui and Tropez
Name of module: maui.o
Parameter
io
irq
Value
<addr>
<irq>
Example: modprobe maui io=0x530 irq=5
267
10
Kernel Parameters
• MPU401
Name of module: mpu401.o
Parameter
io
Value
<addr>
Example: modprobe mpu401 io=0x330
• Turtle Beach MultiSound
Name of module: msnd.o
Example: modprobe msnd
• Turtle Beach Classic/Monterey/Tahiti
Name of module: msnd_classic.o
Parameter
io
irq
mem
write_ndelay
major
fifosize
calibrate_signal
Value
<addr>
<irq>
Example: modprobe io=0x290 irq=7 mem=0xd0000
• Turtle Beach Pinnacle/Fiji
Name of module: msnd_pinnacle.o
As well as the parameters of the Turtle Beach Classic/Monterey/Tahiti, this
card also understands:
Parameter
Value
digital
cfg
reset
mpu_io
mpu_irq
ide_io0
ide_io1
ide_irq
joystick_io
Example: modprobe msnd_pinnacle cfg=0x250 io=0x290 irq=5
mem=0xd0000
268
10.3
The Parameters
• OPL3
Name of module: opl3.o
Parameter
io
Value
<addr>
Example: modprobe io=0x388
• OPL3-SA1
Name of module: opl3sa.o
Parameter
io
irq
dma
dma2
mpu_io
mpu_irq
Value
<addr>
<irq>
<dma>
<dma2>
<addr>
<irq>
Example: modprobe opl3sa io=0x530 irq=11 dma=0 dma2=1
mpu_io=0x330 mpu_irq=5
• YMF711, YMF715, YMF719, OPL3-SA2, OPL3-SA3, OPL3-SAx
Name of module: opl3sa2.o
Parameter
io
irq
dma
dma2
mss_io
mpu_io
Value
<addr>
<irq>
<dma>
<dma2>
<addr>
<addr>
Example: modprobe opl3sa2 io=0x370 irq=7 dma=0 dma2=3
mss_io=0x530 mpu_io=0x330
• Pro Audio Spectrum
Name of module: pas2.o
269
10
Kernel Parameters
Parameter
io
irq
dma
dma16
sb_io
sb_irq
sb_dma
sb_dma16
joystick
symphony
broken_bus_clock
Value
<addr>
<irq>
<dma>
<dma16>
<addr>
<irq>
<dma>
<dma16>
• Personal Sound System (ECHO ESC614)
Name of module: pss.o
Parameter
pss_io
mss_io
mss_irq
mss_dma
mpu_io
mpu_irq
pss_mixer
Value
<addr>
<addr>
<irq>
<dma>
<addr>
<irq>
activate 1 or 0
• Sound Blaster and Clones
Name of module: sb.o
Parameter
io
irq
dma
dma16
mpu_io
mad16
trix
pas2
sm_games
acer
mwave_bug
Value
<addr>
<irq>
<dma>
<dma16>
<addr>
activate 1
activate1
activate1
activate1
activate1, for Acer Notebooks
activate1
Example: modprobe sb io=0x220 irq=5 dma=1 dma16=5 mpu_io=0x330
• Aztech Sound Galaxy
270
10.3
The Parameters
Name of module: sgalaxy.o
Parameter
io
irq
dma
dma2
sgbase
Value
<addr>
<irq>
<dma>
<dma2>
• S3 Sonic Vibes
Name of module: sonicvibes.o
No parameters.
• Ensoniq SoundScape
Name of module: sscape.o
Parameter
io
irq
dma
mss
mpu_io
mpu_irq
spea
Value
<addr>
<irq>
<dma>
<addr>
<irq>
1
• MediaTrix AudioTrix Pro
Name of module: trix.o
Parameter
io
irq
dma
dma2
sb_io
sb_irq
sb_dma
mpu_io
mpu_irq
Value
<addr>
<irq>
<dma>
<dma2>
<addr>
<irq>
<dma>
<addr>
<irq>
• UART401
Name of module: uart401.o
Parameter
io
irq
Value
<addr>
<irq>
271
10
Kernel Parameters
Example: modprobe io=0x330 irq=9
• UART6850
Name of module: uart6850.o
Parameter
io
irq
Value
<addr>
<irq>
• Sound Blaster DSP chipsets
Name of module: v_midi.o
No parameters.
• Turtle Beach Maui, Tropez, Tropez Plus
Name of module: wavefront.o
Parameter
io
irq
Value
<addr>
<irq>
Example: modprobe wavefront io=0x200 irq=9
The parallel port
The operation of the parallel port is somewhat complex. After configuration, a
complete subsystem is available; see Section 6.4.3 page 175 pp .
• Parallel port
Name of module: parport.o
Example: modprobe parport
• Parallel port – architecture-specific
Name of module: parport_pc.o
Parameter
io
irq
Value
<addr>
<irq>
In order to set up 3 Ports in a PC style, for example, whereby one has the
address 0x3bc without an IRQ, one has the address 0x378 with IRQ 7 and
one has the address 0x278 with automatically detected IRQ, you should enter
(all in one line!):
Example: modprobe parport_pc io=0x3bc,0x378,0x278
irq=none,7,auto
272
10.3
The Parameters
• Printer driver
Name of module: lp.o
Parameter
parport
Value
<port>
Example: modprobe lp parport=0,2
• Parallel port IDE devices
Name of module: paride.o
If you want to use chains of Paride devices on a single parallel port, then you
must first load parport.o!
Example: modprobe paride
The parallel port should – if possible – be operated in “EPP mode”; please
set this mode in the BIOS of your computer.
• Parallel port IDE low-level protocol driver
Name of module: \variable{xxxx}.o
protocol
aten
bpck
comm
dstr
epat
epia
fit2
fit3
friq
frpw
kbic
ktti
on20
on26
device
ATEN EH-100
Microsolutions backpack
DataStor (old-type) "commuter" adapter
DataStor EP-2000
Shuttle EPAT
Shuttle EPIA
FIT TD-2000
FIT TD-3000
Freecom IQ cable
Freecom Power
KingByte KBIC-951A and KBIC-971A
KT Technology PHd adapter
OnSpec 90c20
OnSpec 90c26
(HK)
(US)
(TW)
(TW)
(UK)
(UK)
(US)
(US)
(DE)
(DE)
(TW)
(SG)
(US)
(US)
Example: modprobe epat
• Parallel port IDE hard disk
Name of module: pd.o
Parameter
verbose
Value
<value>
First load parport and the low-level driver
Example: modprobe pd verbose=1
273
10
Kernel Parameters
• Parallel port ATAPI CD-ROM
Name of module: pcd.o
First load parport and the low-level driver
Example: modprobe pcd
• Parallel port ATAPI floppy disk drive
Name of module: pf.o
First load parport and the low-level driver
Example: modprobe pf
• Parallel port ATAPI streamer drive
Name of module: pt.o
First load parport and the low-level driver
Example: modprobe pt
• Parallel port generic ATAPI device
Name of module: pg.o
First load parport and the low-level driver
Example: modprobe pg
274
11
Updating the System and Package
Management
11 Updating the System and Package
Management
11.1
Updating SuSE Linux
SuSE Linux offers you the option of updating an existing system without having
to reinstall everything. It is important to distinguish between updating one or a
few packages and updating the entire system to the latest distribution.
It is quite normal for software to “grow”. Thus we recommend that you have a
look at how full the partitions are, with df, before updating! If you think there
might be too little space available, you should consider making a backup and
repartitioning. There is no rule of thumb as to how much space you need in
particular cases.
Note
It is helpful to read the file README or in DOS/Windows README.DOS on the
CD; here additional changes are noted which may have been made after
the manuals have been printed.
11.1.1
Preparations
Before you begin an update, make sure you have saved the old configuration files
to a separate medium such as a streamer, removable drive, floppies or ZIP drives,
just in case things go wrong. Normally these are the files in /etc and /var/lib
(e. g. XDM). In addition, no harm would be done if you wrote the current user
data in /home (the HOME directories) to a backup medium. A data backup should
be carried out as System administrator ‘root’; only ‘root’ has the required
permissions to read all local files.
Before you start the update process, remember to write down the device name of
your root partition. In this case, /dev/sda3 would be your root partition. You
can see this with the command:
earth: # df /
Filesystem
/dev/sda3
/dev/sda1
1024-blocks Used Available Capacity Mounted on
4167999 3253471
698856
82%
/
7496
1311
5785
18%
/boot
Output 11.1.1: file system overview with df
275
11
Updating the System and Package
Management
This shows that /dev/sda3 is mounted in the file system in /.
Tip
Before updating PostgreSQL (package postgres) we recommend that
you make a dump of the databases (see manpage for pg_dump
(man pg_dump)). This is only needed, however, if you used PostgreSQL
previously.
Now you still need to decide if you want to update using the text-oriented YaST
or with the graphical YaST2. The decision is made for you if you want to update from a SuSE Linux before version 6.0 – in this case you should use YaST
and proceed as described in Section 11.1.3. From version 6.0 onwards you can
update using YaST2.
11.1.2
Updating with YaST2
After the preparations mentioned in Section 11.1.1 on the page before, you
should first boot.
Note
You can only carry out an update with YaST2 if you want to update a
SuSE Linux 6.x. For older versions (e. g.SuSE Linux 5.3) YaST1 is the right
method; see Section 11.1.3.
Start YaST2 and select ‘Update exisiting system’ from the menu.
This module updates your current system to the latest version of SuSE Linux.
The module will go through several steps. It will check, which packages need to
be updated. You are able to decide this action for every single package, if you
like to. Using this module you are not able to update the base system. To do
this, you have to boot from the CD/DVD or the floppy disk and select ‘Update
exisiting system’ in YaST2.
11.1.3
Updating with YaST1
Updating the base system
Because central components of the system (such as libraries) must be replaced
when updating the base system, this task cannot be performed during normal
operations, i.e. from the currently running Linux system.
You need to start the update environment – normally using either the supplied
“boot disk” or by entering manually at the kernel boot prompt, as described in
detail in Section 2.1 page 9.
Essentially the following steps are necessary:
276
11.1
Updating SuSE Linux
1. As soon as the kernel has booted from the “boot disk” or the update CD ,
linuxrc is started automatically.
2. In the main menu of linuxrc, in the menu ‘Settings’, you need to choose
the language, monitor and keyboard. Press ‘OK’ when you are finished.
3. Now make sure that you load all the drivers you need by selecting ‘Kernel modules’. The exact procedure is given in the linuxrc description in
Section 18 page 296.
4. After this has been done, selecting ‘Installation / Startup system’
and ‘Startup installation’ leads you to the selection of your source
medium (see Section 18 page 298).
5. linuxrc then loads the installation environment and starts YaST automatically.
In YaST’s main menu, select ‘Update existing system’. YaST then tries
to determine the root partition and displays the result. Here you can now select
your root partition, as mentioned above (for example: /dev/sda3 ).
YaST then reads the existing “old” /etc/fstab and mounts the partitions it
found in this file. Now select ‘Continue’.
After returning to the main menu by pressing Esc , choose ‘Updating your
system’ (Section 3.2 page 45). Your old system is now analyzed by YaST and
the results are displayed in a list.
After this, all the central configuration files of the system are updated. YaST
creates backup files of those files that have changed since the last installation.
When the base system has been updated, you will find yourself in YaST’s special update mode, where you can decide on which packages to update. In addition, old configuration files will be saved as .rpmorig or .rpmsave (see Section 11.3.2 page 282). This procedure is recorded in /var/adm/inst-log/
installation-*, and may be consulted later on.
Updating the Rest of the System
When the base system has been updated, you will then be placed in YaST’s special update mode. Here you may update the rest of your system as desired.
YaST then builds two lists. The first list shows those packages YaST has recognized, and where it has decided that an update could be useful. The second list
shows you those packages where this is not so straightforward (perhaps the old
package still works, but provides no information about its version).
Using these two lists, you can decide which packages should be updated. When
you begin the update, all packages selected will be replaced by the new ones –
all files will be saved that have been changed since the last installation.
After completing this task, you should proceed as with a first-time installation.
One of the things you will need to do is select a new kernel; YaST will offer you
this option.
277
11
Updating the System and Package
Management
Tip
If you use loadlin for booting you need to copy the new kernel and possibly
your initrd as well to the loadlin directory on your DOS partition!
If you do not want the system to be rebooted in its normal runlevel (see standard
runlevel Section 13.2 page 309), but would like YaST to complete the installation, you should enter the following at the LILO prompt:
NO_AUTO_SETUP=true
This parameter is especially useful if you encounter problems when booting
again. These might occur if you access important parts of your system, for
example via PCMCIA-SCSI. To continue with the prepared configuration, the
following steps could be taken:
1. Enter the following parameter at the LILO prompt:
NO_AUTO_SETUP=true
2. Change to user ‘root’ and start YaST with: yast -nomenu to complete its
configuration tasks.
3. Start /lib/YaST/bootsetup.conf as ‘root’.
Experienced Linux users might not want to start in the default runlevel, but in
the “single user mode”. This can be achieved by entering single at the LILO
prompt.
11.1.4
Updating Single Packages
With SuSE Linux, you can update single packages whenever you want; when
doing so, you must make sure that the system remains consistent: recommendations on updating can be found at: http://www.suse.de/de/support/
download/updates/.
In YaST’s package list (see Section 3.4.3 page 67), you can move around as you
please. If you select a package which is needed for the system to run, you will
be warned by YaST. Such packages should be replaced only in update mode. For
example, many packages contain shared libraries which could be in use when
you want to run an update. Updating shared libraries on a running system will
inevitably cause problems.
11.2
From Version to Version
The following sections list details of things which have been changed from one
version to the next. In this overview such things as configuration file syntax
changes and abnormal behavior of well-known programs are listed. Only those
anomalies are listed which might cause problems for the administrator or user.
278
11.2
From Version to Version
This list is probably incomplete. Please also consult the Support Database which
can be found in the package sdb, series doc (cf. Section 1.4 page 3).
Known problems and other abnormal features of each version will be announced
on our webserver when found: see the links given below. Important updates
of individual packages can be found at http://www.suse.de/en/support/
download/updates/.
11.2.1
From 6.4 to 7.0
Problems and Special Features:
file:/usr/share/doc/sdb/de/html/bugs70.html.
• All kernel modules (“drivers”) are included in the respective kernels installed
(single kernel, multi-processor kernel etc.); this guarantees that the matching
compiled modules are installed.
• The X Window System 4.0 no longer supports some very old graphics cards
and a few very new ones; see Section 5.2 page 122. The setup program will
be aware of this and switch to the preceding version 3.3.x, which is also
included, accordingly.
The development environment of version 3.3.x should also be installed if you
want to build packages in accordance with the “Linux Development Platform
Specification”; see Section 12.3.1 page 288.
• ypserv from the package ypserv is no longer linked to the “tcp-wrapper”
library, but instead uses /var/yp/securenets. After an update the settings
from /etc/hosts.allow or from /etc/hosts.deny should be transferred
to /var/yp/securenets.
• The portmapper is started via /sbin/init.d/portmap(since 7.1 via /etc/
init.d/portmap) or with the command rcportmap; /sbin/init.d/
rpc is now obsolete.
• In accordance with the FHS File system Hierarchy Standard (see Section 12.1.1
page 287), all architecture-dependent documentation can now be found in
/usr/share/doc (previously /usr/doc).
• The package bttv is no longer included; the kernel modules are integrated
into the respective kernel installed.
• The gtk-XmHTML library is available as a separate package gxmhtml; it has
been moved from the package gnlibs.
• The package gnadmin has been discontinued; logview is now contained in
the package gnutils.
• On the package cron: in accordance with the FHS, the cron tables are located in /var/spool/cron/tabs; see Section 12.3.2 page 288.
• On the package postgres: PostgreSQL and all of its components have been
reorganized on the basis of the original packages. The package pg_datab
with the initialization database is no longer needed; if needed, initialization
is performed by the startup script.
279
11
Updating the System and Package
Management
11.2.2
From 7.0 to 7.1
Problems and Special Features:
http://sdb.suse.de/sdb/de/html/bugs71.html.
• Kernel: The “low-level” drivers for special EIDE chip sets are integrated into
the standard kernel; k_eide or eide are no longer necessary as separate
images. This means you no longer need to create your own boot disk if you
require this driver.
• The meaning of runlevel has changed; see Table 13.1 page 310. The init
scripts are now located in /etc/init.d; if your have already created your
own scripts, you should make sure they are backed up before you update
them.
• DEFAULT_LANGUAGE: New name for the former variable LANGUAGE in /etc/
rc.config; see Section 12.9 page 305.
• The /etc/resolv.conf is now written directly from YaST as well as YaST2;
no longer by SuSEconfig.
• The limitation of the package names to 8 characters has been removed and
many packages may now have more descriptive names. These new names
will be taken into consideration in the update and the familiar programs will
continue to be available to you automatically. If you are carrying out a reinstallation, you need to be careful that the packages are selected under their
new names.
• Regarding the former package ypclient: This package is now divided into
ypbind and yp-tools and the init-script is called ypbind.
• Regarding package jade_dsl: In order to avoid conflict with package rzsz,
the command line tool sx is now called s2x and sgml2xml.
11.2.3
From 7.1 to 7.2
Problems and Special Features:
http://sdb.suse.de/sdb/de/html/bugs72.html.
• package nkitb no longer exists; the programs moved into several packages:
talk, rsh, finger, rwho, telnet, etc., into the -server packages. E.g.
the command ping can now be found in package iputils.
• Renaming of several packages (see page ??); e. g.:
series sgm: package docbook-dsssl-stylesheets, package docbook_3
and package docbook_4.
• You have to install package mod_php4 instead of package mod_php now.
• Emacs was split up into several packages:
– Base package emacs.
280
11.3
RPM—the Distribution Package
Manager
– In addition you have to install package emacs-x11, which includes the
program with X11 support.
– package emacs-nox contains the program without X11 support.
– package emacs-info: Online documentation in the info format.
– package emacs-el contains uncompiled library files written in Emacs
Lisp – not required for a runtime environment.
– Numerous additional packages which can be installed, if required: package emacs-auctex (for LATEX); package psgml (for SGML/XML); package gnuserv (for a Client-/Server environment), etc.
• Changes to follow the current FHS (see Section 12.1.1 page 287):
– /media (was /cdrom and /floppy)
Compatible links will be available for a transitional period.
11.3
RPM—the Distribution Package Manager
In SuSE Linux, RPM (rpm), the “Red Hat Package Manager” serves as the package manager. It makes the powerful RPM database available to everyone: users,
system administrators and, of course, package builders, from which detailed information on installed software can be queried at any time.
rpm does the following:
• compiles software applications from “pristine” sources and packages them
for installation
• installs, upgrades and cleanly uninstalls software packaged in the RPM format
• supports queries, including dependencies, about packages and maintains the
RPM database of installed packages
The reader is referred to the manpage for rpm (man rpm) and the book Maximum
RPM, Bailey, 1997, Red Hat, for more information on building RPM packages.
The other capabilities of RPM are briefly described below.
Installable RPM archives are packed in a special binary format. These archives
consist of the program files to be installed, as well as certain meta-information
which is used during the installation by rpm to configure the software package, or
stored in the RPM database for documentation purposes. RPM archives normally
have the extension .rpm.
11.3.1
Verifying Package Authenticity
Since Version 7.1, the SuSE RPM packages have a GnuPG signature:
1024D/9C800ACA 2000-10-19 SuSE Package Signing Key <[email protected]>
Key fingerprint = 79C1 79B2 E1C8 20C1 890F 9994 A84E DAE8 9C80 0ACA
281
11
Updating the System and Package
Management
With the command
earth:~ # rpm --verbose --checksig apache-1.3.12.rpm
you can verify the signature of an RPM package and thus determine whether
it really originates from SuSE or from another trustworthy facility; this is especially recommended for update packages downloaded from the Internet. Our
public package signature key normally resides in /root/.gnupg/.
11.3.2
Managing Packages: Install, Update and Uninstall
Normally, RPM archive installation can be quickly taken care of:
earth: # rpm -i <package>.rpm
With this command, the package will be installed – but only if its dependency
requirements are met and if it does not conflict with another package. With an
error message, rpm requests those packages which need to be installed to fulfill
dependencies. In the background the RPM database ensures that no conflicts
will arise – a specific file can only belong to one package. By choosing different
options you can force rpm to ignore these defaults, but be sure to know what you
are doing, otherwise you risk compromising the integrity of the system and you
might jeopardize the ability to update the system.
Use -U or --upgrade to update a package. This option will remove the files of
the old version and immediately install the new files. rpm updates configuration
files more cautiously:
• If a configuration file has not been changed by the system administrator, rpm
will install the new version of the appropriate file. No action by the system
administrator is required.
• If a configuration file was changed by the system administrator before the
update, rpm will save the changed file with the extension .rpmorig or
.rpmsave (backup file) and install the version from the new package, but
only when the originally installed file and the newer version are different. If
this is the case, you should compare the backup file (.rpmorig or .rpmsave)
with the newly installed file and make your changes again in the new file.
Afterwards, be sure to delete all .rpmorig and .rpmsave files to avoid
problems with future updates.
The -U switch is not just an equivalent to un-installing with the (-e) option and
installing with the (-i) option. Use -U whenever possible.
Note
After every update, you should check all backup files created by rpm. These
are your old configuration files. If necessary, incorporate your customizations from the backup files for the new configuration files. After this process
the files with the extensions .rpmorig and .rpmsave should be deleted.
To remove a package, enter the command:
282
11.3
RPM—the Distribution Package
Manager
earth: # rpm -e <package>
rpm will only delete the package if there are no unresolved dependencies. Theoretically it isn’t possible to un-install an old libc using rpm as long as another
program still needs it to work properly—the RPM database guards against this.
11.3.3
RPM Queries
With the -q option, rpm initiates queries, making it possible to inspect an RPM
archive (by adding the option -p) and also to query the RPM database of installed
packages. Several switches are available to specify the type of information required (see Table 11.1).
-i
-l
-f <FILE>
-s
-d
-c
--dump
--provides
--requires, -R
--scripts
Package information
File list
Query a package owned by <FILE> (the full path must
be specified with <FILE>)
File list with status information (implies -l)
list only documentation files (implies -l)
list only configuration files (implies -l)
File list with complete details (to be used with -l, -c or
-d)
List features of the package which another package can
request with --requires
Capabilities the package requires
(Un-)installation scripts (pre/post install/un-install)
Table 11.1: The most important RPM query options (-q [-p]
. . . <package>)
For example, the command
earth: # rpm -q -i rpm
will display something like the following information:
Name
: rpm
Relocations: (not relocateable)
Version
: 3.0.3
Vendor: SuSE GmbH, Germany
Release
: 3
Build Date: Wed 21 Jul 1999 13:48:52
Install date: Wed 21 Jul 1999 18:44:33 MEST
Build Host: euler.suse.de
Group
: unsorted
Source RPM: rpm-3.0.3-3.src.rpm
Size
: 5108780
License: GPL
Packager
: [email protected]
Summary
: RPM Package Manager
Description :
RPM Package Manager is the main tool for managing software packages
of the SuSE Linux distribution.
%rpm can be used to install and remove software packages; with rpm it’s easy
%to update packages. rpm keep track of all these manipulations in a central
%database. This way it is possible to get an overview of all installed
%packages; rpm also supports database queries.
283
11
Updating the System and Package
Management
Option -f only works if you specify the complete filename with its full path.
You can name as many filenames as you want: for example,
rpm -q -f /bin/rpm /usr/bin/wget
will lead to the following result:
rpm-3.0.3-3
wget-1.5.3-55
% rpm-2.4.1-1
% wget-1.4.5-2
If you know only a part of the filename, you will have to use a shell script such
as the following:
#! /bin/sh
for i in ‘rpm -q -a -l | grep $1 ‘; do
echo you’ll find "\"$i\" in package":
rpm -q -f $i
echo ""
done
File contents 11.3.1: Script to search for packages
With the command
earth: # rpm -q --changelog rpm
You can have a precise list of information displayed (updates, configuration,
modifications etc.) on a specific package; this example is on the package rpm.
With the help of the RPM database, verification checks can be made. These
checks are initiated with the option -V (or -y, or --verify). With this option,
rpm will show all files in a package which have been changed since first being
installed. rpm uses eight character symbols to give some hints about the kind of
change (see Table 11.2):
5
S
L
T
D
U
G
M
MD5 check sum
File size
Symbolic link
Modification time
Major and minor device numbers
Owner
Group
Mode (permissions and file type)
Table 11.2: RPM verify options
In the case of configuration files, the letter c will be printed. For example, if you
have changed /etc/wgetrc from the package wget, you may see:
earth: # rpm -V wget
S.5....T c /etc/wgetrc
284
11.3
RPM—the Distribution Package
Manager
The files of the RPM database are placed in /var/lib/rpm. If the partition
/usr has a size of 1 GB, this database can occupy nearly 30 MB, especially
after a complete update. If the database is much bigger than expected, it is useful
to rebuild the database with the option --rebuilddb. But first make a backup
of the old database. The cron script cron.daily makes daily copies of the
database (packed with gzip) and stores them in /var/adm/backup/rpmdb. The
number of copies is controlled by the variable <MAX_RPMDB_BACKUPS>
(default: 5) in /etc/rc.config. The size of a single backup is approximately
3 MB. (This value is valid for a 1 GB /usr partition.) You must take this space
requirement into account when deciding how large you want the root partition to
be. If /var has its own partition, you don’t have to worry about this.
11.3.4
Installing and Compiling Source Packages
All source packages of SuSE Linux are located in the series zq (Source packages) and carry an .spm extension (“Source RPMS”).
Tip
These packages can be handled in just the same way as all other packages.
The packages, however, will not be found in the RPM database (and are not
marked with an [i] in YaST), as only “installed” software is listed.
The directories of rpm in /usr/src/packages must exist (if none of your own
settings have been made, for example in /etc/rpmrc).
SOURCES this is for the original sources (.tar.gz-files etc.) and for distributionspecific adjustments (.dif-files).
SPECS for the “spec” files, similar to a meta Makefile, which control the “build”
process.
BUILD All the sources are unpacked, patched and compiled in this directory.
RPMS This is where the completed “binary” packages are stored.
SRPMS here are the “source”-RPMs.
Note
Please don’t experiment with essential system packages such as package
libc, package rpm, or package nkit, etc.! This could lead to a malfunctioning system!
When you install a source package from series zq with YaST , all the necessary
components will be installed in /usr/src/packages: the sources and the adjustments in SOURCES, and the relevant .spec file in SPECS 1 . For our example
1 For
“making packages” see [Bai97]. Further information can be obtained from the manpage for
rpm (man rpm)
285
11
Updating the System and Package
Management
we will choose the wget.spm package. After you have installed the package
with YaST you should have the following files:
/usr/src/packages/SPECS/wget.spec
/usr/src/packages/SOURCES/wget-1.4.5.dif
/usr/src/packages/SOURCES/wget-1.4.5.tar.gz
rpm -b <X> /usr/src/packages/SPECS/wget.spec starts the compila-
tion. Here <X> is a wildcard for different stages of the build process (see the
output of the rpm -help or the RPM documentation). Here is a short explanation:
-bp Prepare sources in /usr/src/packages/BUILD: unpack and patch.
-bc the same as -bp, but with additional compilation.
-bi the same as -bp, but with additional installation of the built software. Cau-
tion: if the package does not support the BuildRoot feature, you might overwrite configuration files.
-bb the same as -bi, but with the additional creation of the “binary” package. If
the compile was successful the binary should be in /usr/src/packages/
RPMS.
-ba the same as -bb, but with the additional creation of the “source RPM”. If
the compilation was successful the binary should be in /usr/src/packages/
SRPMS.
-short-circuit lets you skip specific steps.
This binary RPM may now be installed by invoking rpm -i or even better, with
rpm -U (to make it appear in the RPM database).
11.3.5
Other Tools for Working with RPM Archives
The Midnight Commander (mc) is able to “browse” RPM archives and to operate
on parts of them. This tool works on an RPM package archive as if the archive
were
a regular file system. Using mc, you canview
HEADER information with
and you can copy parts of an archive with F5 .
F3 xrpm is a new graphical RPM manager, written in Python, which supports commands to FTP-accessed archives.
KDE can use the tool krpm, a graphical interface in the X Window System, for
RPM management. krpm is currently in an early development stage.
Using the Alien (alien) Perl script, it is possible to convert or install an “alien”
binary package. This tries to convert “old” TGZ archives to RPM before installing. This way the RPM database can keep track of such a package after it
has been installed. But beware: alien is still “alpha” software, according to its
author.
Last but not least, there is YaST . . .
286
12
Special Features of SuSE Linux
12 Special Features of SuSE Linux
12.1
File System Hierarchy Standard (FHS) and
the Linux Standard Base (LSB)
12.1.1
File System Hierarchy Standard (FHS)
SuSE Linux strives as far as possible to conform to the File system Hierarchy
Standard (FHS, package fhs, series doc; see also http://www.pathname.
com/fhs/). For this reason it is sometimes necessary to move files or directories
to their “correct” places in the file system.
12.1.2
Linux Standard Base (LSB)
SuSE supports the Linux Standard Base project; current information on this can
be found at: http://www.linuxbase.org.
At this time, the LSB project exists in Version 0.3; among other things, the system initialization is defined here; refer to Chapter 13 page 309.
12.1.3 teTeX – TEX in SuSE Linux
teTeX is put together according to the TEX Directory Structure (TDS) (see ftp:
//ftp.dante.de/tex-archive/tds/), without compromising the FHS.
12.2
Example Environments for FTP and HTTP
About FTP
To make it easier to set up an FTP server, the package ftpdir package includes
an example environment. This is installed in /usr/local/ftp.
About HTTP
Apache is the standard web server in SuSE Linux; together with the installation of Apache some example documents are made available in /usr/local/
httpd. If you want to set up your own web server, it is recommended that you
enter your own DocumentRoot in /etc/httpd/httpd.conf.
287
12
Special Features of SuSE Linux
12.3
Hints on Special Software Packages
12.3.1
The packages xdevel and xdevel33
The “Linux Development Platform Specification” specifies that XFree86 3.3.6 is
to be used for building purposes, so that the software in question will run on as
many platforms as possible. From SuSE Linux 7.0, however, XFree86 4.0 is the
default. So that SuSE Linux can continue to meet the criteria of the specification,
the package xdevel33 is currently available.
If you want to build a package with SuSE Linux 7.2 in accordance with the
“Linux Development Platform Specification”, you must uninstall the package
xdevel and install the package xdevel33 instead.
12.3.2
Package cron
The cron tables are now located in /var/cron/tabs (and not, as previously,
in /var/lib/cron). /etc/crontab serves as a system wide cron table. You
need to enter the name of the user who should run the command directly after
the timetable (see File contents 12.3.1, here ‘root’ is entered); package-specific
tables, located in /etc/cron.d have the same format – see manpage for cron
(man 8 cron).
1-59/5 * * * * root test -x /usr/sbin/atrun && /usr/sbin/atrun
File contents 12.3.1: Example of an entry in /etc/crontab
/etc/crontab cannot be processed with crontab -e, but must be loaded directly into an editor, modified, and then saved.
A number of packages install shell scripts to the directories /etc/cron.hourly,
/etc/cron.daily, /etc/cron.weekly and /etc/cron.monthly, whose
instructions are controlled by /usr/lib/cron/run-crons. /usr/lib/cron/
run-crons is run every 15 minutes from the main table (/etc/crontab); this
guarantees that processes which may possibly have been neglected can be run
at the proper time. You should not be surprised if, shortly after booting the user
‘nobody’ turns up in the process tables and is highly active; this probably means
that ‘nobody’ is just updating the locate database (see Section 13.6 page 324).
12.3.3
package curses
On the CD you will find the package ncurses. The corresponding libraries
are named libncurses.so.<xx>. This means that some Makefiles have to
be adapted to link ncurses. Packages of your own should be linked with the
command -lncurses, and never with -lcurses. For those who want to use
curses anyway, try:
-I/usr/include/termcap -I/usr/include/curses
-L/usr/lib/termcap -L/usr/lib/curses
288
12.3
12.3.4
Hints on Special Software
Packages
Sources for uucp
The sources for package uucp are currently contained as a sub-package in the
source-RPM of the program Sendmail.
12.3.5
Manpages
For some GNU applications (e. g., tar) the manpages are no longer maintained.
They have been replaced by info files. Info (info) is GNU ’s hypertext system. Typing info info gives you a starting help in using info. info can be
launched via emacs -f info or on its own: info. The programs tkinfo and
xinfo are easy to use, or you can access the help system.
12.3.6
The Command ulimit
With the ulimit (user limits) command it is possible to set limits for the use of
system resources, and to have these displayed. ulimit is especially useful for
limiting the memory available for applications. Through this an application can
be prevented from using up too much (all) memory on its own; this could bring
the system to a standstill.
ulimit can be used with various options. To limit memory usage, you can use
the options listed in Table 12.1.
-m
-v
-s
-c
-a
maximum size of physical memory
maximum size of virtual memory (swap)
maximum size of the stack
maximum size of the core files
display of limits set
Table 12.1: ulimit: Setting resources for the user
System-wide settings can be made in /etc/profile; there, creating core files
must be enabled, which is needed by programmers for “debugging”. A normal
user cannot increase the values specified in /etc/profile by the system administrator, but he can make special entries in his own ~/.bashrc.
# Limits of physical memory:
ulimit -m 98304
# Limits of virtual memory:
ulimit
-v 98304
.
File contents 12.3.2: ulimit: Settings in ~/.bashrc
Details of memory must be specified in KB.
289
12
Special Features of SuSE Linux
For more detailed information take a look at manpage for bash (man bash).
12.4
Booting with the “initial ramdisk”
Describing the Problem
As soon as the Linux kernel has been booted and the root file system (/) mounted,
programs can be run and further kernel modules can be integrated to provide additional functions.
To be able to mount the root file system in the first place, certain conditions
must be met. The kernel needs the corresponding drivers to be able to access the
device on which the root file system is located (especially SCSI drivers). The
kernel must also contain the code which is needed in order to be able to read the
file system (ext2, reiserfs, romfs etc.). It is also conceivable that the root
file system is already encrypted; in this case a password is needed to mount the
file system.
If you just take a look at the problem of SCSI drivers, then a number of different solutions are possible: the kernel could contain all imaginable drivers. This
might be a problem because different drivers could conflict with each other. Also
the kernel will become very large because of this. Another possibility is to provide different kernels, each one containing just one or a few SCSI drivers. This
method also has the problem that a large number of different kernels are required,
a problem which is then increased by the differently optimized kernels (Pentium
optimization, SMP).
The idea of loading the SCSI driver as a module leads to the general question
which is answered by the concept of an initial ramdisk: creating a way of being
able to perform userspace-programs even before the root file system is mounted.
12.4.1
Concept of the Initial Ramdisk
The initial ramdisk (also called “initdisk” or “initrd”) solves precisely the problems described above. The Linux kernel provides an option of having a small file
system loaded to a RAM disk and running programs there before the actual root
file system is mounted. The loading of initrd taken over by the boot loader
(LILO, loadlin etc.); all these boot loaders only need BIOS routines to load data
from the boot medium. If the boot loader is able to load the kernel, then it can
also load the initial ramdisk. Special drivers are not required.
12.4.2
The Order of the Booting Process with initrd
The boot loader loads the kernel and the initrd to memory and starts the kernel.
The boot loader informs the kernel that an initrd exists and where it is located
in memory.
If the initrd was compressed (which is typically the case), then the kernel
de-compresses the initrd and mounts it as a temporary root file system. A
290
12.4
Booting with the “initial ramdisk”
program called linuxrc is started on this in the initrd. This program can now do
all the things necessary to be able to mount the proper root file system. As soon
as linuxrc finishes, the (temporary) initrd is unmounted and the boot process
continues as normal, with the mounting of the proper root file system. Mounting
the initrd and running linuxrc can thus be seen as a short interlude during a
normal boot process.
If the initrd cannot be unmounted (which is normally regarded as an error),
the kernel will try and re-mount initrd to the directory /initrd. If the mount
point /initrd does not exist, an error message will be displayed. In such a case
the system is fully functional, but the memory occupied by initrd cannot be
released at all and is no longer available.
linuxrc
These are the only requirements for the program linuxrc in the initrd; it must
have the special name linuxrc and it must be located in the root directory of
the initrd. Apart from this, it only needs to be executable by the kernel. This
means that linuxrc may be dynamically linked; in this case, the “shared libraries”
in /lib must be completely available in initrd. linuxrc can also be a shell
script. For this to work, a Shell must exist in /bin. In short, initrd must
contain a minimal Linux system, which allows the program linuxrc to be carried
out. When SuSE Linux is installed, a statically linked linuxrc is used, to be able
to keep initrd as small as possible (space on boot disks is very limited). linuxrc
is carried out with ‘root’ permissions.
The Real Root File System
As soon as linuxrc terminates, initrd is unmounted and discarded, the boot
process carries on as normal and the kernel mounts the real file system. What is
to be mounted as the root file system can be influenced by linuxrc. It just needs
to mount the /proc file system and write the value of the real root file system in
numerical form to /proc/sys/kernel/real-root-dev.
12.4.3
Boot Loaders
Most boot loaders (above all, LILO, loadlin and syslinux) can handle initrd.
Individual boot loaders are given instructions on how to use initrd as follows:
1. LILO
Enter the following line in /etc/lilo.conf:
initrd=/boot/initdisk.gz
The file /boot/initdisk.gz is the initial ramdisk. It can be, but doesn’t
have to be, compressed.
291
12
Special Features of SuSE Linux
2. loadlin.exe
call up with:
C:> loadlin <kernelimage> initrd=C:\loadlin\initdisk.gz <parameter>
3. syslinux
Enter the following line in syslinux.cfg:
append initrd=initdisk.gz <further parameters>
12.4.4
Using initrd in SuSE
Installing the System
The initrd has already been used for some time for the installation: here the
user can load modules and make the entries necessary for an installation (above
all, for the source medium). Linuxrc then starts YaST, which carries out the
installation. When YaST has finished, it tells linuxrc where the root file system
of the freshly installed system is located. linuxrc writes this value to /proc,
terminates, and informes the kernel to continue booting into the newly installed
system.
For an installation of SuSE Linux you are thus, from the very beginning, booting
the system which is just being installed – somehow, quite clever. A real re-boot
after installation only takes place if the kernel does not match with the modules
which were installed in the system. Since SuSE Linux only uses a kernel for
uni-processor systems, this will only happen if an SMP kernel was installed in
the system with the corresponding modules. For this reason, an SMP kernel
newly installed in the system must be rebooted, in order for it to be able to use
all modules.
Booting the Installed System
In the past, YaST has provided more than 40 kernels for installing in the system,
whereby the only basic difference in the kernels was that each of them contained
a specific SCSI driver. This was necessary to be able to mount the root file system
after booting. Further drivers could then be loaded afterwards as modules.
Because optimized kernels are now available, this concept is no longer feasible
– by now, over 100 kernel-images would be needed.
This is why an initrd is used now, even to start the system normally. The way
it is used is similar to that for an installation. The linuxrc used here, however, is
simply a shell script which just has the task of loading a given module. Typically,
this is just one single module, namely the very SCSI driver which is needed to
access the root file system.
292
12.4
Booting with the “initial ramdisk”
Creating an initrd
An initrd is created by means of the script mk_initrd. In SuSE Linux,
the modules to be loaded are specified by the variable INITRD_MODULES in
/etc/rc.config. After installation this variable is automatically occupied by
the correct values (the installation linuxrc knows which modules were loaded).
Here it should be mentioned that the modules were loaded in exactly the same
order in which they appear in INITRD_MODULES. This is especially important if
a number of SCSI drivers are used, since otherwise the names of the hard disks
would change. Strictly speaking, it would be sufficient just to load those drivers
needed to access the root file system, because the automatic loading of additional SCSI drivers may cause problems (how should it be “triggered”, if hard
disks hang on the second SCSI adapter), we load all SCSI drivers needed at the
installation, by means of initrd.
The current mk_initrd checks if a SCSI driver is needed for the root file system.
If you run mk_initrd on a system where / is to be found on EIDE hard disks,
an initrd is not needed as the kernel used for SuSE Linux already contains the
EIDE driver. As there are more and more special EIDE controllers coming onto
the market, in the future it will probably be necessary in such cases to use an
initrd to boot the installed system.
Note
Because the loading of the initrd with the boot loader runs in just the
same way as loading the kernel itself (LILO notices in its map file the location
of the files), LILO must be re-installed after every change in initrd! Thus
after every mk_initrd, a lilo is also necessary.
12.4.5
Possible Difficulties – Self-Compiled Kernels
A self–compiled kernel can often lead to the following problems: out of habit
the SCSI driver is hard-linked to the kernel, but the existing initrd remains
unchanged. When you boot, the following occurs: the kernel already contains
the SCSI driver, the hardware is detected. initrd however now tries to load the
driver again as a module; with some SCSI drivers (especially with the aic7xxx),
this leads to the system blocking. Strictly speaking, this is a kernel error (an
already existing driver should not be allowed to be loaded again as a module).
The problem is already known from another context, however (serial drivers).
There are several solutions to the problem: either configure the driver as a module (then it will be correctly loaded in the initrd) or remove the entry for
initrd from the file /etc/lilo.conf. An equivalent to the latter solution
is to remove the variable INITRD_MODULES and then run mk_initrd, which
then realizes that no initrd is needed.
293
12
Special Features of SuSE Linux
12.4.6
Prospects
It is quite possible in the future that an initrd will be used for many more and
much more sophisticated things than loading modules needed for access to /.
• “High end” EIDE drivers
• Root file system on RAID software (linuxrc sets up the md devices)
• Root file system on the LVM
• Root file system is encrypted (linuxrc asks for the password)
• Root file system on a SCSI hard disk on a PCMCIA adapter.
Further Information
/usr/src/linux/Documentation/ramdisk.txt
/usr/src/linux/Documentation/initrd.txt
manpage for initrd (man 4 initrd).
12.5
linuxrc
linuxrc is started during the boot up of the kernel, usually as a prelude to a Linux
system installation, before the “real” booting commences (the kernel must first
be properly configured, of course). This allows you to boot a small, modularized
kernel and to load the few drivers you may need as modules, from a floppy disk
– in an emergency even from a second disk (modules).
linuxrc is your assistant for loading all relevant hardware drivers. You can also
use linuxrc as a boot disk for an already installed system, for example, as a rescue
disk. You can even start a totally independent RAM disk based rescue system,
for example, if something serious should happen to your hard disk or you have
simply forgotten your ‘root’ password. More about this below, in Section 12.6
page 299.
Main Menu
After you have selected the language, screen and keyboard, you find yourself in
linuxrc’s main menu (see Figure 2.3 page 12). Start an installation with ‘Start
installation / system’. Whether you can go there directly depends mainly
on your hardware.
If all components that are needed for installation have already been recognized
by the kernel, you do not need to load additional drivers. This mainly applies
to machines that only have (E)IDE adapters (and only (E)IDE hard disks and
CD-ROM as well).
294
12.5
linuxrc
If there is a SCSI adapter installed which is needed for installation,1 you have to
load the corresponding SCSI module. The same applies if you want to install via
an existing network. Here, the appropriate module has to be loaded first.
Furthermore, there are a lot of older CD-ROMs that are driven by proprietary
controllers and which, therefore, need their own kernel modules. If PCMCIA
devices are connected to a laptop, you need these modules as well.
System Information
If you are not sure about your hardware, the boot messages might help you.
In ‘System information’ (Figure 12.1) you can check a number of other
things, besides kernel messages, such as the I/O-addresses of PCI cards or the
size of the main memory recognized by Linux.
You can check some system information in ‘System information’. Here, you
can check the used interrupts, I/O ports used, main memory and recognized PCI
devices as detected by Linux.
Figure 12.1: System information
The next lines show how a hard disk and a CD-ROM connected to an (E)IDE
controller announce their start. In this case, you do not need to load additional
modules:
hda: ST32140A, 2015MB w/128kB Cache, LBA, CHS=1023/64/63
hdb: CD-ROM CDR-S1G, ATAPI CD-ROM drive
Partition check:
hda: hda1 hda2 hda3 < hda5 >
If you booted a kernel that already has a SCSI driver compiled, you do not need
this SCSI driver as a module as well. Quite typical announcements when loading
SCSI adapters and connected devices might look like this:
1 An
adapter with only a scanner connected to it is not required at boot time.
295
12
Special Features of SuSE Linux
scsi : 1 host.
Started kswapd v 1.4.2.2
scsi0 : target 0 accepting period 100ns offset 8 10.00MHz FAST SCSI-II
scsi0 : setting target 0 to period 100ns offset 8 10.00MHz FAST SCSI-II
Vendor: QUANTUM
Model: VP32210
Rev: 81H8
Type:
Direct-Access
ANSI SCSI revision: 02
Detected scsi disk sda at scsi0, channel 0, id 0, lun 0
scsi0 : target 2 accepting period 236ns offset 8 4.23MHz synchronous SCSI
scsi0 : setting target 2 to period 248ns offset 8 4.03MHz synchronous SCSI
Vendor: TOSHIBA
Model: CD-ROM XM-3401TA Rev: 0283
Type:
CD-ROM
ANSI SCSI revision: 02
scsi : detected 1 SCSI disk total.
SCSI device sda: hdwr sector= 512 bytes. Sectors= 4308352 [2103 MB] [2.1 GB]
Partition check:
sda: sda1 sda2 sda3 sda4 < sda5 sda6 sda7 sda8 >
Loading Modules
You select which kinds of modules you need. If you booted via disk, the corresponding data has to be read by linuxrc and displayed in a list.
If you have booted from CD or from DOS (via loadlin), these modules are already
set in linuxrc. This saves tedious loading, but it needs additional memory. If your
machine has less than 8 MB of RAM, you have to boot from disk.
Figure 12.2: Load modules
linuxrc offers you a list of available drivers. On the left, there is the name of the
module and, on the right, a short description of its usage.
For some components, there are a variety of drivers to choose from (even newer
alpha-code drivers).
Passing on Parameters
When
you have found a suitable driver, move to it with the cursor and press
. Now there is a dialog box where you can add additional parameters for this
←- module. More on module parameters can be found in Section 10.3.4 page 255.
296
12.5
linuxrc
Figure 12.3: Selection of SCSI drivers
Figure 12.4: Entering parameters for a module to be loaded
We would like to point out that, in contrast to the LILO prompt, parameters for
the same module have to be separated by blanks.
In most cases, it is not necessary to specify the hardware in detail. Most drivers
find their components automatically. Most network cards and
CD proprietary
ROM drives, however, need parameters. If in doubt, just try ←- .
Recognizing and initializing
hardware can take some time. Switching to
certain
virtual console #4 (Alt + F4 ) lets you watch the kernel messages while loading.
SCSI drivers need a while, as they have to wait for each device to load.
The messages are displayed by linuxrc so you can verify that everything ran
smoothly. If it fails, the messages might give you a hint as to why it failed.
297
12
Special Features of SuSE Linux
Start Installation / System
Once you have set up hardware support via modules, you can switch to the
‘Start installation / system’ menu.
Figure 12.5: the linuxrc ‘Start’ menu
From here (Figure 12.5) a number of procedures can be started: ‘Start installation’ (from this item an update is also started), ‘Boot installed
system’ (the root partition must be known), ‘Start rescue system’ (refer
to Section 12.6 on the facing page) and ‘Eject CD’.
‘Start Live-CD’ is only available if you booted a “LiveEval-CD” You may
download ISO images from the ftp server (live-eval-<VERSION>):
ftp://ftp.suse.com/pub/suse/i386/
Tip
The item ‘Start live-CD’ can be of great use if, for example, you want to
test, without actually installing, if the computer in question or the Notebook
you might want to buy, is at all compatible with SuSE Linux – such a test
ought to be possible in every modern PC shop, without any trouble!
For the installation (Figure 12.6 on the next page) you can choose various sources
for the installation and similarly for the rescue system (see Figure 12.6 on the
facing page).
298
12.6
The SuSE Rescue System
Figure 12.6: Selection of source media in linuxrc
12.6
The SuSE Rescue System
SuSE Linux contains several Linux rescue systems. With their help, you can
reach your Linux partitions on the hard disks in emergencies again “from the
outside”: a boot disk or the “Rescue” System, that you can load from disk, CD,
the network, or the SuSE FTP server. There is also a bootable SuSE Linux CD
(the “LiveEval-CD”) which can be used a rescue system.
Furthermore, the rescue system includes several help programs with which you
can remedy large problems with inaccessible hard disks, misconfigured configuration files, etc.
Tip
Always invest some of your time in a boot and rescue disk, since the slight
effort for creating and maintaining the disk is negligible in comparison to the
time wasted and work involved when, in the case of emergency, you cannot
access your system or your CD-ROM drive.
12.6.1
Preparations
For setting up your rescue system, you need two disks free of errors: one as
future boot disk and the other for the compressed image of a small root file
system. The image file bootdisk for booting the system and the file rescue
for the Root file system can be found on the first CD inthe /disks directory.
There are three ways to set up the root file system on the disk:
299
12
Special Features of SuSE Linux
• with YaST
• in a console using Linux commands
earth: # /sbin/badblocks -v /dev/fd0 1440
earth: # dd if=/media/cdrom/disks/rescue of=/dev/fd0 bs=18k
• at the DOS prompt (where the CD-ROM drive is Q:)
Q:\> cd \dosutils\rawrite
Q:\dosutils\rawrite> rawrite.exe
The rescue disk is based on, as of Version 7.2, libc5 (SuSE Linux 5.3), since it is
possible in this SuSE Linux version to save some programs such as Editor, fdisk
or e2fsck to a disk.
Note
The rescue disk cannot be mounted, since it is not a file system: But only
contains the compressed images of one. If you wish to read the file system,
then read the following paragraph.
If you want to read the image, you will need to de compress the image file and
then mount the de compressed image as user ‘root’. If your Linux kernel
support the loop device, the procedure is as follows:
earth: # cp /media/cdrom/disks/rescue /root/rescue.gz
earth: # gunzip /root/rescue.gz
earth: # mount -t ext2 -o loop /root/rescue /mnt
12.6.2
Starting the Rescue System
The rescue system is launched using the SuSE boot disk or from your boot-able
SuSE Linux CD 1. It is required that the disk and CD-ROM drives are bootable; if necessary, you will need to change the boot series in the CMOS set-up.
Following are the steps for starting the rescue system:
1. Start your system with the SuSE boot disk and with the first SuSE-Linux CD
inserted in your CD-ROM drive.
2. You can launch the entire system or at the boot prompt either enter yast or
manual, where you can define which kernel modules should be loaded.
3. Make the respective settings for language, keyboard and screen.
4. Select the item ‘Installation/Start system’ in the main menu.
5. If you started with the boot disk, you should now insert the installation-CD
or the rescue disk with the compressed image of the rescue system.
6. In the menu ‘Start installation/system’ select the item ‘Start rescue system’ (see Figure 2.4 page 13) and then specify the desired source
medium (Figure 12.7 on the facing page, page 301).
Subsequently, we will introduce a few tips on selection options:
300
12.6
The SuSE Rescue System
Figure 12.7: Source medium for the rescue system
‘CD-ROM’: When loading the rescue system, the path /cdrom is exported.
This makes the Installation from this CD possible.
Note
You now still need to enter the required values in SuSEconfig (Section 13.5 page 314 pp.).
‘Network (NFS)’: To start the rescue system via NFS from the network,
you have to have the driver for your network card already installed; refer
also to the general tips in Section 2.3.1 page 28) .
‘Network (FTP)’: To start the rescue system via FTP from the network,
you have to have your network card driver ready!
‘hard disk’: Load the rescue system from the hard disk.
‘Floppy Disk’: The rescue system can also be started from the floppy
disk; especially if the computer only has a small amount of working memory.
Regardless of which medium you have chosen, the rescue system will be decompressed, loaded onto a RAM floppy disk as a new root file system, mounted and
started. Now it is ready for use.
12.6.3
Working with the Rescue System
Therescue system provides three virtual consoles on
+ F1 to Alt +
Alt
keys
F3
.
Here
‘root’
may
log
in
without
a
password.
Alt
+
F4
brings
you
to
the
system console where you can view the kernel and syslog messages.
A shell and lots of other useful utilities (net tools), such as the mount program,
can be found in the /bin directory. In sbin you can find important file and
network utilities for reviewing and repairing the file system (e.g. e2fsck).
301
12
Special Features of SuSE Linux
Furthermore, this directory contains the most important binaries for system maintenance, such as fdisk, mkfs, mkswap, mount, mount, init, shutdown, as well as
ifconfig, route, and netstat for maintaining the network.
An editor, vi, is located in /usr/bin. Also, tools like grep, find, less, etc., along
with telnet are available.
Accessing Your Normal System
To mount your SuSE Linux system using the rescue system, you should use the
mount point /mnt. You can also use or create another directory.
As an example, let’s assume that your normal system is put together according
to the /etc/fstab shown in the example file 12.6.1.
/dev/sdb5
/dev/sdb3
/dev/sdb6
swap
/
/usr
swap
ext2
ext2
defaults
defaults
defaults
0
1
1
0
1
2
File contents 12.6.1: Example /etc/fstab
Caution
Pay attention to the order of steps outlined in the following section for mounting the various devices.
To be able to access you entire system, mount it step by step in the /mnt directory
using the following commands:
earth:/ # mount /dev/sdb3 /mnt
earth:/ # mount /dev/sdb6 /mnt/usr
Now you can access your entire system and, e. g., correct mistakes in configuration files such as /etc/fstab, /etc/passwd, and /etc/inittab. The configuration files are now located in the /mnt/etc directory, instead of in /etc.
To recover even completely lost partitions with the fdisk program by simply setting it up again, determine where on the hard disk the partitions were previously
located, make a hardcopy print-out of the /etc/fstab directory as well as the
output of the command
earth: # fdisk -l /dev/<disk>
Instead of the <disk> variable, you should insert, in order, the device names of
your hard disks, i.e. hda.
Damaged file systems are tricky problems for the rescue system. This could happen after an unscheduled shutdown caused by power
failure or a system crash. Generally, file systems cannot be repaired on a running system. If you encounter really severe problems, you may not even be able
to mount your root file system and have the system boot end up in a "kernel
Repairing File Systems
302
12.7
Virtual Consoles
panic". Here, the only chance is to repair the system from the “outside” using
a rescue system.
The SuSE Linux rescue system contains the utilities e2fsck and dumpe2fs (for
diagnosis). These should remedy most problems.
In an emergency, manpages often are not available. That is why we have included
them in this manual in Appendix A page 327.
Example:
If mounting a file system fails due to an invalid superblock, then the e2fsck
program would most probably fail too. If this were the case, your superblock
may be corrupted too. There are copies of the superblock located every 8192
blocks (8193, 16385, . . . ). If your superblock got corrupted, you can try one of
the copies instead. This is accomplished by entering the command:
earth: # e2fsck -f -b 8193 /dev/damaged_partition
The -f option forces the file system check and overrides e2fsck’s error so that –
since the superblock copy is intact – everything is fine.
12.7
Virtual Consoles
Linux is a multi-user and multi-tasking system. You will learn to appreciate the
advantages of these features, even on a standalone PC system.
In text mode, there
consoles
are
sixvirtual
available. You can switch between
them by using Alt +F1 to Alt + F6 . The seventh console is reserved for
X11.2
If you
X11
want
to
switch
toa console
from
without
leaving
X11, you should
use Ctrl + Alt + F1 to Ctrl + Alt + F6 . Alt + F7 brings you back to
X11.
12.8
Keyboard Layout
In order to standardize the keyboard mapping of programs, changes were made
to the following files:
/usr/X11R6/lib/X11/Xmodmap
/etc/inputrc
/etc/skel/.exrc
/etc/skel/.less
/etc/skel/.lesskey
/etc/csh.cshrc
/etc/termcap
/usr/lib/terminfo/x/xterm
/usr/lib/X11/app-defaults/XTerm
/usr/share/emacs/20.7/site-lisp/term/*.el
/usr/lib/joerc
2 You
can assign more consoles via /etc/inittab.
303
12
Special Features of SuSE Linux
These changes only affect applications that make use of terminfo entries or
whose configuration files are changed directly (vi, less, etc.). Other non-SuSE
applications should be adjusted to these defaults.
304
12.9
12.9
Local Adjustments
Local Adjustments
SuSE Linux is to a very large extent internationalized and can be adjusted flexibly to local events; in other words, internationalization (“I18N”) allows specific
localizations (“L10N”). The abbreviations I18N and L10N are derived from the
first and last letters of the words, and in between, the number of letters omitted.
Settings are made via LC_ variables, which are defined in the file /etc/rc.
config. This is less to do with “native language support”, and more to do with
the categories for News (Language), Character Set, Sort Order, Time and Date,
Numbers and Money. Each of these categories can be defined directly via its
own variable, or indirectly via an overlying variable in the file rc.config (see
manpage for locale (man 5 locale)):
1. RC_LC_MESSAGES, RC_LC_CTYPE, RC_LC_COLLATE, RC_LC_TIME,
RC_LC_NUMERIC, RC_LC_MONETARY: These variables are passed on to the
shell without the RC_ prefix and determine the above categories; the files
concerned are listed below. DEFAULT_LANGUAGE is not exported.
The current setting can be shown with the command locale.
2. RC_LC_ALL: This variable overwrites the values of the variables mentioned
in item 1, if they have been set.
3. RC_LANG: If none of the above variables are set, this is the “fallback”. By
default SuSE Linux only sets RC_LANG; this makes it easier for the user to
enter his own values.
4. ROOT_USES_LANG: A yes/no variable. If it is set to no, then ‘root’ always
works in the POSIX environment.
5. DEFAULT_LANGUAGE: This variable has two functions. It defines the language in which YaST is started, and at the same time is the fallback if
RC_LANG is not set. It is set by YaST, depending on the language chosen in the language selection menu. In order to avoid any misunderstanding: DEFAULT_LANGUAGE is not passed on to the shell by SuSEconfig as
LANGUAGE, but the value of this variable is only used to set LANG, if it is
required.
DEFAULT_LANGUAGE can be influenced by YaST via the item ‘Select language’; see Section 3.3.1 page 47. The other variables can be set via the
rc.config editor; see Section 3.6.14 page 87.
The value of such a variable is put together from the “language code”, “country
code”, “encoding” and “modifier”. Individual details are connected by special
characters:
LANG=<language>[[_<COUNTRY>].Encoding[@Modifier]]
Concrete Examples:
LANG=de_DE.ISO-8859-15
This is how the German language is defined with the character set ISO-8859-15;
this character set contains the Euro character, but the default currency here is
DM.
305
12
Special Features of SuSE Linux
And an example for setting an option:
[email protected]
You should also use the language and country codes together. Language settings
follow the standard, ISO 639 (http://www.indigo.ie/egt/standards/
iso639/iso639-1-en.html), country codes are listed in ISO 3166
(http://www.din.de/gremien/nas/nabd/iso3166ma/codlstp1/en_
listp1.html. This only makes sense, however, if just those values are chosen
for which usable description files can be found in /usr/lib/locale. Further
description files can be created, using the command localedef, from the files
in /usr/share/i18n. A description file for [email protected] is thus
created with:
earth:~ # localedef -i [email protected] -f UTF-8 [email protected]
SuSEconfig reads the variables in /etc/rc.config and writes the necessary
changes to /etc/SuSEconfig/profile and /etc/SuSEconfig/csh.cshrc.
/etc/SuSEconfig/profile is read by /etc/profile and /etc/SuSEconfig/
csh.cshrc by /etc/csh.cshrc. This makes the settings available systemwide.
The users can override the system settings by editing ~/.bashrc. So, if the
system settings are set to en_US, the user can e. g.switch to german system messages:
LC_MESSAGES=de_DE
12.9.1
Settings for Language Support
It should be pointed out that the files in the category Messages are as a rule only
stored in the language directory (e. g.de) in order to have a fallback. If you set
LANG to de_AT and the “message” file in /usr/share/locale/de_AT/LC_
MESSAGES does not exist, it will fall back to /usr/share/locale/de/LC_
MESSAGES.
A fallback chain can also be defined; e. g.for Breton → French or for Galician
→ Spanish → Portuguese:
LC_MESSAGES="br_FR:fr_FR"
LC_MESSAGES="gl_ES:es_ES:pt_PT"
Possible Problems
• The thousand point is not recognized. LANG is probably set to de. Since the
description which the glibc uses is located in /usr/share/locale/de_
DE/LC_NUMERIC, LC_NUMERIC for example must be set to de_DE.
Further Information:
• English-Howto file:/usr/share/doc/howto/en/html/English-HOWTO.
html
306
12.9
Local Adjustments
• Markus Kuhn, UTF-8 and Unicode FAQ for Unix/Linux, currently at: http:
//www.cl.cam.ac.uk/~mgk25/unicode.html.
• Unicode-Howto by Bruno Haible file:/usr/share/doc/howto/en/html/
Unicode-HOWTO.html.
307
12
308
Special Features of SuSE Linux
13
The SuSE Linux Boot Concept
13 The SuSE Linux Boot Concept
Booting and initializing a UNIX system can challenge even an experienced system administrator. This chapter gives you a short overview of the SuSE Linux
boot concept. The implementation at hand transcribes the System Initialization
section of the LSB outline (Version 0.3); refer to Section 12.1.2 page 287 for
more information on LSB.
The simple words "Uncompressing Linux..." signal that the kernel is taking control over your hardware. It checks and sets your console – or more precisely: the BIOS registers of graphics cards and output format – to read BIOS
settings and to initialize basic hardware interfaces. Next, your drivers “probe”
existing hardware and initialize it accordingly. After checking the partitions and
mounting the root file system, the kernel starts init which “boots up” (Unix jargon) the main system with all its programs and configurations. The kernel will
control the entire system, including hardware access and the CPU time programs
may use.
13.1
The init Program
The program init is responsible for correctly initializing all system processes.
Thus, it is the father of all processes in the entire system.
init takes a special role: init is started directly by the kernel and resists signal 9,
which normally enables you to kill processes. All further programs are either
started directly by init or by one of its “child” processes.
init is centrally configured via the /etc/inittab file. Here, the “runlevels”
are defined (more about runlevels in the next section). It also specifies which
services and daemons are available in each of the levels.
Depending on the entries in /etc/inittab, several scripts are invoked by init
which, for reasons of clarity, all reside in the directory /etc/init.d.
The entire process of starting up the system (and shutting down, as well) is maintained by init. From this point of view, the kernel can be considered a “background process” whose task it is to maintain all other processes and to adjust
CPU time and hardware access according to requests from other programs.
13.2
Runlevels
In Linux, runlevels define how the system is going to be started up. After booting, the system starts as defined in /etc/inittab in the line initdefault.
309
13
The SuSE Linux Boot Concept
Usually this is 3 or 5(see Table 13.1).An alternative to this is assigning a special
runlevel at boot time (e. g., at the LILO prompt): the kernel passes any parameters
which it doesn’t need directly to init.
To change runlevels while the system is running, you can just enter init with the
appropriate number. Only the super user is allowed to do this:
[email protected]:/ > init 1
brings you to single user mode which is used for the maintenance and administration of your system. After finishing work in S mode, the system administrator
can change the runlevel to 3 again by typing:
[email protected]:/ > init 3
Now all essential programs are started and users can log in and work with the
system. Table 13.1 below gives you an overview of available runlevels. Runlevel
2 should not be used on a system whose /usr partition is mounted via NFS:
Runlevel
0
S
1
2
3
4
5
6
Meaning
System halt
Single user mode; from boot prompt with US keyboard layout
Single user mode
Local multi-user without remote network (standard)
Full multi-user with network
Unused
Full multi-user mode with network and xdm
System reboot
Table 13.1: Valid runlevels in Linux
You can halt the system using:
[email protected]:/ > init 0
or cause it to reboot using:
[email protected]:/ > init 6
If you have already installed and configured the X Window System properly
(Section 5 page 121) and want users to log in via a graphical user interface, you
can easily change the runlevel to 5. You should give it a try first by typing:
[email protected]:/ > init 5
to see whether the system works as you expected.
Tip
With a damaged /etc/inittab, you can end up in a system which cannot
be brought up properly. Therefore, be extremely careful while editing /etc/
inittab! To repair the damage, you may try to enter init=/bin/sh at
the LILO boot prompt for directly booting into a shell. This looks like: boot:
linux init=/bin/sh
310
13.3
13.3
Changing Runlevels
Changing Runlevels
Generally, there are a couple of things that happen if you change runlevels. First,
stop scripts of the current runlevel are launched, closing down some programs
which are essential for the current runlevel. Thereafter, start scripts of the new
runlevel are started. Here, in most cases, a number of programs will be started.
To illustrate this, we will show you a change from runlevel 3 to 5:
• The administrator (‘root’) tells init to change runlevels:
[email protected]:/ > init 5
• init now consults its configuration file (/etc/inittab) and realizes that it
should start /etc/init.d/rc with the new runlevel as a parameter.
• Now rc calls all the stop scripts of the current runlevel, but only for those
where there is no start script in the selected new runlevel. In our example,
these are all the scripts which reside in /sbin/init.d/rc3.d (old runlevel
was 3) and which start with a ‘K’. The number following ‘K’ guarantees a
certain order to start, as there are some dependencies which have to be taken
into consideration.
Note
The names of the stop scripts always begin with ‘K’ for kill, and those
for the start scripts with ‘S’ for start.
• The last thing to start are the start scripts of the new runlevel. These are (in
our example) in /sbin/init.d/rc5.d and begin with an ‘S’. The same
procedure regarding the order in which they are started is applied here.
If you want to change to the same runlevel which you are already in, init only
checks /etc/inittab for changes and starts the appropriate steps (e. g., for
starting a getty on another interface).
13.4
Init Scripts
Scripts in /etc/init.d are divided into two sections:
• scripts which are executed directly by init. This only applies while booting
and
shutting
down
the system immediately (power failure or pressing Ctrl + Alt + Del by the user).
• scripts which are started indirectly by init. This happens when the runlevel
is changed. Generally, /etc/init.d/rc is executed here, which guarantees the
correct order of the relevant scripts.
311
13
The SuSE Linux Boot Concept
All scripts are located in /etc/init.d. Scripts for changing the run level are
also found there but are called via symbolic links from one of the subdirectories
/etc/init.d/rc0.d to /etc/init.d/rc6.d. This is just for clarity reasons
and avoids duplicate scripts (e. g., if they are used in several runlevels). Since
every script can be executed as both a start and a stop script, these scripts have
to “understand” the parameters “start” and “stop”. The scripts understand, in
addition, the restart, reload, force-reload und status options; what
these different options mean is elaborated in Table 13.2.
Option
start
stop
restart
reload
force-reload
status
Meaning
Starts service
Stops service
Stops service and restarts if service is already running;
otherwise starts the service over again
Read in configuration of service again without stoppping
and restarting it
Read in configuration of the service again if the support
supports this; in this way different than restart
show current status
Table 13.2: Overview of init script options
After leaving runlevel 3, /etc/init.d/rc3.d/K40network will be called up;
/etc/init.d/rc calls up the /etc/init.d/network script by means of the
stop parameter. After entering runlevel 5, the same script will be started, this
time, however, with the start parameter.
Links in these runlevel-specific subdirectories simply serve to allocate the scripts
to a certain runlevel.
Adding and removing the required links is done by the program insserv (or by
the link /usr/lib/lsb/install_initd) when installing and uninstalling the
package; refer to manpage for insserv (man 8 insserv)
Below, we give you a short introduction to the boot and stop scripts that are
launched first (or last, respectively) as well as an explanation of the maintaining
script.
• boot
Executed while starting the system directly using init. It is independent of the
chosen runlevel and is only executed once. Here, file systems are checked,
the kernel daemon is launched, some unnecessary files in /var/lock are
deleted and the network is configured for the loopback device (if it has been
selected in /etc/rc.config). Furthermore, the system time is set up with
the isapnp tools and Plug and Play hardware configured (refer to Section 6.2
page 170). .
If an error occurs while automatically checking and repairing the file system,
the system administrator can intervene after first entering the root password.
312
13.4
Init Scripts
The directory /etc/init.d/boot.d is assigned to this script. Every script,
whose name starts with an ‘S’ in this directory is executed while the system
is booted. This is the right place for your own personal extensions, which
should be executed only once.
Last to be executed is the script boot.local.
• boot.local
Here, you can enter additional commands to be executed at boot time before
changing into a runlevel. It can be compared to AUTOEXEC.BAT on DOS
systems.
• boot.setup
General settings that have to be performed while changing from single user
mode to another runlevel.
Here, keyboard maps are loaded and the kernel daemon is started, which
loads modules automatically.
• halt
This script is only executed while changing into runlevel 0 or 6. Here, it is
executed either as halt or as reboot. Whether the system shuts down or
reboots depends on how halt is called.
• rc
This script is of overriding importance whenever runlevels are changed. It
calls the appropriate stop scripts of the current runlevel and the start scripts
of the newly selected runlevel.
With this concept in mind, you can create your own scripts. A skeleton has
been prepared in /etc/init.d/skeleton. The exact format is described in
the LSB outline; this defines specifically the order of steps and in which levels
the script has to be processed.
You may add your own scripts to this skeleton very easily. A template may be
found in /etc/init.d/skeleton. To enable a script via /etc/rc.config,
it is recommended that you create a <START_> variable in this file. Additional
parameters should only be added if really needed (refer to the /etc/init.d/
gpm script for reference).
Now you need to create the links in the corresponding rc?.d to your script to
make sure it is launched when you change runlevels (see above Section 13.3
page 311 for script names, etc.). The manpage for init.d (man 7 init.d)
gives you all the necessary technical background.
Caution
Please handle these scripts with the utmost care! A faulty script may hang
your machine! See Section 13.2 page 309 if all else fails. . .
313
13
The SuSE Linux Boot Concept
13.5
/etc/rc.config and SuSEconfig
Practically the entire configuration of SuSE Linux can be done via a central configuration file called /etc/rc.config. Here, a couple of environment variables
are set which are (among others) checked by the init scripts. Each of the scripts
in /etc/init.d executes /etc/rc.config as a first step, in order to read the
values of those variables which apply to it.
Note
From SuSE Linux 6.0 packages with extensive adjustment options store
their variables in individual files in the directory /etc/rc.config.d; this
is the case, for example, with the package sendmail or the package i4l
(ISDN).
To simplify things, however, we will usually just mention /etc/rc.config,
even if the file has been moved somewhere else!
Moreover, a large number of configuration files can be generated from /etc/
rc.config. This is the task of /sbin/SuSEconfig. If you change the network
configuration, for example, the file /etc/host.conf will be regenerated, as it
is dependent on the configuration you have made.
So, if you change /etc/rc.config manually, you should invoke
/sbin/SuSEconfig afterwards to make sure all changes to the appropriate configuration files are made at the correct places. If you change the configuration with
YaST, you don’t have to bother. YaST automatically executes /sbin/SuSEconfig
and updates your configuration files.
This concept enables you to make basic changes to your configuration without
having to reboot the system. Since some changes are rather complex, some programs probably have to be restarted in order for the changes to take effect. This
procedure is explained more fully in network configuration, where these programs are forced to be restarted using the commands:
earth:~ # rcnetwork stop
earth:~ # rcnetwork start
As you can see, you can easily start and stop init scripts by hand.
Generally, we recommend the following steps for configuring your system:
• Bring the system into single user mode (Runlevel 1):
earth:~ # init 1
• Change the configuration file /etc/rc.config as needed. This can be done
using an editor of your choice or with YaST in ‘Changing configuration file’ (see Section 13.6 on the next page).
• Execute /sbin/SuSEconfig to make the changes take effect. If you have
changed /etc/rc.config via YaST, this is done automatically.
314
13.6
The Variables in /etc/rc.config
– System Configuration
• Bring your system back to the previous runlevel:
[email protected]:~ > init 3
This procedure is mainly relevant if you have changed system-wide settings
(such as network configuration). It is not necessary to go into single user mode
for small changes, but it ensures that all relevant programs are correctly restarted.
Tip
To categorically disable the automatic configuration of SuSEconfig you
need to set the variable <ENABLE_SUSECONFIG> in /etc/rc.config
(please note Section 13.6). By using selected rc.config variables, you
may partially disable the auto configuration.
13.6
The Variables in /etc/rc.config
In this section, we describe all the parameters of the system, including their default settings. If you don’t use YaST to change /etc/rc.config, make sure
you set “empty” parameters as two quotation marks (e. g., KEYTABLE="") and
that you surround parameters that contain a blank with quotation marks (parameters consisting of only one word do not have to be quoted). In our description,
each parameter is given a value in order to make its settings as clear as possible:
Basic Settings
• ENABLE_SUSECONFIG=yes
With this entry you can disable SuSEconfig completely. Please don’t contact
our Installation Support if you have trouble configuring your system after
disabling SuSEconfig ;-)
• MAIL_REPORTS_TO=newbie
SuSEconfig can mail reports (created by YaST or included in packages) to
you. Here you can set the address. If you don’t want this feature, simply set
it to "".
• GMT=-u
If your hardware is set to GMT (Greenwich Mean Time), you should set
this variable to -u.1 Otherwise, leave it empty. This setting is relevant for
automatic switching to summer or winter time.
• TIMEZONE=CET
The time zone where you live and where you operate your computer. This
setting is also relevant for automatic switching to summer or winter time.
1 -u
is an abbreviation for universal time.
315
13
The SuSE Linux Boot Concept
• DEFAULT_LANGUAGE="english"
Set by YaST when changes made using ‘Define language’ setting option
(refer to Section 3.3.1 page 47). This value can also be classified as fallback if
RC_LANG is not set; in this case, the value entered in /usr/share/locale/
locale.alias will be resolved.
• RC_LANG="en_US"
Sets LANG for locale; this way, a default can be set for the local users. This
value is comes in to play as long as no specific RC_LC_* variables are used.
The relevant rc.config variables are as follow: RC_LC_ALL (This can
overwrite LC_* as well as LANG!), RC_LC_MESSAGES, RC_LC_CTYPE,
RC_LC_MONETARY, RC_LC_NUMERIC, RC_LC_TIME und RC_LC_COLLATE.
Refer to Section 12.9 page 305.
• ROOT_USES_LANG="no"
Should local settings also be used for ‘root’?
• ENABLE_SYSRQ="no"
View inside of the kernel. Before implementing it, definitely read /usr/
src/linux/Documentation/sysrq.txt!
Initializing Local Hardware (keyboard, modem,
mouse,PCMCIA, etc.)
• KEYTABLE=de-latin1-nodeadkeys
Defines keymaps.
• KBD_NUMLOCK=no
on/off.
NumLock • KBD_CAPSLOCK=no
on/off.
CapsLock • KBD_TTY="tty1 tty2 tty3 tty4 tty5 tty6"
NumLock and CapsLock can be limited to certain TTYs; "" stands for all
TTYs.
• KBD_RATE=30
Sets the automatic keyboard frequency. Possible values are from twice to 30
times per second. For this change to take effect, keyboard delay has to be set
as well.
• KBD_DELAY=250
This is the delay whereafter automatic repetition of the pressed key commences. This value is in milliseconds but isn’t very accurate. You have to
assign KBD_RATE as well.
• CONSOLE_FONT=mr.fnt
This is the console font. Not all fonts support German umlauts. YaST provides a little window where you can test all fonts and choose the one you like
best. Additional settings are: CONSOLE_SCREENMAP, CONSOLE_UNICODEMAP
and CONSOLE_MAGIC.
316
13.6
The Variables in /etc/rc.config
– System Configuration
• MODEM=/dev/ttyS1
Interface to which the modem is connected. YaST and SuSEconfig, in turn,
create a link from /dev/modem to the device specified.
• MOUSE=/dev/ttyS2
Interface to which the mouse is connected. YaST and SuSEconfig, in turn,
create a link from /dev/mouse to the device specified.
• START_GPM=yes
Set to yes to start mouse console support. This enables you to exchange
text between consoles using the mouse. gpm can cause problems in connection with certain bus mice. If you encounter problems while starting X, you
should disable gpm. The other alternative is to start xdm, since gpm is not
started in runlevel 3.
• GPM_PARAM=" -t logi -m /dev/mouse"
Initialization parameters for gpm. These are normally set via YaST.
• PCMCIA=i82365
This is for assigning the chipset: valid entries are: i82365 and tcic. If the
variable is set to "" the PCMCIA sub-system is not launched. Fine tuning is
achieved via PCMCIA_PCIC_OPTS and PCMCIA_CORE_OPTS
• START_ISAPNP=yes
Initialize ISA P’n’P at boot time.
• INITRD_MODULES="aic7xxx"
The names of the modules which need to be loaded when the kernel is being
booted, for example, to access the hard disk. Useful or necessary entries can
be made during the installation or the update; see Section 12.4 page 290.
• START_KERNELD=yes
This variable determines whether the kernel daemon should be started automatically at boot time. This daemon is responsible for automatically loading
kernel modules on demand. For the current standard kernel 2.2.xx, kerneld is
no longer required. A short description of the module concept and functions
of kerneld can be found in chapter Section 9.2 page 235.
Starting and Configuring Local Network and Other Services
• START_LOOPBACK=yes
Sets up a sort of “mini” network created by configuring the Loopback device.
Since many programs rely on this functionality, it should be set.2
• CHECK_ETC_HOSTS=yes
SuSEconfig can do some checks and modifications to /etc/hosts.
• BEAUTIFY_ETC_HOSTS=no
If /etc/hosts is to be sorted.
2 Your
kernel needs to have been compiled with network support for this to work.
317
13
The SuSE Linux Boot Concept
• SETUPDUMMYDEV=no
Determines whether the dummy network device should be set up: this is
useful for non-permanent network connections (e. g., SLIP or PPP). If you
have an ethernet card, it can be troublesome at times.
• CREATE_HOSTCONF=yes
SuSEconfig can create and check /etc/host.conf.
• NETCONFIG=_0
Specifies how many network cards (or other net devices) are installed. The
text shows an example for one network card (they start with 0). For a system
with two cards installed, it should resemble NETCONFIG="_0 _1". For a
system without networking, it should not be set.
• IPADDR_0=193.141.17.202
IP address of the first networking card.
• NETDEV_0=eth0
Name of the first network device (normally an Ethernet card, therefore, the
example, eth0). Other possible settings are str1 or plip1. If there is
more than one card installed, additional cards are supplied with the variables
NETDEV_1 to NETDEV_3.
• IFCONFIG_0="193.141.17.205 broadcast 193.141.17.255
netmask 255.255.255.192"
Configuration command for the first networking device installed. These settings can easily be assigned using YaST. If you have more than one card
installed, just enter the corresponding values in the appropriate variables.
• CLOSE_CONNECTIONS=false
If this variable is set to true and the system runs in “runlevel” 0 or 6,
/etc/init.d/route sends a SIGTERM to all processes that own an open
“remote tcp” or “udp” connection.
• IP_DYNIP=no
Switch on the “dynamic IP patch” when booting; if yes, the script /etc/
init.d/boot enables this patch via an entry in the /proc file system.
• IP_TCP_SYNCOOKIES=yes
Activate “syn flood protection”.
• IP_FORWARD=no
If the machine should perform forwarding with two network cards,
IP_FORWARD should be set to yes; normally this is preferable, or required,
for a “router” or for “masquerading”. The script /etc/init.d/boot enables “IP forwarding” by means of an entry in the /proc file system.
• FQHOSTNAME=earth.cosmos.com
Fully qualified hostname of your machine; fully qualified means the complete name, consisting of computer name and domain name.
318
13.6
The Variables in /etc/rc.config
– System Configuration
• SEARCHLIST=cosmos.com
This entry is used for completing a not fully qualified hostname. If, for example, you enter venus, a check is made on whether venus.cosmos.com is a
valid address. This variable has to be set if you plan to use DNS! You should
at least enter your domain name here. You can make up to three entries,
which should be separated by blanks.
• NAMESERVER=193.141.17.193
Address of the name server which is to be interrogated if a hostname has to
be transposed to an IP address. You can enter up to three name servers which
should be separated by blanks. If you plan to use a name server, SEARCHLIST
has to be set!
• ORGANIZATION="Gladstone Ganter Inc."
This text appears in every newsposting you send.
• NNTPSERVER=helios
Address of your news server. If you receive your news via UUCP and it is
saved locally, you should enter localhost.
• IRCSERVER=helios
This is the place for your IRC server (Internet Relay Chat). Names of the
servers should be separated by blanks.
• START_INETD=yes
Controls whether the inetd super daemon should be activated. This daemon
reacts to calls from other hosts and starts (depending on the port) the appropriate service. You need it if you want to log in via telnet or rlogin. If you
plan to use xinetd (see Section 21), set this to no.
• START_XINETD=no
Controls whether the xinetd super daemon should be activated (this is an enhanced inetd, see Section 21). If you plan to use this daemon, START_INETD
should be set to no.
• START_POSTFIX=no
Activates the mail server postfix. The relevant variables are
POSTFIX_CREATECF, POSTFIX_RELAYHOST,
POSTFIX_MASQUERADE_DOMAIN and POSTFIX_LOCALDOMAINS.
• SMTP=no
Set to yes if a sendmail daemon should be activated. If you receive your
e-mail exclusively via UUCP, you don’t need it, provided you call sendmail
-q after each polling. (rmail, started by UUCP, just puts mail into a queue
but doesn’t deliver it). If mail spool directories are mounted via NFS (on a
network, for example) and the single host has got only outgoing mail, this
could be set to no as well. The same applies with the use of relay hosts.
• START_PORTMAP=no
Determines whether to start the portmapper or not. You need the portmapper if you plan to use your host as an NFS server. Without this daemon,
rpc.mountd and rpc.nfsd can’t run; this is why the portmapper is started
319
13
The SuSE Linux Boot Concept
when the variable is set to no, but NFS_SERVER is switched on! It is also
necessary for NIS
• NFS_SERVER=no
If the host is going to be used as an NFS server, this variable has to be set to
yes. This initializes the start of rpc.nfsd and rpc.mountd.
• REEXPORT_NFS=no
Set this variable to yes in order to re-export mounted NFS directories or
NetWare volumes.
• NFS_SERVER_UGID=yes
If the daemon (rcp.ugidd) for the conversion of user and group ID’s is to be
started; this variable only takes effect if <NFS_SERVER> is set to yes.
• USE_KERNEL_NFSD="no"
If the package knfsd is installed, the kernel-based NFS daemon can be used.
With this NFS daemon, locking is possible. See the corresponding variable,
USE_KERNEL_NFSD_NUMBER.
• START_AUTOFS=no
This daemon enables you to automatically mount directories, via NFS as
well as local directories, CD-ROM drives, floppy disks and more. The package autofs, series n must be installed and configured.
• START_RWHOD=no
Controls whether rwhod is started. Caution: the rwhod regularly sends “Broadcasts”. If you use “on-demand” connection (ISDN or diald), this may cause
connections to be made, resulting in extra traffic and costs!
• START_ROUTED=no
The route daemon is only necessary for dynamic routes (see the manpage
for routed (man routed)). Caution, this service establishes a connection
every 30 seconds. If the machine is connected to the Internet via dialup (for
example, ISDN), then it makes no sense to set this variable to yes.
• START_NSCD=yes
NSCD Initializing “Name Service Caching Daemon” at boot time.
• START_NAMED=no
This controls whether the name daemon should be activated.
• CREATE_YP_CONF=yes
Set to yes if SuSEconfig should create the necessary files for YP. This depends on the next two entries as well. SuSEconfig also makes the appropriate
changes to /etc/passwd and /etc/group.
• YP_DOMAINNAME=cosmos.com
YP domain name of hosts.
• YP_SERVER=helios.cosmos.com
Name of the NIS server.
320
13.6
The Variables in /etc/rc.config
– System Configuration
• USE_NIS_FOR_RESOLVING=no
Use NIS for resolving host names.
• START_CIPED=no
Start CIPE daemon for an IPIP tunnel.
• START_DHCPD=no
Start server for DHCP Dynamic Host Configuration Protocol. For this the
variables DHCPD_INTERFACE, START_DHCRELAY and DHCRELAY_SERVERS
are used.
• START_LDAP=no
Start LDAP server.
• START_RADIUSD=yes
Start radius accounting and authentication service. This service is used by
some ISPs for authentication of their users. See documentation in /usr/
share/doc/packages/radiusd.
• START_LPD=yes
Start the lpd (“line printer”). Normally needed for printing.
• START_NNTPD=yes
Start nntpd if you want to access news via an NNTP site.
• START_INN=no
Start the INN news server.
• START_ATD=yes
Controls whether the AT daemon is activated. This daemon enables you to
perform tasks periodically. In contrast to the cron daemon, this action is only
performed once.
• START_HTTPD=yes
Controls whether the Apache http daemon should be activated.
• START_HTTPSD=yes
Specifies whether the Apache httpsd (“secure” webserver) with SSL and
PHP3 should be started.
• START_SQUID=no
Controls whether the proxy server squid should be activated.
• DOC_HOST=""
If you want to use the central documentation server which contains the SuSE
help system, enter the name of the host, e. g. "helios.cosmos.com".
• DOC_SERVER=no
You should set this variable to yes on the documentation server. In DOC_ALLOW
(see below) access to http-rman is set. Furthermore the index files for the http
server have been rearranged: http://‘hostname-f‘ instead of http:
//localhost.
321
13
The SuSE Linux Boot Concept
• DOC_ALLOW="LOCAL"
List of machines (as patterns for /etc/hosts.allow) that are allowed to
access the documentation server. This variable is read only if DOC_SERVER is
set to yes. You could also enter a subdomain here (e. g. with ".cosmos.com").
• HTTP_PROXY=""
A couple of programs (e. g. lynx, arena, or wget) are capable of using proxy
sites if this environment variable has been set.
SuSEconfig may set this in /etc/SuSEconfig/* (see SDB file:/usr/
share/doc/sdb/de/html/lynx_proxy.html). Example:
"http://proxy.provider.de:3128/".
• FTP_PROXY=""
FTP proxy. Example: "http://proxy.provider.de:3128/".
• GOPHER_PROXY=""
Gopher proxy. Example: "http://proxy.provider.de:3128/".
• NO_PROXY=""
This enables you to exclude (sub) domains from the proxy.
Example: "www.me.de, do.main, localhost".
• START_HYLAFAX=no
Activates Hylafax. You will have to invoke faxsetup before setting this variable to yes.
• START_SMB=no
Start the samba server; a file and printer server for MS-Windows.
• START_MARSNWE=no
Activates the Novell server emulation.
• START_SSHD=yes
Start the “Secure Shell Daemon”; ensure before starting that a “host key”
exists – see also the documentation in /usr/share/doc/packages/ssh
as well as the manpages.
• START_XNTPD=yes
Controls whether the “Network Time Protocol (NTP) daemon” is activated
(package xntp). It is configured via /etc/ntp.conf. Radio Controlled
Clocks have addresses in the form 127.127.T.U; in which T is the type of
clock and U is the “unit number” which has a range from 0 to 3. Most clocks
use a serial port or a special bus. The device file (Device) is normally only
to the symbolic link /dev/device-U which refers to the actual hardware,
where U has the value of the “unit number”. See also /usr/share/doc/
packages/xntp/html/refclock.htm. Example: You have a radio controlled clock attached to a serial port, you’ll also need the necessary Symlink.
For this see refclock.htm. for the typical DCF77 receiver the “PARSE”
driver is required:
## Type 8 Generic Reference Driver (PARSE)
## Address:
127.127.8.u
## Serial Port: /dev/refclock-u
322
13.6
The Variables in /etc/rc.config
– System Configuration
So, if you choose, by an entry in ntp.conf, the value server 127.127.8.0
you’ll also need the Symlink /dev/refclock-0 to refer to ttySx – where
x represents the serial port on which the Radio controlled clock is attached.
• XNTPD_INITIAL_NTPDATE=""
List of the NTP servers from which the time can be obtained before the local
server is started; e. g."helios.cosmos.com". If a number of servers are
entered, they must be separated by a space. (package xntp). It is configured
via /etc/ntp.conf.
• DISPLAYMANAGER=""
Sets up the login of the machine. This may either be a text console or the X
Window System. Possible entries are: xdm (The standard display manager of
the X Window System), kdm (KDE’s display manager) or "". The latter sets
the login to text console (runlevel 2). This is the default.
• KDM_SHUTDOWN=root
Controls which user is allowed to shutdown the machine via kdm (reboot or
shutdown). Possible values are: root (‘root’), all (every user), none,
and local (it may only be shutdown by users that logged in locally). If this
is set to "", root is the default.
• CONSOLE_SHUTDOWN=reboot
Controls how init should react to Ctrl + Alt + Del . Possible values:
reboot (the machine reboots), halt (the machine shuts down) and ignore
(nothing happens). Default is reboot.
• START_AXNET=no
Applixware server forApplixware .
• START_MYSQL=no
Server for MySQL.
• START_ADABAS=no
Adabas server. The following variables belong to Adabas: DBROOT, DBNAME,
DBUSER and DBCONTROL – see the respective comments in rc.config.
• START_DB2=no
Server for DB2.
• START_ARKEIA=no
Arkeia backup server.
• START_ARGUS=no
Argus server (network monitor).
• ARGUS_INTERFACE=eth0 The interface Argus should listen to.
• ARGUS_LOGFILE="/var/log/argus.log"
The Argus logfile. This file might become quite large!
• CRON=yes
Sets the start and stop of the cron daemon. This daemon lets you start certain
323
13
The SuSE Linux Boot Concept
programs at a given time. It is only started in runlevels 2 and 3. It is highly
recommended that you activate this daemon, especially if your computer is
running all the time. An alternative or replacement is the AT daemon (see
Section 21 page 321).
Note
There are a lot of options which require you to regularly run certain commands and programs. Therefore, the cron daemon should be activated
on every system.
Local Maintenance
• RUN_UPDATEDB=yes
Set this to yes to have the locate database updated once per day via cron. locate is useful for quickly finding files. This tool may be fine tuned by a set of
variables: RUN_UPDATEDB_AS, UPDATEDB_NETPATHS, UPDATEDB_NETUSER,
and UPDATEDB_PRUNEPATHS (see comments in rc.config). – This updating may be carried out shortly after you have booted, if the computer is not
switched on all the time; see Section 12.3.2 page 288.
• REINIT_MANDB=yes
If the manpage data base should be renewed once a day by cron.daily.
• CREATE_INFO_DIR=yes
Set this to yes to have /usr/info/dir created, which serves as a general
index of all info pages. This is useful after installing a package which contains info pages. Keep in mind that perl needs to be installed for this to work.
• CHECK_PERMISSIONS=set
Controls check of file permissions according to /etc/permissions. set
corrects wrong entries, warn warns you, and no deactivates this feature.
• PERMISSION_SECURITY="easy local"
There are three levels of security: /etc/permissions.paranoid, /etc/
permissions.secure and /etc/permissions.easy. You may enter either easy, secure or paranoid. You can also create your own security
levels; e. g. in /etc/permissions.local. Then you may use local to
activate your level.
• RPMDB_BACKUP_DIR=/var/adm/backup/rpmdb
Controls where cron.daily should install its RPM database backup. If you
want to disable this feature, set this variable to "".
• MAX_RPMDB_BACKUPS=5
Maximum number of backup files for the RPM database.
• DELETE_OLD_CORE=yes
Core files are memory images of programs which have been killed due to a
324
13.6
The Variables in /etc/rc.config
– System Configuration
segmentation fault. These images are very useful for debugging purposes. If
this is enabled, a regular search and deletion of old core files is launched.
• MAX_DAYS_FOR_CORE=7
Assigns how old core files should be before they are deleted.
• MAX_DAYS_FOR_LOG_FILES=365
If a log file (mainly in /var/log) reaches a certain size, it will be automatically compressed and archived. ‘root’ is informed via e-mail. This parameter sets how long these files are to be kept on disk before being deleted
automatically. If you set this value to 0, no compressing and no archiving will
be done. Log files are written continuously and can grow to a considerable
size! Compressed log files can be viewed anytime using less.
• MAX_DAYS_IN_TMP=30
Selected directories (see TMP_DIRS_TO_CLEAR below) are checked daily to
see whether they have been accessed during the selected time interval (set in
days). Files which have not been modified will be deleted automatically.
• TMP_DIRS_TO_CLEAR="/tmp /var/tmp"
Enter here all directories which are to be searched for old files
(see MAX_DAYS_IN_TMP=30 above).
• OWNER_TO_KEEP_IN_TMP="root bs"
Files of system users given here should not be deleted, even if they have not
been modified during the time specified.
• CWD_IN_ROOT_PATH=no
The current working current working directory in the path of user ‘root’.
• ROOT_LOGIN_REMOTE=no
If a login for ‘root’ is to be allowed by telnet or rlogin, this variable should
be set to yes. For security aspects concerning this variable, please refer to
page ??.
• SUSEWM_UPDATE=yes
Controls whether SuSEconfig should adapt the system-wide configuration
files according to the installed packages. You may fine tune this feature by
means of the following variables: SUSEWM_WM, SUSEWM_MWM, SUSEWM_XPM,
SUSEWM_ADD and SUSEWM_COMPAT.
325
13
326
The SuSE Linux Boot Concept
A
Manual Page of e2fsck
A Manual Page of e2fsck
E2FSCK(8)
E2FSCK(8)
NAME
e2fsck - check a Linux second extended file system
SYNOPSIS
e2fsck [ -pacnyrdfvstFSV ] [ -b superblock ] [ -B blocksize ] [ -l|-L bad_blocks_file ][ -C fd ] device
DESCRIPTION
e2fsck is used to check a Linux second extended file
system.
device is the special
(e.g /dev/hdXX).
file
corresponding to the device
OPTIONS
-a
This option does the same thing as the -p option.
It is provided for backwards compatibility only; it
is suggested that people use -p option whenever
possible.
-b superblock
Instead of using the normal superblock, use an
alternative superblock specified by superblock.
This option is normally used when the primary
superblock has been corrupted; most file systems
have primary superblocks located at blocks 8193,
16385, etc. If an alternative superblock is specified and the file system is not opened read-only,
e2fsck will make sure that the primary superblock
is updated appropriately upon completion of the
file system check.
-B blocksize
Normally, e2fsck will search for the superblock at
various different block sizes in an attempt to find
the appropriate block size.
This search can be
fooled in some cases. This option forces e2fsck to
only try locating the superblock at a particular
blocksize.
If the superblock is not found, e2fsck
will terminate with a fatal error.
-c
This option causes e2fsck to run the badblocks(8)
program to find any blocks which are bad on the
file system, and then marks them as bad by adding
them to the bad block inode. This option causes
e2fsck to write completion information to the
specified file descriptor so that the progress
327
A Manual Page of e2fsck
of the file system check can be monitored. This
option is typically used by programs which are
running e2fsck. If the file descriptor specified is
0, e2fsck will print a completion bar as it goes
about its business. This requires that e2fsck is
running on a video console or terminal.
-d
Print debugging output
debugging e2fsck).
(useless
unless
you are
-f
Force checking even if the file system seems clean.
-F
Flush the file system device’s buffer caches before
beginning. Only really useful for doing e2fsck
time trials.
-l filename
Add the blocks listed in the file specified by
filename to the list of bad blocks. The format of
this file is the same as the one generated by the
badblocks(8) program.
-L filename
Set the bad blocks list to be the list of blocks
specified by filename. (This option is the same as
the -l option, except the bad blocks list is
cleared before the blocks listed in the file are
added to the bad blocks list.)
-n
Open the file system readonly, and assume an answer
of ‘No’ to all questions. Allows e2fsck to be
used non-interactively. (Note: if the -c, -l, or
-L options are specified in addition to the -n
option, then the file system will be opened readwrite, to permit the bad-blocks list to be updated.
However, no other changes will be made to the
file system.)
-p
Automatically repair ("preen")
without any questions.
the
-r
This option does nothing at all;
only for backwards compatibility.
it
file
is
system
provided
-s This option will byte-swap the file system so
that it is using the normalized, standard byteorder (which is i386 or little endian). If the
file system is already in the standard byte-order,
e2fsck will take no action.
328
-S
This option will byte-swap the file system, regardless of its current byte-order.
-t
Print timing statistics for e2fsck. If this option
is used twice, additional timing statistics are
printed on a pass by pass basis.
-v
Verbose mode.
-V
Print version information and exit.
A
-y
Manual Page of e2fsck
Assume an answer of ‘‘yes’’ to all questions;
allows e2fsck to be used non-interactively.
EXIT CODE
The exit code returned by e2fsck is the sum of the
following conditions:
0
- No errors
1
- File system errors corrected
2
- File system errors corrected, system should
be rebooted if file system was mounted
4
- File system errors left uncorrected
8
- Operational error
16
- Usage or syntax error
128 - Shared library error
SIGNALS
The following signals have the following effect when sent
to e2fsck.
SIGUSR1
This signal causes e2fsck to start displaying a
completion bar. (See discussion of the -C option.)
SIGUSR2
This signal causes e2fsck to stop displaying a completion bar.
REPORTING BUGS
Almost any piece of software will have bugs. If you
manage to find a file system which causes e2fsck to crash,
or which e2fsck is unable to repair, please report it to
the author.
Please include as much information as possible in your bug
report. Ideally, include a complete transcript of the
e2fsck run, so I can see exactly what error messages are
displayed. If you have a writeable file system where the
transcript can be stored, the script(1) program is a handy
way to save the output of e2fsck to a file.
It is also useful to send the output of dumpe2fs(8). If a
specific inode or inodes seems to be giving e2fsck
trouble, try running the debugfs(8) command and send the
output of the stat(1u) command run on the relevant inode(s).
If the inode is a directory, the debugfs dump command
will allow you to extract the contents of the directory
inode, which can sent to me after being first run through
uuencode(1).
Always include the full version string which e2fsck
displays when it is run, so I know which version you are
running.
AUTHOR
This version of
<[email protected]>.
e2fsck
was
written
by
Theodore
Ts’o
SEE ALSO
mke2fs(8), tune2fs(8), dumpe2fs(8), debugfs(8)
E2fsprogs version 4
1.18
November 1999
329
A Manual Page of e2fsck
330
B
The GNU General Public License
B The GNU General Public License
GNU GENERAL PUBLIC LICENSE
Version 2, June 1991
Copyright (C) 1989, 1991 Free Software Foundation, Inc. 675 Mass Ave, Cambridge, MA 02139, USA Everyone is permitted to copy and distribute verbatim
copies of this license document, but changing it is not allowed.
Preamble
The licenses for most software are designed to take away your freedom to share
and change it. By contrast, the GNU General Public License is intended to guarantee your freedom to share and change free software–to make sure the software
is free for all its users. This General Public License applies to most of the Free
Software Foundation’s software and to any other program whose authors commit to using it. (Some other Free Software Foundation software is covered by
the GNU Library General Public License instead.) You can apply it to your
programs, too.
When we speak of free software, we are referring to freedom, not price. Our
General Public Licenses are designed to make sure that you have the freedom
to distribute copies of free software (and charge for this service if you wish),
that you receive source code or can get it if you want it, that you can change the
software or use pieces of it in new free programs; and that you know you can do
these things.
To protect your rights, we need to make restrictions that forbid anyone to deny
you these rights or to ask you to surrender the rights. These restrictions translate
to certain responsibilities for you if you distribute copies of the software, or if
you modify it.
For example, if you distribute copies of such a program, whether gratis or for
a fee, you must give the recipients all the rights that you have. You must make
sure that they, too, receive or can get the source code. And you must show them
these terms so they know their rights.
We protect your rights with two steps: (1) copyright the software, and (2) offer you this license which gives you legal permission to copy, distribute and/or
modify the software.
Also, for each author’s protection and ours, we want to make certain that everyone understands that there is no warranty for this free software. If the software
is modified by someone else and passed on, we want its recipients to know that
what they have is not the original, so that any problems introduced by others will
not reflect on the original authors’ reputations.
331
B The GNU General Public License
Finally, any free program is threatened constantly by software patents. We wish
to avoid the danger that redistributors of a free program will individually obtain
patent licenses, in effect making the program proprietary. To prevent this, we
have made it clear that any patent must be licensed for everyone’s free use or not
licensed at all.
The precise terms and conditions for copying, distribution and modification follow.
GNU GENERAL PUBLIC LICENSE
TERMS AND CONDITIONS FOR COPYING, DISTRIBUTION AND
MODIFICATION
0. This License applies to any program or other work which contains a notice
placed by the copyright holder saying it may be distributed under the terms of
this General Public License. The “Program”, below, refers to any such program or work, and a “work based on the Program” means either the Program
or any derivative work under copyright law: that is to say, a work containing
the Program or a portion of it, either verbatim or with modifications and/or
translated into another language. (Hereinafter, translation is included without
limitation in the term “modification”.) Each licensee is addressed as “you”.
Activities other than copying, distribution and modification are not covered
by this License; they are outside its scope. The act of running the Program is
not restricted, and the output from the Program is covered only if its contents
constitute a work based on the Program (independent of having been made
by running the Program). Whether that is true depends on what the Program
does.
1. You may copy and distribute verbatim copies of the Program’s source code as
you receive it, in any medium, provided that you conspicuously and appropriately publish on each copy an appropriate copyright notice and disclaimer
of warranty; keep intact all the notices that refer to this License and to the
absence of any warranty; and give any other recipients of the Program a copy
of this License along with the Program.
You may charge a fee for the physical act of transferring a copy, and you may
at your option offer warranty protection in exchange for a fee.
2. You may modify your copy or copies of the Program or any portion of it,
thus forming a work based on the Program, and copy and distribute such
modifications or work under the terms of Section 1 above, provided that you
also meet all of these conditions:
a) You must cause the modified files to carry prominent notices stating that
you changed the files and the date of any change.
b) You must cause any work that you distribute or publish, that in whole or
in part contains or is derived from the Program or any part thereof, to be
licensed as a whole at no charge to all third parties under the terms of this
License.
332
B
The GNU General Public License
c) If the modified program normally reads commands interactively when
run, you must cause it, when started running for such interactive use in
the most ordinary way, to print or display an announcement including an
appropriate copyright notice and a notice that there is no warranty (or
else, saying that you provide a warranty) and that users may redistribute
the program under these conditions, and telling the user how to view a
copy of this License. (Exception: if the Program itself is interactive but
does not normally print such an announcement, your work based on the
Program is not required to print an announcement.)
These requirements apply to the modified work as a whole. If identifiable
sections of that work are not derived from the Program, and can be reasonably considered independent and separate works in themselves, then this License, and its terms, do not apply to those sections when you distribute them
as separate works. But when you distribute the same sections as part of a
whole which is a work based on the Program, the distribution of the whole
must be on the terms of this License, whose permissions for other licensees
extend to the entire whole, and thus to each and every part regardless of who
wrote it.
Thus, it is not the intent of this section to claim rights or contest your rights
to work written entirely by you; rather, the intent is to exercise the right to
control the distribution of derivative or collective works based on the Program.
In addition, mere aggregation of another work not based on the Program with
the Program (or with a work based on the Program) on a volume of a storage
or distribution medium does not bring the other work under the scope of this
License.
3. You may copy and distribute the Program (or a work based on it, under Sec-
tion 2) in object code or executable form under the terms of Sections 1 and 2
above provided that you also do one of the following:
a) Accompany it with the complete corresponding machine-readable source
code, which must be distributed under the terms of Sections 1 and 2 above
on a medium customarily used for software interchange; or,
b) Accompany it with a written offer, valid for at least three years, to give
any third party, for a charge no more than your cost of physically performing source distribution, a complete machine-readable copy of the corresponding source code, to be distributed under the terms of Sections 1 and
2 above on a medium customarily used for software interchange; or,
c) Accompany it with the information you received as to the offer to dis-
tribute corresponding source code. (This alternative is allowed only for
noncommercial distribution and only if you received the program in object code or executable form with such an offer, in accord with Subsection
b above.)
The source code for a work means the preferred form of the work for making
modifications to it. For an executable work, complete source code means
all the source code for all modules it contains, plus any associated interface
333
B The GNU General Public License
definition files, plus the scripts used to control compilation and installation of
the executable. However, as a special exception, the source code distributed
need not include anything that is normally distributed (in either source or
binary form) with the major components (compiler, kernel, and so on) of the
operating system on which the executable runs, unless that component itself
accompanies the executable.
If distribution of executable or object code is made by offering access to
copy from a designated place, then offering equivalent access to copy the
source code from the same place counts as distribution of the source code,
even though third parties are not compelled to copy the source along with the
object code.
4. You may not copy, modify, sublicense, or distribute the Program except as ex-
pressly provided under this License. Any attempt otherwise to copy, modify,
sublicense or distribute the Program is void, and will automatically terminate
your rights under this License. However, parties who have received copies,
or rights, from you under this License will not have their licenses terminated
so long as such parties remain in full compliance.
5. You are not required to accept this License, since you have not signed it.
However, nothing else grants you permission to modify or distribute the Program or its derivative works. These actions are prohibited by law if you do
not accept this License. Therefore, by modifying or distributing the Program
(or any work based on the Program), you indicate your acceptance of this
License to do so, and all its terms and conditions for copying, distributing or
modifying the Program or works based on it.
6. Each time you redistribute the Program (or any work based on the Program),
the recipient automatically receives a license from the original licensor to
copy, distribute or modify the Program subject to these terms and conditions.
You may not impose any further restrictions on the recipients’ exercise of the
rights granted herein. You are not responsible for enforcing compliance by
third parties to this License.
7. If, as a consequence of a court judgment or allegation of patent infringement
or for any other reason (not limited to patent issues), conditions are imposed
on you (whether by court order, agreement or otherwise) that contradict the
conditions of this License, they do not excuse you from the conditions of
this License. If you cannot distribute so as to satisfy simultaneously your
obligations under this License and any other pertinent obligations, then as a
consequence you may not distribute the Program at all. For example, if a
patent license would not permit royalty-free redistribution of the Program by
all those who receive copies directly or indirectly through you, then the only
way you could satisfy both it and this License would be to refrain entirely
from distribution of the Program.
If any portion of this section is held invalid or unenforceable under any particular circumstance, the balance of the section is intended to apply and the
section as a whole is intended to apply in other circumstances.
It is not the purpose of this section to induce you to infringe any patents
or other property right claims or to contest validity of any such claims; this
334
B
The GNU General Public License
section has the sole purpose of protecting the integrity of the free software
distribution system, which is implemented by public license practices. Many
people have made generous contributions to the wide range of software distributed through that system in reliance on consistent application of that system; it is up to the author/donor to decide if he or she is willing to distribute
software through any other system and a licensee cannot impose that choice.
This section is intended to make thoroughly clear what is believed to be a
consequence of the rest of this License.
8. If the distribution and/or use of the Program is restricted in certain countries
either by patents or by copyrighted interfaces, the original copyright holder
who places the Program under this License may add an explicit geographical distribution limitation excluding those countries, so that distribution is
permitted only in or among countries not thus excluded. In such case, this
License incorporates the limitation as if written in the body of this License.
9. The Free Software Foundation may publish revised and/or new versions of
the General Public License from time to time. Such new versions will be
similar in spirit to the present version, but may differ in detail to address new
problems or concerns.
Each version is given a distinguishing version number. If the Program specifies a version number of this License which applies to it and “any later version”, you have the option of following the terms and conditions either of that
version or of any later version published by the Free Software Foundation.
If the Program does not specify a version number of this License, you may
choose any version ever published by the Free Software Foundation.
10. If you wish to incorporate parts of the Program into other free programs
whose distribution conditions are different, write to the author to ask for permission. For software which is copyrighted by the Free Software Foundation,
write to the Free Software Foundation; we sometimes make exceptions for
this. Our decision will be guided by the two goals of preserving the free status of all derivatives of our free software and of promoting the sharing and
reuse of software generally.
NO WARRANTY
11. BECAUSE THE PROGRAM IS LICENSED FREE OF CHARGE, THERE
IS NO WARRANTY FOR THE PROGRAM, TO THE EXTENT PERMITTED BY APPLICABLE LAW. EXCEPT WHEN OTHERWISE STATED
IN WRITING THE COPYRIGHT HOLDERS AND/OR OTHER PARTIES
PROVIDE THE PROGRAM “AS IS” WITHOUT WARRANTY OF ANY
KIND, EITHER EXPRESSED OR IMPLIED, INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO, THE IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY AND
FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE. THE ENTIRE RISK AS TO
THE QUALITY AND PERFORMANCE OF THE PROGRAM IS WITH
YOU. SHOULD THE PROGRAM PROVE DEFECTIVE, YOU ASSUME
THE COST OF ALL NECESSARY SERVICING, REPAIR OR CORRECTION.
335
B The GNU General Public License
12. IN NO EVENT UNLESS REQUIRED BY APPLICABLE LAW OR AGREED
TO IN WRITING WILL ANY COPYRIGHT HOLDER, OR ANY OTHER
PARTY WHO MAY MODIFY AND/OR REDISTRIBUTE THE PROGRAM
AS PERMITTED ABOVE, BE LIABLE TO YOU FOR DAMAGES, INCLUDING ANY GENERAL, SPECIAL, INCIDENTAL OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES ARISING OUT OF THE USE OR INABILITY TO USE
THE PROGRAM (INCLUDING BUT NOT LIMITED TO LOSS OF DATA
OR DATA BEING RENDERED INACCURATE OR LOSSES SUSTAINED
BY YOU OR THIRD PARTIES OR A FAILURE OF THE PROGRAM TO
OPERATE WITH ANY OTHER PROGRAMS), EVEN IF SUCH HOLDER
OR OTHER PARTY HAS BEEN ADVISED OF THE POSSIBILITY OF
SUCH DAMAGES.
END OF TERMS AND CONDITIONS
Appendix: How to Apply These Terms to Your New Programs
If you develop a new program, and you want it to be of the greatest possible
use to the public, the best way to achieve this is to make it free software which
everyone can redistribute and change under these terms.
To do so, attach the following notices to the program. It is safest to attach them to
the start of each source file to most effectively convey the exclusion of warranty;
and each file should have at least the “copyright” line and a pointer to where the
full notice is found.
< one line to give the program’s name and a brief idea of what it does.> Copyright (C) 19yy < name of author>
This program is free software; you can redistribute it and/or modify it under
the terms of the GNU General Public License as published by the Free Software
Foundation; either version 2 of the License, or (at your option) any later version.
This program is distributed in the hope that it will be useful, but WITHOUT
ANY WARRANTY; without even the implied warranty of MERCHANTABILITY
or FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE. See the GNU General Public
License for more details.
You should have received a copy of the GNU General Public License along with
this program; if not, write to the Free Software Foundation, Inc., 675 Mass Ave,
Cambridge, MA 02139, USA.
Also add information on how to contact you by electronic and paper mail.
If the program is interactive, make it output a short notice like this when it starts
in an interactive mode:
Gnomovision version 69, Copyright (C) 19yy name of author Gnomovision comes
with ABSOLUTELY NO WARRANTY; for details type ‘show w’. This is free software, and you are welcome to redistribute it under certain conditions; type ‘show
c’ for details.
The hypothetical commands ‘show w’ and ‘show c’ should show the appropriate
parts of the General Public License. Of course, the commands you use may be
called something other than ‘show w’ and ‘show c’; they could even be mouseclicks or menu items–whatever suits your program.
336
B
The GNU General Public License
You should also get your employer (if you work as a programmer) or your school,
if any, to sign a “copyright disclaimer” for the program, if necessary. Here is a
sample; alter the names:
Yoyodyne, Inc., hereby disclaims all copyright interest in the program ‘Gnomovision’ (which makes passes at compilers) written by James Hacker.
< signature of Ty Coon>, 1 April 1989 Ty Coon, President of Vice
This General Public License does not permit incorporating your program into
proprietary programs. If your program is a subroutine library, you may consider
it more useful to permit linking proprietary applications with the library. If this
is what you want to do, use the GNU Library General Public License instead of
this License.
337
B The GNU General Public License
338
C
Important keys
C Important keys
A short summary of helpful and important keys.
Enter + F1 - F6
Alt Ctrl
+
Alt
+ F1 -F6 Alt + F7
+ Alt +
Ctrl Shift
⇑
+
Page
↑
⇑
+ Page ↓ Shift
↑ ↓
Shift ⇑ + Alt +
Cursor 7−→
Ctrl + Alt +
±(gray)
+D Ctrl Executes a command on the command line; otherwise, a linefeed.
Change to another console (in text mode).
Under X11 and Dosemu: change to one of the
text consoles.
Switch from a text console back to X11.
Exit X11.
Shows previous screens on console. Works until
consoles are switched.
Opposite of Shift ⇑ +Page ↑ .
Displays the previous commands on the command line.
Just the opposite of ↑ (in the shell).
X11: Change to the next virtual desktop (in the
direction of the cursor). The number of virtual
desktops is set in .fvwm[2]rc with the parameter “DeskTopSize”.
Changes the screen resolution according to entries in XF86Config.
Log out. Corresponds to exit. EOF (end
of file). Affected by entry in /etc/profile:
ignoreeof=x. Here, x indicates how many
times command can be repeated until executed.
Table C.1:
339
C Important keys
340
Bibliography
Bibliography
[Alm94]
A LMESBERGER, Werner: LILO User’s guide, 1994. – (see file /usr/doc/lilo/user.
dvi)
[Bai97]
BAILEY, Edward C.: Maximum RPM. Red Hat, 1997. – (ISBN 1-888172-78-9)
[CAR93]
C OSTALES, Bryan; A LLMAN, Eric ; R ICKERT, Neil: sendmail. O’Reilly & Associates,
Inc., 1993. – (ISBN 1-56592-056-2)
[CB96]
C HESWICK, William R.; B ELLOVIN, Steven M.: Firewalls und Sicherheit im Internet.
Addison Wesley GmbH, 1996. – (ISBN 3-89319-875-x)
[CR91]
C AMERON, Debra; ROSENBLATT, Bill: Learning GNU Emacs. O’Reilly & Associates,
Inc., 1991. – (ISBN 0 937175-84-6)
[CZ96]
C HAPMAN; Z WICKY:
Einrichten von Internet Firewalls. Sicherheit im Internet
gewährleisten.. O’Reilly & Associates, Inc., 1996. – (ISBN 3-930673312)
[Daw95]
DAWSON, Terry: Linux NET-2/NET-3 HOWTO, v2.8, 07 Jan 1995. – (see file /usr/doc/
howto/NET-2-HOWTO)
[FCR93]
FANG, Chin; C ROSSON, Bob ; R AYMOND, Eric S.:
The Hitchhiker’s Guide to
X386/XFree86 Video Timing (or, Tweaking your Monitor for Fun and Profit), 1993. – (see
file /usr/X11/lib/X11/doc/VideoModes.doc)
[Fri93]
F RISCH, Æleen: Essential System Administration. O’Reilly & Associates, Inc., 1993. –
(ISBN 0-937175-80-3)
[Gil92]
G ILLY, Daniel: UNIX in a nutshell: System V Edition. O’Reilly & Associates, Inc., 1992.
– (ISBN 1-56592-001-5)
[GMS93] G OOSSENS, Michel; M ITTELBACH, Frank ; S AMARIN, Alexander: The LATEX Companion.
Addison Wesley GmbH, 1993. – (ISBN 3-54199-8)
[Gri94]
G RIEGER, W.: Wer hat Angst vorm Emacs?. Addison Wesley GmbH, 1994. – (ISBN
3-89319-620-X)
[GS93]
G ARFINKEL, Simson; S PAFFORD, Gene: Practical UNIX Security. O’Reilly & Associates, Inc., 1993. – (ISBN 0-937175-72-2)
[Her92]
H EROLD, H.: UNIX Grundlagen. Addison Wesley GmbH, 1992. – (ISBN 3-89319-542-8)
[HHMK96]H ETZE, Sebastian; H OHNDEL, Dirk; M ÜLLER, Martin ; K IRCH, Olaf: Linux Anwenderhandbuch. 6. LunetIX Softfair, 1996. – (ISBN 3-929764-05-9)
[Hof97]
H OFFMANN, Erwin: EMail-Gateway mit qmail. In: iX 12 (1997), S. 108ff
341
Bibliography
[Hun95]
H UNT, Craig: TCP/IP Netzwerk Administration. O’Reilly & Associates, Inc., 1995. –
(ISBN 3-930673-02-9)
[Kie95]
K IENLE, Micheal: TIS: Toolkit für anwendungsorientierte Firewall-Systeme. In: iX 8
(1995), S. 140ff
[Kir95]
K IRCH, Olaf: LINUX Network Administrator’s Guide. O’Reilly & Associates, Inc., 1995.
– (ISBN 1-56592-087-2)
[Kof95]
KOFLER, M.: Linux. Addison Wesley GmbH, 1995. – (ISBN 3-89319-796-6)
[Kop94]
KOPKA, Helmut: LATEX-Einführung. Addison Wesley GmbH, 1994. – (ISBN 3-89319664-1)
[Kun95]
K UNITZ, Ulrich: Sicherheit fast kostenlos: Einrichtung eines kostenlosen FirewallSystems. In: iX 9 (1995), S. 176ff
[Lam90]
L AMB, Linda: Learning the vi Editor. O’Reilly & Associates, Inc., 1990. – (ISBN
0-937175-67-6)
[Lam94]
L AMPORT, Leslie: LATEX User’s Guide and Reference Manual. Addison Wesley GmbH,
1994. – (ISBN 0-201-52983-1)
[Lef96a]
L EFFLER, Sam: HylaFAX Home Page, 1996
[Lef96b]
L EFFLER, Sam: TIFF Software, 1996
[OT92]
O’R EILLY, Tim; T ODINO, Grace: Manging UUCP and Usenet. O’Reilly & Associates,
Inc., 1992. – (ISBN 0-937175-93-5)
[Per94]
P ERLMAN, G.: Unix For Software Developers. Prentice-Hall, 1994. – (ISBN 13-9329978)
[Pug94]
P UGH, K.: UNIX For The MS-DOS User. Prentice-Hall, 1994. – (ISBN 13-146077-3)
[SB92]
S CHOONOVER, M.; B OWIE, J.: GNU Emacs. Addison Wesley GmbH, 1992. – (ISBN
0-201-56345-2)
[Sch98]
S CHEIDERER, Jürgen: Sicherheit Kostenlos - Firewall mit Linux. In: iX 12 (1998)
[Sto98]
S TOLL, Clifford: Kuckucksei; Die Jagd auf die deutschen Hacker, die das Pentagon knackten. Fischer-TB.-Vlg., 1998. – (ISBN 3596139848)
[The96]
T HE XF REE 86™-T EAM: XF86Config(4/5) - Configuration File for Xfree86™, 1996. –
Manual-Page zu XFree86™
[TSP93]
T ODINO, Grace; S TRANG, John ; P EEK, Jerry: Learning the UNIX operating system.
O’Reilly & Associates, Inc., 1993. – (ISBN 1-56592-060-0)
[Wel94]
W ELSH, Matt: Linux Installation and Getting Started. 2. S.u.S.E. GmbH, 1994. – (ISBN
3-930419-03-3)
[WK95]
W ELSH, Matt; K AUFMAN, Lars: Running Linux. O’Reilly & Associates, Inc., 1995. –
(ISBN 1-56592-100-3)
342
Was this manual useful for you? yes no
Thank you for your participation!

* Your assessment is very important for improving the work of artificial intelligence, which forms the content of this project

Download PDF

advertisement